JP6091036B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”).

  Conventionally, a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed. Then, for example, a game ball as a game medium is driven toward a game area formed on the game board. The game balls that are driven into the game area flow down along the game board. In the game area, a number of obstacle nails are provided in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a windmill is provided at an appropriate position in the game area. In addition, the game area is provided with a start port through which a game ball driven toward the game area can be won.

  In addition, in a gaming machine, a big hit lottery is performed when a game ball wins at a start opening, and the result is displayed on a liquid crystal display or the like through various presentation displays. When the lottery is won, a jackpot game that allows a large amount of balls to be generated is generated (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2006-247107 A

  However, even with the above gaming machines, there is a concern about a decline in gaming interest.

  This invention is made in view of such a situation, and it aims at providing the game machine which can implement | achieve a novel game production and can suppress the fall of a game entertainment attraction.

In order to achieve such an object, in the invention described in claim 1,
A determination game means capable of executing a determination game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
When a special result is obtained in the judgment game by the judgment game means, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
Effect control means capable of controlling the result information about the determination game by the determination game means as indicated by a display effect in a predetermined effect display device;
Operating means provided so as to be operable by a player ,
Before Symbol effect control means,
Time information update means for performing update processing on time information using a real-time clock function;
When it is in the first effect period based on the time information by the time information update means , even if a specific effect command is acquired according to the result of the determination game by the determination game means , the specific effect First effect control means for controlling not to accept an operation on the operation means at a predetermined timing in an effect pattern according to a command and to prevent a specific operation system display effect from appearing; and
When it is in the second effect period based on the time information by the time information update means, when the specific effect command is acquired according to the result of the determination game by the determination game means , A second effect control means for receiving an operation on the operation means at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern and controlling to cause a specific operation system display effect to appear based on the operation. Yes, and it is required to.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of an outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a back perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment or detachment structure of the upper-axis support metal fitting of a main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a reverse view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a locking member. It is a reverse view of the upper metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dish unit and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a back perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation unit and was seen from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which pressed the press operation part in the operation unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle apparatus in a door frame and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the foul cover unit in a door frame, and was seen afterwards. It is a front view shown in the state where a front cover of a foul cover unit was removed. It is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball feeding unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which removed the rear case of the ball | bowl feeding unit and was seen from the back. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for the light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system | strain of the LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a body frame. It is a left view of a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the back. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the hitting ball launcher in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a prize ball unit in a body frame. It is a back perspective view of a prize ball unit in a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen afterwards. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout path, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution | circulation passage of the ball | bowl in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is a back perspective view of the ball exit opening and closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl exit opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is a back perspective view of a substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from before. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is sectional drawing of the terminal board box in a board | substrate unit, (B) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the terminal board box in a board unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is a front view of a launch power supply board box, (B) is a sectional view of an AA line shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the fastening mechanism in a back cover and was seen from the rear side. (A) is the left view of the locking device in a main body frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the locking device in a main body frame from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame that are slidably provided inside a U-shaped base of the locking device. It is a figure and (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the sliding rod for glass doors, and the sliding rod for main body frames in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the fraud prevention member in a locking device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. FIG. (A) is the front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming board using a gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 from back. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board in FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view which shows the crime prevention structure in the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board which omits and shows the part which can be seen through a game panel. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front unit in a game board from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the attacker unit from back lower. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the center accessory from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit in a game board from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structural member and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the back decoration unit in the back unit of a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back decoration unit in the back unit of a game board from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit in the back unit of a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable production | presentation unit in the back unit of a game board from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable production | generation unit into the upper movable unit and the raising / lowering unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable production | generation unit into the upper movable unit and the raising / lowering unit, and was seen afterwards. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable unit of the upper movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper movable unit and was seen from the back. (A) is a top view of the upper movable unit in the upper movable effect unit, (b) is a front view of the upper movable unit, and (c) is a front view of the upper movable unit shown in a state where the figure is rotated. is there. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit of the upper movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the raising / lowering unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view which shows later the principal part of the raising / lowering mechanism in an upper movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view for explaining raising and lowering of the upper movable unit in the upper movable effect unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating raising / lowering of an upper movable unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the right-and-left movable production unit in the back unit of a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right-and-left movable production unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left-right movable production | presentation unit into the rotary body unit and the slide unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left-right movable production | presentation unit into the rotary body unit and the slide unit, and was seen afterwards. It is a perspective view which shows one rotary body unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body unit of the left-right movable production | presentation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary body unit of the left-right movable production | presentation unit, and was seen afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the rotation decoration body in the rotary body unit of a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the rotation decoration body following FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the rotation decoration body following FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the slide unit of the right unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the slide unit of the right unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the slide unit of the right unit and was seen from the back. It is a perspective view which shows the slide unit of the left unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the slide unit of the left unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the slide unit of the left unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the right unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the left unit in a right-and-left movable effect unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower movable production unit in the back unit of a game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower movable production unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower movable production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower movable production | presentation unit for every main member, and was seen afterwards. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the raising / lowering unit in a lower movable production | presentation unit. It is a front view which shows the motion of the raising / lowering decoration body in a lower movable production | presentation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the upper movable production | presentation unit of a back unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the right-and-left movable production | presentation unit of the back unit in a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the lower movable production | presentation unit of a back unit in a game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 169. It is a block diagram which shows the drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram which shows a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. 172 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG. It is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board, It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power failure generation | occurrence | production. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows a start opening prize process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during a fluctuation | variation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game start process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit game process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number memory means for special symbols. It is a table | surface which shows each characteristic for every kind of jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation pattern table which can be selected in a normal external disadvantageous game state. It is a block diagram which shows especially the real-time clock function among the functions of a peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sub main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16 ms regular process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a decoration design change start process (step S1210). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225a) of the stop symbol in 1st production mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the determination process (step S1225b) of the stop symbol in 2nd production mode. (A), (b) is a figure for demonstrating an extended production | presentation pattern, comparing with the display presentation pattern of normal (at the time of non-extension), (c) is for demonstrating a challenge bonus production | presentation pattern FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. 12 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. (A) is a table | surface which shows the jackpot expectation degree etc. when in the 1st production mode according to each production content series, respectively, (b) is a challenge bonus rush expectation degree in the 2nd production mode. It is a table | surface which shows each etc. according to each production content series. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "01H" in the 1st production mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display production pattern matched with production command "02H" in the 1st production mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship of the rotation detection piece of a driven gear and two rotation detection sensors accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit. (A) is a table | surface figure which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation part in a rotation operation unit, (B) is accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of a dial operation part. It is a list figure which shows ON / OFF of two rotation detection sensors.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view illustrating a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame constituting the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, game board constituting the pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, a pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game area 1100 in which a game ball as a game medium is inserted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side, and a front face of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 A door frame 5 that is pivotally supported to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. The door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 stores a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a game ball placed below the game window 101 and storing game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 5, are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction when viewed from the front. The horizontal width of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width dimension. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. The outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the left end front side of the outer frame 2. The right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 moves to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  The pachinko machine 1 is desired to have a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 in a front view, and protrudes forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. In addition, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and a game can be played.

  Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100. However, the player can recognize the inside of the game area 1100. By inserting a hand or the like, it is impossible to touch game balls, obstacle nails, various winning holes, and bonus items in the game area 1100. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes the back of the game board 4 is provided.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detaching structure between the upper shaft support fitting of the main body frame and the upper support fitting of the outer frame. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a rear view of the upper support metal part for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 that extend in the horizontal direction, and left and right sides that extend in the vertical (vertical) direction. Frame plates 12 and 13, and four connecting members 14 that connect the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, and each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 is connected by the connecting member 14. They are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them together. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present example are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, And an engagement notch 15 that is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step 10a that is recessed from the other general surface is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 to be described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is like that.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. The protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength rigidity is enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily held as a finger hook, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

  The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the horizontal direction. The plate-like horizontal piece 17 extending to the side, the plate-like vertical piece 18 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the vertical piece 18 are opposite to each other A plate-like engagement piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engagement notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are asymmetrical to each other. The vertical piece 18 is divided into front and rear parts. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes, respectively. Has been.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch between the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. In a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15, a predetermined screw passes through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19 and is screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper side inner side surfaces of the side frames 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 while being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is like that. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame bodies 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower side inner side surfaces of the side frame bodies 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18 so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. The side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled into a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of the present example is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower portion of the left side frame plate 12 that is disposed so as to face the upper support bracket 20 and the upper support bracket 20 that is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10. Fixed to the lower support bracket 21, the reinforcing bracket 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support bracket 21 and fixed to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13, and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement bracket 22. The decorative cover 23 is provided. The upper support bracket 20 and the lower support bracket 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so that they can be opened and closed.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support protruding piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. The support side wall 20c formed by being cut out so as to bend from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame depending from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protruding piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that contacts the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that continues to the hanging fixing piece 20d and hangs along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (see FIG. 14). 14) and a stop drooping portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the drooping wall 20e and is inclined inward at the entrance end of the supporting saddle hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper shaft support bracket 630 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the support hole 20c in the upper support bracket 20. Further, the upper support bracket 20 can connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by a fixing piece 20a and a hanging fixing piece 20d.

  The strength of the support protrusion 20b is enhanced by a hanging wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b. The details of the upper support metal 20 will be described later. The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the player can be concealed so that it cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance can be improved. Further, the support hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a square shape so as to be inclined from the side of the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support bracket 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c Support projections 21d. A main body frame pivot formed on a main body frame pivot bracket 644 (see FIG. 66, etc.) of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21. After the support protrusion 21d of the support bracket 21 is inserted into the support hole of the main body frame pivot support 644 in the main body frame 3, the pivot support pin 633 of the upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support stud 20c. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 of this example has two closing plates 24 and 25 that are disposed at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction inside the right side frame plate 13. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the locking device 1000 that are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. As will be described in detail later, the hooks 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing plates 24 and 25 by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and turning it to one side. Thus, the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is used to smoothly guide the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is mounted and fixed in a replaceable manner.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support fitting 20, and the support projecting piece 20b is supported by the rivet 28. On the other hand, it is pivotally supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin, and has a stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from a position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28, and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a rightward from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The protruding operation part 27b, the elastic piece 27c protruding from the opposite side of the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operation part 27b, and the front end of the stopper part 27a are formed to bulge forward. An arcuate tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by a stopper portion 27a and an operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a narrower width than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases.

  As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, the lock member 27 is configured such that the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27 c is the hanging wall when supported by the support protrusion piece 20 b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state). 20e is in contact with the inner surface of the stopper 20a, and the stopper 27a closes the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The tip of the stopper 27a is inclined to the inclined hole of the supporting hole 20c. The head space portion is not closed, and a space in which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed in the head space portion of the support hole 20c. .

  The support mechanism of the pivot pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example is such that the pivot pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c so that the stopper portion 27a The tip side faces the stop drooping portion 20f at the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f so that the abutting portion is in contact). In a normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 positioned in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support rod hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a are respectively provided. The center is in a state of being offset in an oblique direction and facing each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 supporting the heavy body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support saddle hole 20c. Since almost no load is applied to the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not loaded. In addition, since the arcuate tip end surface 27d is provided at the tip of the stopper portion 27a, the lock member 27 is smoothly rotated when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft supporting pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip end surface 27d, the acting force F is Component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arcuate tip end surface 27d (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip end surface 27d), and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hole 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment for rotating the tip part in the direction away from the support protruding piece 20b (clockwise in the figure) does not act, and the pivot pin 633 is formed between the tip part of the stopper part 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole part of the support collar hole 20c. Maintain the state of being pinched between the inner surface of one side. To. Therefore, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not always loaded even in a normal shaft support state or in a state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, and is an elastic formed integrally with synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c and to prevent the pivot pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support projecting piece 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a. Does not rotate in a direction in which it comes into contact with the stop drooping portion 20f and disengages any further, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude beyond the support protruding piece 20b.

  Even if the shape of the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 or the distal end portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the axis fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 at all times. Since the one side of the tip end of the stopper portion 27a only abuts against the stop drooping portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the present applicant points out that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support protruding piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The action of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be freely opened and closed, a lower support bracket is mounted on a main body frame pivot support hole (not shown) formed in a main body frame pivot support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63). 21 support protrusions 21d need to be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed against the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, thereby pushing As shown in FIG. 16B, the lock member 27 rotates counterclockwise while deforming the elastic piece 27c, so that the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support rod hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support flange 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not contact each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c and rotates in the clockwise direction, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again and closes the inlet portion of the support hole 20c. The distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support saddle hole 20c.

  This state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. Next, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support saddle hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, the finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the distal end portion of the stopper portion 27a is retracted from the support rod hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 is supported. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main body frame 3 is lifted, and the main body frame 3 is detached from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement between the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal 644 and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal 21. It can be removed from.

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are made of wood, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal ( For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility lined up in a game hall, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing it at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical plane of the island. However, since such an operation is performed by nailing nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nails can be easily nailed, and the pachinko machine 1 can be used without problems in existing island facilities. It can be installed. In addition, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, it becomes possible to form a thin wall while maintaining strength as compared with a conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63, etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 has a large horizontal dimension. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12, 13 constituting the outline of the outer frame 2 are connected by a connecting member 14. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and the connecting member 14 is engaged with the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased, and it is sturdy. It can be made into a rectangular frame. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be attached in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine.

[1-2. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 25. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover as seen from the rear after being disassembled from the door frame. It is a disassembled perspective view.

  The door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a gaming frame 101 having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape) as shown in the figure. The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 below the lower end. A pair of side speaker covers 290 disposed and attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 passes through the tray unit 300, the tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the door. A handle device 500 that is attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 that is disposed on the rear side of the tray unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. A foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side, a ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and a game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be closed. The glass unit 590 is provided.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 26 to 30. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as seen from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows the wiring state for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view which expands and shows.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of the present example is a door having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially elliptical shape having a vertically long shape. The frame base body 110, the upper bracket 120 for fixing the upper decorative unit attached to the upper center of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110, and the lower left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base body 110, and the front side of the door frame base body 110 are attached to the lower right corner when viewed from the front. And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a side surface of the side speaker 130 and a front side of a wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 and the like on the outside of the right side speaker 130 in front view. Is further provided with a cover member 134 that is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111 and holds the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when the side speaker 130 is attached or removed. Can be done.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is configured so that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and the lower surface of the gaming window 101 are covered with the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 to be attached, a glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in a rear view. ) And a launch cover 191 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the gaming window 101, and a rotational position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear face of the door frame base body 110 below the launch cover 191. The handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100 and the rear side of the handle device relay board 192 are covered. The door frame is disposed on the opposite side of the middle device relay board cover 193 and the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 with the center in the left-right direction (right side of the left-right center (back side) in the rear view). A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base main body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door pivotally supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the wiring cord 196 that connects the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side is provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the present example has an overall rigidity increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 to be described later. 4, and an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs the amplified signal to each speaker 130. In this example, each decoration unit 200, 240, 280, each decorative board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, dial driving motor 414 or sensor 432a, 432b provided in the operation unit 400, 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the wiring cord 196 that connects the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. As will be described in detail later, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate of the main body frame 3 are extended to the rear by being held by the wiring holding member 197. 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin as shown in FIGS. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the gaming window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right side and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, whereas the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a cutout portion of a rectangular shape 101a into which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a pivot supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Accordingly, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  In addition to the gaming window 101, the door frame base body 110 is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, and attaches and fixes the ball feeding unit 580 and the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the game ball penetrating in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and stored in the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 are transferred to the ball feeding unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supply and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 inclined obliquely so that the right side (open side) end of the front surface which is arranged in the lower right corner portion and bulges forward in the front view is retracted Part 114, a wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment part 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and a door frame base main body in the rear view. A board mounting part 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194 disposed on the lower right side (axis support side), and an arrangement closer to the center than the speaker mounting part 111 on the left side (open side) in the rear view of the lower end of the gaming window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for protruding backward and mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 and the door frame base body 110 are recessed to the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 on the rear side. The glass unit support step 110a with which the outer periphery of the front surface can abut and the glass unit locking member 190 can be rotated by protruding backward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, a door frame protruding piece 110c is provided on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 so as to protrude a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. The rear side of the door frame base body 110 is provided with a positioning projection 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 in rear view and engages with the fitting groove 612 of the body frame 3. The positioning projection 110d is fitted into the fitting groove 612 so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at correct positions.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like. In addition, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 for attaching the side speaker 130, and an attachment hole 110h (FIGS. 18, 24, and 24) for attaching the side speaker cover 290. Are formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right ones are arranged so as to pass through the glass unit support stepped portions 110a into which the glass units 590 are fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the 110 (door frame 5), the glass unit 590 can be detached with a predetermined screw through the mounting hole 110h. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the security cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, first, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must be removed from the door frame base body 110. Accordingly, it is possible to take time for removing the side speaker cover 290 to allow a person who performs an illegal act to remove the relatively large glass unit 590. The removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (safety) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by deceiving theft acts on the side speakers 130 and the fraudulent acts on the game area 1100 etc. It has become.

  In addition, the door frame base main body 110 includes a lower dish ball supply port 310g and a foul cover unit 540 in the dish unit base 310 of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, between the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 and the substrate mounting part 118. A rectangular ball passage opening 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the upper center of the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100 are left and right. The upper gap formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240 is concealed, and both left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. The upper bracket 120 is partially inserted into the upper decorative unit 280 so that the upper decorative unit 280 can be supported from above when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is like that.

  The pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, but the intersection of the central axes is a predetermined distance from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view (for example, 0.2 m to 1). .5 m), the sound is delivered most efficiently to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the side speaker 130 mainly outputs middle and high range sounds, and is disposed at a position as far away from the pachinko machine 1 as possible in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

  The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base body 110 disposed on the rear side, so that the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base body 110 from the front side with a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open as shown in FIGS. A step portion 195a that is recessed forward is provided at a position slightly below the center. A wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, and the cross section is formed in an I-shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the figure, the wiring holding member 197 includes a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in the upper and lower parts in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. The wiring holding member 197 has an end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled, and a step 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the vertical direction Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates to the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 is rotated. The door frame base substrate cover 195 can be accommodated in the stepped portion 195a.

  This wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined bundling in a holding hole 197a which is paired up and down with the wiring cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3. It will be pushed forward by the part and will turn in the direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free. The bend becomes large (sharp) near the edge. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled rearward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in a direction away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). Thus, the wiring cord 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is unfolded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being obstructed by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to this example, the end of the wiring frame holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the door frame base substrate cover 195 is moved so that the free end side moves to the main body frame 3 side. Since it is pivotally supported on the rear surface and a part of the wiring cord 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction, the main body frame 3 When the door frame 5 is opened and closed, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded laterally on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions (breakage of the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching.

  Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force acts through the wiring cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent blurring in the vertical direction, and the wiring cord 196 can be reliably folded in the horizontal direction to prevent the occurrence of problems.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is hung between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from drooping even when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and when the wiring 196 droops, it is caught by another member and disconnected. Or the door frame 5 cannot be closed, and the main control board 4100, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, and the like as the main body side electric devices are connected to the door side. Decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, a ball rental unit 360, and a handle as electric devices Location 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by a rotatable wiring holding member 197, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and to prevent a problem that the wiring 196 is pulled and disconnected or the connection connector is disconnected. it can. In addition, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, so that the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-213675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being rubbed and causing problems such as leakage or disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the holding holes 197 a that are arranged at a predetermined interval in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 through the holding hole 197a, and to reliably prevent the wiring 196 from dropping together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197. can do.

  Even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is connected by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from drooping when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side of the door frame 5 that is pivotally supported. And the door frame 5, and the pachinko machine 1 with high security against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with protrusions protruding at least from the both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction to the side along which the wiring 196 is located, the wiring is formed by the pair of protrusions and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Thus, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good state.

  In addition, the length from the base end to the tip end of the wiring holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the base of the base end, and the main body frame 3 extends in the wiring 196. The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center side of the door frame 5 than the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member Since a pantograph-like link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, the opening / closing operation can be facilitated, and an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196, etc. can be reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-like link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, a portion of the wiring 196 that extends from the front end of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the front end side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and gathered compactly, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 being closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the step 195 a that can store the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and the wiring frame holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base substrate cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 or The wirings 196 can be gathered in a compact manner, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members, thereby preventing a problem from occurring.

  Further, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5. It is possible to reliably achieve the function and effect. In addition, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 which can hold the game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by enlarging the game area 1 and can attract the player's interest strongly by having the large game board 4 is provided. it can.

  Further, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tube portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tube portion 141 from the rear end of the tube portion 141 as shown in FIGS. An annular flange portion 142 extending outward in a right angle direction, and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the cylindrical portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. 143, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state in which the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base body 110. Although not shown in the drawings, the axis of the cylindrical portion 141 is substantially coincident with the wiring passage opening 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion 143 on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. The three grooves 502a are arranged and formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 502a. The cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 only when the three protrusions 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other. Yes. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 that is inclined obliquely so that the shaft of the cylinder portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) toward the front in a front view. Similarly, the shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 is also inclined obliquely.

  Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the rear side of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. And a lower reinforcing metal plate 154 attached along the lower back surface of the gaming window 101, which are fastened to each other with screws, rivets or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper shaft supporting portion 156 having shaft pins 155 provided on the upper surface and the lower end portion of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. So that it can be freely opened and closed.

  In addition, the lower reinforcing metal plate 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side end edge of both long side edges thereof. A lower bent protrusion piece 159 that is bent forward (see FIG. 27), and an upper bent protrusion piece 160 that is bent forward to the right side (open side) portion of the upper long side edge when viewed from the front. And a vertical bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward at the central portion of the upper long edge and is extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent protrusion piece 159, the upper bent protrusion piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertical bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to be engaged and locked with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5, the vertical bent protruding piece 161 is locked to the locking piece 592 b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 is moved in the horizontal direction and It is possible to restrict movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 has a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outward bent protrusion 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154, As shown in the figure, the open side inner bent projecting piece 164 is formed so as to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent projecting piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 to be described later is provided at the lower rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side and opens to the outside of the shaft support side (see FIG. 106). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent protrusions 167 bent rearward on both sides of the long side.

  The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. Although there is a possibility that an action may be easily performed, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the present example includes the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, the shaft-supporting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is configured such that a front end piece 952b of a side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the U-shape (see FIG. 106), the insertion of the tool can be prevented, and only the pivot-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 can be prevented from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. This crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing metal plates 152 and 153, and the upper side thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 A formed contact recess 181 and a post-crime prevention protrusion 182 protruding rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181 are provided. In addition, the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180 are respectively provided with crime prevention rear end protrusions 183 that protrude rearward along the shape of the ends. In addition, the rear side crime prevention end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is configured to extend rearward longer than the opposite (open side) crime prevention rear end protrusion 183. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention projection piece 184 that protrudes along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and the left and right sides outside the projection piece 184 before the crime prevention. And a U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end.

  The security cover 180 has a mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) attached to the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 in front view and a mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side). By attaching to the security cover attaching part 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. In a state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the pre-crime projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bent protruding piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the post-crime protruding protrusion 182 protruding rearward is inserted into the lower surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 and the half on the open side is front. The component 1110 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool enters the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the post-crime projecting piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  The crime prevention cover 180 can cover the lower portion of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. In addition, it is possible to prevent the hitting ball that flies or reversely feeds the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

  Accordingly, in this example, the crime prevention cover 180 covers the rear lower outer periphery of the glass unit 590 (the gaming window 101) in the door frame 5, so that the gaming window 101, the glass unit 590 and the like from the front side of the door frame 5 Even if a highly flexible tool is inserted between the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) and a fraudulent act is attempted, the crime prevention cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, Thus, the pachinko machine 1 with higher safety can be provided.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with fitting portions 190a that are rotatably fitted to locking member mounting portions 110b that protrude rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 has a retaining screw fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is pivotally supported with respect to the locking member attaching part 110b.

  Although the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 is not shown in detail, the locking piece 190b has a protrusion protruding rearward on the rear side, and this protrusion rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating. Of the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 attached to the lower right in the rear view, and the rear surface is a flat surface. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110, respectively. In addition, when the launch cover 191, the handle device relay board cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, the rear surfaces thereof are substantially in the same plane. The front surface of the ball striking device 650 attached to the main body frame 3 can be covered.

[1-2B. Right side decoration unit]
Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the figure, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side decoration frame 202 that forms a skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, a side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and a side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208; a side lens 210 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 202 from the rear side; and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 210 It is equipped with.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A substrate 214 and a right side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially vertical center of the side inner lens 212 on the lower side and on which a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) are mounted; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 that covers the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and is attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side that covers the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216. The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Further, the right side decoration unit 200 includes an upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left portion in the front view of the side decoration frame 202, and an upper portion that supports the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted to the upper rear portion of the side decoration frame 202. A speaker bracket 224; an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202; and a side sub-lens 228 attached to a predetermined position on a side surface of the side upper cover 208 from the inside. Yes. On the rear side of the side sub-lens 228, the LED 214c of the upper decoration board 214 on the right side is arranged so that the LED 214c is decorated for light emission.

  In the right side decoration unit 200, a side decoration frame 202, a side upper decoration member 204, a right side upper decoration board cover 218, and a right side lower decoration board cover 220 are formed of a light-impermeable member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surface of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. Further, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decorative unit 200 are translucent members. The side upper cover 208 is substantially milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is said that.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedral shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 are white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently illuminated and decorated with light from the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, and the like. The decorative boards 214 and 216 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, and 216b are not lit. The right side upper decorative board 214 and the right side lower decorative board 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can appropriately emit light so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be illuminated.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 202a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 202a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 202b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame The inner frame 2 is arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the lower end frame 202d that connects the lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 202b is formed in a straight line at the substantially same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a, while the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is the upper and lower sides. Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. Further, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. Further, the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation extending radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b by a plurality of partition walls 202f, and each of the divided frames is divided. Is a light emitting decoration opening 202g, and a peripheral lens portion 210a of a side lens 210, which will be described later, is fitted from the rear side. In addition, the radiating lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition wall frame 202f from the rear side. Further, the slit 202e and the light emitting decoration opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, and the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and the rear surface. Are formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 204a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 204a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 to the vicinity of the front end thereof through the opening 204a. A plurality of light guides 206a capable of protruding is provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and can be inserted and fitted into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204 so that it appears as if a jewel has been fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. Further, the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 206a of the side upper decorative lens 204 can be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the tip of the light guide unit 206a can be shined as a gemstone.

  The side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 has an upper surface and a right side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). Has a shape substantially along the side upper decorative member 204. The side upper cover 208 is provided with a mounting step 208a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 204 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, or the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 or the like is formed on the end surface. Also, two cutouts 208b arranged on the upper and lower sides are formed on the right side surface of the side upper cover 208, so that the side sub-lens 228 attached to the inside through the cutouts 208b is desired to the front side. It has become. By inserting the side sub-lens 228 into the notch 208b of the side upper cover 208, only this part can emit light in a different manner.

  The side lens 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 has a shape that is substantially along the side decoration frame 202 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202 later. A peripheral lens portion 210 a and a radiating lens portion 210 b inserted into the slit 202 e of the side decorative frame 202 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodation step part 210c made. The accommodation step 210c accommodates an upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like which will be described later. Further, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210 d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210 c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208 a in the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decorative frame 202. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is not uniform. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. Further, the inner surface formed in the shape of a polyhedron can provide a distinctive appearance in which the peripheral lens portion 210a is sparkling.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiating lens portion 210b are formed in the side lens 210 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body part 212a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens part 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body part 212a and projects forward from the main body part 212a. And a plate-like light guide part 212b arranged at the above position. The main body 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state where the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 210. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body 212a of the side inner lens 212 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. The light transmitted through the main body part 212a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body part 212a.

  By combining the side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a can be birefringently refracted. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape as well as the irregular refraction can make the appearance of the side lens 210 (circumferential lens portion 210a) sparkle and make the sense of perspective unclear.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 202g of the side decorative frame 202 (the periphery of the side lens 210). The LEDs 214a and 216a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 210a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 202e (side lens 210 of the side lens 210) is used. The LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). Note that the LED 214c of the upper decorative substrate 214 on the right side that decorates the side sub lens 228 with light emission is a red LED in this example.

  Like the side speaker 130, the upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs a mid-high range sound, and is attached to a predetermined position and in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 224. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper end back side of the horn portion 224a in the upper speaker bracket 224 so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 224a in front view. It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 is irregularly refracted due to the uneven thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 226 that covers the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 202g that is in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decorative frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. In addition, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226 so that sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210.

[1-2C. Left side decoration unit]
Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. 34A is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the front side. Further, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as seen from the exploded side.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer periphery of the gaming window 101 excluding the lower part in front view, as shown in the drawing, and the inside is the gaming window 101. The outer side of the door frame base unit 100 is linearly formed along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed substantially symmetrically with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 includes a side decoration frame 242 that forms a skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, a side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and a side upper decoration member 244. The side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the upper side of the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244 are covered, and the side upper decorative member 244 is attached to the front side so as to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246. A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 that supports the lower portion of the side upper cover 248 and is fitted and fixed to the side frame 242 from the rear side, and a side inner lens 252 that is fitted to the back side of the side lens 250 It is equipped with.

  The left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the substantially vertical center to the upper side, and the left side upper decoration in which a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface. A substrate 254, and a left side lower decorative substrate 256, which is disposed on the lower side from a substantially center in the vertical direction of the side inner lens 252 and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface. A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 that covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side that covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration board 256. That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 includes an upper left speaker 262 disposed in the upper right part in the front view of the side decoration frame 242, and an upper part that supports the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted to the upper rear side of the side decoration frame 242. The speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, a side decoration frame 242, a side upper decoration member 244, a left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and a left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of an opaque member. A plating layer of a predetermined color is formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244. Further, the side upper decorative lens 246, the side upper cover 248, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decorative unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially entire side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the side surfaces of the side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 that are formed to be substantially transparent and the surface side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. The light can be irregularly refracted. Therefore, the LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 arranged on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252 It cannot be clearly seen from the person side. Further, the front surfaces of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently decorated with light emission by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, and the like. The decorative boards 254, 256 are not conspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit. The left side upper decorative board 254 and the left side lower decorative board 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, and each LED 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b is driven by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The left side decoration unit 240 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is formed in an arc shape substantially along the gaming window 101 as shown in the figure, and specifically, along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper portion that is arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a toward the outside and is linear along the outer periphery of the side surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper portion. The outer frame 242b formed in an arc shape so as to bend toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the upper end edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame A lower end frame 242d for connecting the lower end edges of 242a, and the inner frame 2 arranged at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends with substantially the same width in the circumferential direction of the gaming window 101 at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the outer frame 242b has a rear end at a linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 that is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a, whereas the front end is vertically Are formed in an arc shape such that both ends of the projection protrude forward. In addition, the curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. In addition, the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 has a shape curved in the front-rear direction so that a portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242f is arranged on the radiation that extends radially from the vicinity of the lower center of the gaming window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decorative frame 242 is divided into a plurality of portions in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b by a plurality of partition walls 242f. Is a light emitting decoration opening 242g, and a peripheral lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 to be described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiating lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition wall frame 242f from the rear side. Further, the slit 242e and the light emitting decoration opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, and the respective light emitting modes can be made different.

  As shown in the drawing, the side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends in the left-right direction at a constant height substantially along the arc-shaped upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242 and is also provided on the rear surface. Is formed in a depressed state, and a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 has a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the openings 244a arranged in a row.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244 and extends from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to the vicinity of the front end thereof. A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude is provided. The light guide 246a has a polyhedral shape at the tip, and by inserting and fitting into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it can appear as if gems are also fitted in the opening 244a. It can be done. Further, the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guide portion 246a of the side upper decorative lens 244 may be emitted forward (player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244. In addition, the tip of the light guide 246a can be shined as a jewel.

  The upper side cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a top surface and a left side surface (in front view) substantially aligned with the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and a lower surface (lower end). The shape is substantially in line with the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is provided with a mounting step 248a that is open at the bottom and recessed rearward so that the side upper decorative member 244 can be accommodated in the lower front portion. A mounting boss, a mounting hole, and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed on the end surface. Further, the side upper cover 248 includes a covering portion 248b that covers the upper shaft support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 from the front side on the outer side surface (the left side surface in a front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 has a shape substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a recessed rear surface, and is inserted into the light emitting decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 later. A peripheral lens portion 250a and a radiation lens portion 250b to be inserted into the slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242 later are provided. As shown in the figure, the side lens 250 does not include the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the light emitting decoration opening 242g contacting the upper end frame 242c of the side decoration frame 242, and the corresponding part is opened forward and downward. It is made the accommodation step part 250c made. The housing step 250c accommodates an upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later. The side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250d that forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 248a in the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape that bulges to the front side so that the front surfaces of the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are substantially along the front end of the partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is not uniform. As a result, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, the inner surface formed in a polyhedral shape allows the peripheral lens portion 250a to have a distinctive appearance.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted and fitted into the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion where the peripheral lens portion 250a and the radiating lens portion 250b are formed in the side lens 250 as shown in the figure. It corresponds to the main body 252a having a recessed rear surface and the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decorative frame 242) that is continuous from the rear end of the main body 252a and projects forward from the main body 252a. A plate-shaped light guide portion 252b disposed at the position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed such that the front surface thereof is kept a predetermined distance from the inner surface of the side lens 250. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, one surface of the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed into a polyhedral shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted by the non-uniform thickness of the main body 252a.

  By combining the side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be doubled and refracted, and the shape of the object disposed on the opposite side can be changed. It is almost unrecognizable. Further, the irregular reflection due to the polyhedral shape along with the irregular refraction makes the appearance of the side lens 250 (circumferential lens portion 250a) sparkle and makes it possible to show a mysterious feeling with an unclear perspective.

  The left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on the surface, and the light emitting decorative openings 242g of the side decorative frame 242 (the periphery of the side lens 250). The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slit 242e (side lens 250 of the side lens 250) is used. The LEDs 254b and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  Similar to the side speaker 130, the upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs a mid-high range sound and is attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. Yes. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264a that protrudes obliquely forward and downward at the center of the left and right of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. And the upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper speaker back side of the upper end of the horn portion 264a in the upper speaker bracket 264, so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side by the horn portion 264a in front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 of the present example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and this causes noise to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the front speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing different directions, like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness.

  The upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decorative frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decorative opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c of the side decorative frame 242. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing different directions like the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252a of the side inner lens 252. In this case, the light transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 is irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform plate thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, the light is irregularly refracted, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the through hole 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side. The appearance can be similar to that of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250.

[1-2D. Upper decoration unit]
Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as seen from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. It is installed between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a that penetrates largely to the center and both the left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 that has a pair of side openings 281b and into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 A central lens 282 fitted from the rear side, an inner lens 283 arranged at the rear end of the central lens 282, a pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281, and an outer shape in front view The shape is similar to that of the front decorative member 281 and the center lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 are placed in front. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decoration member 281 so as to be sandwiched between the decoration members 281; an upper decoration substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the main body member 285 and mounted with a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b on the front surface; And a board cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so that the outer shape of the front view is substantially the same as that of the main body and covers the upper decorative board 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends rearward while being bent continuously from the lower end of the front decorative member 281, and the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is downward A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 fitted into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 from the upper side and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287, It is equipped with. In this example, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front decorative member 281 and the lower decorative member 288. The LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be individually decorated with light emission. In this example, the LED 286a is a full-color LED, and the LED 286b is a high-intensity white LED.

  The front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example has an inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a in an arc shape in which the central upper end is a side extending left and right, the central lower end is a vertex, and each side is loose in front view. And has three protrusions extending from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the lower end vertex to the central opening 281a. The front decorative member 281 has a plurality of streaks extending obliquely outward and upward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281a, and the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281a by the streaks. A side opening 281b is formed so as to extend along the streaking as well as the shape of the blade extending.

  The central lens 282 fitted into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape substantially the same as that of the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces facing different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel that is trillant cut, and the front decorative member 281 looks like a jewel base. .

  The inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a fine lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be diffused widely toward the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted into the side opening 281b of the front decoration member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface thereof is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decoration member 281 when fitted into the side opening 281b. Has been. Note that a plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284, as with the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. Can emit light.

  Note that the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of being clouded by a plurality of minute lenses formed on the surface, and the rear side is not clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 has an outer shape substantially conforming to the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front-rear direction, and the front end opening is inclined downward and closed. Center portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and a closed rear end disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a is positioned substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a, and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a. And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286, penetrating the rear end surfaces of the central portion 285a and the side portion 285b. ing. When the upper decorative board 286 is arranged on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LED 286a of the upper decorative board 286 is inserted and arranged in the opening 285c so that the light from the LED 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. Further, the central part 285a and the side part 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side, so that light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  The lower decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed so as to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side surface shapes thereof are the upper speaker covers 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. The shape of the end portions of the upper speaker frames 266 and 242 near the upper end frames 202c and 242c is substantially the same as that of the upper speaker frames 226 and 266. ing. The lower lens 289 is sandwiched between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker covers 226 and 266. Further, light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the left side upper decorative substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 via the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and includes the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like. It is arranged between.

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a cover body 291 having a disk shape and a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and an outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A main body member 292 that has an annular opening that is formed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and a lower plate of the dish unit 300 that is disposed below the main body member 292. And a lower member 293 formed so as to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is made of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. As long as it can be protected.

  In the side speaker cover 290, a plating layer having metallic luster is formed on the surface of the main body member 292. The lower member 293 is formed of a translucent member having a milky white color similar to that of the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 of this example is attached to the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300. Through a mounting hole 110h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position 110, the door frame base body 100 is fixed to the door frame base body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base body 110.

  Thereby, after removing the security cover 180 in the door frame 5, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screws attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5. The side speaker 130 can be removed by removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5. Therefore, even if the side speaker 130 needs to be replaced for some reason, the front side of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the dish unit 300, and the like from the door frame 5. Only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the speaker can be easily removed, and the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  Thus, in this example, in order to replace the side speaker 130 attached between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the dish unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door that closes the front surface of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the body member 292 from the rear side of the door frame 5 to the door frame base body 110, the body member 292 and the cover body 291 are attached to the door frame base body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 faces from the front side of the door frame 5. Since the side speaker 130 is sandwiched by the speaker bracket 132 attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the front side, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after the main body member 292 is removed. By removing the bracket 132 and releasing the holding of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 are moved to the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110. The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without being removed from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even when a player or the like hits the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is damaged, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily removed. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the exchange of the side speakers 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged, so that the player becomes irritated and less interested and the interest is lowered. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is sandwiched between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be attached to the door frame 5 ( Since it can be attached to the door frame base body 110), the side speaker 130 does not need to be provided with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 that covers the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is not affected even if a player or the like hits the cover body 291. Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, the side speakers 130 can be sufficiently protected to prevent the occurrence of defects, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  Moreover, since the side speaker cover 290 which covers the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 is positioned relatively close to the player. However, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. Thus, it is possible to suppress the player's interest from deteriorating. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is arranged as close as possible to the player, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be heard by the player more efficiently, and a powerful sound is provided. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by making the sound production enjoyable.

  Further, since the side speaker 130 is disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the continuity of decoration by the side decoration units 200 and 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit can be maintained. 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 can be connected without a sense of incongruity, and the side speaker cover 290 can prevent the appearance from deteriorating, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly can be obtained. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shapes of the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed on the side decoration units 200 and 240. It is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200, 240, etc. The design of the front surface of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be made favorable.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5. It takes a little time to remove the glass, and it is possible to make the removal work troublesome for those who are trying to perform illegal acts, etc., and to make the removal work stand out by removing the relatively large glass unit 590 The pachinko machine 1 having high deterrence power (safety) against fraudulent acts etc. can be made by deceiving theft or fraudulent acts.

[1-2F. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing game balls paid out from a prize ball device 740 to be described later, and games stored in the upper plate 301. The ball can be supplied to a ball hitting device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of the present example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and that extends in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped upper plate body 312 which is fixed at substantially the center of the front surface and opened upward and rearward and has a large front side left side (axial support side) bulging forward, and the front end of the upper plate body 312 covers the upper outer periphery. The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction projects forward, and a plurality of openings 316a attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating in the vertical direction A plate front decoration member 316, and a plurality of light guide portions 318a which are disposed between the plate upper decoration member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 and are fitted into the openings 316a of the plate upper decoration member 316 are provided. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and upper dish upper lens 318 are arranged on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and are attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a and 322a on the upper surface. Are mounted between the upper plate upper decorative panel 320 and the upper plate upper decorative panel 314 and the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322. And an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine prisms for diffusing the light to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  The dish unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the dish unit base 310 at the lower side of the upper dish body 312 and opened upward and rearward, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end toward the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the front, and fixed to the upper part of the lower dish body 324, and in the front view, the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the same manner as the lower dish body 324. A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower plate top plate 326 and the lower plate main body 324, and covers the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 328, a dish side middle cover 330 having openings 330 a that are disposed on both left and right sides of the lower dish cover 328 and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and an opening 330 a of the dish side middle cover 330 A dish-side middle cover lens 332 fitted from the side, and a dish-side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 and extending in the left-right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. Note that the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side when viewed from the front is formed with a lock hole 330b at a right end portion thereof to face a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the right dish side outer cover 334 when viewed from the front.

  Further, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing game balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302, and a lower dish body 324. A lower tray ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling downward the game balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower tray 302, and installed on the upper left side in front view of the tray unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. A ball rental unit 360 that operates a ball rental machine (also referred to as CR unit 6; see FIG. 171).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. The dish unit 300 constitutes a lower dish 302 that can store game balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the lower dish body 324, the lower dish top plate 326, the lower dish cover 328, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending in the left-right direction. Is provided. A ball rental unit attachment portion 310b for penetrating in the front-rear direction and attaching the ball rental unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front) of the ball lending unit mounting part 310b, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape that passes through in the front-rear direction. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction below the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (substantially in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e that are disposed directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper tray ball supply port 310c, protrude forward, and have the same upper surface. The upper dish ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower dish support part 310e arranged immediately below.

  The dish unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower dish support portions 310e and is fitted to the rear ends of the lower dish body 324 and the lower dish top plate 326, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular ring in front view. A groove 310f and a rectangular lower dish ball supply port 310g that is disposed in the lower right portion of the center surrounded by the lower dish support groove 310f and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 includes a lower dish ball supply bowl 310h that extends rearward in a cylindrical shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish bowl supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish bowl supply bowl 310h. A notch 310i formed on a side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

  The upper tray ball supply port 310 c of the dish unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the door frame base main body 110 and the cutout portions 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. The unit 540 communicates with the first ball outlet 544a. At the front end of the upper bowl supply port 310c, there is provided a guide recess 310j that extends in the right direction in the front view and is recessed backward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side when viewed from the front is slightly lower with respect to the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower with respect to the front-rear direction. As a result, the difference in height between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 increases toward the right end of the guide recess 310j. The height difference is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game balls stored in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 are: Since it becomes impossible to go straight into the front upper plate 301 from the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the paid-out game ball comes into contact with the game ball whose front side is closed and rolls. The direction is changed, and is guided to roll rightward in the guide recess 310j, and is released from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower stages in the upper plate 301, so that when the game ball blocks the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the player does not bring the game ball by hand. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the game balls that have been paid out into the upper plate 301, and to prevent the player from feeling troublesome about the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , By dedicating the player to the game ball driving operation and the game using the game ball that has been driven in, it is possible to suppress the interest in the game from being reduced, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 Can be done.

  The upper dish ball outlet 310d of the dish unit base 310 includes an opening 344a of the upper dish ball removal base 344 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. Via the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower dish ball supply port 310g, a lower dish ball supply rod 310h extending rearward from the rear side extends rearward through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The cutout portion 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h is connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 It is connected to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  In this example, as shown in the drawing, the front end of the lower dish ball supply port 310g is provided with an enlarged portion 310k that spreads leftward in a front view, and the lower dish ball supply port is provided by this enlarged portion 310k. The front end of 310g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310g at an early stage due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310g, and more games The sphere can be supplied into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (the shaft support side) bulges forward from the center in the front view, and the bottom surface is entirely lowered at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side. Yes. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the pivot support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310 c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310 d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located in the vicinity of the middle position in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  The upper plate body 312 is provided with a metal upper plate rail 312a that can come into contact with the game ball from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the upper plate rail 312a is electrically grounded (grounded) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper dish upper panel 314 of the dish unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper dish body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and is outside the open side of the upper dish body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction to which an upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, which will be described later, is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a step shape that is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312 at the front end, and a decoration attachment portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decoration member 316, and an upper portion at the center in the left-right direction. And an operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting an operation unit 400, which will be described later, formed in a step shape lower than the decoration mounting portion 314b at a position in front of the plate body 312.

  Although not described in detail, the decoration mounting step 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314 has upper and lower positions at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper plate right decoration substrate 320 and the upper plate left decoration substrate 322 attached to the lower surface. An opening or notch that penetrates in the direction is formed, and an opening through which a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 can pass is formed in the operation unit mounting portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 has a shape extending in a left-right direction along the front end of the upper dish upper panel 314, and the light guide part 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 from the lower side to the plurality of openings 316a. And the upper plate upper lens 318 can be held between the upper plate upper panel 314 by being attached to the decorative attachment portion 314b of the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of fine lenses (prisms) on its surface is disposed below the upper plate upper lens 318, and an upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and an upper plate left decorative substrate 322 are disposed. Is sufficiently diffused so that the entire upper dish upper lens 318 can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decorative member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted into the opening 316a is the same. It is shaped, and by fitting this light guide portion 318a, it appears to have an appearance that a pair-shaped gemstone is fitted into the opening 316a of the upper dish front decorative member 316. .

  The lower plate body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a that extends in a fan shape forward in a plan view and has a rear end that is formed in a straight line in the left-right direction and has a substantially lower center on the upper surface, and a center of the bottom plate 324a. And a side plate 324c that rises upward from the front and side ends excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the side of the bottom plate 324a The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower dish top plate 326 are placed and connected to the linear part of the upper end.

  The lower plate body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 is closed by an opening / closing shutter 352 of a lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 disposed on the back side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower plate cover 328 is formed in an inverted triangle shape with the outer shape in front view bulging downward and arcs on each side, and includes an opening 328a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a is a shape that matches the shape formed by the front ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is made of translucent milky white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged on the back side at predetermined intervals, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The dish side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the lower dish cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along a lower side of the lower dish cover 328 from a substantially center in the left and right direction to a side surface of the door frame 5 in a front view. The upper rear end extending to the side surface of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side middle cover 330 includes an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the dish side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Further, the right (open side) dish side middle cover 330 in the front view has a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 near its outer end (right end). When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces the lock hole 330b.

  The dish side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330 c extending rearward from the lower front end thereof, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330 c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is like that. In addition, a part of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The dish-side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right outer sides of the dish-side middle cover 330 when viewed from the front. It is formed in a box shape. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334 a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) dish side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The dish side outer cover 334 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the dish unit base 310. Further, the lower side excluding the central portion of the lower plate body 324 is covered with the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 is provided for the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341 that is attached to the attachment hole 314a of the upper dish upper panel 314 so as to be movable back and forth, and the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341. And an operation piece 342 supported on the front side of the dish unit base 310 and moved upward and downward by the vertical movement of the operation piece 342, and a ball feed unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removal slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the plate unit base 310 and the contact piece 343a that comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 in the upper plate ball slidable in the vertical direction. An upper dish ball removal base 344 that is supported and attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 is omitted, an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper dish ball removal button 341 is arranged so that the upper dish ball removal button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. The coil spring is urged upward. The upper dish ball removal slider 343 is biased upward by a coil spring provided between the upper dish ball removal base 344.

  The upper dish ball removal base 344 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper dish ball discharge port 310d of the dish unit base 310 and simultaneously communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to open forward 344a (see FIG. 43), and a ball guiding channel 344b that communicates with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper dish ball removing base 344 and guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guided backward (FIGS. 42 and 44) and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b, it extends toward the right side (axial support side) end portion in rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper dish ball removing base 344. And a ball passage 344c through which game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper dish ball removal base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper dish ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guide channel 344b communicated with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is transferred to the ball feed unit 580 so as to communicate with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 through the feed opening 113. Can be supplied to.

  Further, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding channel 344b of the upper plate ball removing base 344 communicates with the ball outlet 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 through the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base body 110. In addition, the lower end extending to the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit base 310, and the game balls discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 are It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The rear end lower portion of the bulb passage 344c is closed by an upper dish bulb passage cover 345.

  When the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward is also provided. Move down. Then, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that contacts the upper surface of the contact piece 343a moves the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 in a predetermined direction by moving the contact piece 343a downward. The partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other. Thereby, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d through the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guide path 344b. After that, the balls are discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball passage 344c of the upper dish ball base 344, and from the lower dish ball supply port 310g to the lower dish 302 via the lower dish ball supply rod 310h of the dish unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  Note that the ball removal member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is biased upward by the coil spring. Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent breakage and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower dish ball removal base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the dish side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower dish body 324 in front view and left and right. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower dish ball removal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324, and rotating the opening / closing shutter 352 while lowering the lower dish A lower dish ball removal slider 353 supported on the upper surface of the ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower dish ball removal button 354 attached to the front end of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 351 includes a base ball removal hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324. The open / close shutter 352 includes a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b, and a shutter ball extraction hole which is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction and can substantially coincide with the lower dish ball extraction hole 324b. 352b, and a closing portion 352a is biased by a coil spring between the lower dish ball removal base 351 and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b and the base ball removal hole 351a.

  Although not shown in detail, the open / close shutter 352 includes a contact pin that can come into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353, and the contact pin comes into contact with the lower dish ball removal slider 353. The lower dish ball removal slider 353 is rotated so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward, or the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. Can be done.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower dish ball removal button 354 is arranged at a position sandwiched between the left and right dish side middle covers 330 on the lower side in the horizontal direction of the lower dish cover 328 in the dish unit 300. The surface shape is such that the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 and the plate side middle cover 330 is smoothly continuous.

  Further, the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 is configured such that the shutter ball removal hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 324b of the lower dish body 324 and the base ball removal hole 351a of the lower dish ball removal base 351. In order to hold in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower dish ball removal slider 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

  The lower dish ball removal mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower dish ball removal button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower dish ball removal button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower dish cover 328 or the like. Yes, the lower plate ball hole 324b of the lower plate body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate body 324 (the lower plate 302). When the lower dish ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower dish ball removal button 354 and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slide rearward, and the lower dish ball removal slider 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball hole 324b and the base ball hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball hole 352b and the lower plate ball hole are formed. 324b matches, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 300 through the lower dish ball removal hole 324b. When the lower dish ball removal slider 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower dish ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower dish ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower dish ball removal button 354 is left in the opened state, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is provided in the lower dish ball. The game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball removal button 354 is not kept depressed, while being held in a state where it matches the hole 3324b.

  On the other hand, when closing the lower dish ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted lower dish ball removal button 354 is further pushed backward, the holding mechanism 355 releases the lower dish ball removal slide 353, and the lower dish The ball slide 353 can be slid, and the open / close shutter 352 urged by the coil spring in the direction to close the lower plate ball removal hole 324b by the coil spring, the closing portion 352a is moved to the lower plate by the urging force. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower dish ball removal slide 353 slides forward, the lower dish ball removal hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower dish ball removal button 354 is lowered. It returns to the position of the closed state substantially coincident with the front surface of the dish cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower dish 302.

  Note that the holding mechanism 355 of the lower dish ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-described function, and a detailed description of the detailed mechanism is omitted.

  The lending unit 360 in the dish unit 300 includes a lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending remaining display portion 363 between the lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending unit 360 is pushed into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then pushes the ball lending button 361, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. It can be lent (paid out) into the upper plate 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the cash balance and prepaid card inserted after drawing the remainder of the lent are returned. Yes. Further, the remaining lending display section 363 displays the number of cash and prepaid cards remaining in the ball lending machine.

  The ball rental unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball rental unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. The ball lending unit 360 includes a security cover mounting portion 364 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

  The dish unit 300 of the present example includes an upper dish 301 and a lower dish 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having the same feeling as a conventional pachinko machine having two storage dishes. The pachinko machine 1 can be reminiscent, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new pachinko machine), it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 easy to select as a pachinko machine to play by reducing anxiety given to the player. It has become.

[1-2G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 to 50. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit as seen from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the pressing operation unit is pressed in the operation unit.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at a substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player, and a press that can be pressed by the player An operation unit 405, which can accept a player's operation or move the dial operation unit 401 in accordance with the gaming state, and not only a game ball driving operation for the player It is intended to be able to participate in production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a columnar pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower coupled to the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disc-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 that is fixed to the rotating shaft of the drive gear 412, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support tube 416b that supports the pressing operation unit 405 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support tube 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 are arranged. A spring 418 that biases upward, and an opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a and the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 can pass are provided. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed to the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 that covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 that is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and covers the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attachment portion 314c in the dish unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the cover main body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the upper surface of the base member 420. Dial support substrate 430 having a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of dial operation portion 401 on the upper surface, having an opening 430a through which button support tube 416b and inner tube portion 401a of dial operation portion 401 can pass. Are fixed to the lower side of the base member 420 and A button decoration board 432 having a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rolling, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting an operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a color LED 432d mounted on an upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405; It is equipped with.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a material having translucency, and has a cylindrical inner cylinder part 401a extending in the vertical direction and outward from the upper end of the inner cylinder part 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extended surface, an outer tube portion 401c that extends downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b in a cylindrical shape, and is shorter than the inner tube portion 401a, and an outer tube And a flange portion 401d extending in an annular shape outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange 401 d in the dial operation unit 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a in the upper cover 422. Moreover, the dial operation part 401 is provided with the connection latching | locking part (refer FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylinder part 401a, and when the connection latching claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is latched, dial operation part 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a at a position that is lower than the upper end by a predetermined distance. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401a. As will be described in detail later, the protruding portion 401 f can come into contact with the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operation portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) can be prevented from being further immersed into the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the protrusion 401 f of the dial operation unit 401 and the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation unit 405 are arranged such that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation unit 401. In this case, the contact area is increased when they are in contact with each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. A cap inner 408 disposed inside the button body 407 and sandwiched between the upper end of the button main body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape whose bottom surface is narrowed downward, and the upper end of a coiled spring 418 is inserted into the truncated cone-shaped bottom surface. In addition, a through-hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided at the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape. It is like that.

  The button main body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b that extend downward from the lower outer periphery and protrude outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. By engaging with a locking projection 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward movement end is prevented so that the button body 406 does not come out of the button support 416b. It can be regulated. Although not shown in detail, the button support tube 416b of the operation portion holding member 416 includes a contact portion that prevents the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction. The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating within the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the button main body 406 has a predetermined angle by the gap. It can be rotated within the range.

  Further, the button main body 406 includes a pressing detection piece 406c that extends downward from a different position on the outer peripheral lower part of the locking claw 406b and can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432. The press detection piece 406c is detected by the press detection sensor 432c when the button body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the biasing force of the spring 418.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than a substantially center in the vertical direction smaller than the upper side, and a stepped portion 407a between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a lower diameter than the step portion 407a smaller than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and an upper side than the step portion 407a is a dial operation portion. The inner cylindrical portion 401a 401 has a smaller diameter than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper side of the dial operation portion 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 contacts the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401. Further, the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. A character “Push” is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the character can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 includes a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operation portion holding member 416, and an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connection locking claws 410 b that extend upward from a position at which the upper ends are opposed to each other and project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operation unit 401 are connected to each other so as to be integrally rotatable by being locked with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylinder portion 401a.

  The driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that protrude downward from the lower end and are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432. Although details will be described later, the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c are arranged between each other. The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed therebetween. In this example, the circumferential lengths of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410 and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotary shaft of the dial drive motor 414. The dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor that can arbitrarily control the rotation direction, the rotation speed, and the rotation angle. Thus, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the drive gear 412 (rotary shaft) in small increments by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a predetermined rotation angle for a short period of time based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, so that the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. A feeling can be given.

  Further, the operation unit holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. Button support cylinder 416b that slidably moves in the vertical direction, and a locking projection 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface near the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 ( 49 and FIG. 50), and a through hole 416c that transmits light from the LED 432d that passes through the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and is mounted on the button decoration board 432 to the button support cylinder 416b (press operation unit 405). And a rotation detection sensor 4 attached to the button decoration board 432 through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. An opening 416d through which 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e that passes through the bottom of the button support tube 416b in the vertical direction and is attached to the button decoration board 432, and an opening 416e that is desired from above, and downward from the bottom. And a pair of board holding claws 416f for locking and holding the extended button decorative board 432.

  Although not shown in detail, the operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support tube 416b, and forms a predetermined amount of clearance in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and is locked. A plurality of abutting portions that can abut against the claw 406b are further provided. By this contact portion, the button main body 406 (the pressing operation portion 405) can be rotated within a predetermined angle range, and is not rotated in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning the base member 420 and the button decoration board 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Is provided.

  The operation portion holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation portion 401) about a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 through the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so as to be rotatable. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation portion 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coiled spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button main body 406, and the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion) is arranged by the spring 418. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is hit strongly. The base member 420 has a lower concave portion 420b that can be fitted to the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and a bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b that vertically penetrates the operation holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c that is disposed on the opposite side of the lower recess 420b across the opening 420a and that is recessed downwardly so as to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. I have. Further, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b and is attached to the motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and downward from the outside of the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e projecting by a predetermined amount, and positioning holes 420f opening downward at the lower ends of the leg portions 420e are provided.

  Further, the base member 420 includes a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover body 426 disposed on the outer side of the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is located upward from a different position outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses and mounting holes for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper and lower surfaces thereof.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower concave portion 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the top surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c when the operation unit holding member 416 is supported. The driven gear 410 placed on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate within the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  Further, the leg portion 420e of the base member 420 has a positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof fitted to a positioning protrusion 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later. 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 accommodated in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It does not come into contact with the gear 410.

  Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. Thus, the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. Thereby, the overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 and the like due to overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open bottom, and includes an opening 422a having an inner diameter through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the flange portion 401d cannot pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. The engaging claw 422b that protrudes downward is provided at both ends in the major axis direction, and the engaging claw 422b is engaged with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  The upper cover 422 includes a claw-like locking piece 422c that extends downward from the outer periphery of one side (front side in the pachinko machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) and protrudes outward at the lower end. I have. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper dish front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming out upward from the operation unit mounting portion 314c.

  The upper cover 422 is configured such that the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the base member 420 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422a with the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration board 430, the dial member 401, and the like attached thereto. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass, it is possible to prevent the dial operation unit 401 from being pulled upward by the opening 422a.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an outer peripheral shape substantially coincident with the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted into the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b that can be engaged with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at both upper portions in the major axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engaging claws 422b.

  As shown in the figure, the cover main body 426 in the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a that passes through the center in the vertical direction and through which the dial operation unit 401 (excluding the flange 401d) can pass, and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 are provided. .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing part 426b of the cover main body 426. Although not shown in detail, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment part 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state where the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is slightly lifted from the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm). The cover body 426 can be elastically deformed to reduce the impact when it is pressed or hit.

  In the operation unit 400, the fixing portion 426b of the cover body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw with the front cover 428 removed, and then the cover body 426 is attached. The surface cover 428 is attached to the upper surface.

  In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has a circumferential length in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The length in the direction is the same length. In addition, the pair of rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b attached to the button decoration board 432 has an interval in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 that is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410. It is said that. As a result, as will be described in detail later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection is detected. The direction in which the dial operation unit 401 is rotating can be detected from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  The operation unit 400 of the present example, as will be described in detail later, can rotate the dial operation unit 401 clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 step by step by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, Rotation can be assisted, it can be prevented from turning on purpose, or a click can be added to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 forward and backward in small increments.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50, in the operation unit 400 of this example, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the stepped portion 407 a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401, and the button cap Since 407 (press operation part 405) cannot be further immersed into the inner cylinder part 401e, the load applied to the press operation part 405 is dialed via the step part 407a and the protrusion part 401f. The operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Further, the operation unit 400 of this example presses the pressing operation unit 405 so that the dial drive motor 414 is adjusted in small increments while the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other. By repeatedly rotating and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operation unit 401, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 so that the game and production can be enjoyed. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if a player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely attached to the player. In addition to being able to operate, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and to prevent the player's interest in the game from deteriorating by enjoying the effects using the operation units 401 and 405. it can.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is struck strongly, the dial operation unit 401 is also struck, The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and it is possible to prevent the hitting impact from being concentrated and prevent the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can be made to withstand strong hits, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to improve the operability of 405 and to entertain the performance using the operation units 401 and 405 and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As shown, when the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied, Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the cover body 426 can absorb an impact and a load by elastic deformation, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is connected to the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, an impact is caused by the bottom of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (the dish unit 300). Since the load can be received, the impacts from the operation units 401 and 405 can be dispersed and the impacts can be prevented from being concentrated. Can be increased.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e protruding downward from positions where the operation parts 401 and 405 are supported, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the dish unit 300. Even when the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 by contacting the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portions 420e are not arranged immediately below the impact, so the operation portions 401 and 405 in the base member 420 are not provided. The portion that supports the base plate is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed), so that the shock from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. It is possible to reduce the impact and prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps the base member 420 in plan view. Even when the operation unit holding member 416 that holds the dial operation unit 401 moves away from the base member 420 when the operation unit 401 is struck from the upper side, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotation drive including vibration). Thus, the player can be surprised and attention can be paid to the effects produced by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. The effects using the 401 (press operation unit 405) can be made more difficult to get tired of, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation axis of the dial drive motor 414 is, as a matter of course, the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401. Direct dial drive motor 414 can be avoided and damage to dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can abut on the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 becomes the base member. It is possible to reliably prevent a drop from 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation portion holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and load from the operation.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotating the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 is driven. Although the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite being driven by the rotation, even if the amount of heat generated due to excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 increases, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated and radiated satisfactorily through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive means 414 from being defective due to overheating. That can withstand high loads. Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a press detection sensor 432c that detects the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Rotation operation and pressing operation can be detected, so that it is possible to produce an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and it is more effective for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide an experience with a bodily sensation, and to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained. In addition, a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 for decorating the operation parts 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation parts 401 and 405 can be decorated with light emission, so that the operation parts 401 and 405 emit light. Thus, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

  Further, when the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation portion 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 are in contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation portion 405. When the dial is pressed, the dial operation unit 401 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined angle range by the dial drive motor 414, thereby allowing the dial operation unit 401 to contact the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 via the step 407a. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, since it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation with respect to the pressing operation 405 without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, an effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 that the user thought would not move. It is possible to make it seem that there is something, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the operation unit 400 to the player, and the enjoyment of the game by reducing the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other, so that the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even when the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed also on the dial operation unit 401 side, and load resistance and impact resistance against the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be increased. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to damage to the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent a player's interest in games from being reduced due to the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the axial center extending in the vertical direction. When the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can perform the dial operation in the operation unit 400. The role of each of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the performance using the operation unit 400, and is guided to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The “PUSH” characters that have been played can be easily read from the player side without turning or tilting greatly, It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 includes a protruding portion 401f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner tube portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 has a smaller diameter than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a is formed at the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 as much as possible, and the inside of the operation unit 400 through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dust to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate due to the entry of foreign matter, and it is difficult to press the pressing operation unit 405. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which part of the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 is selected. Since the contact can be made even at a position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed with a feeling that it is tilted (a position that is biased toward the outer periphery from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), the dial operation unit 401 is reliably contacted. Therefore, the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are annularly contacted, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side. Impact resistance can be further increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to become lower toward the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed radially outward in a direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the load is prevented from being concentrated. The loadability and impact resistance can be reliably increased, the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward / reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, or forward / reverse. The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and that exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 having the upper plate 301 for storing game balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Thus, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a smashing of the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily entertain using the operation unit 400.

[1-2H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame as seen from behind. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to a handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300. A fixed and cylindrical handle base 502 whose front end bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body rear 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle A rotating handle body front 506 fixed to the front surface of the rear body 504 and integrally rotatable with the rotating handle body rear 504, and disposed on the front surface of the rotating handle body front 506 and fixed to the handle base 502. Rotating handle body front 506 and rotation in cooperation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 includes a shaft member 510 that is mounted and fixed at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body so as to protrude from the front side to the rear side and has a non-circular bearing portion 510a at the rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510. A rotation position detection sensor 512 that has a detection shaft portion 512a that can be rotated by being engaged with 510a and that is non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotation position detection sensor 512 is sandwiched between the handle base 502 and the rotation position detection sensor 512. A sensor support member 514 having a through hole 514a that is fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and through which the detection shaft 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a sensor support A single button 520 that is pivotally supported with respect to the member 514 and activates the firing stop switch 518, and a rotation handle body front 506 and a rotation handle body rear 504 that are arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member 510 are initially rotated ( And a handle return spring 522 that urges it to return to a counterclockwise rotation end when viewed from the front.

  As shown in the drawing, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of the present example has a hemispherical round shape that expands to the front side on the front end side, and a cylindrical shape with the rear end open on the rear end side. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on a cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side. The three groove portions 502a of the handle base 502 have one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three protrusions 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Has been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tube portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a is fitted to the protrusion 143.

  In the handle device 500, an arcuate slit 506a arranged concentrically with the rotation shaft is formed on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward are formed on the front end cover 508. These mounting bosses 508a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506a on the front surface 506 of the rotary handle. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front 506 of the rotating handle main body abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508 so that the rotation range of the rotating handle main bodies 504 and 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b protruding rearward is formed on the rotary handle main body front 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is locked to the sensor support member 514, and the rotary handle body 504 is held by the handle return spring 522. , 506 are biased to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base body 110 is inclined so that its mounting surface faces the outside (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above. The device 500 is also tilted outward in plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1). 5 to be fixedly attached. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grasp the handle device 500, and there is no sense of incongruity in the rotation operation, and it is easy to perform the rotation operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is detected via the shaft member 510. The shaft portion 512a rotates. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball hitting device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Thus, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are conductively plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player touches the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is like that. When the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, when the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 rotate, the rotation drive of the launch solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball Can be typed in. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven, It is possible to reduce a load (burden) related to the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed by preventing the player from playing a game different from the original game.

  Further, when the player presses the single button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 stops the rotational driving of the firing solenoid 654. It is like that. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle apparatus 500, while launching of a game ball can be stopped temporarily, before operating the single button 520 by operating the single button 520 release operation. A game ball can be launched with a driving strength.

  In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotational operation of the rotary handle main bodies 504 and 506 is electrically detected by the rotational position detection sensor 512, and then the emission control is performed based on the detection of the rotational position from the rotational position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the unit 4120, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 as in a conventional pachinko machine, It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so that the door frames 5 are linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and the linkage is released when the door frame 5 is opened, and the configuration relating to the pachinko machine 1 is simplified. Can be eliminated, and the occurrence of defects in the joint unit can be eliminated. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame as seen from the back. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the foul cover unit with the front cover removed.

  A foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to a rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 to be described later, or a ball hitting device 650. Nevertheless, the game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the game area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 having a front side opened and having a plurality of game ball passages therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 includes a first sphere inlet 542a that is disposed in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front end of the cover base 542 that communicates with the first sphere inlet. A first sphere passage 542b that expands to the right as viewed from the front, a second sphere inlet 542c that is arranged outside the first sphere inlet 542a (on the right in the rear view) and is larger than the first sphere inlet 542a, and a second A second ball inlet 542c that communicates with the ball passage 542d and extends downward and slopes downward toward the lower right corner when viewed from the front is provided. The first ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the drawing, the second ball passage 542d in the cover base 542 has a height of a portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end, which is about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. An accommodation space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can be guided to the upper part in the vicinity of the downstream of the foul ball inlet 542e and the foul ball inlet 542e, which is disposed at a substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e. A foul ball passage 542f. The cover base 542 includes an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g contacts the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, and is disposed in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first spherical passage 542b of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first sphere outlet 544a and the second sphere outlet 544b that is disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second sphere passage of the cover base 540 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310 c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the rear end of the lower dish ball supply rod 310h in the dish unit 300 is connected to the second ball outlet 544b through the ball passage opening 110f of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 of the present example passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage 542b. 544a can be supplied to the upper plate 101 through the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage 542d. From 544b, it can be supplied to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply bowl 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 will be described in detail later, but when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is positioned below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supply) the game balls received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 of the present example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and can swing by a game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the shaft, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that biases the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the swinging member 548 is pivotally supported at the lower end with respect to the cover base 542, and the upper end is rotated to the left in the front view. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. Further, the swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a position where the swinging member 548 is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swinging member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by a full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end in the rear view of the cover base 542, respectively. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance caused by circulation of game balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, the game ball stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball flows to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). From the full tank outlet 776 to the second bulb inlet 542c, the second bulb passage 542d, and the second bulb outlet 544 of the foul cover unit 540. It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  When the inside of the lower plate 302 of the tray unit 300 is filled with game balls, the game balls can no longer come out from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and are stuck in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. Game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and more game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548 and resists the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. When the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and also provides the player with a dish unit. Notification is made to prompt the player to discharge the game balls in 300 to the outside.

  When the game ball in the storage space 546 (the lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 is returned to a substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the full detection sensor 550 detects the detection piece 548a. The non-detection is made, and the payout of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 57. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 can be pulled out to the lower dish 302 by operating the upper dish ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 that has a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 581a and is opened at the rear, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. A rear cover 582 having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that has penetrated in the front-rear direction and entered from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launcher 650, and the rear cover 582 and the front cover. A partition 58 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitions between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. a ball-extracting member 583 having a, and game balls on the partitioning portion 583a of the ball-extracting member 583 are sent one by one to the hitting supply port 582a of the rear cover and extend vertically between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. A ball feeding member 584 supported so as to be rotatable around the axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feeding member 584. In this example, as shown in the drawing, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in the front view, and the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the left side of the ball feeding member 584, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is disposed on the right side. Has been placed.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 includes an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b when viewed from the front. An operating rod 583c of a ball punching member 583, which will be described later, extends from 581c to the front. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a. When the front cover 581 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guide channel 344b in the upper dish ball removal base 344 is assembled. Is formed to close.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 has a partition portion 583a which is located below the entrance port 581a and partitions the entrance port 581a and the ball exit port 581b so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the ball feed member 584, and the partition portion 583a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and bends from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 583b that is pivotally supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 583c that projects forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 583b, and a side surface of the pivot collar 583b below the actuation collar 583c. And a weight portion 583d protruding to the opposite side to the partition portion 583a. An operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and a ball feed opening of the door frame base body 110 The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300 is in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583. A sphere holding portion 584b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear end to the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 584c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 584b are provided. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b in the ball feeding member 54 are formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to hold one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates about the rotation axis when the flange 584c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585. ing.

  In the ball feeding member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a. It rotates between the holding position. When the ball feeding member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 582a to the hit ball launching device 650 and enters the partition portion 583a from the advance port 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (hit ball supply port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the flange portion 584c side closes the hitting ball supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 580 is moved back and forth by a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 which is swung vertically. And a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operation rod 586 and extends in the left-right direction, and the side of the engagement portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operation rod 586. Is disposed on the opposite side and is supported between a front cover 581 and a rear cover 582 so as to be pivotable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a ball feed member 584 extending upward from the shaft 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-shaped flange portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operating rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586 that swings by the driving of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587. 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 swinging away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 585 and the tip of the swing is positioned upward, so that the ball feeding member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the ball feeding unit 580 is controlled by the firing control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 654.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 that is pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 580 of the present example is configured to apply a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 583c. The operation rod 583c protruding forward comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 in the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 of the dish unit 300, so that its rotation is restricted. In a normal state, the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball removal port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removal port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 341 of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340 in the dish unit 300 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact. As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340, the ball removal member 583 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet passage 344c of the upper dish ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. Then, it is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

  Since the contact piece 343a of the upper dish ball removal slider 343 against which the operating rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 abuts is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper dish ball removal slider 343 via the operating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

  As described above, according to the present example, the game ball is stored in the upper plate 301 and the game ball is supplied to the ball feeding unit 580, and then the player holds the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting device 650 by driving the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting device 650, thereby playing the game window 101 of the door frame 5. A game is played in the game area 1100 that can be viewed via the player, so that the player can be entertained, and a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 or ball feed solenoid 585 is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a discharge mechanism (ball removal member 583) are disposed, so that only the ball feed member 584 and the ball removal member 583 are provided. The ball feeding member 584 and the ball hitting device 650 are also brought as close as possible, and when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341, it remains on the ball feeding member 584 side. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls as much as possible, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be thrown in. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing early or the game balls in the upper plate 301 from being filled up early due to the operation. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of annoyance and suppress the interest, and the dish unit 300 can be downsized while maintaining the capacity of the upper dish 301, so that the game The area 1100 can be enlarged (widened) to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention.

  Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 580 is simply attached to the ball feed member 580 as compared with the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 separately. 584 and the ball punching member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in the assembly can be simplified, the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball punching member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feeding unit 580.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the ball feeding unit 580 provided on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (the upper dish ball removal mechanism 340) that transmits the operation of the removal button 341 to the ball removal member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The configuration related to the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (when the door frame 5 is opened, as compared with the case where the ball feeding unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side). By shutting off the upper bowl removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism will be consumed at an early stage, causing malfunction or damage, and reliability for the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feeding unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

  Further, since the upper plate ball removal button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 or the upper plate 301 by simply pressing the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward. Can be stopped, and the player can easily perform the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

  The partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in accordance with the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341, and the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is moved. At the same time, the partition portion 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible. The unit 580 can be reduced in size, and the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is urged upward, and the partition portion 583a of the ball removal member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a when the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in the raised position. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously comes into contact with the partition portion 583a, the impact can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member) 583) can be improved. Further, since the impact applied to the partition portion 583a can be reduced by the urging force acting on the upper dish ball removal slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult to repel even when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, compared to the case where the partition portion 583a is slid, it relates to the movement of the partition portion 583a when a load of a game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operability can be improved by lightening the operation of the upper dish ball removal button 341, and the moving range of the partitioning portion 583a can be reduced in the planar projection. The effect of this can be achieved.

  In addition, since the partition portion 583a is rotated by its own weight in a direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b communicate with each other, the partition portion Rotating due to its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are in communication with each other, and the game medium in the storage tray is sent to the feed mechanism (input device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it will be discharged to the player side without being played, the player can be made aware that there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 and moved to a pachinko machine 1 with no problems. It can suppress that it falls.

  Further, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated via the rotating hook part 583b bent, the rotating hook part bent when the game ball collides with the divider 583a. It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft by dispersing it by 583b or by absorbing it by bending of the rotating collar portion 583b, and to improve the durability of the ball removing member 583. Can be increased.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged, the right and left of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 are Directional movement can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can serve as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, the ball feeding unit 580 can be prevented from being unnecessarily enlarged.

[1-2K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 is demonstrated mainly with reference to FIG.22 and FIG.23. This glass unit 590 has an opening of approximately the same size as the gaming window 101 and has an annular, vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592. And a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 includes four pieces 592a that are arranged apart from each other in the vertical direction at the left and right ends and extend outward in a plate shape, and a plate that extends in the horizontal direction along the lower end and extends downward. Shaped locking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end to engage with the vertical bent protrusion 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. After that, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. It is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIGS. 23, 28, etc.).

  As described above, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls arranged vertically below the gaming window 101 having a vertically long elliptical shape, For driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101 on the right side of the lower plate 302 in front view. A handle device 500 is arranged. The door frame 5 includes a right side decoration unit 200, a left side decoration unit 2200, and an upper decoration unit 280 so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the gaming window 101, and surrounds the lower side of the gaming window 101. Thus, the dish unit 300 is disposed so as to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 with the side speaker cover 290 interposed therebetween, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. Appearance with continuous integration.

  Further, the door frame 5 emits the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 and the like provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300, thereby causing the gaming window 101 to emit light. In addition, light emission decoration can be performed with an arbitrary light emission color so as to surround the opening 328a of the lower plate cover 328. Of the LEDs mounted on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. By turning on and off the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256 that are arranged, the mode of the light-emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250 and the light emission of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same emission mode (the emission color and the emission pattern are the same), the overall illumination pattern can be made substantially uniform. If it is, it can be set as the light emission decoration which was interrupted in the circumferential direction. It can be made into a light-emitting decoration, and can attract a player's interest strongly.

  In the door frame 5, the base member 420 that supports the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die-casting, and the base member 420 is attached to the plate unit 300 by the cover body 426. Since the operation unit mounting portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover body 426 is elastically deformed to bend and the base member 420 is lowered. The contact with the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c through the cover 424 can alleviate the impact on the dial operation unit 401, the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, and can prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and the dial operation unit 401 is included together even if a player or the like tries to strike the pressing operation unit 405 strongly. Therefore, the impact hit by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, and the impact can be prevented from being concentrated to be hard to break. In addition, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 that rotatably supports the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly protrude from the upper surface from below. When the impact hitting the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) via the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can contact the upper surface and receive the impact, it is possible to reduce the load on the operation portion holding member 416 and to prevent the gear rail 416a from being crushed by the impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached to the plate unit 300 from above, even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced, It is possible to prevent the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from being lowered by replacing the unit 400.

[1-2L. Luminous decoration on door frame]
Next, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. FIG. 60 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emission decoration in the door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the dish unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, and 300 is provided with a decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, and 322 on which LEDs are mounted. The outer periphery can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of peripherals in the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion of the gaming center 101 in the left-right direction center. Is disposed between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by side decorative frames 202 and 242 that are opaque (in this example, have a plating layer on the surface). Is surrounded.

  Side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged on the rear side of these side lenses 210 and 250, and the body inner portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are arranged with respect to the rear surfaces of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. The plate-shaped light guides 212b and 252b are formed so as to extend as far as possible to the rear surfaces of the radiation lens units 210b and 250b. Has been. Although not shown in detail in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surfaces thereof, and the decorative substrates 214, 216 and 254 arranged on the rear side. , 256 can diffuse light.

  The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b are provided. In this example, LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiating lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decorations). Normal luminance lower than that of the LED 286b of the upper decorative board 286 in the unit 280). In addition, the two LEDs 214c arranged above and below corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 in the upper decorative board 214 on the right side are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that the lights from the player side are reflected by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and deteriorating in appearance, and by reflecting the light from each of the LEDs 210a and 210b that emit light to the player side by the substrate, The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly decorated.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the upper side of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction. The upper center of the gaming window 101 is decorated. The upper decoration unit 280 includes a large central lens 282 formed in a jewel shape in the center, side lenses 284 formed in a wing shape on the diagonally upper left and right sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 arranged. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a blue-tinged transparent member, and the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a white (milky white) member having translucency. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 arranged on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decoration unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on the surface thereof, and can diffuse and refract light, so that it passes through the transparent central lens 282. When the inner lens 283 is viewed, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to shine. Further, the upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative substrate 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, and the rear lenses 284 and the lower lens 289. A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, respectively) on the left and right sides. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a high-intensity white LED. In addition, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, a plurality of jewel-like light guides 318 a in the upper dish upper lens 318 are formed along the front end of the upper dish 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. The front decoration member 316 is lined up so as to be exposed through the opening 316a. When viewed from the front, the upper side front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 allow the outer side of the lower side of the gaming window 101 to be shown in the figure. (Lower) is designed to decorate. Below the upper dish upper lens 318, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper dish upper inner lens 319 of the dish unit 300 has a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318, and diffuses and refracts light. In the same way as the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 is given a deep and sparkling brightness to guide it. The light part 318a looks like a jewel. In addition, the upper dish upper decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are not seen from the player side through the light guide 318a by the upper dish upper inner lens 319.

  On the upper surface of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 in the plate unit 300, a plurality (six in this example) are provided so as to correspond to the light guide portions 318 a of the upper plate upper lens 318. LEDs 320a and 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper pan right decorative substrate 320 and the upper pan left decorative substrate 322 are full-color LEDs. Moreover, the surface (upper surface) of the upper plate right decorative substrate 320 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 is also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 includes a ring-shaped dial operation unit 401 having translucency and a columnar pressing operation unit having translucency disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. 405, and a dial decoration board 430 and a button decoration board 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration board 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED with high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the gaming window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are a first annular group 102 (within the hatched area in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the gaming window 101, and a second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102. (In the range of the cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light appropriately, so as to surround the gaming window 101, and are substantially concentric. A plurality (two in this example) of light emission can be decorated. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are caused to emit light, the hatched area near the gaming window 101 is decorated in a ring shape, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are activated. When all the lights are emitted, the cross hatch area away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b, 256 b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210 b, 250 b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are the first annular group 102 and the first ring group 102. A radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) that extends radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the gaming window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the bicyclic group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 can appropriately emit light so that the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission in addition to the ring shape of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emitting decoration can be decorated so as to be divided in the circumferential direction. Further, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub-lens 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are set as the upper right side group 105. The portion (side sub-lens 228) can be decorated with light emission.

  In the door frame 5, the LED 286 a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decorative unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the gaming window 101 emits light at the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. Group 106 is designated. The LED 286a of the upper central group 106 can appropriately emit light so that the upper center of the gaming window 101 can be decorated with light emission, and the reference point of the annular light emitting decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 It is possible to make such a luminous decoration. The LED 286 b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper central side group 107 that decorates the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately lit to decorate the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, or above the gaming window 101 (including the upper part). It is possible to decorate the light emission in a V shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 320 a corresponding to the light guide 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the plurality of openings 316 a of the upper dish front decoration member 316 in the dish unit 300 decorating the lower side of the gaming window 101. , 322 a is a lower group 108 that illuminates and decorates the outer periphery of the lower side of the gaming window 101 so as to connect the left and right lower ends of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. By appropriately emitting light from the LEDs 320a and 322a of the lower group 108, the lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated with light emission, and the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 , 216a, 254a, and 256a, the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

  In the door frame 5, the LEDs 430 b and 432 d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged at the lower center of the gaming window 101 and in the upper center of the dish unit 300 An operation unit group 109 for decorating light emission is used. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated with light emission, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be changed. The player can be informed.

  The light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, and 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250, respectively. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. It has been.

  The 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into 8 systems 104a to 104h for each of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Also, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Further, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper center group 106 are divided into three systems, a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. The six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d, three at a time from the right side when viewed from the front. The five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 include four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405 as a set, and the left and right 109a and the front and rear 109b. The two LEDs, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

  Meanwhile, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, and 432d are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which 432d belongs are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit full color, and 3 in actual light emission control. It has doubled 84 systems. The LEDs 286b and 430b are high-intensity white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 107b, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 286b and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high luminance. Two systems are connected to each other. In actual light emission control, the number of systems is doubled to eight.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal luminance, and belong to the eight systems 104a to 108h. The LED 214c is a red LED and belongs to the two systems 105a and 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, so that there are ten systems of the same number in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting / flashing is controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). . As a result, a rich light-emitting effect can be achieved.

  As the lighting effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color) to spread outwardly around the gaming window 101. Light emission effect, or conversely, light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the gaming window 101 by emitting light sequentially from the second annular group 103 to the first annular group 102 (sequential light emission of the same color or similar color), Alternatively, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 can emit light at the same time, so that a light-emitting effect or the like can be performed so that the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 emits light widely.

  In addition, by coordinating with the LEDs (detailed illustration is omitted) provided on the front surface of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000, the LEDs of the game board 4 and the LEDs of the first annular group 102 close to the game window 101 are provided. With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 arranged outside the first annular group 102, it becomes possible to provide a more expressive light-emitting effect, which can attract the player's interest strongly, It is possible to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by delighting the player.

  Moreover, in the 1st cyclic | annular group 102, the 2nd cyclic | annular group 103, and the lower group 108, light circulates the outer periphery of the game window 101 by light-emitting each system | strain 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 108a-108d suitably. Such as a light emission effect, or light moving toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101, or light from the central lens 282 along the outer periphery of the gaming window 101. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions). However, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that light circulates around the outer periphery of the gaming window 101.

  Further, by emitting light only from the radial group 104, a light emission effect is produced in which the light is emitted radially around the gaming window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. To produce a light emission effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the gaming window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or to cause the radial group 104 to emit light (light on / flash) while the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 emits light. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration. Further, by emitting light individually from each of the systems 104a to 104h of the radial group 104, it is possible to produce a light emission effect such that the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b circulate.

  Further, the central lens 282 as a whole emits light by simultaneously emitting light from the respective systems 106a to 106c of the upper central group 106, and light is rotated in the central lens 282 by sequentially emitting light from each of the systems 106a to 106c. Light emission effects can be performed. Further, the upper center side group 105 emits light so that the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, and the player has an opportunity and a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probable game) State, short-time gaming state, etc.) can be performed. The lower lens 289 is arranged so as to irradiate light from the player's head toward the player, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286b. .

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 can emit light by decorating the front edge of the upper plate 301 by appropriately emitting light from each of the systems 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109. Or a light-emitting effect that prompts the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, the system 109a, 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 is appropriately caused to emit light so as to prompt the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or guide the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that prompts the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the system 109c of the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, the upper central group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 is a full color LED, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to produce a lighting effect with different gradations such as luminescent color and brightness for each 109 or for each system 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, 109c. A rich lighting effect can be performed.

  Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are the first close to the gaming window 101. Since the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be made to emit light, a plurality of outsides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) are arranged. The pachinko machine can be decorated in a substantially concentric circle shape, and the light surrounding the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can produce a light emitting effect that is not available in conventional pachinko machines, and attracts the player's attention strongly. 1 can be set.

  In addition, one peripheral lens portion 210a, 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged in a substantially concentric circle, and even if the appearance looks like one, each LED of the two systems can emit light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentrically, it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a (the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit) by the light emission decoration can be made. 240) can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light emitting decoration can be obtained.

  Furthermore, LEDs 214b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are divided in the circumferential direction by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Therefore, the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 can be decorated in a plurality of rings by causing the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light according to the gaming state. And never seen before on a pachinko machine It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  Further, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 constituted by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, and 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60). So that the light converges toward the gaming window 101, that is, the gaming area 1100 by emitting light in the order of the second annular group 103 and the first annular group 102 from the outside to the inside. And can make the player's interest to the gaming area 1100, and can make it seem that there is something good in the gaming area 1100, which increases the expectation of the game. It can suppress that interest falls. Furthermore, by emitting light in the order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside to the outside, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, that is, the game area 1100. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is something good for the light-emitting effect spreading to the player, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light-emitting effects can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The player in the game hall can also show the above-mentioned light-emitting effects, attract the interest of other players, and make it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. Can do.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 that are radially arranged so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that extend in the circumferential direction in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by causing these radial groups 104 to emit light, it is possible to add an accent to the luminous decoration, The player's interest can be strongly attracted by changes in the light-emitting decoration. Further, the radial groups 104 arranged in a radial direction cause the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to correspond to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 in the circumferential direction. Since the LEDs 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are divided, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the respective peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for each of the systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j. Thus, it is possible to perform a light emission effect in which light moves in the circumferential direction. By providing a variety of light emission effects, the pachinko machine 1 that does not get tired can be obtained.

  Further, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lens portions 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Compared with the case where the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are included in the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and integrated, the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be changed, so Even when the lighting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be improved, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained. Even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b, the annularly arranged LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a and the radially arranged LEDs 214b and 216b are arranged. , 254b, and 256b in the same light emission mode, it is possible to make an illusion that the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b are integrated, and the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 is integrated. Thus, the light emitting decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  Further, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 that are partitioned in the circumferential direction by LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially on one peripheral lens portion 210a and 250a in the side lenses 210 and 250. , 216a, 254a, 256a are made to correspond to each other, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are made to emit light even if the appearance looks like one. Therefore, it is possible to make the light emission decoration substantially concentrically, so that it is difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased, and the light emission Increase the impact of decoration and attract players' attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, the side inner lenses 212, 250 irradiate the side lenses 210, 250 by diffusing light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256. 252 is provided, so that unevenness in the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be suppressed, the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, Even if 254a and 256a are used, the side lenses 210 and 250 can be decorated with light emission in a planar shape, so that a light emitting body that emits light in a linear shape (for example, a cold cathode tube (fluorescent tube), a neon tube, an organic EL, etc.) As compared with the case where the LED is used, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a are individually made to emit light, thereby allowing the first annular group 1 to emit light. 2 and the second annular group 103 can also change the light emission in the circumferential direction, can present more various light emission effects, and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player due to difficulty in getting bored. In addition, the pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's interest.

  Further, since the light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by random refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. The decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 placed on the board can be hard to see, and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. can be seen directly from the player side and prevent the appearance from deteriorating. Can do.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is guided by the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 to irradiate the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b can be reliably guided to the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b to be decorated with light emission, so that the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be realized. Further, the light guide portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 ensure the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b is long. Since the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 irradiate the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 widely with the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is sufficient between the side lenses 210 and 250. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a that secure the space, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the side decorative frames 202 and 242 surround the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250, so that the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is emitted from the radiating lens. It is possible to reduce as much as possible that the light from the portions 210b and 250b or the light from the radiating lens portions 210b and 250b affects the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a, and the light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the appearance of the light emission.

[1-3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side when viewed from the front with respect to the outer frame 2 and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 can hold the game board 4 detachably from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrates in the front-rear direction to have a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, and a main body frame base An upper shaft bracket 630 and a lower shaft bracket 640 that are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the front view 600 and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, and the main body frame base 600. A ball hitting device 650 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 and a game ball delivered to the upper plate 301 of the tray unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. Open the ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  The main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and includes various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 except the game board 4, a power supply board 851, and the like. Are combined into a unit board unit 800, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and opens and closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 and is approximately in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a certain depth D (see FIG. 65). Accordingly, when the main body frame base 600 is faced down when attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability relating to the assembly of the main body frame 3 is improved. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a gaming board holding port through which the entire range of about 3/4 penetrates in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction from the upper part to the lower part so that the outer periphery of the gaming board 4 can be fitted and held. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and a recess from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear, and the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5. Door frame protruding piece 110c protruding rearward from the lower end of the frame, the upper bent protruding piece 167 protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside protruding rearward of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 153. And an engaging groove 603 into which the bent protrusion 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spread in a plate shape in the left-right direction. 604 and a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free end portions (upper and lower left end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 to each other, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is like that.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 forms a lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall part 604, and a game board placement part 606 on which the game board 4 is placed, and the game board placement part 606. A game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and a positioning projection 607 that protrudes upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. A game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the stopper 1120 is fixed, and a plate shape that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and whose lower end can come into contact with the upper end of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction. A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rearward direction. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict the right side of the game board 4 from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. Yes. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 when viewed from the front will be described later, movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is mounted with a bracket for mounting the upper shaft bracket 630 and the lower shaft bracket 640 on the rear surface of the free end portion (upper left and right end portions in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. Part 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 and the like, the bracket mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and attaches the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through-hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and is formed at the lower left of the cylinder lock through-hole 611 in front view. The U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits the positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 that is formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 when viewed from the front are accommodated. A solenoid housing recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step further to the rear side than the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, The ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid housing recess 613. In a state in which the ball hitting device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, A foul space 626 extending downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e in the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  The main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in a front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides of the front view. A through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by a relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 66 and the like), and passes through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, so that the lower rear wall portion 604 is opened. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear surface face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a front wall on the front side.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has a fixture support portion that rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 near the upper front end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616 and a stopper 617 that protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 when viewed from the front and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixing tool 690 includes a fixing piece 690a that spreads in a fan shape around an axis that is pivotally supported by the fixing tool support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixing piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated clockwise when viewed from the front). The game board fixing tool 690 is pivotally supported on the fixing tool support 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixing tool 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. Then, the fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, the game board fixing tool 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is regulated by contacting the stopper 617. It has become.

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the lower rear surface from the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressure is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 includes three pieces penetrating vertically in the front-rear direction on the inner side (axial support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 in front view. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 that penetrates in the front-rear direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and is arranged in the left-right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and the approximate center in the vertical direction. The upper and center door hook holes 620 and the lock engagement holes 621 are engaged with and engaged with engagement protrusions 1004 provided at both upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000, and the front end frame portion 602 is engaged. The locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 protrude forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. 1010 protrudes forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 descends slowly and obliquely downward from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the rear view, and then the lower rear wall 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. Is provided with a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 that is allowed to circulate from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward. The main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 is closed at the rear side by a substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and will be described in detail later. A game ball that has circulated through the ball extraction passage 741d in the prize ball device 740 is provided. It comes to circulate.

  A plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 when viewed from the back, and the back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supports the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 obliquely upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and the locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall portion 605 in front view. And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, the main body frame base 600 has mounting bosses and mounting holes for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, and the like as appropriate. Is formed.

[1-3B. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the metal mounting portions 610 on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. Thus, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported to the outer frame 2 to be openable and closable.

  First, the upper shaft support metal 630 is attached to the upper metal attachment part 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment part 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like extension extending forward from the upper end of the attachment part 631. A front extending portion 632, a shaft supporting pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 632, and a shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side in front of the shaft supporting pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 and the like) penetrating in the vertical direction is inserted, and the door frame 5 is pivoted downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front. And a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is disposed below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. A main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft bracket 642 in the lower shaft bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and forward from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a. A plate-like front extending portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extending portion And a stopper 642d that is erected upward from the left end of the front view 642a and restricts the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support 642 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 642a, a front extension 642b, and a stopper 642d by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends from the bottom of the attachment portion 644a in a plate-like attachment portion 644a. A front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 644b are provided. The main body frame shaft support 644 is also integrally formed with an attachment portion 644a and a front extension portion 644b formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support 640 of this example is in a state in which the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction. The front extension 642b of the shaft support 642 and the front extension 644b of the main body frame support 644 are attached to the lower metal attachment 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance therebetween in the vertical direction. It is like that.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640 Are positioned on the same axis, and the body frame shaft support hole of the body frame shaft support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support bracket 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extending portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is placed on the outer frame 2. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by being inserted into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640. The metal fitting 642c is coaxially positioned, and the door is such that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal 642 in the lower shaft support metal 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is placed on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction. When the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Once the door shaft 5 is slid downward and the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 are vertically overlapped, the shaft pin 155 is slid upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launcher 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking device in the main body frame. This hitting ball launching device 650 can drive the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the ball hitting device 650 of the present embodiment, a metal plate launch base 652 attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall 604 in the main body frame base 600, and a rotary drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652 are projected. The launching solenoid 654, the hitting ball 656 fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be integrally rotatable, the tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and the movement locus of the tip 658. The tip of the hitting ball 656 between the firing rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in front view and is attached to the front surface of the firing base 652 and the firing rail 660 at the upper base end of the firing rail 660. The ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time as the ball 658 can pass. The ball 66 槌 (tip 658) is prevented from rotating toward the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 can be hit by the piece 662 and the ball stop piece 662. A stopper 664.

  The firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is not shown in detail, but the drive shaft 654a is reciprocally rotated at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking ball 656 of the ball striking device 650 includes a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. A collar portion 656b that faces the normal direction and has a collar portion 656b fixed to the tip, and a stopper portion 656c that extends to the opposite side with respect to the collar portion 656b and can be brought into contact with the stopper 664c. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball basket 656 is in contact with the stopper 664, the tip of the tip 658 is rotated to the firing rail 660 side from the hitting position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). Being regulated.

  In addition, the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 has a loose arc shape that is recessed downward so as to be substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98) and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center is shaped like a V-shape, and the game ball hit by the hitting ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 that covers the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate a rotation end of the hitting ball 656 toward the hitting ball position, and a rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting ball position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotation end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, so that it can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts and suppress the generation of noise due to the abutment. Be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, and the like, the hit ball launching device 650 of the present example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, the lower side of the game board mounting portion 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) is located outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed between the lower end of the rail 1111. The hitting ball launching device 650 of this example hits the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by firing the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the front view from the launch rail 660. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned below the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 A game ball that has not been driven into a foul ball falls into the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

  In addition, the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the firing control unit 4120 with a driving strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 is used. It is made to drive in synchronism with the drive. Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven from this state. When is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side, so that the ball launching solenoid 654 of the ball feed unit 580 is driven almost simultaneously. By turning on (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably fired by the rotation of the hitting ball cage 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. 72 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a sphere circulation passage in the prize ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores a game ball supplied from the island facility side to the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. Is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 which is attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receives and stores game balls supplied from the island facility side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and arranged to send the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 to the downstream side, and a predetermined payout of the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 The payout device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction, and the game ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit, and the game ball to be paid out when the upper plate 301 is full of game balls And a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and a grounding bracket for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the winning ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface thereof, and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in rear view. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape so that the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 are along the front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are arranged on the upper side. In addition, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a reverse L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600 as shown in the figure. And is integrally formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 has a peripheral wall portion 710a that extends rearward substantially along the outer periphery of the inverted L-shape, and a predetermined width that extends inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a and is disposed in a substantially identical plane. And a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710 a is formed to extend backward from a position that is one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The award ball base 710 is located at a position where the rear wall portion 710b is deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space that can accommodate the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

  The prize ball base 710 includes a tank attachment part 711 for attaching the prize ball tank 720 to the upper side of the upper side of the peripheral wall part 710a, and the side of the tank attachment part 711 (right side in the rear view). External terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the rear end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b A prize ball apparatus mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball apparatus 740, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding a game ball paid out from the prize ball apparatus 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball apparatus attachment portion 714, and a rear wall. An attachment locking portion 716 for attaching the full tank branching unit 770 to the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 has a relief hole 717 for letting out a payout motor 744 and the like that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b and projects forward from the prize ball device 740, and the like. And a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Although the detailed description is omitted, the mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the winning ball tank 720, the winning ball device 740, etc., or mounting to the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned on the winning ball base 710. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top opened, and is a bottom wall portion that is substantially rectangular in plan view. 721, an outer peripheral wall portion 722 that rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 and has only a right rear portion (open side rear portion) that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 710 in a rectangular shape in plan view, and an outer peripheral wall portion A discharge port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side in 722 and a plate-like shape from the left side (axial support side) in plan view of the discharge port 723 to the left end of the prize ball tank 720 , A rod-shaped shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower left side in plan view of the flange portion 724, a baseball tank formed near the proximal end of the shaft portion 725 and at both front ends of the outer peripheral wall 722. 720 in the prize ball base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by an outer peripheral wall portion 722 so that a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. The prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  The prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the spherical leveling member 727 is supported at one end side by a shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side is suspended by its own weight. . The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, so that game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. In addition, the collar portion 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that the game ball can be prevented from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lowered toward the right side in plan view, The right side (the side close to the discharge port 723) in plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. Thereby, the flow of the game ball can be made smooth, and the occurrence of the ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720 can be suppressed, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game balls can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and extending in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl shape with a predetermined depth with the upper part open, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two lines in the front-rear direction. The bottom is inclined so as to be low. The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) that opens downward at the left (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b that extends upward from the bottom at a substantially center in the front-rear direction, and a front end lower surface And a plurality of locking protrusions 731c (see FIG. 74) that protrude downward and are locked to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710 from above.

  The tank rail 731 has an end on the right side (open side) when viewed from the front, which is positioned immediately below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 After receiving, it rolls to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the winning ball base 710 by locking the locking protrusion 731 c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the winning ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 when viewed from the front. A ball retainer plate 734 that closes the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stop piece that can be moved forward and backward in the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. 735, and a grounding plate 736 that is disposed in the tank rail 731 and that can contact a game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731 b of the tank rail 731. The ball retainer plate 734 includes an attachment portion 734a to which a ball stop piece 735 is attached at an upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and into which the protruding piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 can be inserted.

  In this tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported on the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above into the upstream side (open side) of the ball presser plate 734. The game balls discharged from the outlet 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. The ball retainer plate 734 is for forcibly making the game balls that have not become one step by the ball leveling member 727, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 narrows toward the discharge port 731a. It is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As shown in the drawing, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game balls that have flowed down the tank rail 731 flow down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls aligned in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. To the device 740.

  A narrow groove penetrating vertically is formed at the bottom of the tank rail 731 so that foreign matters such as dust rolling along with the game ball in the tank rail 731 fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. The ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not shown in detail, but is grounded to the outside via the grounding metal fitting 782 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 851. The game ball comes into contact with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731 so that the charged static electricity can be removed.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the attachment portion 734a of the ball retainer plate 734, and the protrusion 735a of the ball stop piece 735 passes through the slit 734a in the tank rail 730. , The two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the protruding piece 735a, and the supply of game balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. Yes.

  Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the state of a game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Is. As shown in FIGS. 77 to 79, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the drawing, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is provided on the rear surface side with a supply passage that opens to the upper end and extends to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and has a space of a predetermined width, and communicates with a lower left side (open side) lower end of the distribution space 741b and bends substantially in a letter shape when viewed from the rear. A prize ball passage 741c that opens to the left side surface and a ball extraction passage 741d that communicates with the lower right side (axial support side) bottom of the distribution space 741b and extends downward and open to the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 that is shorter in the vertical direction than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742. A plate 743, a discharge motor 744 disposed on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotation shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and a rotation shaft 744a of the discharge motor 744 are integrated. A first gear 745 that is rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, a second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. A third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and a payout circuit that rotates together with the third gear 747 and is disposed in the distribution space 741c of the unit base 741. The body 748 and the payout rotating body 748 are fixed to the opposite side so as to be integrally rotatable with the third gear 747 interposed therebetween, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. 749.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of game balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 that is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. A sensor board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball break switch 750, a counting sensor 751, and a prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. I have.

  Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749). ), And a gear cover 756 that covers the sensor substrate 753 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 interposed therebetween, and a supply passage ground that can contact a game ball that circulates in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741 The metal fitting 757, the screw 744 for fixing the payout motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween, and the back cover 742 are detachably supported with respect to the unit base 741. A detachable button 759.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example has a rear cover 742 attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened at the rear end. Is supposed to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a is once bulged rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be reduced. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially cut out at one side (left side in the rear view) of the lower side of the supply passage 741a from the position bulged rearward and outside the position where the supply passage 741a is cut out. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball break switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a front and rear direction penetrating below the prize ball passage 741a. A motor insertion hole 741g that is formed and into which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball break switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball break switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the playing ball, the presence or absence of the playing ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the cut ball switch 741e. In a state where the game ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball break switch 741e (out of ball state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and it is determined that the ball is out of the player or the hall. It is notified to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for pivotally supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (dispensing rotary body 748), and between the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. An earth metal fitting attaching portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth metal fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j for supporting an attaching / detaching button 759 for attaching / detaching and supporting the back cover 742 arranged on the upper portion of the unit base 741. I have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage ground metal fitting 757 to the ground metal fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply path grounding metal fitting 757 is in contact with the rear surface of the lower end of the U-shaped earthing metal fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game balls flowing through the supply path 741 a is removed via the supply path grounding metal fitting 757. Can be done.

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape, and its upper end bulges backward. The upper part of the back cover 742 has a button insertion hole 742a through which the detachable button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and the relay board mounting. The sensor board attaching part 742c which is arrange | positioned under the part 742b for attaching the sensor board 753, and the through-hole 742d which the paying-off | rotation body 748 can pass are provided. The relay board mounting portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located on the rear side of the ground metal mounting portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  In addition, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and comes into contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744, and generates heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to facilitate heat dissipation.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotator 748 of the prize ball device 740 includes three recesses 748a each having a size that can accommodate one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are stored one by one in the recess 748a and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d. The three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotate integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the spaces between the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

  The prize ball device 740 of the present example has a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a loan command from the CR unit 6 or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or a ball removal switch 860b is operated. 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotation shaft 744 a of the payout motor 744 is driven to rotate, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotation shaft 744 a rotates, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 rotates, and further the second gear 746. Is rotated. The third gear 747 has a payout rotator 748 on the front side and a rotation detection board 749 on the rear side so as to be able to rotate integrally therewith. It is designed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, a payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at the approximate center of the distribution space 741b. When the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotator 748 is rotated clockwise by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball removal passage 741d. The game balls paid out to the side of the ball extraction passage 741d are discharged from the lower end of the ball extraction passage 741d into a ball extraction passage 778 of a full tank sorting unit 770 described later, a main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and a substrate unit. It can be discharged to the outside outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 at 800.

  Note that the unit base 741 in the prize ball apparatus 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled in the main body frame 3, the award is given from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d and the like of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and a defect such as a ball clogging can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75, and 79. FIG. The full tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710 and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball path 741c side of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. In addition, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game ball can be distributed to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 so as to be paid out.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is fixed to the rear surface of the lower end of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the latching part 770a latched to the attachment latching part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially upper center in the front-rear direction. Fixing portion 770b. The full tank branching unit 770 is suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branching unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at a substantially horizontal center in the upper part of the rear end. A prize ball receiving port 771 for receiving a game ball flowing down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710 and a branch space 772 arranged below the prize ball receiving port 771 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79). And a normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving port 771 to the front side in the branch space 772, and a game ball that has circulated through the normal passage 773 forward and the front end of the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and a full passage 775 (see FIG. 79) that guides the game ball toward the front side from a position on the right side of the rear view rather than just below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772. A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Further, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that opens upward at the left end of the rear end upper part when viewed from the front and receives the game ball flowing down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, A ball extraction passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball received at the opening 777 to the front side, and a game ball flowing through the ball extraction passage 778 is discharged forward, and a normal ball outlet 774 and And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position behind the full tank outlet 776.

  When the full tank branching unit 770 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are respectively the first foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and communicates with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 and discharged from the full tank outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. The ball outlet 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right side of the main body frame base ball outlet passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 so that the game ball released from the ball outlet 779 is released from the main body frame base 600. It is delivered to the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622.

  The full tank branching unit 770 is configured such that a game ball delivered to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 is received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged immediately below the prize ball receiving port 771. The game ball that has flowed into the normal passage 773 enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 from the normal outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and passes through the first ball outlet 544a to the top of the dish unit 300. It will be supplied to the plate 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (the prize ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 is full of game balls, the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540 is provided. The game balls that can no longer come out from the 544a toward the upper plate 301 stagnate in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 and eventually fill up the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branching unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, starts to move laterally in the branch space 772, and moves laterally. A game ball enters into the full tank passage 775 and passes from the full tank exit 776 to the bottom of the dish unit 300 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  The full tank branch unit 770 of the present example is formed entirely of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and debris that has entered the full tank branch unit 770, the occurrence of clogging, etc. can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  In this way, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example automatically plays the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 until the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 until the game balls are full. Since the upper plate is full like the conventional pachinko machine, the game ball is not supplied to the ball hitting device by operating the ball pulling button on the upper plate. It is possible to avoid interruption of game ball driving, and it is possible to eliminate the annoyance during the game and suppress the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the path of the game ball to be paid out immediately below the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear part of the pachinko machine 1, when the upper plate 301 becomes full. Since the game ball staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branching unit 770 is paid out to the upper plate 301, the game ball in the upper plate 301 and the game ball in the normal passage 773 are used as a ball hitting device. A game ball that can be directly struck by 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as in the conventional case are stored in the upper plate 301. Can do. Accordingly, by reducing the size of the upper plate 301, the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 can be relatively enlarged (widened), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider gaming area 1100 can be obtained. The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the player, and the player can be entertained by the wide game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank ball outlets 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right sides, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (the first inlet) Even when there is only one ball inlet 542a and second ball inlet 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be able to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branching unit 770) in the main body frame 3. And it can suppress that the cost concerning the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 from which the number of storage dishes differs is increased.

  In addition, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 is achieved. Thus, various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, a game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray. Even if it is exchanged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player due to a lack of game balls for driving, and to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays. .

  In addition, as long as the upper plate 301 is not full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to devote the player to a game ball driving operation and the like, and to suppress the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  Even if the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 are arranged side by side and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray, the first sphere The position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the inlet 542a and the like can be set to the same height as the first ball inlet 542a and the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates. It becomes possible to avoid the depth becoming shallower, the storage tray can be deepened to secure a sufficient amount of game balls, and the game can be played without frequently worrying about the amount of storage for the player. Can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 and the like increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branching unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with game balls. Even if the game ball can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball exit 774 to the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. The amount of substantial game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be increased as much as possible. In addition, in the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray becomes full of game balls and the game balls can no longer come out from the normal ball exit 773 or the full tank exit 776, Since the position where the full tank path 775 branches from the normal path 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are provided not only in the normal path 773 but also in the full tank path 775. Can be stored, and the substantial amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage trays provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branching unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be increased to a limit and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

  In addition, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to allow game balls to circulate in a plurality of rows, and the stopping amount (reserved amount) of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 is Since it can be increased, even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to prevent the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770 from decreasing. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3 can be obtained.

  Moreover, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. In this case, it is possible to easily find the place where the ball is clogged from the outside of the full tank branching unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem at an early stage and increase the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3E. Ball exit opening / closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to an attachment portion 624 formed in the vicinity of the upper left end of the main body frame base 600 in the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 moves to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of game balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 slidably held on the shutter base 791, an opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the up-down direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 ascending through the opening / closing crank 793. And an open / close spring 794 for urging.

  The shutter base 791 of the bulb outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a pair of slide grooves 791a extending in the vertical direction for holding the open / close shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to protrude upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates between the pair of slide grooves 791a in the front-rear direction, and a crank that is disposed in front of the left end portion in front view and supports the open / close crank 793 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side of the opening 791b in front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in front view.

  The opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a flat shutter body 792a and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that protrude from the front surface of the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. , And a horizontally elongated drive hole 792b that is disposed at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrates in the front-rear direction.

  Furthermore, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a shaft portion 793a that is supported by a crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 so as to be rotatable about a shaft extending in the front-rear direction, and a right-side outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a. From the front end of the opening 791b and projecting rearward from the front end of the driving lever 793b and slidably inserted into the driving hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. A driving pin 793c, a contact portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery on the lower side in front view of the shaft portion 793a, and a spherical shape at the tip, and the other end (lower end) of the open / close spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the driving rod 793b. And a spring locking portion 793e for locking.

  In this example, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is configured such that the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792 even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised. The normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 in the full tank branching unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the driving pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in an up-down direction in an arc shape by rotating the opening / closing crank 793 around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and at the same time, the driving pin 793c. The open / close shutter 792 is slid in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which is inserted. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is in contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542 g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c rotates in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal sphere outlet 774 and the full sphere outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branching unit 770 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 on the door frame 5 is released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised to close the normal bulb outlet 774 and the full bulb exit 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. Be able to.

  As described above, in response to opening / closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically switches the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. Can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 89. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as seen from the exploded position. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. 88A is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88B is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as seen from the front. FIG. 89A is a front view of the launch power supply board box, and FIG. 89B is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

  The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the rear left side of the board unit base 810, and a board unit base. Of the power supply board box 830 attached to the rear face of the right end of the front view 810, the power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear face of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the fired power supply board box 830 from the rear side, and A power supply board box 850 that is attached to the rear face and has a rear end that is substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear face of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end portion of the front view of 860, and a main-side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral-side relay terminal board 882 attached to the front face of the board unit base 810. I have.

  As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of the present example is configured to extend in the left-right direction, and the substantially central portion in the left-right direction is stepped downward and gradually tilted upward as it goes to the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding forward from the front surface, an opening portion 812 that is disposed above the position of the shielding wall portion 811 that is one step lower in the center in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the lower side of the shielding wall portion 811 And a board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, which is formed on the front surface in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and a rectangular shape that is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813 when viewed from the front. A plurality of vertically long slits penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the penetrating cylindrical duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface. A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  The board unit base 810 is formed such that the shielding wall portion 811 is along the lower side of the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The game ball can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the board unit base 810 can be increased. Further, the board base unit 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. Be able to.

  The board unit base 810 has a board mounting portion 813 for attaching the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. In the state where the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are located on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It comes to face. Further, the board unit base 810 can transmit sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side satisfactorily by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Further, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box housing portion 816 is disposed on the rear side. The box housing portion 816 and the front box housing portion 843 are formed. Thus, a housing recess for housing the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 is literally provided with a speaker 821 attached facing the front side. The speaker box 820 has a horizontally elongated opening 822 formed on the left side of the speaker 821 when viewed from the front, while covering the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner. Although not shown in detail, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby inverting the phase of the sound behind the speaker 821 and moving forward. The bass-reflex type speaker box is capable of emitting a deep bass to the diameter of the speaker 821. Note that the duct portion 814 in the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that sound radiated from the opening 822 can be transmitted well forward. ing.

  The launch power supply board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and includes a launch power supply board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. This launching power supply board box 830 accommodates various electronic components attached to the launching power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic parts etc. through slits 830a formed on the upper and lower surfaces. Can be released to the outside.

  This launching power supply board box 830 is detached from above in an accommodation recess opened upward by a box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box accommodation part 844 of a power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as possible. Thus, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the launch power supply board box 830, the launch power supply board box 830 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 to be replaced or repaired. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply board 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 and driven. This launching power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat radiation holes on its upper and lower surfaces in order to release heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the launching power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

  In addition, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the launch power supply board box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is provided as a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, the launching power supply board box 830 has a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom surface to the end opening edge. Thus, when the launch power supply board 831 is attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830 and the interior space of the launch power supply board box 830 is closed, the interior space of the launch power supply board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Two spaces, an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, and an accommodation space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are formed. , Functioning as a heat insulating wall that blocks heat from entering and exiting the housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a.

  The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is a slit as a heat radiation hole formed in each of the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicates the accommodation space 830c with the outside air. By being discharged to the outside via 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is a heat radiation hole formed in the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d with the outside air, respectively. As a result, the released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating a combined current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 are not provided on the power board 851, but are fired separately from the power board 851. By providing the power supply board 831, the size of the launch power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, it becomes easy to handle by reducing the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 and the replacement work of the launch power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, which contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement operation, the launch power supply board box 830 can be exchanged in a state where the launch power supply board 831 remains attached to the end opening of the launch power supply board box 830, that is, the launch power supply board box 830.

  Further, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life and the driving firing by the launching solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to launch and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the launching power supply board 831 is not performed. By being able to do easily, the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 very easily, and it is possible to resolve the interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing at an early stage and resume the game, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of life due to repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed. On the other hand, the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of an island facility such as a game hall, but is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the launch power supply board 831. Compared with the launch power supply substrate 831, its lifetime is extremely long. In other words, the fired power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration associated with charging / discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, while the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to secular change. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the launch power supply board 831 separate from the power supply board 851. Thus, electronic components accompanying long-term aging can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent the electronic component accompanying a long-life change over time from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the hitting ball launching device 650 can be detached from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, it has a capacity for changing the driving characteristics. Even if an attempt is made to change the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to a different one, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to remove the launch power board 831 and it is difficult to replace the launch power board 831. It is possible to prevent fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the driving strength of the launch power supply substrate 831 that has been tampered with and optimized, and to make fraud difficult. A pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into a fraud such as a fraudulent act can be provided.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 can be exchanged so as to be removable, even if an unauthorized operation is performed on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launch power supply board 831, the launch power supply board 831 can be replaced immediately and the unauthorized use can be made. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game of the player.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch controller 4120 that controls the hitting ball launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 holding the game board 4. When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change or the like, the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. Replacing the launching power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a capable of realizing the driving characteristics makes it possible to change the driving characteristics of the hitting ball launcher 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 to a new game. It can be matched to board 4. Therefore, it is possible to easily match the driving characteristics of the game ball with the concept of the game board 4, so that the game with the new model of the game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the interest of the player is reduced. can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply board 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as a game hall, It is possible to simplify the time and labor required for exchange, and it is possible to exchange in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) can be exchanged so as to be removable, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire launch control unit 4120 (dispensing control board 4110) is exchanged. Cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hall side or the like can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 can be used as they are. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the launching power supply board 831 deteriorates, as described above, the launching power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side. The problem can be resolved, the game interruption period can be shortened as much as possible, and it is possible to quickly eliminate irritation and disappointment due to the game interruption. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, the launch power board 831 (launch power board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the launch power board 831 is held in the game board holding port 601 for detachment. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing an illegal act enters the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the illegal tool reaches the launch power supply board 831 by the game board 4. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented from performing an illegal act on the launch power supply substrate 831 and has a high defense against the illegal act.

  Further, the launch power supply board box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601, and the position where the launch power supply board box 830 is supported is more rearward than the front surface of the main body frame 3. A space for supporting the board box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power board box 830 and exhibits the above-described effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided in the firing power supply board 831. Since the firing power supply board 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load on the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is likely to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, and the malfunction can be solved at an early stage to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 that reliably exhibits the above-described effects can be obtained.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 receives a game ball that is opened upward and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the game board 4 to the lower left side of the left and right center in front view. A discharge ball receiving portion 841, a discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box housing portion 843 that is open forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the launch power board box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power board box holder 840 are formed so as to be recessed forward. A rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  In the power supply board box holder 840, the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is located at a desired position to the discharge passage 842. The rear side of the substrate unit base 810 passes through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810 through the main body frame base ball passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described in detail later, pass through the discharge passage 842 to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1. Can be discharged.

  The power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation part 816 of the board unit base 810, and the box accommodation part 816 and the front box accommodation part 843 accommodate the emission power supply board box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the front open, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally transfers heat from the electronic parts and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released. As shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

  The power supply board box 850 is a standing wall that protrudes rearward along the lower side of the opening where the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) attached to the lower side of the power switch 852 in the power supply board 851 faces the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c projecting rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 disposed on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a large gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking piece to be locked with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. And the connector terminal 855 is prevented from being detached from the power supply terminal 853.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the power board box 850 has a standing wall 850b slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851. It is formed so as to protrude. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is turned from the lower front side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear end so as to be hooked to the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. A terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, when the connector terminal where the wiring cord extends is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board, and then the wiring cord is pulled to the board side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension from the wiring cord. Since it is in a state of being pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the front end side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even when pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed around the connector terminal 855 so as to be turned back (turned back) from the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent a force from pressing the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 includes the protruding portions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, The protrusions 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back by the standing wall portion 850b can be moved toward the standing wall portion 850b, so that the wiring cord 854 is drawn from the standing wall portion 850b. Since the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b and the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d, a series of operations are continuously performed. This can be performed, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

  The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820. When attached, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush with each other.

  Further, in this example, the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851, and then the connector is connected by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is connected to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. The connector terminal 855 can be prevented from being disconnected by the wiring cord 854 and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power terminal 853 of the power board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed, and maintenance such as substrate replacement can be easily performed.

  Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where there is no standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a failure.

  Further, a standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the standing wall portion 850b is positioned adjacent to the power supply terminal 853. The wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 can be extended to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a force from acting and to prevent problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the standing wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the power supply board 851 with the standing wall portion 850b, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, dust and dirt that cause a failure can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 851 and mounted on the power supply board 851. It is possible to make it difficult to touch or replace electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) and to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  In addition, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 in the power supply board 851 is substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-rear direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or removing the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, it is possible to prevent the shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853. Can be prevented from being energized and causing a failure of energization or the power supply terminal 853 being detached from the power supply board 851, and the pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction can be obtained.

  Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means using the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b so that the wiring cord 854 is Even if a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in such a direction as to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. Connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization.

  Further, since the projections 850c projecting rearward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the projection 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can be prevented from coming off the standing wall 850b. The pachinko machine 1 that reliably prevents the above-described effects can be realized.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b is moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 is not easily detached from the standing wall portion 850b. In addition, the above-described effects can be surely achieved, and the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost.

  Also, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and opened rearward, and a thin box-shaped cover that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and opened forward. 862 and a dispensing control board 4110 (see FIG. 168) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separation cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in the rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862, and are provided at one location of the plurality of separation cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 must be cut so that the box base 861 and the cover 862 cannot be separated. When the dispensing control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been opened and closed illegally. In this example, the dispensing control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  The payout control board box 860 is configured such that an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, and the like attached to the payout control board 4110 face rearward through a cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). The payout control board box 860 has various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like facing rearward through the cover 862.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and includes a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side in the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface on the right end in the rear view. The board base 871 is provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 is attached to the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a is attached to the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871 A connection terminal plate cover 873 having an opening portion 873b that is attached from the rear side and extends in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a that faces rearward from the opening portion 873a of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. CR unit connection terminal plate 8 supported in the connected terminal plate cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting a ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. Note that the board base 871, the connection terminal board cover 873, and the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 are each formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and externally connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside. The plate 874 and the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, when a defect such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator or the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side is displayed. The displayed status display sticker 876 is pasted.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the board base 871 in the terminal board box 870 has a board mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with the rear end opened. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a and a fixing piece (not shown) for fixing the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and is formed on the inner lower portion of the substrate mounting portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  The substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape in which the substrate cover mounting portion 871b is opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is set such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. In addition, the inner peripheral wall is an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b and a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side in the rear view in the left-right direction, and contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided on the left outer side in back view of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b. The protrusion 871e on the substrate base 871 is in a state in which the amount of backward protrusion is slightly less than that of the outer piece 871c, and as much as possible on both side ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in the figure. It is arrange | positioned so that it may become a position near.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear right side rear surface of the substrate cover mounting portion 871b so as to be vertically separated from each other, and a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875, and a left end in the rear view. And a rectangular tube-shaped locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall portion 873a for closing the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, a rectangular opening portion 873b penetrating the rear wall portion 873a and extending in the vertical direction, and a rear wall portion substantially along the inner periphery of the opening portion 873b An inner wall portion 873d extending forward (from the substrate base 871) from 873a, and the upper and lower outer wall portions holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 so that the front end of the inner wall portion 873d contacts the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873e formed in 873c.

  Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating through the rear wall portion 873a, and an approximately vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is opened on the left side when viewed from the back side, and extends outward (rightward) from the right side end when viewed from the back side of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing hole 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c when viewed from the back and can be locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. A pawl piece 873i. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the inner wall part 873d extended ahead also in the upper and lower sides of the inner periphery in the center opening part 873f provided with the protection part 873g is formed.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by an outer wall portion 873c and a rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is configured to restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 rearward by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. In addition, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 from moving forward, and thus the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be detachably held. It has become. Further, the connecting terminal plate cover 873 is inserted into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 after the fixing piece 873h is inserted, and then the locking claw piece 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. The base 871 can be detachably attached to the board cover attaching portion 871b.

  The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front side (rear side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. Yes.

  Further, the board box cover 875 in the terminal board box 870 is formed in a thin box shape that covers the entire rear surface of the board base 871 and is opened to the front side, and is disposed on the right side surface as viewed from the rear side. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 871g, a through-hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873, penetrating in the front-rear direction, and forward from both left and right ends of the through-hole 875b And a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

  The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a on the bearing part 871g of the board base 871. Yes. Further, the board box cover 875 has a length in which a wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (side supported) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and a wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length 875c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective barrier walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surfaces of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It is like that.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so that it can be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

  As shown in FIG. 88, the terminal board box 870 of this example has an outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and a board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece 871c of the connecting terminal plate cover 874 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connecting terminal plate 874 are the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the shaft portion 875a of the board box cover 875. Since the barrier wall 875c on the side exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized tool having excellent flexibility is to be inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary, and the CR unit connection terminal It is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and to reliably prevent an illegal act on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the terminal board box 870 has a CR unit attached as a CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed between the connection terminal plate 874 and the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, illegal acts can be prevented. It is like that.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through-hole 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a to the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. A barrier wall 875c having a length in between is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the gap from being formed. It can be made expensive.

  Further, the terminal board box 870 of this example is configured so that the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, an illegal act of inserting a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord in a state where the connection terminal on the wiring cord side is fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b that is a two-piece connector. However, the protection part 873g and the board box cover 875 can prevent the insertion of the electrode, and can also prevent an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b.

  Thus, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are attached from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted through a gap between the front and back of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the accommodated CR unit connection terminal plate 874 even if the distal end of the unauthorized tool is inserted. It is possible to prevent illegal acts against the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 with certainty.

  When the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 are arranged in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the barrier wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier wall is formed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 has a meandering crank shape. In an analogy, an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility tries to enter between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary). However, the tool does not bend along the boundary, and it is possible to reliably prevent an unauthorized tool from entering from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 has a CR The pachinko machine 1 that can reliably prevent an illegal act on the unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b can be obtained.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed between the substrate as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and illegal acts can be surely prevented.

  Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so that the rear surface of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be opened and closed, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 is opened. And a board box cover 875 having a plate-like barrier wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the pivotally supported side of the through-hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the portions of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the substrate base 871 to form a gap to allow an unauthorized tool to enter, an unauthorized tool is connected to the connection terminal by the barrier 875c. Reaching to the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) side can be prevented, and illegal acts can be prevented. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection box board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be increased by the barrier 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 is formed. Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to perform fraud and making it highly deterrent.

  Furthermore, even if an unauthorized act of inserting the needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attempted, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective part 873g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 The needle-like electrode cannot be inserted from the (rear side) into the gap of the connector body, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed on the terminals of the connected wiring cord. Can be.

  In addition, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with a substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side from the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even when a screwdriver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform an illegal act, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves rearward together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). The CR unit connection terminal on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal board box 870 is formed of a transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be viewed from the outside without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Whether an unauthorized tool is inserted into the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 accommodated therein, or the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 itself is not replaced with an unauthorized one. Or, it is possible to easily check whether electronic parts (for example, ROM, IC, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 have been replaced with unauthorized ones. , It can make it easier to detect fraud, and it also makes it easier to find fraud. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 5 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, When the main body frame 5 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are directed to the worker side (player side), and the CR The unit connection terminal plate 874 and the terminal board box 870 can be easily inspected.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 in the board unit 800 include a peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, etc. 5 for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main-side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral-side relay terminal plate 882 include a plurality of connection terminals for connection to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

  The main side relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIGS. In addition, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring cord 196 is connected to these connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a remaining loan display portion 363, and a rotational position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. 512, the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank detection sensor 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the connection of the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side is relayed. Further, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 is attached to each decoration unit 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each decoration board 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 or the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. Dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided
And the connection with the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3G. Back cover]
Next, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. 90A is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 90B is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as seen from the rear side. The back cover 900 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. . The back cover 900 has a plate-like main body portion 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body portion 902, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of juxtaposed vertical rows, projecting downward and pivotally supported by the back cover pivotal support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper left and lower sides of the main body 902 when viewed from the front. An engagement piece 908 that engages with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780 respectively, and the back cover 900 is placed in the vicinity of the lower engagement piece 908. 3 is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in a non-openable / closable manner.

  The fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction to the left in the rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body 902 of the back cover 900, as shown in FIGS. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a strip 923a on one end side and a horizontally long slot 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and inserted into the slot 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. Note that the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked in a loosely fitted state with respect to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. You can play with. Further, the fastening mechanism 920 is in a state in which the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. It can be slid in the left-right direction and is not dropped from the long hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, the fastening mechanism 920 has a fastening member 924 that protrudes forward through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 of this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pin 906 on the back cover shaft supporting portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engagement pieces 908 with the main body frame base 600 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, the engagement pieces 908 can be closed. Note that when the back cover 900 is in a closed state, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially aligned.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male thread portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even if the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923b of the guide member 923 locked to the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. A state of being positioned on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b and rotating the fastening member 924 from this state, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screwed). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. It should be noted that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example allows the fastening member 924 to be fastened even when the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is inclined with respect to the main body portion 902 when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male thread portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily moved to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by a single fastening mechanism 920, so that it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating one fastening member 924. The maintenance work can be improved by simplifying the labor involved in opening and closing the back cover 900.

  The back cover 900 includes a connection notch 910 that is cut upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 when viewed from the front, and a confirmation opening that passes through the connection notch 910 in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 that is cut out in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, through the connection cutout portion 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, and the like. Comes to the rear. Further, the back cover 900 has a confirmation opening portion 912 through which a board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the notch part 914. Thereby, even if the back cover 900 is not opened with respect to the main body frame 3, it is possible to perform operation confirmation, appearance confirmation, management state confirmation, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100.

  The back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated in the main body 902 and the side portion 904, and heat generated in the game board 4 and the like through the slits 916 is generated in the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged outside the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through-holes 918 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and extend in the up-down direction at a position slightly to the left in front view from the center. These through holes 918 are in a state where the back cover 900 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 is accommodated and held in the main body frame 3, and the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located on the rear side of the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the apparatus so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted satisfactorily. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Accordingly, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is fixed to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. When the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 and maintenance of the rear side of the game board 4 is performed. Even if the fastening of the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 remains the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left in the pachinko machine 1 from being attached to the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the opened back cover 900, so that it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. Further, it can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  In addition, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined with respect to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is reliably in a correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be securely fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Further, since the holding member 925 that holds the fastening member 924 in a freely movable manner with respect to the guide member 923 in cooperation with the head of the fastening member 924 is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is provided. The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming out of the elongated hole 923 b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented. The fastening member 924 can be held movably with respect to the guide member 923 by the gap and the long hole 923b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating a holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When the fastening hole 780b is fastened, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be housed in the housing recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. Thus, the protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. Can improve the appearance.

  Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female threaded portion and is screw-coupled with the male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened only by pulling compared to engagement by a simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 with high deterrence against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 relative to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is easily positioned at a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, and the male screw portion 924 is easily moved straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 770b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  In addition, in the state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900, the locking port Since it is elastically locked to 922, the shaft extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 on the distal end side (the long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably mounted It can be moved so as to rotate around the center, and the locking piece 923 a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the long hole 923b on the distal end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be easily performed.

  Further, a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 to be engaged, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is described. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using only one fastening part using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. Can increase the sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement of the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closed range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 (the rear side of the game board 4) can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

  Further, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover pivot support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600). Therefore, by simply rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction and closing the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily aligned, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 can be opened even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and the back cover 900 is opened during maintenance or the like. It is possible to keep the cover 900 pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side security board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed to the top and bottom near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed to the inside of the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  A main body 952 of the side security plate 950 includes a side plate piece 952a having a length substantially the same as the height of the main body frame base 600 and extending in the vertical direction and having a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a right side when viewed from the front end of the side plate piece 952a. A front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c that is disposed so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protruding amount than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a. And a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right direction of view (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U-shape by a side plate piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. A left side portion in front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  The side security plate 950 of this example is configured such that the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. When the side security plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is connected to the shaft side of the shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped projecting piece 166 and to prevent the insertion of a tool for performing an illegal act between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side when viewed from the front. (See FIG. 106). The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion mold material, and has a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, so that the overall strength of the main body frame 3 can be increased to favorably support the game board 4, the door frame 5, and the like. It has become.

  Thus, according to this example, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed with the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is interposed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side face plate 950. The rear side piece of the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the pivot-side U-shape. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the U-shaped protrusion 166 on the pivotal side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoted U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened. And can be used to perform illegal acts such as opening the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. The body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance in the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. In addition, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, the security side plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (the shaft support side) is formed of metal. Compared with the case where the entire main body frame 3 is made of metal, the cost associated with the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one location between the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041, the open side is illegal such as a bar. Even if the tool is scooped by an easy tool, it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from being spread well, and to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly opened.

  Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a is increased. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the security side plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and it is possible to prevent the crime prevention side plate 950 from being forcibly bent and being cheated. .

  Further, since the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by a metal extrusion mold material, the security side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily obtained. It can be formed, and even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, the increase in cost can be suppressed, and defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are compared with the case where the metal plate is bent. The security side plate 950 can be reduced as much as possible and has high durability and high strength.

[1-3I. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97. FIG. 93A is a left side view of the locking device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the locking device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94A is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94B is a glass door slide rod and a body frame slide rod provided slidably inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device as seen after disassembling, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the glass door sliding rod and the main body frame sliding rod in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front side right side (open side) side of the front end frame part 602 in the main body frame base 600 and a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600 A plurality of lock mounting portions 625 are formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 when viewed from the front.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section, and a door frame that is slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The U-shaped sliding rod 1040, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 cannot be illegally slid. Fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and includes a door frame sliding rod 1040 and a main body frame sliding rod 1050. Are slidably arranged. Note that the U-shaped base 1001 has an extremely thin lateral width as compared to a conventional locking device integrated into a base having an L-shaped cross section. Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the locking device 1000 can be made as thin as possible, and the horizontal dimension of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively increased. 1100 wide game board 4 can be provided.

  The U-shaped base body 1001 is attached in a state in which the open side having a U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600. The open side of the base body 1001 is closed by the main body frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 are formed on the U-shaped substrate 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has a fraud prevention structure in which it is difficult to perform fraudulent acts on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can penetrate vertically on the closed side (front side) opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002, a screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper part and middle of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and a screw fixing part 1003 protrudes forward from the open side (front side) upper and middle portions of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which the projections 1003 are provided, and from the lower ends of the open side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The locking protrusion 1004 is provided.

  Screw fixing portions 1003 and locking protrusions 1004 of the U-shaped base body 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. When the screw locking portion 1003 is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other. By screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3).

  The locking device 1000 is mounted not only on the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003 but also on the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 described later and in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Also, the lock attaching portion 625 is fixed to the main body frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 is also attached.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three locations on the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001 are connected to the upper and lower door hook holes 620 and the locking locking holes. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame base 600 with a very simple structure. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the locking device 1000 is configured by concentrating on the U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the locking device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing of the front side and the rear side of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projection 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) protrudes from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure projects from the side surface 1001b close to the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001 to the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605. The locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to be loose as compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b which is dense with the main body frame 3.

  The U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating left and right in the upper, middle, and lower sides of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are inserted inside the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting and crimping the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 with the body frame sliding rod 1050 stored. Can be slidably mounted in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower portions of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portions of long holes 1055 and 1061 for rivets formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 respectively for the body frame sliding rod 1050. The door frame sliding rod 1040 can be moved upward, and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be moved downward.

  Further, the U-shaped base body 1001 protrudes from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the open-side main body frame base 600 and protrudes laterally. Then, a lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and a relief lateral hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch 1007 of the U-shaped base body 1001 will be described later in detail, but the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is advanced and retracted. Further, the lock mounting piece 1008 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be positioned below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is mounted on the back surface of the main body frame base 600. Projecting from the front end to the side, the lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates and the mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations on the top and bottom. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the screw and a screw stopper 1003 drilled to mount the lower part of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

  The U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 through which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 that urges the second tamper-proof member 1032 upward, and a clearance lateral hole 1022 that forms a clearance hole so as not to obstruct the movement of the connecting pin 1034; It has.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for fixing to a lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of a cylindrical cylinder lock body, and a lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. At the same time, an engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomerang shape, and one end side is a first engagement protrusion 1017 that engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 when rotating. The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating.

  This cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted into a lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and attachment holes 1013 formed at two positions on the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing a screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

  The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base body 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with an official key, but fraudulently for the main body frame with a piano wire, a wire, etc. It is for preventing lowering. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034 as shown in FIG. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is supported by the U-shaped base body 1001 so as to be swingable about the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper-proof member 1023 is positioned together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base body 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 opens vertically in the plate-like surface at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. The protruding piece insertion hole 1026 is provided. The second engagement projection piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the projection piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, so that the door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base body 1001. The raised engagement hole 1045 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely on the outer front side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 so as to be able to contact the rear surface side of the first engaging protruding piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 is rotated. The inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging protrusion 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from an obliquely lower lower side of the protruding piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. A regulation protrusion 1031 that protrudes downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 that pass through the front side of the regulation protrusion 1031 in the left-right direction and are arranged vertically. The stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066 of the main body frame slide rod 1050 when the main body frame slide rod 1050 is locked. Thus, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding illegally. Further, the restricting protruding piece 1031 of the first fraud preventing member 1023 abuts on the second fraud preventing member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud preventing member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). The movement can be restricted.

  Further, the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is configured such that the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 by engaging with a horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is for connecting the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 in a pivotable manner by a connecting pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted “te” -shaped plate material, and has a connection hole 1033 at one upper end and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other upper end. And a contact portion 1037 at the lower end. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base body 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutting portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-like member. The door sliding rod 1040 includes door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding rod 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001 in a state where the door sliding rod 1040 is housed in the U-shaped substrate 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from a door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the cover. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape as shown in the figure, and thereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are lifted by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  Also, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed in the center of the upper, middle, and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, below the uppermost rivet slot 1042, and for the door frame. A guide protrusion 1043 protruding in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided at the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040. In the rivet slot 1042 of the door sliding rod 1040, a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base body 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is inserted into the door frame sliding rod. It is formed in a vertically long shape so as not to interfere with the upward movement of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted such that the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding rod 1050. Thus, the sliding movement between the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be guided.

  In addition, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the door frame sliding is performed by the spring 1048. The collar 1040 is biased downward, and the main body frame sliding collar 1050 is biased mutually upward. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is stamped from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 is configured to contact the inner surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be prevented from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is like that.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is provided at the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 so as not to obstruct the rotation of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. This constitutes a space in which the part can move. Further, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the rising engagement hole 1045 and rotated, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised by the rotation operation of the engagement cam 1016. It is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is notched larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007 at the lower rear of the vertical side. This escape notch 1049 is obstructed by the door frame sliding rod 1040 so that the stopper piece 1027 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 is securely engaged with the tamper-proof notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066. The corresponding part is notched so as not to become.

  On the other hand, the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, a connecting wire rod 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, It has. That is, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is not formed of a single vertically long metal plate as in the prior art, and the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by pressing, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a long rivet hole 1055 penetrating in a horizontal direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054. , A protruding piece moving hole 1056 that passes through the rivet long hole 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the protruding piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact hole 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the upper part on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward.

  Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040. In a normal state in which the rivet 1006 has penetrated, the rivet 1006 has penetrated the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1055 so that the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The upper hook member 1051 has a protruding piece moving hole 1056 into which the guide protruding piece 1043 above the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted. The mutual movement with 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the other end of the spring 1048 is locked. Further, the connection hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted with the upper end of the connection wire rod 1053 bent. Further, the abutting portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base body 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base body 1001. There is no backlash and it can slide smoothly.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is for the rivet penetrating in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion. A long hole 1061, a downward engagement hole 1062 arranged below the long hole 1061 for rivets, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a lower part of the free hole 1063 A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 drilled in the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. A joint notch portion 1066 and a contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 passes through the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped base body 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. A locking claw is formed upward. The rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 has a rivet. In a normal state in which 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet long hole 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  Further, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. It is for engaging. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 has a second engagement protrusion 1018 so as not to obstruct the rotation operation when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a space in which the distal end portion of the can move. Further, the guide piece 1043 below the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the protruding piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding plate are inserted. The mutual movement with the palpit 1050 can be guided.

  The lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be smoothly slid without play.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described. To assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are connected by a connecting wire rod 1053, and the guide projection of the door frame sliding rod 1040 in that state is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the protruding piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet elongated holes 1042 and the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped. In the combined state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base body 1001, and the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame slide are inserted. After inserting the pallet 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

  When the rivet 1006 is inserted, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to pass through the rivet long holes 1055, 1061, 1042. When the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first tamper-proof member 1023 and attach the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001 at the same time. Further, before attaching the first tamper-proof member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 are coupled by the coupling pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is coupled to the pin hole. It is necessary to insert the guide pin 1028 into the opening at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after it is fixed at 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the rivet 1006, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001, and the spring 1048 is spanned between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, The frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are biased in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the distal end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  In order to attach the assembled locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While being inserted, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a bowl shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in this state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is provided. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking protrusion 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a that does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001b that contacts the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base body 1001, the front locking structure contacts the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where it is formed on the side surface 1001b, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to be loose.

  Next, the operation of the locking device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. Further, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are locked, and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the door frame 5 The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 to depress the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and is connected thereto. The connected connecting rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locking state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are lifted by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lifted position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). , 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, so that the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1054, 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24, 25 by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2. Since it contacts the lower end, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 descends downward, and the upward claw portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again, thereby sliding the main body frame. The hook 1050 is raised and returned to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 rotates in a direction to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The front end of the two engaging protrusions 1018 engages with the ascending engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 and pushes the door frame sliding rod 1040 upwardly against the urging force of the spring 1048. For this reason, the hook state 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. The main frame 3 can be opened.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as in the state shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook part 1041 for the door is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined part of the hook part 1041 for the door frame is hooked to the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised upward, and the downward claw portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 165 are re-engaged with each other. The pail 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 according to the present embodiment is formed to have a length substantially the same as the full length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 that is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three locations of the upper end portion, the center portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the entire length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire from the inside. The act cannot be performed.

  Thus, the locking device 1000 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment releases the locking of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and in the other direction. The door frame 5 can be unlocked with respect to the main body frame 3 by rotating. Further, the locking device 1000 of this example performs an illegal act of hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and lowering it without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped base 1001. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are accommodated in the closed space.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97A, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact It has become a state. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is rotated counterclockwise by the biasing force of the spring 1035 so that the stopper piece 1027 enters the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the stopper piece 1027 is intrusion prevention notch. The main body frame sliding rod 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged with an engagement notch 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052. As a result, even if the piano frame or the like is hooked onto the main body frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged. Unauthorized pulling down (unlocking) becomes impossible, and an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3 cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is properly unlocked by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010, the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key as shown in FIG. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other. The stopper piece 1027 starts to rotate around the angle 1025 in the clockwise direction shown in the figure, and also moves so as to be retracted from the tamper-proof notch 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. When the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated in this state and the first engagement protrusion 1017 is also rotated, the tip of the first engagement protrusion 1017 is engaged with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire body frame sliding rod 1050 is lowered, the hooked state of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. Can be done.

  Note that when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the restriction protrusion 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 contact from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. In the present embodiment, the first tamper-proof member 1023 and the second tamper-proof member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main body frame sliding rod 1050 from being illegally performed. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened improperly, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after being released, and the illegal act of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like is practically difficult to perform. For this reason, it has been devised to prevent unauthorized operation of the body frame sliding rod 1050.

  Even in the lock mechanism that is the first tamper-proof structure described above, it is impossible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first tamper-proof member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the internal The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided in the housing are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, and are completely covered. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to pull down the body frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire or the like, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 Since the intruder is prevented from entering the closed space, the structure is such that it is not possible to easily perform the illegal act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame in the inside of the U-shaped base 1001 whose width is extremely thin as compared with the conventional lock device concentrated on the L-shaped base. The body frame sliding rod 1050 is slidably provided and the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the locking device 1000 is attached to the U-shaped base 1001 at a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, the lock device 1000 is placed on the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be attached firmly.

  Moreover, since the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame 3, in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered by the U-shaped base body 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is not possible to easily perform an illegal act such as pulling down a main body frame sliding rod 1050 provided by inserting a piano wire or the like.

  Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle, and lower three positions on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower portions of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. With this structure, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600).

  In the locking device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for fixing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 with screws. Although the structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, instead of this, a screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is attached to the lock. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole penetrated through the piece 1008 on the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock penetration hole 611. Even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the locking device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 at the rear of the locking device 1000. It can be fixed sufficiently firmly on the back surface of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod 1050 are slidably mounted on the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. The door frame sliding rod 1040 and the body frame sliding rod are formed in a closed space formed by the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (tablet substrate) and the first side wall 540. It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and there can exist an effect similar to the locking device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and the upper side of the prize ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is aligned with the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 to align the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base. A transparent tank rail unit 730 mounted on the rear side, and a game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 is discharged to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall portion 710b of the prize ball base 710 A part of the award ball device 740 that is attached to the rear side and a side portion 904 that extends to the rear end of the main body frame base 600 and the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the award ball device 740 are rear. And a transparent back cover 900 arranged substantially in the same plane as that of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like. A pachinko machine that can visually check the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. 1 can be used.

  Further, not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When the game board 4 is removed from the front side to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, remove them. It can be easily detected from the image, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of any malfunction due to the residue.

  Further, as described above, since the rear surface and rear side surface of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, unauthorized devices and tools for performing illegal acts are attached to the rear side and side surfaces of the game board 4. Even if it is done, it can be easily discovered, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed, and it is also possible to easily find unauthorized devices attached to the game board 4 from the outside, The pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrence against fraudulent behavior can be provided, which can be used to prevent unauthorized installation of devices.

  Also, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the game machine 4 is installed come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matters such as dust and dust from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to keep the game board 4 in a good state and suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is located at a position about twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, and the like, and the above-described effects are surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to obtain a flat shape. Further, it is possible to facilitate the attaching operation of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like attached to the prize ball base 710. As a result, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made into a substantially flat surface, and it can be caught or brought into contact with other members in the island facility to be installed by eliminating protrusions on the rear side. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, it is possible to use a buffer material with a simple shape and to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency). The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

  In addition, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through-holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 can be further easily seen, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 and the like of the back cover 900. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from accumulating, and the control of the game is unstable due to the heat, and the occurrence of problems due to deformation of members such as synthetic resin is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 are sized so that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring due to the game ball entering.

[1-4. Basic configuration of game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the game board using the game panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 and the like, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 is the game as viewed from the rear of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 according to the present embodiment has a front configuration in which an outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven by a player operating the handle device 500 is substantially rectangular in shape. A member 1110, a plate-like game panel 1150 that is arranged on the rear side of the front component member 1110 and defines the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 that is arranged on the lower rear side of the game panel 1150, and a board holder 1160 A main control board box 1170 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls the game content that is attached to the rear surface of the game ball 1100 and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined signal based on a control signal from the main control board 4100 A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying the game status and attached to a predetermined position of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible to the player. To have. The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. It is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 115, etc.).

  The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component member 1110, a game panel 1150, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. A detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, a basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and a detailed configuration will be described later.

[1-4A. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component member 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 1100 is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left end toward the left side from the center in the left-right direction in a front view and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction in the front view. An inner rail 1112 that is arranged substantially inside the outer rail 1111 along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view so as to smoothly continue from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111 , The inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, which can be contacted with the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1111. Is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 at the boundary of the outer area, and is supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to be rotatable, and closes between the outer rail 1111. In this way, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where the outer rail 1111 is opened by rotating in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. And a backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component member 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 as shown in FIG. It is positioned on the extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, a space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the hitting ball launcher 650 is Then, it jumps over the space and is driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is used. The player can enter the game area 1100 by rotating it toward the open position against the biasing force.

  In addition, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that rolls along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed by the game ball coming into contact with the stop 1114, and the game ball rolls continuously from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It can be prevented from moving. Note that even if a game ball that has entered (or has been driven into) the game area 1100 attempts to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Accordingly, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  In addition, when the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is not received in a starting port 2101, 2102, a winning port 2103, 2104, 2201, etc., which will be described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, it is guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, and discharged from the out port 1151 downward to the rear side of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hitting ball launcher 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is opened from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It falls and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626 and discharged to the lower plate 302 in the plate unit 300.

  Note that the outer rail 1111 in the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to the surface thereof, so that the wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball is enhanced, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, the stopper 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin on the surface, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is reduced. The game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component member 1110 includes a wall-shaped crime prevention projection 1117 protruding forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially center in the vertical direction along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-port guide surface 1115. And a groove-shaped rail crime prevention groove 1118 that is recessed from the front end by a predetermined amount. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security protrusion 1117 in the front structural member 1110 overlaps with the rear end protrusion piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction. Thus, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the unauthorized tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be.

  Further, when the front structural member 1110 of the present example is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the post-crime protruding piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime protruding piece 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even in the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, unauthorized equipment such as a piano wire that has entered from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  Further, the front component member 1110 is spaced apart in the vertical direction at the left end in the front view and is recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end, and is spaced in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120, a fixed recess 1121 which is disposed on the left side of the front view of the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward, and has an arc shape on the upper side and is recessed from the front side. In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a spherical passage cutout portion 1122 that is cut out in a rectangular shape extending long in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning concave portion 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to a positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 is viewed from the front side. However, it is possible to restrict movement in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board. By being locked by the locking portion 608, the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component member 1110 is a front view of the game board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the lower end of the game board 4 is restricted from moving forward by the game board fixture 690. It is like that. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is connected to the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notches 1122 and 1152 for the ball passage.

  Further, the front component member 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the vicinity of the right end of the front end at the lower end, and a thickness in the front-rear direction from the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the through hole 1123 to the left side of the front view. A fastening portion 1124 formed thinly and a certificate sticking portion 1125 disposed on the left side of the through hole 1123 as viewed from the front is attached. Although the detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component member 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is attached to the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4 and to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4.

  Further, in the front component member 1110, a display unit 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the outer right side of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and in the lower right of the front view. The front component member 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 protruding rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 can be fitted into an inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150 to fix the inner rail 1112 at a predetermined position of the game panel 1150.

[1-4B. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. This gaming panel 1150 is horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side in front view of the lower end in front view and the out-port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-out guide surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front , And is opened downward and has a spherical passage cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110, and a rearward projecting portion of the function display unit 1180 that penetrates the lower right corner when viewed from the front. An insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and the positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed near the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and whose lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101). And a notch 1157 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 includes a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110, and although not shown, A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a corresponding range, and a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. Further, the gaming panel 1150 is formed so that the out port 1151 is positioned at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component member 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided rearward by the out port guide surface 1115 thus made enters the out port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front. The substrate holder 1160 has an out sphere discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall portion at the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is the out sphere A game ball that is formed so as to become lower toward the discharge unit 1161, is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and is supplied (discharged) to the bottom upper surface of the substrate holder 1160. The ball is discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 downward. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned directly above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the board pass through the discharge passage 842 of the board unit 800 and are discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 that protrude forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 and then fitted to the rear ends of the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110. In a state of being fitted to the boss 1126, a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 through the fixed boss 1162 from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, so that the substrate holder 1160 is attached to the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 can be sandwiched between the front component member 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 includes a fixing portion 1163 in which a fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the lateral side to the left end portion of the rear wall in the rear view when viewed from the rear. And a locking portion 1164 that is disposed so as to face 1163 and that can lock the elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160 by the fixing part 1163 and the locking part 1164 of the board holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 includes a thin horizontal box-shaped board base 1171 with the rear side opened, and a thin horizontal box shape with the front side opened to cover the rear surface of the board base 1171 and is fitted into the board base 1171 from the rear side. A board cover 1172 to be combined, and a main control board 4100 having electronic components and terminals mounted on the rear surface side at the front end of the board cover 1171 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left side end of the board base 1171 when viewed from the back and is fitted to the fixing part 1163 of the board holder 1160 and from the right side of the board cover 1172 when viewed from the right side. And an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end of the back view two times up and down across the elastic fixing piece 1175 and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a hermetic seal (not shown) pasted between the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the hermetic seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing part 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation cutting part 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and caulking is fixed in any one of the four sealing parts 1176. Has been. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the caulking-fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the main control board box 1170 remains open and closed. It has become. Thus, it can be clearly determined from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

  In this example, four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided, so that the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. In addition, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a hermetic seal applied across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. When the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off or peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such illegal acts from being performed.

  The main control board box 1170 has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening, Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like face the rear side. The main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170 by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100f facing the rear surface of the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-described sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly crafted, the presence or absence of unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention performance is obtained. Be able to.

[1-4E. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. The display unit 1181 is disposed on the front surface of the front component member 1110 so as to be visible from the player side. A rear projecting portion 1182 projecting rearward from the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 102 (A), the game state that changes depending on the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end of the front view. A game status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED to display the number of suspensions related to the acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2101 consisting of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 1st special symbol memory display 1184 for the first special symbol memory 1184 and the first special symbol result that is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and drawn by receiving a game ball to the first start port 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 made up of one 7-segment LED for display as the first special symbol display 1185 and the second start opening 210 A second special symbol display 1186 comprising one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting game balls to the second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game balls to the second start port 2102.

  In addition, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 displays the number of reserves related to the passage of the gate unit 2401 by a game ball that is arranged in a circular arc substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186. A normal symbol memory display 1188 composed of four LEDs for display, and a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball passing through the gate portion 2401 arranged below the normal symbol memory display is displayed as a normal symbol. And a normal symbol display 1189 made up of one LED.

  The game status indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange. Various game states (for example, probability variation state, short-time game state, big hit game state, small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed by the combination.

  Also, the first special symbol memory display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the first start port 2101 when the first special symbol display 1185 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the first special symbols on which the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory indicator 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b made of predetermined LEDs, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. More specifically, for example, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on when the number of holds is 1, and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is turned off. When the number of holdings is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is blinking. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 receives a game ball at the second start port 2102 when the second special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner. In this case, the number of the second special symbol that is suspended (stored) is displayed (stored). The second special symbol memory indicator 1187 includes a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b made of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on when the number of holdings is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory display lamps 1187a, When the number of holdings is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is lit. When the number of holdings is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. Both are now flashing. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are selected by the first special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed. The 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first 7-segment LED light emission pattern (special symbol) is stopped. The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  Further, the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED that can change the emission color of red, green, and orange, and a combination of the emitted emission color and lighting / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing a game ball through the gate portion 2401. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined time similarly to the special symbol.

  Also, the normal symbol memory display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 holds the start of the variable display when the game symbol passes through the gate portion 2401 when the normal symbol cannot be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189. The number of stored ordinary symbols (stored) is displayed. The normal symbol storage indicator 1188 includes four normal symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from below, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol storage lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holds. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved normal symbols. In this example, up to four normal symbol fluctuation displays are held (stored).

  As shown in FIG. 102A, the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status indicator 1183, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the normal symbol memory of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188 and the normal symbol display 1189 are attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 168). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, the function display unit 1180 has a function as compared with the case in which the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk in the hall can recognize the position of the display unit 1181 without being confused. To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may be configured as shown in FIG. In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by 7 segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the normal symbol memory indicator 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  The function display unit 1180 can achieve the same effects as described above, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured by eight LED groups. As compared with the case where the segment LED is used, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since the content displayed on the function display unit 1180 is difficult to understand, it is possible to suppress the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming concerned about the display during the game, and it is possible to suppress difficulty in concentrating on the game. The game can be more enjoyed by devoting itself to movable effects and effects images.

[1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a gaming panel 1200 having a form different from the gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component member 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and a detailed description thereof is omitted here. The gaming panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the gaming panel 1150 described above, and has a plate shape that can partition the rear end of the gaming area 1100 that is partitioned by the front component member 1110 from the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-like panel holder 1220 that detachably holds the panel plate 1210 from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110.

  The gaming panel 1200 panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than the gaming area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic plate. The panel plate 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary that can be sufficiently held even if a failure nail (not shown) is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The thickness is 8 to 10 mm. In this example, panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed of round holes arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and penetrating in the front-rear direction, a long hole 1212 disposed in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and extending in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction It has. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1213 whose front sides are recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. The engagement step portion 1213 is cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100 in the same manner as the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  The panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size that includes the panel board 1210 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is substantially the same thickness as the gaming panel 1150 made of the above-described wood board (in this example, about 20 mm) of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1220 includes a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and is substantially the same size as the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It mainly includes a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

  The holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost the same surface. In addition, the holding step portion 1221 has a front inner peripheral surface of a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. With this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to temperature changes and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. A plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engagement claw 1224 is disposed on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engagement step portion 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and moves forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the end and is elastically engaged with the engaging step 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engagement piece 1225 is disposed on the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210, and is positioned between the front surface of the holding step 1221. It is configured such that a predetermined amount is extended toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220 in a state where a predetermined gap of a size that allows the engagement step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the attachment boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the attachment boss of the front component member 1110 is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component member 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave the lower center and the outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. The mounting support portion 1227 causes the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 to be recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the rear outer peripheral portion protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression ( The depth (depth is about 2.5 mm in this example) that can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001a (see FIG. 114, etc.) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the attachment support portion 1227. It is desirable to be between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be securely installed and mounted in the game board holding port 601.

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 has a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in a predetermined arrangement in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and on the upper side of the housing recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion (for example, a positioning protrusion (illustrated) protruding forward from a fixing portion 3001a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001 in the back box 3001. Is omitted))). In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) when viewed from the back.

  It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, the inner diameter of the hole is mixed with a large diameter and a small diameter so that the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size or weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of thinned portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the thinned portions 1230. It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these thinning portions 1230 are not formed in the predetermined range from the front side of the housing recess 630h, that is, from the lower end on the front side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height. Then, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 becomes a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component member 1110 disposed on the front surface becomes a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball hitting device 650 However, it is guided smoothly. In addition, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a thinned portion 1230 so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and supports the panel holder 1220 and maintains the strength of the panel holder 1220. For this reason, a box-like rib is formed.

  The panel holder 1220 is formed with a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1150 on the obstacle nail planting device. Can be set in the state. Further, at the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guide surface 1115 of the front component member 1110, and penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction on the left side of the lower end when viewed from the front. The ball passage cutout portion 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component member 1110 and the rear protrusion portion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front lower right corner portion when viewed from the front are inserted. An insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 has a groove-shaped out sphere discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface to the front side on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and is opened downward at the lower end side. A notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction from the right end in a front view. The panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component member 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The out-ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed in the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600) when the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. The game board 4 is moved relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction when the out-ball discharge groove 1235 is fitted with the positioning protrusion 607. Being regulated.

  In the gaming panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224, the engagement piece 1225, and the engagement step portion 1213 are engaged. By combining them, the panel holder 1220 can hold the panel board 1210, and the front side of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. Even if the installation device is not modified, it is possible to set the panel plate 1210 to the conventional obstacle nail planting device with the panel holder 1220 held, and to suppress the cost for planting the failure nail. Can be done.

  In addition, although not shown in the drawing, the gaming panel 1200 of this example has a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the gaming area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. At the same time, a front unit 2000 is attached. A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, since only the front unit is supported, it is possible to prevent the panel board 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 has a divided structure of the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, even if the panel board 1210 is a transparent board, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the gaming panel 1200 as a whole. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the board 1210 can be realized, and the pachinko machine 1 that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

  In addition, since the gaming panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose positions such as obstacle nails and winning holes are changed depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 including the game board 4 that can be used for various models can be obtained by replacing only the panel plate 1210.

  Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, the mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the rear unit 3000 that are mounted and fixed on the rear side of the panel holder 1220 according to the model. Even if the positions are different, the panel holder 1220 can be made a common part of the pachinko machine 1 independent of the model by designing the fixing portions of the various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Next, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is accommodated.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivot support side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example is a side surface on the pivot support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. The metal crime prevention side plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and the metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 formed of the synthetic resin in the door frame 5 are configured.

  As described above, the security side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extrusion mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction in which the front component member 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 are combined. This side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction, extends in the front-rear direction, and forms a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending from the front end of the side piece 952a to the inner side (open side) in a substantially right angle direction. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b, and extending inward from the rear end of the side piece 952a in a substantially perpendicular direction. And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that opens inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

  Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. The strength of the main body frame 3 is increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be favorably supported.

  On the other hand, the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed in a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, or the like, as described above. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened outward (the shaft support side). In the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased by the support-side U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at the upper and lower points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side. If an unauthorized tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is increased. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the security side face plate 950 are provided. A rear piece of a pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is pivotally supported. The side U-shaped projecting piece 166 is sandwiched. Accordingly, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft-supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. Since the pivot-side U-shaped projecting piece 166 can be prevented from moving in a direction away from the main body frame 3, the closed door frame 5 can be prevented from being opened, and the main body frame can be prevented. It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to 3.

  In addition, since the security side plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is set. Since the strength and rigidity of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made difficult to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, the crime prevention performance can be improved.

  Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the security side plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the player is destroyed, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire cannot be entered from the rear end of the side piece 952a into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1150). Can be surely prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the security side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It can be fully countered against the destruction of the. In general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed within the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side From the (front side), it is almost impossible to allow an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further improved.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, as shown in FIG. Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 is connected to the rear side or the side of the game board 4 accommodated in the main body frame 3. Even if it is not removed from the main body frame 3 or the back cover 900 is not opened, it can be viewed from the rear side of the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an unauthorized device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily discovered and illegal acts can be prevented. Further, since it is possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach an unauthorized device, and it is possible to increase deterrence against unauthorized acts. ing.

  In addition, since the rear side and the side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the board 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, remove them. Therefore, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring, and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of game board]
Next, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board with the portion visible through the game panel omitted, FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the left front. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. In addition, FIG. 114 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 115 is an exploded view of the main members constituting the game board and obliquely viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium when the player operates the handle device 500. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to be driven, and the game window 101 of the door frame 5 from the game window 101 to the player side when the front component member 1110 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front. A function display unit 1180 arranged at a position where it can be visually recognized, and a plurality of penetrating through the front and rear in a predetermined shape at positions corresponding to the game area 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 And a plate-like gaming panel 1200 that has an opening 1215 (see FIG. 114) and partitions the rear end of the gaming area 1100.

  The gaming panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel board 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component member 1110 and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component member 1110. A frame-like panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 so as to be detachable from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1110. An opening 1215 of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

  The game board 4 includes a front unit 2000 attached from the front side to the opening 1215 of the game panel 1200, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a rear side of the back unit 3000. A liquid crystal display device 1900 which is attached so as to be visible from the player side and can display a predetermined effect image, a substrate holder 1160 which is attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit from the rear side, and a substrate And a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the holder 1160.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the present example is arranged along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the upper left side of the attacker unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2100 arranged on the upper side of the out port 1151 in the lower part in the game area 1100. A side guide member 2300, a gate member 2400 disposed slightly above and to the left of the upper side of the game area 1100 above the side guide member 2300, and a frame-like shape disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100. A center accessory 2500.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is a box shape attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and opened on the front side, and a back box 3001 in which an opening 3001c facing the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3001b. A back decoration unit 3100 having a frame-like decoration attached near the front face in the back box 3001, and a ball guiding unit 3200 attached to the lower front part of the back box 3001 to guide a game ball from the front unit 2000 downward. And an upper movable effect unit 3300 which is mounted on the upper side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and is movable according to the gaming state, and a left and right which is mounted on the left and right sides of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and is movable according to the gaming state. It is attached to the lower side of the opening 3001c within the movable effect unit 3400 and the back box 3001, and is movable according to the gaming state. A lower movable direction unit 3600, and a lower decorative member 3002 to decorate both right and left sides of the lower movable direction unit 3600 is arranged between the rear wall 3001b of the lower movable direction unit 3600 and the back box 3001, the.

  The back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 has a substantially rectangular opening 3001c penetrating in the front-rear direction on the rear wall 3001b, and the display screen faces forward (player side) from the opening 3001c. A liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001.

  Further, on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control board 4010 having a peripheral control part 4140 and a liquid crystal control part 4150 is provided, as will be described in detail later. Yes.

[2-1. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the front unit 2000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. 116 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the front unit of the game board as seen from the rear.

  The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 is arranged at an upper portion of the out-out 1151 at a substantially lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported by the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210), and the attacker unit 2100. A side guide member 2300 that is arranged on the upper left side of the game area 1100 and extends from the outer periphery of the game area 1100 to the center side in the left-right direction, and a game panel that is arranged on the upper side of the side guide member 2300 A gate member 2400 supported on the front surface of 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 disposed in a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 has a first start port 2101 in which game balls can be received at all times, and a game ball that passes through the gate portion 2401 of the gate member 2400 disposed below the first start port 2101. The second starting port 2102 that allows game balls to be received according to the result of the normal lottery that is drawn, and the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 arranged below the second starting port 2102 The winning prize opening 2103 that can receive gaming balls according to the result of the special lottery drawn by receiving the gaming balls of the game, and the four winning balls 2103 that are arranged above the winning prize opening 2103 and that can always accept the gaming balls And a general winning opening 2104. In addition, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate portion 2401 through which a game ball can pass.

  Further, in the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000, a substantially frame-shaped flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and a game ball that has flowed down in the game area 1100 enter the frame. A peripheral wall portion 2503 for preventing the warp, a warp inlet 2504 that opens at a predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion 2503, a warp outlet 2505 that discharges a game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and a warp outlet 2505 that is released A stage 2510 that rolls the game ball in the left-right direction and then releases the game ball into the game area 1100 for reflux.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 can be viewed without passing through the transparent gaming panel 1200 such as the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 that is penetrated in the front-rear direction and disposed on the rear side, the back unit 3000, and the like. A window logo 2501, a center logo decoration member 2520 that forms an upper frame of the window 2501 and has a logo in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1, and a right frame decoration member 2530 that forms the right frame of the window 2501. I have. The center logo decoration member 2520 and the right frame decoration member 2530 of the center accessory 2500 include decoration boards 2523 and 2532 on which LEDs are mounted, respectively, so that they can be decorated with light emission according to the gaming state. Yes.

[2-2. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120. 118 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the attacker unit as viewed from the rear lower side.

  The attacker unit 2100 of the game board 4 in the table unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 formed in the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200, and then the game panel It is fixed to the front surface of 1200 (panel plate 1210). The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of reception openings (winning openings) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 can be received. Specifically, the first start port 2101 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101, and disposed below the second start port 2102. A rectangular large winning opening 2103 extending greatly in the left-right direction from the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and four general winning opening 2104 arranged at a position higher than the large winning opening 2103, I have.

  The first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, so that game balls can always be received (winning). On the other hand, the second start port 2102 disposed below the first start port 2101 is, as illustrated, a pair of blade-like movable pieces 2105 disposed substantially upright on both the left and right sides of the second start port 2102. Thus, the space between the first start port 2101 is closed, and in the state shown in the figure, the game ball cannot be received into the second start port 2102. The pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second starting port 2102 is pivotally supported at the lower end side, and the second starting port is opened by rotating the upper end side away from each other. The game ball is ready to be received at 2102. That is, the second starting port 2102 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2105.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2106 that can close the opening. The opening / closing member 2106 is pivotally supported at its lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the big prize opening 2103 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is turned, the special winning opening 2103 is opened so that a game ball can be received. That is, the special winning opening 2103 is a variable winning opening by the opening / closing member 2106.

  The attacker unit 2100 has a width (width) in which the width in the left-right direction of the first start port 2101 is slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball, and the game balls can be received one by one. Further, the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the upper ends of the pair of movable pieces 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other and expanded to be three times the outer shape of the game ball. The width is about 5 times. Further, the winning prize opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 has a width in the left-right direction when the opening / closing member 2106 is in an open state, which is 5 to 8 times the width of the game ball. As a result, in a state where each of the winning ports 2101, 2102 and 2103 can be received, the lower winning port can receive game balls more easily.

  Further, two of the four general winning ports 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 are arranged so as to open upward on the left and right sides with the large winning port 2103 sandwiched therebetween, and the remaining two are sandwiched with the large winning port 2103 interposed therebetween. They are arranged so that they face each other on the upper left side of the general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left side.

  More specifically, the attacker unit 2100 of this example is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the gaming panel 1200, and has a first start port 2101 and a big prize opening 2103 at a position corresponding to the center of the gaming area 1100 in the left-right direction. The plate-shaped base plate 2110 capable of forming the second start port 2102 and the general winning port 2104, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 attached to the lower front surface of the first start port 2101 in the base plate 2110 can be rotated. The center receiving member 2111 is formed with a second start port 2102 and opened on the upper and rear sides, and a general winning port 2104 opened upward is formed on the left and right front surfaces of the large winning port 2103 on the base plate 2110. A pair of side receiving members 2112 which are attached and whose upper and rear sides are open, and a general winning opening 2104 facing away from each other, are formed. A left side receiving member 2113 attached to the position of the upper left than to the region in which both side members 2112 of the left is attached in 2110, and a.

  The attacker unit 2100 is attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110, pivotally supports an opening / closing member 2106 that opens and closes the grand prize winning opening 2103, and rotationally drives the pair of movable pieces 2105 and the opening / closing member 2106. An attacker drive unit 2120 to be operated, a right back cover 2141 attached to the right side of the attacker drive unit 2120 on the rear side of the base plate 2110, and a left back cover attached to the left side of the attacker drive unit 2120 on the rear side of the base plate 2110. 2142. The right back cover 2141 and the left back cover 2142 of the attacker unit 2100 have a flat rear surface, and the rear surface of the right back cover 2141 and the left back cover 2142 is a panel with the attacker unit 2100 attached to the panel plate 1210. The rear surface of the plate 1210 is substantially flush with the rear surface.

  The base plate 2110 of the attacker unit 2100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and has a shallow relief-like decoration on the surface. The base plate 2110 has an opening 2110a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and passes through the game ball at a position corresponding to the second start port 2102 and a position where the left side receiving member 2113 is attached. In addition, the base plate 2110 includes a flange 2110b that extends backward from a position where the first start opening 2101 and the general winning opening 2104 are formed and can guide the game ball.

  The center receiving member 2111 attached to the front surface of the base plate 2110 in the attacker unit 2000 is provided with a relief such that small jewels are scattered on the outer periphery of a heart-shaped jewel. Although not shown in detail, the center receiving member 2110 includes a pair of shaft portions that extend rearward from the rear surface of the front plate at intervals wider than the left and right widths of the opening 2110a in the base plate 2110. The movable piece 2105 can be pivotally supported by these shaft portions.

  Further, both side receiving members 2112 have a relief-like decoration in which the outer periphery of a circular jewel is surrounded by a small jewel on the front surface. Further, the left side receiving member 2113 includes a shelf portion 2113a that is formed on the upper side of the general winning opening 2104 that is arranged in the back direction, extends short in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, on the shelf portion 2113a. The dropped game ball can be guided to the center side in the left-right direction of the game area 1100.

  Further, the attacker drive unit 2120 in the attacker unit 2100 includes a start port solenoid 2121 for opening and closing a pair of movable pieces 2105 that open and close the second start port 2102, and a rear side of the base plate 2110 that supports the start port solenoid 2121. A start opening driving mechanism base 2123 attached to the opening, an opening / closing member 2106 for closing / opening the prize winning opening 2103, an opening / closing member 2106 for supporting the opening / closing operation, and an opening / closing member 2106 pivotally supported so as to be rotatable. An attacker drive mechanism base 2126 attached to the rear side of the base plate 2110 below the start port drive mechanism base 2123, and a game ball received at the second start port 2102 supported at a predetermined position of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A second start port sensor 2127 to detect, A count sensor 2128 that detects a game ball that is supported at a position different from the start port sensor 2127 and received in the grand prize winning port 2103, and a start port solenoid 2121, an attack solenoid 2124, and a second that are supported by the upper surface of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. A starter sensor 2127 and an attacker unit relay board 2130 for relaying the connection between the count sensor 2128 and the main control board 4100 are provided.

  Although not shown, the start port solenoid 2121 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and is urged in a protruding direction by a coil spring. The second start port 2102 is below the first start port 2101. The start port drive mechanism base 2123 supports the plunger so as to protrude forward at the rear position. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the start port solenoid 2121 is energized, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2121 moves backward against the urging force of the coil spring, and a pair of movable pieces are connected via a transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The upper ends of 2105 are rotated in directions away from each other, and the second starting port 2102 is in an open state.

  Further, the start port drive mechanism base 2123 is formed in a box shape so that the start port solenoid 2121 can be accommodated and supported from the front side. A first guiding portion 2123a that guides the game ball that has circulated through the portion 2110b to the right in a front view, and a game ball that is formed below the portion that supports the start port solenoid 2121 and is received in the second start port 2102 A second guiding portion (detailed illustration is omitted) for guiding downward.

  Although not shown, the attacker solenoid 2124 in the attacker drive unit 2120 has a plunger that can be advanced and retracted by energization and urged in the protruding direction by a coil spring, as with the start-port solenoid 2121. In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, when the attacker solenoid 2124 is energized, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2124 is immersed, and the upper end of the opening / closing member 2106 moves relatively forward via the transmission member engaged with the tip of the plunger. The special winning opening 2103 is in an open state.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of this example, the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 are in a state where they can always accept game balls. On the other hand, in the second starting port 2102, a pair of movable members are driven by energizing the starting port solenoid 2121 in accordance with a normal lottery result in which a game ball passes through the gate portion 2401 in a gate member 2400 described later. The piece 2105 is expanded and can be received. Also, in the big winning opening 2103, according to the special lottery result (for example, the special lottery result is “big hit” by receiving the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (start winning prize). ”), The opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern and can be received by energizing the attacker solenoid 2124.

  Although not shown in the figure, the attacker unit 2100 includes a large prize opening decoration board that is supported on the lower part of the attacker drive mechanism base 2126 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface. It can be made to.

  In this attacker unit 2100, a game ball received in the general winning port 2104 arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2101 and the big winning port 2103 is the right passage member 3210 in the ball guiding unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 described later. It is sent to the start opening passage 3211 and the middle right general winning opening passage 3212. In addition, the attacker unit 2100 receives the game balls received in the general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left side of the big winning opening 2103 and each general winning opening passage of the left passage member 3220 in the ball guiding unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 described later. 3221, 3222, and 3223.

  Also, the attacker unit 2100 is discharged downward after the game ball received in the second starter port 2102 is detected by the second starter port sensor 2127 supported by the attacker drive mechanism base 2126. ing. Further, the attacker unit 2100 is configured such that the game ball received in the special winning opening 2103 is discharged downward after being detected by the count sensor 2128.

  In the attacker unit 2100 of the present embodiment, the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged so that the forward / backward direction of the plunger 2124a is the left / right direction, and the attacker solenoid 2124 is arranged as close to the opening / closing member 2106 as possible. Therefore, the dimension in the front-rear direction of the attacker unit 2100 can be shortened by 5 to 30% compared to the conventional product, and the rear space of the attacker unit 2100 can be secured more widely. .

[2-3. Side guide member]
Next, the side guide member 2300 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. The side guide member 2300 in the game board 4 is in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 on the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 and below the center in the vertical direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the plate 1210.

  The side guide member 2300 of this example is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) and extends in the left-right direction, and extends forward from the substantially vertical center of the contact portion 2301. And a shelf 2302 that extends in the left-right direction and is inclined so that the right end side is lowered. The side guide member 2300 can guide the game ball flowing down along the left end of the game area 1100 to the right by the shelf 2302. The side guide member 2300 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and the rear side can be seen through the side guide member 2300.

[2-4. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2400 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 116 and 117. The gate member 2400 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1215 formed on the left side of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 on the left side and slightly above the center in the vertical direction. Thus, it is fixed to the front surface of the gaming panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). The gate member 2200 has a gate portion 2401 having a width through which only one game ball can pass. The gate sensor 2402 disposed in the gate portion 2401 detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2401. Be able to.

  Note that the gate member 2400 of the present example is formed to have a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the conventional gate member, and the portion on the rear side of the front surface of the game panel 1150 is the thickness of the game panel 1150. It will fit within. That is, only the wiring cord connected to the gate sensor 2402 extends from the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

[2-5. Center character]
Next, the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the front. FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the center accessory as seen from the rear. The center accessory 2500 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 1215 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent plate-like panel plate 1210 in the game panel 1200, and then the panel plate 1210. As shown in the drawing, a large window portion 2501 penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided in a frame shape that occupies most of the game area 1100.

  In the center accessory 2500, the shape of the outer periphery of the upper frame is linearly inclined at a steep angle from the approximate center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and is lowered by a predetermined amount, and then gradually decreases toward the left. A plurality of step shapes which are inclined to each other. On the other hand, in the center accessory 2500, the outer peripheral shape on the right side of the upper frame is a curved shape (arc shape) substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. In the center accessory 2500, the upper frame is formed in an arc shape having a predetermined width along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and the shape of the inner periphery of the upper frame is highest at the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. The shape is curved in an arc shape. A center logo decoration member 2520 described later is provided on the upper frame of the center accessory 2500.

  The center accessory 2500 is formed so that the outer peripheral shape of the left frame hangs downward, and the inner peripheral shape of the left frame is such that the upper side and the lower side are on the left with the approximate center in the vertical direction sandwiched between them. It is formed in a wave shape curved so as to be recessed in the direction. Further, the center accessory 2500 has an outer peripheral shape of the right frame that is continuous with the curved upper portion, extends downward from the left frame, and has an arc shape substantially along the inner periphery of the game area 1100. The inner peripheral shape of the frame is formed in a shape in which three depressions curved in a substantially semicircular shape are arranged in the vertical direction.

  Further, the center accessory 2500 has a shape of the lower frame that becomes lower from the lower end of the left frame toward the right, and becomes higher as it goes to the right after passing a position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100. And it is made into the shape which inclined toward the lower end of the right frame from the position of about 3/4 of the whole from the left end to the right direction.

  As described above, the center accessory 2500 has an outer periphery on the right side of the upper frame and an outer periphery of the right frame substantially shaped along the inner periphery of the game area 1100, and is attached to the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200. In this state, a gap slightly larger than the outer shape of the game ball is formed on the outer periphery on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Further, the center accessory 2500 has an upper frame left side, a left frame, and a lower frame as described above, and when attached to the panel board 1210, a game area is formed on the outer periphery on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A region with a predetermined width is formed between the inner periphery of 1100.

  The center accessory 2500 includes a plate-like flange portion 2502 that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a game ball that bulges forward from the flange portion 2502 and flows down in the game area 1100 from the approximate center in the left-right direction. And a peripheral wall 2503 that guides the game ball to the left and right and prevents the game ball from entering the frame. Further, the center accessory 2500 is a warp inlet 2504 that opens to the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the peripheral wall 2503 located on the front side of the panel board 1210 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter (see FIG. 111). And a warp outlet 2505 that discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 2504 into the frame, and after the game ball released from the warp outlet 2505 rolls in the left-right direction, into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 And a stage 2510 disposed under the lower inner edge of the window 2501 for discharging and refluxing.

  The stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 is arranged on the lower side and the front side of the first stage 2511 to which the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2505 is supplied, and the game ball is received from the first stage 2511. A second stage 2512 to be supplied, and a third stage 2513 which is disposed below and in front of the second stage 2512 and from which the game ball is supplied and can be released into the game area 1100. And.

  The first stage 2511 in the stage 2510 has a curved shape so that both ends in the left-right direction are generally raised, and has a wave shape in which the position corresponding to the approximate center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is slightly higher. The game balls can be released to the front side (second stage 2512 side) from the lower portions (valleys) on both sides that are formed slightly higher.

  In addition, the second stage 2512 is formed more slowly in the vertical direction than the first stage 2511, and both ends in the left-right direction are the highest, and the position corresponding to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 is slightly higher. It is formed in a wavy shape. The second stage 2512 can also release the game ball to the front side (third stage 2513) from the lower part (valley part) on both sides of the central part.

  Furthermore, the third stage 2513 is formed more gently than the second stage 2512 and is curved so that the left and right ends are the highest and the position corresponding to the center of the game area 1100 is the lowest. A game ball can be emitted from the lowered center to the front side (in the game area 1100).

  The stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 has a game ball that opens forward in a standing wall formed between the first stage 2511 at a position corresponding to the substantially horizontal center of the game area 1100 in the second stage 2512. A chance entrance 2514 that can be entered, and a chance exit 2515 that is released immediately after the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 is released and is disposed directly below the chance entrance 2514 below the third stage 2513. . A game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2514 is released from the chance exit 2515 into the game area 1100. Further, as shown in FIG. 108 and the like, this chance exit 2515 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2515 has a high probability. It can be received (wins) into the start port 2101.

  In this center accessory 2500, the entire stage 2510 is formed of a transparent member, and the lower decorative member 3002 and the lower movable effect unit 3600, etc. of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side through the stage 2510 are on the player side. It can be seen from.

  The center accessory 2500 forms an upper frame of the window portion 2501 and extends in an arc shape in the left-right direction. And a right frame decoration member 2530 that can be decorated with light emission.

  A center logo decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 has a relief-shaped logo (detailed illustration is omitted) and has a translucent logo lens 2521 and a rear side of the logo lens 2521. Diffusing lens member (not shown) provided with a prism, a logo decorative board 2523 arranged on the rear side of the diffusing lens member and having a plurality of color LEDs mounted thereon, and a logo covering the rear side of the logo decorative board 2523 And a cover 2524. The center logo decoration member 2520 can light-decorate the logo lens 2521 in various colors by appropriately causing the LED of the logo decoration board 2523 to emit light. Further, the center logo decoration member 2520 is formed with a thin thickness in the front-rear direction so that the rear surface of the logo cover 2524 is substantially flush with the rear surface of the panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200.

  Further, the right frame decoration member 2530 of the center accessory 2500 is formed in a predetermined shape that forms the surface of the right frame and is partially translucent, and on the rear side of the surface decoration member 2531. A right frame decorative board 2532 which is disposed and has a plurality of color LEDs mounted thereon, and a cover lens 2533 having a translucency which covers the rear side of the right frame decorative board 2532 and decorates the rear side surface of the surface decorative member 2531; It is equipped with. The right frame decoration board 2532 of the right frame decoration member 2530 has a center upper right decoration board 2532a and a center right middle decoration board 2532b from the upper side so as to correspond to the three substantially semicircular recesses formed in the surface decoration member 2531. , And the center lower right decorative board 2532c.

  The cover lens 2533 of the right frame decoration member 2530 includes three upper right cover lenses respectively corresponding to the three center upper right decoration boards 2532a, the center right middle decoration board 2532b, and the center right lower decoration board 2532c of the right frame decoration board 2532. 2533a, right middle cover lens 2533b, and lower right cover lens 2533c.

  The right frame decoration member 2530 can appropriately light-emit the LED mounted on the right frame decoration substrate 2532 so that the surface decoration member 2531 and the cover lens 2533 can be illuminated, and each decoration substrate By appropriately emitting the LEDs 2532a, 2532b, and 2532c, the three substantially semicircular recesses can be individually decorated with light emission.

[2-6. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 126. FIG. 123 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 124 is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. FIG. 125 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the back unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in which the back unit is disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there.

  The back unit 300 of this example includes a back box 3001 that is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1150 and has an open front side, in which an opening 3001c that faces the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is formed on the rear wall 3001b. A back decoration unit 3100 which is attached near the front face in the box 3001 and has a relief-like decoration on the front face and formed in a frame shape, and a first start port 2101 in the front unit 2000 attached to the lower part of the back decoration unit 3100 and A ball guiding unit 3200 for guiding the game ball received in the general winning opening 2104 to a predetermined position below, and an upper movable effect unit 3300 which is attached to the upper side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and moves according to the game state. The left and right movable effects that are attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and move according to the gaming state. The knit 3400, the lower movable effect unit 3600 attached to the lower side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and movable according to the gaming state, and the lower movable effect unit 3600 and the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 are arranged. A lower decorative member 3002 for decorating the left and right side surfaces of the lower movable effect unit 3600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is provided with a panel relay board 3012 which is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001 at the lower left corner in rear view and relays the connection between the main control board 4100 and the count sensor 2128 of the front unit 2000. I have.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged on the right side of the panel relay board 3012 when viewed from the back, and the big prize opening decoration board (not shown) of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, the right frame decoration board 2532 of the center accessory 2500, the back In the unit 3000, the left back decoration board 3112 and the right back decoration board 3122 of the back decoration unit 3100, the lift solenoid 3610, the lift decoration body decoration board 3621, the stage lower right decoration board 3661, and the stage lower left decoration board of the lower movable effect unit 3600. 3662 and a lower relay board 3014 that relays the connection between the peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 168) attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the rear side of the back box 3001 that covers the rear side of the lower relay board 3014 A lower relay board cover 3015 attached to the Eteiru.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is disposed on the rear surface of the back box 3001 and above the opening 3001c, and the logo decoration board 2523 of the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000, the top and bottom decoration boards 3132 of the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, Character body drive motor 3315 of movable effect unit 3300, upper movable body lower decorative board 3318, rotation detection sensor 3320, upper movable body rear central decorative board 3334, upper movable body rear side decorative board 3335, lift drive motor 3361, and lift detection An upper relay board 3016 that relays the connection between the sensor 3368 and the peripheral control board 4010, and an upper relay board cover 3017 that covers the rear side of the upper relay board 3016 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged on the rear side of the back side of the back box 3001 on the left side of the opening 3001c (right side of the front view), and the rotation drive motor 3412 of the right unit 3400R in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, 3416, rotation detection sensor 3426, base decoration board 3428, slide drive motors 3525, 3535, 3545, position detection sensors 3526, 3536, 3546, and right relay board 3018 that relays connection with peripheral control board 4010, right A right relay board cover 3019 that covers the rear side of the partial relay board 3018 and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged on the rear side of the opening 3001c on the rear side of the back box 3001 (the left side of the front view), and the rotation drive motor 3412 of the left unit 3400L in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, 3416, rotation detection sensor 3426, base decoration board 3428, slide drive motors 3565, 3575, 3585, position detection sensors 3566, 3576, 3586, and left relay board 3020 that relays connection with peripheral control board 4010, left A left relay board cover 3021 that covers the rear side of the partial relay board 3020 and is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 at a substantially horizontal center on the upper side of the opening 3001c and a substantially vertical center on the left side of the opening 3001c in a rear view, respectively. A lock member 3022 for detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided.

  A back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 is arranged at appropriate positions before and after the rear wall 3001b, with a lower decoration member 3002, a back decoration unit 3100, a ball guiding unit 3200, an upper movable effect unit 3300, a left and right movable effect unit 3400, and a lower movable effect. Mounting holes and mounting bosses for mounting the unit 3600, the panel relay board 3012, the lower relay board cover 3015, the upper relay board cover 3017, the right relay board cover 3019, the left relay board cover 3021 and the like are provided.

  Further, the back box 3001 includes a flange-shaped fixing portion 3001a extending outward from the front end, and is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portion 3001a. Further, as shown in FIG. 124 and the like, the back box 3001 is mounted so that the entire outer periphery of the opening 3001c including the opening 3001c on the rear surface side of the rear wall 3001b is shallowly recessed toward the front side so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be inserted. A stepped portion 3001d and a pair of fixing pieces 1902 formed on the right portion in the bottom and rear view of the mounting stepped portion 3001d and extending downward from the lower surface and side surface (left side surface in the front view) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are inserted. Mounting recess 3001e.

[2-7. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 127 and 128. FIG. 127 is a perspective view of the back decoration unit in the back unit of the game board as seen from the front. FIG. 128 is a rear perspective view of the back decoration unit in the back unit of the game board. The back decoration unit 3100 of this example is attached to the front end in the back box 3001 so as to close the front opening of the box-shaped back box 3001 whose front side is open. The back decoration unit 3100 includes a left back decoration unit 3110 arranged along the left side of the back box 3001 in a front view, a right back decoration unit 3120 arranged along the right side of the back box 3001, and a left back decoration unit. On the lower side of the back box 3001 between the upper back unit 3130 arranged along the upper side of the back box 3001 between the 3110 and the right back unit 3120, and between the left back unit 3110 and the right back unit 3120. And an underlining unit 3140 arranged along.

  The left back decoration unit 3110 in the back decoration unit 3100 includes a left back decoration member 3111 formed with a relief decoration on the surface and partially translucent, and a rear of the left back decoration member 3111. The left back decorative board 3112 arranged on the side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and arranged on the rear side of the left back decorative board 3112 to support the left back decoration member 3111 and the left back decorative board 3112 and in the back box 3001 And a transparent left back decoration base 3113 attached to the left side of the front end.

  The left back decoration member 3111 of the left back decoration unit 3110 has a left-end shape when viewed from the front and has an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100, and the right-end shape has a substantially semicircular shape to the left. Rotating body unit provided in left unit 3400L of left and right movable effect unit 3400, which has three substantially semicircular portions at the left end, which are formed in a wave shape in which three recessed portions are arranged in the vertical direction. It has a shape corresponding to the rotating head 3415 of the rotating decoration body 3410A of 3410.

  Further, the left back decorative board 3112 of the left back decoration unit 3110 has a back outer periphery upper left decorative board 3112a and a back outer peripheral left left which are respectively arranged on the left outer periphery of the most recessed positions in the three substantially semicircular shapes of the left back decoration member 3111. An inner decoration board 3112b and a back outer periphery lower left decoration board 3112c are provided, and the three peripheral edges of the left back decoration member 3111 that are recessed in a substantially semicircular shape can be individually decorated with light emission. The left back decorative board 3112 has a back upper left decorative board 3112d, a back left upper decorative board 3112e, a back left lower decorative board 3112f, and a light emitting decoration between three portions of the left back decorative member 3111 that are recessed in a substantially semicircular shape. And a lower back left decorative substrate 3112g.

  The right back decoration unit 3120 in the back decoration unit 3100 includes a right back decoration member 3121 formed with a relief-like decoration on the surface and partially translucent, and a rear of the right back decoration member 3121. A right back decorative board 3122 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and a right back decorative board 3122 arranged on the rear side of the right back decorative board 3122 and supporting the right back decoration member 3121 and the right back decorative board 3122 and in the back box 3001 And a right back decoration base 3123 attached to the right side of the front end.

  The right back decoration member 3121 of the right back decoration unit 3120 has a shape in which three portions recessed in a substantially semicircular shape in the right direction in a front view are arranged in the vertical direction, and the three substantially semicircular portions Has a shape corresponding to the rotating body head 3415 of the rotating body unit 3410 provided in the right unit 3400R in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 described later. Further, the right back decoration board 3122 of the right back decoration unit 3120 has a back upper right decoration board 3122a and a back right middle decoration board 3122b that illuminate and decorate between the three portions of the right back decoration member 3121 that are recessed in a substantially semicircular shape. , And a back lower right decorative board 3122c.

  The upper back decoration unit 3130 in the back decoration unit 3100 includes an upper back decoration member 3131 formed with a relief-like decoration on the surface and partly translucent, and a rear of the upper back decoration member 3131. And an upper back decorative board 3132 mounted on the side and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. The upper / lower decorative member 3131 of the upper / lower decorative unit 3130 has an upper end that has an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral shape of the game area 1100 and a lower end that has a wave shape that is gently curved in an M-shape. The shape of the lower end is continuous with the shape of the right end of the left back decoration member 3111 in the left back decoration unit 3110 and the shape of the left end of the right back decoration member 3121 in the right back decoration unit 3120.

  In addition, the upper and lower decorative board 3132 of the upper and lower decorative unit 3130 is disposed along the lower end of the upper and lower decorative member 3131 formed in a wave shape. And a substrate 3132b. The upper and lower decorative board 3132 is attached to the rear side of the upper and lower decorative member 3131, and the LED mounted on the front surface appropriately emits light so that the lower edge of the upper and lower decorative member 3131 formed in a wave shape is light-emitting decorated. It can be made to.

  The upper back decoration unit 3130 is attached to the upper ends of the left back decoration unit 3110 and the right back decoration unit 3120 at the left and right ends, respectively.

  The lower back decoration unit 3140 in the back decoration unit 3100 has a substantially semicircular shape bulging upward so as to surround the outer periphery of the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 of the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000. A back decoration member 3141 and a lower back decoration base 3142 that supports the lower back decoration member 3141 from the rear side are provided. The lower decoration member 3141 of the lower decoration unit 3140 is formed so that a relief-like decoration based on a circle is formed on the surface and partially has translucency. The lower back decoration base 3142 extends in the left-right direction from the lower back decoration member 3141 and is formed of a transparent member. The lower back decoration base 3142 includes a plurality of lens portions formed on the surface in a polygonal pyramid shape.

  The back decoration unit 3100 of this example can be visually recognized through the transparent panel plate 1210 of the game panel 1200 and the window 2501 of the center accessory 2500 on the front side, so that the rear side of the game panel 1200 can be decorated. It is like that. The back decoration unit 3100 is formed in a frame shape by the left back decoration unit 3110, the right back decoration unit 3120, the upper back decoration unit 3130, and the lower back decoration unit 3140, and is arranged on the rear side through the inside of the frame. The upper movable effect unit, the right movable effect unit, the left movable effect unit, the lower movable effect unit, the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the like are visible.

[2-8. Ball guidance unit]
Next, the ball guiding unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit in the back unit of the game board viewed from the front, and FIG. 129 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guidance unit viewed from the rear. The ball passage unit 3200 of this example is disposed near the front surface in the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 and in the lower center in the left-right direction, and receives the game balls received in the first start port 2101 and the general winning port 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. It will guide you down. This ball guiding unit 3200 includes a right passage member 3210 disposed on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100 and a left passage member 3220 disposed on the left side.

  The right passage member 3210 of the ball guiding unit 3200 has a start port passage 3211 that receives the game ball received in the first start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and guided backward by the flange 2110b and guides it downward, and a start port. Middle right that receives a game ball that is formed adjacent to the passage 3211 and that is received by the general winning port 2104 disposed on the right side of the big winning port 2103 in the attacker unit 2100 and guided rearward by the collar unit 2110b and that guides downward. And a general prize opening passage 3212.

  In addition, the left passage member 3220 of the ball guiding unit 3200 is located on the left side of the big prize opening 2103 in the attacker unit 2100, and on the general prize opening 2104 arranged on the right side of the big prize opening 2103, in a general winning opening. The middle left general winning hole passage 3221 that receives the game ball received by the hook 2110b and guided backward by the collar part 2110b and guides it downward, and the general right on the right side of the general winning hole 2104 disposed in the back direction in the attacker unit 2100 A side-right general winning opening passage 3222 that receives the game ball received by the winning opening 2104 and guided rearward by the flange 2110b and guides it to the lower part of the middle left general winning opening passage 3221 and the back side arrangement in the attacker unit 2100 Received by the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the received general winning opening 2104 Includes a side left regular winning opening passage 3223 to induce the lower middle left regular winning opening passage 3221 receives the game ball guided rearward, the by 110b.

  The game balls guided downward by the right passage member 3210 and the left passage member 3220 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160 and discharged from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 to the lower side of the game board 4. It has become so.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 3200 of the present example includes a first start port sensor 3231 that detects a game ball that is attached to a predetermined position of the right passage member 3210 and circulates in the start port passage 3211, a right passage member 3210, and a left passage member. And a general winning opening sensor 3232 for detecting game balls received at the general winning opening 2104, which are respectively attached to predetermined positions 3220. One general winning opening sensor 3232 is provided for each of the middle right general winning opening passage 3212, the middle left general winning opening passage 3221, the side right general winning opening passage 3222, and the side left general winning opening passage 3223. It is possible to determine which of the general winning holes 2104 is a game ball that has won a prize. The general winning port sensor 3232 provided in the middle left general winning port passage 3221 is disposed on the downstream side of the position where the side right general winning port passage 3222 and the side left general winning port passage 3223 merge. The game balls flowing through the right general winning opening passage 3222 and the side left general winning opening passage 3223 are detected by two general winning opening sensors 3232.

[2-9. Upper movable production unit]
Next, the upper movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 130 to 140. FIG. 130A is a perspective view of the upper movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 130B is a perspective view of the upper movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 131 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable effect unit as seen from the front by disassembling the upper movable effect unit into the upper movable unit and the lift unit, and FIG. 132 is an exploded view of the upper movable effect unit as the upper movable unit and the lift unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back. Further, FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable production unit as seen from the front and exploded, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 135 (a) is a plan view of the upper movable unit in the upper movable effect unit, (b) is a front view of the upper movable unit, and (c) is the upper movable unit shown in a state where the figure is rotated. FIG.

  FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the upper movable effect unit as seen from the front after disassembling the lifting unit, and FIG. 137 is an exploded perspective view of the lifting unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 138 is a perspective view showing the main part of the lifting mechanism in the upper movable effect unit later. Further, FIG. 139 is a front view for explaining raising and lowering of the upper movable unit in the upper movable production unit, and FIG. 140 is a rear view for explaining raising and lowering of the upper movable unit.

  The upper movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the approximate center in the left-right direction above the opening 3001c in the back box 3001, and the center logo decoration of the center accessory 2500 is assembled with the game board 4 assembled. The member 2520 is located on the rear side. The upper movable effect unit 3300 includes an upper movable unit 3310 having a pair of character bodies 3311 that are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction, and an elevating unit 3350 that moves the upper movable unit 3310 up and down.

  As shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the upper movable unit 3310 of the upper movable effect unit 3300 is a disk-shaped pedestal portion 3311a, and is imitated on a character in accordance with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 attached on the pedestal portion 3311a. A pair of character bodies 3311 having a figure 3311b and spaced apart in the left-right direction, a pair of spur gear-like rotation gears 3312 connected to the lower end of the pedestal portion 3311a in each character body 3311, and a pair of rotation gears An intermediate gear 3313 that is disposed between the three gears 3312 and meshes with the right rotation gear 3312 when viewed from the front, and a drive gear 3314 that meshes with the intermediate gear 3313 and the left rotation gear 3312 and has the same diameter as the intermediate gear 3313. A character body drive motor 3315 for rotating the drive gear 3314; Rotation gear 3312 to support the Yarakuta body drive motor 3315 to the lower surface, and a rotatably supporting shallow dish-like character-based 3316 the upper is opened by the intermediate gear 3313 and the drive gear 3314 top side.

  The pair of character bodies 3311 that are spaced apart from each other on the left and right are made into figures 3311b of different characters, but the poses of the figures 3311b are formed in substantially the same pose. The left rotation gear 3312 includes a plate-like detection piece 3312a that extends from the lower end in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis and is partially cut off in the circumferential direction. Further, the character base 3316 is formed with a support hole 3316a penetrating in the vertical direction with a smaller diameter than the rotation gear 3312 at a portion where the rotation gear 3312 is disposed.

  Further, the upper movable unit 3310 has a through hole 3317a that covers the opened upper portion of the character base 3316 and through which the pedestal portion 3311a of the character body 3311 can pass, and a part of which the relief-like decoration is formed on the upper surface. A decorative plate 3317 having translucency, an upper movable lower decorative substrate 3318 mounted on the lower surface of the character base 3316 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the upper and lower surfaces, and a lower side of the upper movable lower decorative substrate 3318 are covered. A translucent character base cover 3319 attached to the lower surface of the character base 3316.

  Further, the upper movable unit 3310 is attached to the lower surface of the character base 3316 above the character base cover 3319 and detects a detection piece 3312a in the rotation gear 3312 on the left side when viewed from the front, and the lower side of the character base 3316. And a disk-shaped rotary presser 3321 attached to the lower surface of the rotary gear 3312 through the support hole 3316a. The rotation detection sensor 3320 can detect the rotation position of the rotation gear 3312, that is, the character body 3311 by detecting a notch formed in the detection piece 3312 a in the left rotation gear 3312.

  The rotary presser 3321 of the upper movable unit 3310 is attached to the lower surface of the rotary gear 3312 through the support hole 3316a of the character base 3316, so that the character base 3316 can be held between the rotary gear 3312 and the rotary presser 3321. It has become. As a result, the support hole 3316a serves as a guide so that the rotation gear 3312 is rotatably supported with respect to the character base 3316, and the rotation gear 3312 can rotate along the surface of the character base 3316. The rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction of the rotation gear 3312 can be prevented from tilting. That is, the character body 3311 can be prevented from tilting.

  Furthermore, the upper movable unit 3310 includes a back decoration member 3330 that is attached to the rear end of the character base 3316 and forms the background of the pair of character bodies 3311. The back decoration member 3330 in the upper movable unit 3310 decorates the rear side (background) of the pair of character bodies 3311 above the decoration plate 3317, forms a heart-shaped relief, and has a translucent center. A decorative member 3331, a back side decorative member 3332 having a plurality of star-shaped decorations arranged on the left and right sides of the back central decorative member 3331, and a back frame 3333 supporting the back side decorative member 3332 and the back central decorative member 3331, respectively. The upper movable body rear central decorative board 3334 disposed on the rear side of the rear central decorative member 3331 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and disposed on the rear side of the rear side decorative board 3332 and supported by the rear frame 3333. Upper movable body rear side decorative board 3335 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the upper movable body rear surface Includes rear center ornament member 3331 while being disposed on the rear side of the decorative substrate 3334, a back base 3336 for supporting the rear end of the rear frame 3333, and character-based 3316, the.

  As shown in FIG. 133, the upper movable body rear surface decoration board 3334 of the rear surface decoration member 3330 extends downward from the lower end of the rear surface central decoration member 3331 and is attached to the lower side of the character base 3316. It is the form extended to the rear side. The upper movable body back surface decoration board 3334 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the portion extending to the rear side of the character base cover 3319, and the character base cover 3316 can also be decorated with light emission. Yes.

  The upper movable unit 3310 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 in this example includes a pair of character bodies 3311 that are spaced apart from each other in a state where the rotation detection sensor 3320 detects a cutout portion of the detection piece 3312a in the rotation gear 3312. Each of the figures 3311b faces the front (see FIG. 135 (b) and the like). When the upper movable unit 3310 rotates and drives the drive gear 3314 by the character body drive motor 3315, the left rotation gear 3312 and the intermediate gear 3313 meshed with the drive gear 3314 rotate in opposite directions to the drive gear 3314, respectively. At the same time, the right rotation gear 3312 meshed with the intermediate gear 3313 rotates in the same direction as the drive gear 3314. In this example, since the driving gear 3314 and the intermediate gear 3313 have the same diameter, the left and right rotating gears 3312 rotate in different directions at the same speed.

  As a result, the character bodies 3311 attached to the pair of rotating gears 3312 spaced apart from each other on the left and right can rotate in different directions around the axis extending in the vertical direction. Accordingly, the pair of character bodies 3311 (figure 3311b) can be directed in directions other than the front, and various movable effects can be performed (see FIG. 135 (c)).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 136 to 138 and the like, the elevating unit 3350 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 includes a shallow box-shaped unit base 3351 mounted in the back box 3001 and extending in the left-right direction, and the front side being opened. A long slide rod 3352 having an upper end and a lower end supported at a position on the left side of the center of the base 3351 in the left-right direction and extending in the vertical direction, and a slide member 3353 supported by the slide rod 3352 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. And an elevating slider 3354 in which the upper left side is attached to the front end of the slide member 3353, is extended in a plate shape in a substantially rectangular shape in the vertical direction, and the upper movable unit 3310 is attached to the front surface. The slider 3354 is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction and is A guide roller 3355 rotatably supported at the lower part of the front surface of 3351, and attached to a position opposite to the slide rod 3352 across the elevating slider 3354 on the front surface of the unit base 3351. A slide guide 3356 for restricting the right side from moving in the front-rear direction, and attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 on the right side of the slide guide 3356 and supported by a slide rod 3352 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction via a slide member 3353. And an elevating mechanism 3360 for elevating the elevating slider 3354.

  As shown in the figure, the unit base 3351 of the elevating unit 3350 is formed with an elongated guide groove 3351a extending in the up-down direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and sandwiching the guide groove 3351a. A slide rod 3352 is attached to the left side, and a slide guide 3356 is attached to the right side. The unit base 3351 includes a pair of roller support pins 3351b protruding forward on the left and right sides of the lower end of the guide groove 3351a, and the guide roller 3355 is rotated by inserting the guide roller 3355 into the roller support pins 3351b. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, the unit base 3351 includes an arm support pin 3351c that protrudes forward from a position on the right side of the position where the slide guide 3356 is attached and supports an elevating arm 3365 of an elevating mechanism 3360 described later so as to be rotatable. The unit base 3351 has a rectangular opening 3351d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position on the left side of the position where the slide rod 3352 is attached. The character body provided in the upper movable unit 3310 through the opening 3351d. A wiring member 3357 for connecting the drive motor 3315, the rotation detection sensor 3320, the decorative boards 3318, 3334, 3335, and the upper relay board 3016 extends to the rear side of the unit base 3351. In this example, the wiring member 3357 is a flexible flat cable.

  The lifting / lowering slider 3354 of the lifting / lowering unit 3350 includes a main body 3354a extending vertically in a rectangular shape, a mounting piece 3354b extending leftward from the upper end of the main body 3354a, and a right direction from the upper end of the main body 3354a. An extended plate-shaped piece 3354c that extends and a connecting hole 3354d that is formed at the center of the left and right direction at the upper end of the main body portion 3354a and penetrates in the front-rear direction are provided. The lift slider 3354 has an attachment piece 3354b attached to the front end of the slide member 3353, and an extension piece 3351c inserted into the slit 3356a of the slide guide 3356. Further, a connecting shaft 3366 of an elevating mechanism 3360 described later is inserted into the connecting hole 3354d of the elevating slider 3354. Note that an attachment hole for attaching the back base 3336 of the upper movable unit 3310 to the main body 3354a is formed at an appropriate position in the elevating slider 3354.

  The guide roller 3355 of the elevating unit 3350 has a cylindrical shape that extends short in the front-rear direction and has a front roller 3355a that has a flange that extends outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis at the front end, and is disposed on the rear side of the front roller 3355a and is short in the front-rear direction. And a rear roller 3355b having a flange extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis at the rear end. The guide roller 3355 is rotatably supported by being inserted into the roller support pin 3351b of the unit base 3351. The cylindrical portions of the front roller 3355a and the rear roller 3355b are the main body of the lift slider 3354. It comes in contact with the side surface of the portion 3354a.

  Further, the guide roller 3355 is inserted into the roller support pin 3351b so that the flange of the front roller 3355a is positioned on the front side of the elevating slider 3354 and the flange of the rear roller 3355b is positioned on the rear side of the elevating slider 3354. The main body 3354c of the elevating slider 3354 can be sandwiched in the front-rear direction by the flanges of the front roller 3355a and the rear roller 3355b, and the elevating slider 3354 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the guide rollers 3355 disposed on the left and right sides of the main body 3354a of the elevating slider 3354 can be smoothly guided in the vertical direction while restricting the main body 3354a of the elevating slider 3354 from moving in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  The slide guide 3356 of the lifting / lowering unit 3350 is formed in a crank shape in which the shape in plan view is located in the left-right direction from the center in the left-right direction and ahead of the right side, and extends in the front-rear direction at the center in the left-right direction and penetrates in the left-right direction. 3356a. In this slide guide 3356, an extension piece 3354c of the elevating slider 3354 is inserted into the slit 3356a from the left side, and the extension piece 3354c can move in the vertical direction and move in the front-rear direction. Can be regulated.

  The elevating mechanism 3360 of the elevating unit 3350 includes an elevating drive motor 3361 having a rotating shaft extending rearward, a spur gear-like drive gear 3362 driven to rotate by the elevating drive motor 3361, and a first transmission gear meshing with the drive gear 3362. A reduction gear 3363 having a second transmission gear having a smaller diameter than that of the first transmission gear 3363b and a second transmission gear 3363b of the reduction gear 3363 meshing with the rear side of the third transmission gear 3363a. A third transmission gear 3364a having the same diameter as the first transmission gear 3363a, and a cam having a link pin 3364b protruding rearward in parallel with the axial direction from a position eccentric to the rotation axis of the third transmission gear 3364a. A link gear 3364 and a base end that is disposed behind the cam link gear 3364 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 3351 3365a and a base end portion 3365a, and a connecting portion 3365b that is formed at a position away from the rotating shaft and is connected to the lift slider 3354, and a link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364. , And a rod-like connecting shaft 3366 that is supported by a connecting portion 3365b of the elevating arm 3365 and inserted into a connecting hole 3354d of the elevating slider 3354.

  The elevation mechanism 3360 is disposed in the vicinity of the right end on the front side of the unit base 3351 in a front view, and a drive gear 3362, a reduction gear 3363, and a cam link gear 3364 are arranged in a line from right to left.

  The elevating arm 3365 of the elevating mechanism 3360 has a base end portion 3365a having a support hole through which the arm support pin 3351c of the unit base 3351 is inserted, and the base end portion 3365a to the axis of the support hole (rotating shaft). A connecting portion 3365b disposed at a position away from the right-angle direction, an arm portion 3365c connecting the connecting portion 3365b and the base end portion 3365a, and a direction shorter than the arm portion 3365c from the base end portion 3365a to the arm portion 3365c. An extended portion 3365d that extends, a connecting portion 3365e that is formed at the tip of the extended portion 3365d and is connected to the link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364, and a plate-like detection that extends outward from the middle of the arm portion 3365c Piece 3365f.

  As shown in the drawing, the lifting arm 3365 has an arm portion 3365c extending from the base end portion 3365a to the center side in the left-right direction with respect to the unit base 3351, and an extending portion 3365d is the right end with respect to the unit base 3351. It extends to the side and is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the front. Further, the elevating arm 3365 has a connecting portion 3365b and a connecting portion 3365e extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base end portion 3365a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364 is slidably inserted.

  The elevating mechanism 3360 is guided by the guide groove 3351a of the unit base 3351 in the vertical direction and is slidable in the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365b of the elevating arm 3365 and supports the rear end of the connecting shaft 3366. A sliding member 3367, a lifting detection sensor 3368 for detecting the rotation position of the lifting arm 3365 by detecting a detection piece 3365f of the lifting arm 3365 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351, and a front side of the lifting arm 3365 are arranged. And a gear cover 3369 that is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3351 and covers the rear side of the drive gear 3362, the reduction gear 3363, and the cam link gear 3364, and a drive gear 3362 and a reduction gear 3363 that are attached to the front surface of the gear cover 3369. , And cam link gear 3364 A motor holder 3370 elevation drive motor 3361 to the front to cover the front side is mounted, further comprising a.

  The gear cover 3369 and the motor holder 3370 of the elevating mechanism 3360 cooperate with each other to support the reduction gear 3363 and the cam link gear 3364 rotatably. Further, the gear cover 369 is provided with a semicircular slit 3369a through which the link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364 can pass, and a long hole of an elevating arm 3365 in which the link pin 3364b is arranged on the rear side through the slit 3369a. It is inserted in the connection part 3365e of a shape. Reference numeral 3371 in the drawing is a washer for reducing the sliding resistance between the elevating slider 3354 and the elevating arm 3365 with the connecting shaft 3366 inserted.

  Next, raising and lowering of the upper movable unit 3310 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. In this upper movable effect unit 3300, the connecting portion 3365b of the elevating arm 3365 in the elevating unit 3350 is located on the left side in front of the rotation axis (base end portion 3365a) of the elevating arm 3365. Due to the load of the upper movable unit 3310 acting on the elevating arm 3365 via the slider 3354, a force (moment) for rotating the connecting portion 3365b in the direction of moving downward is always applied to the elevating arm 3365. .

  As shown in FIG. 108 and the like, the upper movable production unit 3300 is located at a retracted position in which the upper movable unit 3310 is raised in a normal state. In this state, the character base cover 3319 of the upper movable unit 3310 is excluded. Therefore, the character body 3311, the back surface decoration member 3330, and the like are not visible to the player.

  In the state of the retracted position where the upper movable unit 3310 is raised, the upper movable effect unit 3300 is configured such that the link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364 is a long hole-like connecting portion of the lifting arm 3365, as shown in FIG. It is in a state of being in contact with the end portion on the rotating shaft side in 3365e. In the retracted position, the normal line passing through the link pin 3364b with respect to the axis extending the connecting portion 3365e passes below the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364. The rotational moment applied to the arm 3365 causes a force to move the link pin 3364b downward from the connecting portion 3365e (a force to rotate the cam link gear 3364 counterclockwise in the rear view). The link pin 3364b is in contact with the end of the connecting portion 3365e on the rotating shaft side, and the cam link gear 3364 can no longer rotate counterclockwise in the rear view, and the lifting arm 3365 The rotation is restricted (locked). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the load of the upper movable unit 3310 from acting on the lifting drive motor 3361 via the lifting arm 3365, the cam link gear 3364, the reduction gear 3363, and the driving gear 3362. A load is not applied to the lifting drive motor 3361 at the retracted position.

  Further, in a state where the upper movable unit 3310 is positioned at the retreated position, the detection piece 3365f formed on the elevating arm 3365 is detected by the elevating detection sensor 3368. Accordingly, the up / down detection sensor 3368 can detect that the upper movable unit 3310 is located at the retracted position.

  When the up / down drive motor 3361 is rotated so that the cam link gear 3364 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view from the state of the retracted position in which the upper movable unit 3310 is raised, the link pin 3364b rotates the cam link gear 3364. While revolving around the center, it slides in a direction away from the base end portion 3365a in the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365e of the lifting arm 3365. And the raising / lowering arm 3365 rotates centering | focusing on the base end part 3365a with the revolution of the link pin 3364b sliding in the connection part 3365e.

  On the other hand, on the side of the connecting portion 3365b that supports the upper movable unit 3310 in the lifting arm 3365, a connecting shaft 3366 for connecting the lifting arm 3365 and the lifting slider 3354 is guided to the unit base 3351 via the connecting sliding member 3367. It is guided in the vertical direction by the groove 3351a and is slidably guided in the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365b in the lifting arm 3365. Thus, when the lifting arm 3365 rotates, the connecting sliding member 3365 slides in the connecting portion 3365b of the lifting arm 3365 and simultaneously slides in the guide groove 3351a and is supported by the connecting sliding member 3365. The lift slider 3354, that is, the upper movable unit 3310 is slid (lifted) in the vertical direction via the shaft 3366.

  In this example, as described above, the normal line passing through the link pin 3364b in the axis of the connection portion 3365e passes below the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364 in the retracted position state. The elevating arm 3365 rotates counterclockwise in the rear view until 3364b revolves in the clockwise direction in the rear view and the normal passing through the link pin 3364b passes through the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364. It becomes. When the link pin 3364b revolves in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, the normal passing through the link pin 3364b passes above the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364, and the lifting arm 3365 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the back. Will rotate in the direction of Accordingly, when the up / down drive motor 3361 is rotationally driven in the direction of lowering the upper movable unit 3310 in the retracted position, the upper movable unit 3310 is once raised and then lowered.

  Further, the lifting arm 3365 is further rotated so that the lower ends of the mounting piece 3354b and the extending piece 3354c of the lifting slider 3354 are in contact with the lower ends of the slits 3356a in the guide roller 3355 and the slider guide 3356, and at the same time, the lifting drive motor 3361. Is stopped, the downward movement of the elevating slider 3354 is stopped, and the upper movable unit 3310 is located at the lowering appearance position (see FIGS. 139 (b) and 140 (b), etc.). .

  In the state in which the upper movable production unit 3300 is located at the appearance position where the upper movable unit 3310 is lowered, the pair of character bodies 3311 and the back decoration member 3330 of the upper movable unit 3310 are more than the center logo decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500. Also, the character body 3311 and the like can be visually recognized from the player side (see FIG. 165).

  In order to raise the lower movable unit 3310 that has been lowered, the elevating drive motor 3361 is driven to rotate in the opposite direction to the above, and the elevating arm 3365 is rotated in the opposite direction to that when lowered to move the elevating slider 3354. Can be raised. When the detection piece 3365f of the lift arm 3365 is detected by the lift detection sensor 3368, the rotation of the lift drive motor 3361 is stopped, so that the upper movable unit 3310 can be returned to the raised retracted position. ing.

  In this way, the upper movable effect unit 3300 of this example has the pair of character bodies 3311 and the like as the center logo decoration member in the center accessory 2500 when the upper movable unit 3310 including the pair of character bodies 3311 is in the retreated position. Only a part of the character base cover 3319 located on the lower side and located on the lower side and not visible to the player is visible. The character base cover 3319 of the upper movable unit 3310 is decorated with light emission by LEDs mounted on the upper movable body lower decorative substrate 3318 disposed on the upper side and the upper movable body rear central decorative substrate 3334 disposed on the rear side. Thus, the character base cover 3319 facing from the lower end of the center logo decoration member 2520 can be brightly illuminated, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the character base cover 3319 (the rear side of the center logo decoration member 2520). In addition, the inside of the game area 1100 can be made conspicuous by illuminating the inside of the center accessory 2500.

  Further, the upper movable effect unit 3300 rotates the up-and-down drive motor 3361 according to the game state, so that the upper movable unit 3310 including the pair of character bodies 3311 can be played from the retreat position where it cannot be seen from the player side. It can be lowered to the appearance position visible from the player side, so that the appearance of the character body 3311 can make the player think that there is something good, and raise the expectation for the game. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, the upper movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the pair of character bodies 3311 that appear by raising and lowering around the axis extending in the vertical direction, and for example, outputs predetermined music in accordance with the rotation of the character body 3311. Thus, the player can be given an illusion that the character body 3311 is dancing to music, and the movement of the character body 3311 can be enjoyed to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating.

  Further, the upper movable effect unit 3300 can rotate the pair of character bodies 3311 around the axis extending in the vertical direction. Thus, the atmosphere of the character can be made different, various messages can be sent to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 which is hard to get tired of by various effects can be obtained.

[2-10. Left and right movable production unit]
Next, the left and right movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 141 to 158. FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the left and right movable effect units in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the left and right movable effects unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 143 is an exploded perspective view of the left and right movable effect unit as seen from the front after being disassembled into the rotating body unit and the slide unit, and FIG. FIG. FIG. 145 is a perspective view showing one rotating body unit in the left and right movable effect unit. Further, FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the left and right movable effect unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 147 is an exploded perspective view of the right and left movable effect unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  148 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the rotating decorative body in the rotating body unit of the left-right movable effect unit, FIG. 149 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the rotating decorative body following FIG. 148, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the rotation decoration body following. 151 is a perspective view showing the right unit slide unit in the left and right movable effect unit, FIG. 152 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit slide unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 153 is the right unit slide unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the slide unit. Further, FIG. 154 is a perspective view showing the left unit slide unit in the left and right movable effect unit, FIG. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit slide unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 156 is the left unit slide unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked after disassembling the slide unit. FIG. 157 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the right unit in the left / right movable effect unit, and FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the left unit in the left / right movable effect unit.

  The left and right movable effect units 3400 in the back unit 3000 are attached to the left and right sides of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001, and a right unit 3400R attached to the right side of the opening 3001c and a left unit 3400L attached to the left side of the opening 3001c. It consists of and. The left and right movable effect unit 3400 of this example includes a plurality of (three each) rotating body units 3410 and a plurality of rotating body units 3410 that slide independently of the right unit 3400R and the left unit 3400L, respectively. Right slide unit 3510 and left slide unit 3550).

  The left-right movable effect unit 3400 includes a rotating decoration body 3410A that is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rotating body unit 3410, and can perform a rotation effect by rotating the rotating decoration body 3410A. It can be done. In addition, the left and right movable effect unit 3400 can slide each rotating body unit 3410 independently in the left and right directions, and can perform a slide effect. Accordingly, various movable effects can be performed by appropriately combining the slide effect of the rotating body unit 3410 and the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A.

[2-10A. Configuration of rotating body unit]
Next, the configuration of the rotating body unit 3410 in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147 and the like. This rotating body unit 3410 is disposed on the rear side of the rotating body base 3411 and the plate-like rotating body base 3411 attached to the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 of the slide unit 3500, and the rotating shaft rotates. A rotation drive motor 3412 extending through the body base 3411 and extending forward, a disk-shaped rotation coupler 3413 fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotation drive motor 3412 and disposed on the front surface of the rotation body base 3411; A cylindrical shaft member 3414 that is connected to the front face so as to be integrally rotatable and extends forward, and is attached to the front end of the shaft member 3414 and bulges out in a substantially hemispherical shape to form a relief-like decoration on the surface. A translucent rotary head 3415 and a rear surface of the rotary head 3415 and a plurality of A rotary head decorative board 3416 ED is mounted, and a, a substrate bracket 3417 attached to the rotating body based 3411 has a relief-like decoration on the front to support the rotary head decorative substrate 3416 from the front side.

  The rotating body base 3411 of the rotating body unit 3410 has a rectangular shape with the same width (height) as the diameter of a semicircle with a predetermined radius centered on the rotating shaft of the rotary drive motor 3412 attached to the rear side. It is formed in a cannonball shape that combines shapes. The rotating body base 3411 has an opening through which a detection portion of a rotation detection sensor 3426, which will be described later, can be passed, and mounting holes and mounting bosses for fixing each member are formed at appropriate positions. .

  The rotating coupler 3413 of the rotating body unit 3410 is formed so that the rear surface is in contact with the front surface of the rotating body base 3411 and slides, and a plurality of protrusions 3413a are formed on the front surface. The rotary coupler 3413 is made of a material having a low frictional resistance.

  As shown in the figure, the shaft member 3414 of the rotating body unit 3410 includes a disc-shaped flange portion 3414a at the rear end, and a recess 3414b that fits with the protrusion 3413a of the rotary coupler 3413 is formed on the rear surface of the flange portion 3414a. (See FIG. 147). By fitting the protrusion 3413 a of the rotary coupler 3413 into the recess 3414 b of the shaft member 3414, the rotation of the rotary coupler 3413 can be transmitted to the shaft member 3414. As shown in the figure, the front end of the shaft member 3414 has a non-cylindrical outer periphery, and is fitted into a fitting hole 3424a of a turntable front member 3424 described later to rotate the turntable front member 3424 integrally. It can be made to.

  The rotating head 3415 of the rotating body unit 3410 has a heart-shaped translucent portion on a substantially hemispherical surface, and a heart-shaped light emitting decoration is provided by the LED of the rotating head decoration substrate 3416 disposed on the rear side. It has come to be. In addition, the surface of the other part of the rotating head 3415 except for the heart-shaped part has a metallic luster in the form of a plating, and the light from the outside is reflected to glitter. Yes. Note that the left and right movable effect unit 3400 of this example has a rotating head 3415 of the rotating body unit 3410 provided in the right unit 3400R formed in a substantially hemispherical shape, whereas a rotating head provided in the left unit 3400L. 3415 is formed in a hemispherical shape that is slightly crushed in the front-rear direction than the rotary head 3415 of the right unit 3400R. Therefore, the front end of the rotary head 3415 of the right unit 3400R is in a state of protruding forward from the rear surface of the game panel 1200, and the front end of the rotary head 3415 of the left unit 3400L is positioned rearward of the panel plate 1210. It is in a state (see FIG. 113, etc.).

  The rotating body unit 3410 is disposed behind the rotating head 3415 and has a passage hole 3418a through which the shaft member 3414 passes rotatably. The rotating body unit 3410 is formed in the vicinity of the rear end coaxially with the passage hole 3418a. A cylindrical fixed gear member 3418 that has a gear 3418b and is attached to the front surface of the rotating body base 3411, and has an inner diameter larger than the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418 and a fixed gear 3418b in the fixed gear member 3418. An annular guide ring 3419 that is inserted in a position that is relatively non-rotatable relative to the rear side, the rear end abutting against the front surface of the rotating body base 3411, and the rear end edge is slidable with respect to the front end of the guide ring 3419 And a plate-like turntable rear member 3420 having a through hole 3420a through which the fixed gear member 3418 can pass. That.

  The rotating body unit 3410 is rotatably supported on the front surface of the turntable rear member 3420, meshes with the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418, and protrudes forward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation axis. A movable link gear 3421 having a pin 3421a and a link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 are slidably inserted, and are perpendicular to the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. The first link groove 3422a is a long hole extending in the direction, and extends in parallel with the first link groove 3422a and is symmetrical with respect to the axis line connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. It has a pair of elongated hole-shaped second link grooves 3422b arranged to connect the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. It axially slidable and is a plate-shaped oscillating member 3422, and a.

  Further, the rotating body unit 3410 is slidably inserted along the swing member 3422 from the rear end of the insertion pin 3423a and the insertion pin 3423a which is slidably inserted into the second link groove 3422b of the swing member 3422 and extends in the front-rear direction. A drive arm portion 3423b extending to the outside of the moving member 3422, a shaft portion 3423c formed at the end opposite to the insertion pin 3423a of the drive arm portion 3423b, and rotatably supported by a turntable rear member 3420, a shaft portion 3423c. A pair of arm members 3423 having an operating arm portion 3423d extending in a different direction from the drive arm portion 3423b and having an outer surface decorated, and a turntable so as to cover the arm member 3423 and the swinging member 3422 from the front side The swing member 3422 is attached to the front surface of the rear member 3420 and the shaft core of the movable link gear 3421 and the shaft member. The shaft portion 3423c is supported so as to be slidable in the axial direction connecting the shaft core of 414, and the shaft portion 3423c is rotatably supported in cooperation with the turntable rear member 3420. And a turntable front member 3424 having a fitting hole 3424a that is fitted so as to be integrally rotatable.

  The fixed gear member 3418 of the rotator unit 3410 has a cylindrical inner shape formed so that the rotary coupler 3413 and the shaft member 3414 do not come into contact with each other, and the front end of the shaft member 3414 is located forward when assembled. The length is fixed. In this example, the number of teeth of the fixed gear 3418b in the fixed gear member 3418 is 30 and the number of teeth of the movable link gear 3421 meshing with the fixed gear 3418b is 10. Accordingly, when the fixed gear 3418b makes one rotation relatively, the movable link gear 3421 rotates three times, and the movable link gear 3421 revolves around the fixed gear member 3418 (fixed gear 3418b) once. The movable link gear 3421 rotates three times.

  Further, the rotary table front member 3420 of the rotating body unit 3410 extends forward from a position outside the through hole 3420a through which the fixed gear member 3418 can pass through in the front-rear direction and rotatably supports the movable link gear 3421. Are arranged symmetrically on both sides across an axis connecting the center of the shaft pin 3420b and the center of the shaft pin 3420b and the center of the through-hole 3420a, and are arranged at positions away from the radius of the through-hole 3420a from the axis. A bearing portion 3420c that rotatably supports the rear end of the shaft portion 3423c in the arm member 3423, and a through hole 3420a sandwiching the shaft pin 3420b on an axis line connecting the center of the shaft pin 3420b and the center of the through hole 3420a A plate-shaped detection piece 3420d that is disposed on the opposite side and protrudes backward.

  Further, the first link groove 3422a of the swing member 3422 of the rotating body unit 3410 is formed so that the center in the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. Has been. The swinging member 3422 has a U-shaped notch 3422c extending in the direction of the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. And a guide protrusion 3422d that extends parallel to the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414 on both sides of the notch 3422c and is guided by the rotating body front member 3424. The second link groove 3422b is disposed outside the guide protrusion 3422d with respect to the axis.

  Further, the operating arm portion 3423d of the arm member 3423 of the rotator unit 3410 has a direction in which the tip side opposite to the shaft portion 3423c approaches the axis line connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. It is formed in the shape of a crooked bend, and a circular decoration imitating a hand is formed at the tip.

  Further, the rotating table front member 3424 of the rotating body unit 3410 includes a cylindrical tube portion 3424b having a fitting hole 3424a fitted to the front end of the shaft member 3414 at the front end, and a swing member from the rear end of the tube portion 3424b. And a plate-like main body 3424c that extends in parallel with 3422 and substantially covers the front surface of the rear turntable member 3420. The cylindrical portion 3424b of the turntable front member 3424 is formed so that the shape of the inner surface does not come into contact with the fixed gear member 3418, and can accommodate the front side of the fixed gear member 3418 relative to the fixed gear 3418b. Yes.

  The turntable front member 3424 extends rearward from a symmetrical position on both sides across the axis connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414, and rotates the shaft 3423c of the arm member 3423. A pair of support pins 3424d for enabling support, and an oscillating member that extends in parallel with an axis that is arranged between the pair of support pins 3424d and connects the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. And a guide portion 3424e for slidably guiding the guide protrusion 3422d of 3422 (see FIG. 147). The swinging member 3422 can be slid in the axial direction connecting the shaft core of the movable link gear 3421 and the shaft core of the shaft member 3414 by the guide portion 3424e of the turntable front member 3424.

  Furthermore, the rotating body unit 3410 is attached to the rear side of the rotating body base 3411 and covers the mounting portion of the rotation drive motor 3412. The rotating body unit 3410 is sandwiched between the motor cover 3425 and the rotating body base 3411, and the rear rotating table member. A rotation detection sensor 3426 for detecting the detection piece 3420d of 3420, a three-dimensional decoration is formed on the front surface of the rotating body base 3411, and a part thereof is translucent. A through hole 3427a having a size through which the ring 3419 can pass, and a rotating body base decoration 3427 having an opening 3427b through which the detection unit of the rotation detection sensor 3426 can pass.

  The rotating body base ornament 3427 of the rotating body unit 3410 is formed in a bullet shape whose front view is slightly larger than the rotating body base 3411, and a plurality of circular light-transmitting portions 3427c are formed so as to surround the through hole 3427a. They are arranged in a horseshoe shape.

  The rotating body unit 3410 further includes a base decoration board 3428 that is attached to the rear side of the rotating body base decoration 3427 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. As illustrated, the base decoration board 3428 is formed in a horseshoe shape, and LEDs are respectively arranged at positions corresponding to the plurality of light transmitting portions 3427 c of the rotating body base decoration 3427. The base decoration board 3428 can light-decorate the rotating body base decoration 3427 by appropriately causing the mounted LED to emit light.

  Further, the rotating body unit 3410 is disposed at the front end of the fixed gear member 3418 and is disposed on the outer periphery of the sliding washer 3429 disposed in the tube portion 3424b of the turntable front member 3424 and the tube portion 3424b of the turntable front member 3424. A substrate support member 3430 that supports the rotating head decoration substrate 3416 by contacting the front surface of the main body portion 3424c of the rotating table front member 3424 and the rear end thereof is attached to the front side of the rotating table rear member 3420 and sandwiching the shaft pin 3420b. And a rotating body cover 3431 that covers the front surface opposite to the through hole 3420a.

  The rotary unit 3410 includes a rotary coupler 3413, a shaft member 3414, a rotary head 3415, a rotary base rear member 3420, a movable link gear 3421, a swing member 3422, an arm member 3423, and a rotary base front member 3424 from a rotary drive motor 3412. And the turntable cover 3431 is configured to rotate, and these constitute a rotating decorative body 3410A.

[2-10B. Rotating decorative body operation]
Subsequently, the movement of the rotating decorative body 3410A in the rotating body unit 3410 of the left-right movable effect unit 3400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. When the rotary unit 3410 of this example rotates the rotary shaft of the rotary drive motor 3412 according to the gaming state, the rotary member 3410 extends forward via a rotary coupler 3413 attached to the rotary shaft of the rotary drive motor 3412. 3414 rotates. A rotary head 3415 is attached to the tip of the shaft member 3414, and a substantially hemispherical rotary head 3415 arranged at the foremost end of the rotary unit 3410 is rotated by a rotary drive motor 3412.

  Further, the front end of the shaft member 3414 in the rotating decorative body 3410A is fitted and inserted into the fitting hole 3424a of the rotating table front member 3424, so that the rotating table front member 3424 rotates together with the shaft member 3414. ing. The front rotating table member 3424 supports the swinging member 3422 so as to be slidable, and supports the shaft portion 3423c of the pair of arm members 3423 so as to be rotatable. Since the rotating table front member 3424 rotates through the shaft member 3414, the swinging member 3422, the arm member 3423, and the rotating table rear member 3420 are also moved together with the front table 3424. The shaft member 3414 rotates integrally around the axis. Further, since the turntable rear member 3420 rotatably supports the movable link gear 3421 at a position away from the axis of the shaft member 3414, the movable link gear 3421 is pivoted together with the rotation of the turntable rear member 3420. The member 3414 revolves around the axis.

  On the other hand, the fixed gear member 3418 arranged coaxially with the shaft member 3414 is fixedly attached to the rotating body base 3411 to which the rotation drive motor 3412 is attached, and the rotation shaft of the rotation drive motor 3412 can be driven to rotate. , Not to rotate. Since the movable link gear 3421 that revolves around the axis of the shaft member 3414 is engaged with the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418 that does not rotate, the rear of the turntable that pivotally supports the movable link gear 3421. When the member 3420 rotates, the movable link gear 3421 revolves around the axis of the shaft member 3414 and simultaneously rotates (rotates) relative to the turntable rear member 3420.

  The movable link gear 3421 is provided with a link pin 3421a that protrudes forward at a position that is eccentric from the rotation axis. When the movable link gear 3421 rotates (rotates), the link pin 3421a rotates to the rotation axis (rotation axis). ) It will revolve around. When the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 revolves, the distance between the shaft core of the shaft member 3414 and the link pin 3421a approaches or separates.

  In the rotating decorative body 3410A of this example, the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis line connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414 in the swing member 3422. Since the swing member 3422 is inserted into the first link groove 3422a and supported so as to be slidable in the axial direction connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414, the link When the pin 3421a revolves, the link pin 3421a slides in the first link groove 3422a, and at the same time, the link pin 3421a moves the swing member 3422 through the first link groove 3422a and the shaft core of the movable link gear 3421 and the shaft member 3414. The pivot member 3422 is pressed in the axial direction connecting the shaft core of the movable link gear 3421. Connecting the axis of the shaft member 3414 is adapted to slide in the axial direction.

  The swing member 3422 slides back and forth within the range of the revolution diameter of the link pin 3421a with respect to the axial direction connecting the axis of the movable link gear 3421 and the axis of the shaft member 3414. .

  By sliding the swing member 3422, the insertion pin 3423 a of the arm member 3423 inserted into the second link groove 3422 b of the swing member 3422 connects the shaft center of the movable link gear 3421 and the shaft core of the shaft member 3414. When the insertion pin 3423a moves, the arm member 3423 rotates about the shaft portion 3423c. As a result, the pair of arm members 3423 moves such that the distal end (free end) of the operating arm portion 3423d approaches or separates from the axis of the shaft member 3414.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 148, the rotating body unit 3410 of this example is a rotating body formed in a substantially bullet-like shape in a front view of the heart-shaped portion of the rotating head 3415 in the rotating decorative body 3410A. In a state where the body base decoration 3427 (rotary body base 3411) is positioned so as to face the tip of the shell, the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 is located farthest from the shaft member 3414, and a pair of The distal end of the operating arm portion 3423d of the arm member 3423 is positioned behind the rotary head 3415. As a result, the tip of the arm member 3423 is hardly visible from the player side.

  In this state, for example, when the rotary head 3415 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the rotation drive motor 3412, as described above, the entire rotating decorative body 3410 A rotates around the axis of the shaft member 3414, and the movable link The gear 3421 revolves around the axis of the shaft member 3414, that is, around the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418 fixed to the movable body base 3411 in the clockwise direction. When the movable link gear 3421 revolves around the fixed gear 3418b, the movable link gear 3421 itself rotates (rotates) in the counterclockwise direction. The link pin 3421a revolves in a direction relatively approaching the axis of the shaft member 3414, and the swing member 3422 slides in a direction approaching the shaft member 3414.

  When the swinging member 3422 moves in a direction approaching the shaft member 3414, the pair of arm members 3423 are separated from each other by the second link groove 3422b of the swinging member 3422. And the tip of the operating arm portion 3423d moves to the outside of the rotary head 3415 in a front view. As a result, the tip of the arm member 3423 (actuating arm portion 3423d) can be clearly seen from the player side.

  When the movable link gear 3421 revolves due to the rotation of the rotating decorative member 3410A, and the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 rotates to the position closest to the shaft member 3414, the swinging member 3422 also changes to the shaft member 3414. On the other hand, the closest state is reached, and the ends of the pair of arm members 3423 are also farthest apart (see FIG. 149). In this example, since the number of teeth of the movable link gear 3421 is 1/3 of the number of teeth of the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418, it is rotated by 60 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state of FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 149, the movable link gear 3421 is rotated halfway so that the tips of the pair of arm members 3423 are separated most.

  When the rotating decorative member 3410A is further rotated in the clockwise direction from this state, the sliding member 3422 slides away from the shaft member 3414 by the revolving link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 that rotates by revolving. Then, the sliding of the sliding member 3422 causes the pair of arm members 3423 to rotate in a direction in which the tips approach each other. When the rotating decorative body 3410A rotates 60 degrees in the clockwise direction from the state shown in FIG. 149, the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 is located farthest from the shaft member 3414, and the ends of the arm members 3423 are also aligned with each other. It is closest and hidden behind the rotary head 3415 in front view (see FIG. 150).

  In the rotating body unit 3410 of this example, when the rotating decorative body 3410A rotates 120 degrees, the tips of the pair of arm members 3423 appear and disappear once from the rear side of the rotating head 3415. That is, when the rotating decorative body 3410A makes one rotation, the tips of the pair of arm members 3423 appear and disappear three times from the rear side of the rotating head 3415.

  Thus, according to the rotating body unit 3410, when the rotating decorative body 3410A is rotated by the rotation drive motor 3412, the pair of arm members 3423 appear and disappear from the rear side of the rotating head 3415. Can be greatly changed, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  In addition, the rotating body unit 3410 has a shaft member 3414 even if a force that moves the front end side of the shaft member 3414 downward is applied by a load of the rotary head 3415 attached to the front end of the shaft member 3414 extending in the front-rear direction. Since the rear surface of the disk-shaped rotary coupler 3413 attached to the rear end is in contact with the front surface of the rotating body base 3411, the shaft member 3414 may not easily fall down with respect to the axis extending in the front-rear direction. In addition, the shaft member 3414 can be prevented from rotating in a straight state with the rotary head 3415 and the like being eccentric.

[2-10C. Configuration of slide unit]
Next, the configuration of the slide unit 3500 in the left / right movable effect unit 3400 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 151 to 156. The slide unit 3500 of this example includes a right slide unit 3510 attached to the right side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001, and a left slide unit 3550 attached to the left side of the opening 3001c. The right slide unit 3510 and the left slide unit 3550 are formed symmetrically with each other.

  First, as shown in FIGS. 151 to 153, the right slide unit 3510 in the slide unit 3500 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 has a right unit base 3511 attached to the right side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and extending in the vertical direction. I have. The right unit base 3511 includes three support portions (3511a, 3511b, and 3511c) including an upper support portion 3511a, a middle support portion 3511b, and a lower support portion 3511c for supporting the three rotating body units 3410 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. ).

  Each of the support portions 3511a, 3511b, and 3511c in the right unit base 3511 has slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540, which will be described later, disposed therein and a rectangular base opening portion 3511d penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a base opening portion 3511d. A horizontally-long rectangular shaft opening 3511e that is formed on the upper side and has slide shafts 3521, 3531, and 3541, which will be described later, disposed therethrough and penetrates in the front-rear direction. Further, each base opening 3511d is formed with a rail portion 3511f extending in the left-right direction in which lower rollers 3524, 3534, 3544 described later can roll on the lower side of the inner peripheral edge.

  The upper support portion 3511a of the right unit base 3511 is formed in a state in which a rectangular base opening portion 3511d and a shaft opening portion 3511e extending in the left-right direction are inclined so that the left side is lowered in front view. . The middle support portion 3511b is formed such that a rectangular base opening portion 3511d and a shaft opening portion 3511e extend in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Further, the lower support portion 3511c is formed in a state where a rectangular base opening portion 3511d and a shaft opening portion 3511e extending in the left-right direction are inclined so that the left side is higher in a front view.

  Further, on each support portion 3511a, 3511b, 3511c of the right unit base 3511, a motor attachment portion 3511g for attaching slide drive motors 3525, 3535, 3545, which will be described later, to the lower side of each base opening portion 3511d, and a motor attachment A meshing opening 3511h formed between a portion 3511g and a base opening 3511d immediately above is formed so that a part of a first transmission gear 3516 described later faces the front side. Although not described in detail, the right unit base 3511 is provided with mounting holes, mounting bosses and the like for mounting various members at appropriate positions.

  The right slide unit 3510 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like upper right slide base 3520 disposed on the front surface of the base opening 3511d in the upper support portion 3511a of the right unit base 3511 and to which the rotating body unit 3410 is attached on the front side. A cylindrical upper right slide shaft 3521 that supports the upper end of the upper right slide base 3520 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3511e of the upper support portion 3511a and extends in the left-right direction, and an upper right slide shaft 3521 An upper right shaft bracket 3522 that supports both left and right ends and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 is rotatably supported on the left and right ends of the upper right lower roller support member 3523 and the upper right lower roller support member 3523 that are attached to the lower portion of the upper right slide base 3520, and on the rail portion 3511f of the right unit base 3511. A pair of lower rollers 3524, which are allowed to roll, and an upper right slide base 3520 are moved in the left-right direction along the upper right slide shaft 3521 to be arranged below the upper support portion 3511a in the right unit base 3511 and attached to the motor mounting portion 3511g. An upper right slide drive motor 3525 that is attached and an upper right position detection sensor 3526 that is attached to the right unit base 3511 and detects the slide position of the upper right slide base 3520 are provided.

  The right upper slide base 3520 of the right slide unit 3510 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The upper right slide base 3520 has a pair of slide receiving portions 3520a formed at the right end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction and having a through-hole through which the upper right slide shaft 3521 can be inserted, and formed at the lower side and extended in the left-right direction. A rack gear 3520b and an insertion hole 3520c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The upper right slide base 3520 includes a detection piece 3520d that extends downward from the lower side in a plate shape and can be detected by the upper right position detection sensor 3526.

  The upper right slide base 3520 is supported by the upper right slide shaft 3521 via a slide bush 3512 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3520a are inserted into the upper right slide shaft 3521, respectively. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3512 includes a flange portion extending outwardly at one end portion of the cylindrical shape, and the flange portions are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3520a. Inserted to face each other. Further, a cylindrical shaft collar 3513 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3520a (slide bush 3512) in the upper right slide shaft 3521, and the slide bush 3512 moves in a direction in which the slide bush 3512 approaches each other by the shaft collar 3513. Therefore, the slide bush 3512 cannot be removed from the slide receiving portion 3520a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3520a in the upper right slide base 3520 are disposed at a distance of about 1/2 with respect to the length of the inserted upper right slide shaft 3521 and are loose with respect to the upper right slide shaft 3521. It has become difficult.

  The upper right slide shaft 3521 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The right upper shaft bracket 3522 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511. The upper right slide shaft 3521 and the upper right shaft bracket 3522 are attached so as to follow the obliquely inclined shaft opening 3511e of the upper support portion 3511a, and the upper right slide base 3520 is the same as the direction in which the base opening 3511d extends. It can be slid in the direction, that is, the direction in which the left side is lowered in the front view (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  The pair of lower rollers 3524 pivotally supported by the upper right lower roller support member 3523 in the right slide unit 3510 includes a rail portion 3511f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3511d in the upper support portion 3511a of the right unit base 3511. The upper right lower roller support member 3523 (lower part of the upper right slide base 3520) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3511f and moved in the front / rear direction. It can be regulated.

  Therefore, in the right slide unit 3510, the upper right slide base 3520 is suspended and supported by the upper right slide shaft 3521, and is moved in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 3511f in the upper support portion 3511a of the upper right slide shaft 3521 and the right unit base 3511. It can be slidably supported in the left-right direction while being regulated.

  Further, the upper right slide drive motor 3525 of the right slide unit 3510 has a rotating shaft extending rearwardly through the right unit base 3511 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3511g of the upper support portion 3511a on the front side of the right unit base 3511. As installed.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 is disposed on the rear side of the right unit base 3511, and a drive gear 3514 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper right slide drive motor 3525 so as to be integrally rotatable. A large-diameter large-diameter gear 3515a, a reduction gear 3515 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3515a, has a smaller-diameter gear 3515b smaller than the large-diameter gear 3515a, and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511; The first transmission gear that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3515b and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511 and that part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the right unit base 3511 through the meshing opening 3511e of the right unit base 3511. 3516 and the front opening from the meshing opening 3511e in the first transmission gear 3516 Includes a second transmission gear 3517 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3520b meshing right unit base 3511 of the upper right slide base 3520, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  When the drive gear 3514 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction by the right upper slide drive motor 3525, the right slide unit 3510 receives the rack gear of the upper right slide base 3520 via the reduction gear 3515, the first transmission gear 3516, and the second transmission gear 3517. The upper right slide base 3520 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to 3520b. Accordingly, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the upper right slide base 3520 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  The right slide unit 3510 in the slide unit 3500 of the present example is a plate-like right middle slide base 3530 that is disposed in front of the base opening 3511d in the middle support portion 3511b of the right unit base 3511 and to which the rotary unit 3410 is attached on the front side. A columnar right middle slide shaft 3531 that supports the upper end of the right middle slide base 3530 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3511e of the middle support portion 3511b and extends in the left-right direction; A right middle shaft bracket 3532 that supports the left and right ends of the slide shaft 3531 and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511.

  The right slide unit 3510 includes a right middle lower roller support member 3533 attached to the lower part of the right middle slide base 3530 and a rail portion of the right unit base 3511 that is rotatably supported at both right and left ends of the right middle lower roller support member 3533. A pair of lower rollers 3534 capable of rolling on 3511f and the right middle slide base 3530 are moved in the left-right direction along the right middle slide shaft 3531, and are disposed below the middle support portion 3511b in the right unit base 3511. A right middle slide drive motor 3535 attached to the motor attachment portion 3511g and a right middle position detection sensor 3536 which is attached to the right unit base 3511 and detects the slide position of the right middle slide base 3530 are provided.

  The right middle slide base 3530 of the right slide unit 3510 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The right middle slide base 3530 is formed at the right end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and has a pair of slide receiving portions 3530a each having a through hole through which the right middle slide shaft 3531 can be inserted. The extended rack gear 3530b and an insertion hole 3530c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The middle right slide base 3530 includes a detection piece 3530d that extends upward from the upper side in a plate shape and can be detected by the middle right position detection sensor 3536.

  The right middle slide base 3530 is supported by the right middle slide shaft 3531 via a slide bush 3512 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3530 a are inserted into the right middle slide shaft 3531. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3512 includes a flange portion extending outward at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flange portions are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3530a. Inserted to face each other. In addition, a cylindrical shaft collar 3513 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3530a (slide bush 3512) in the right middle slide shaft 3531, and the slide bush 3512 approaches each other by the shaft collar 3513. It is possible to prevent the slide bush 3512 from coming off from the slide receiving portion 3530a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3530a in the right middle slide base 3530 are arranged at a distance of about 1/3 from the length of the right middle slide shaft 3531 to be inserted, with respect to the right middle slide shaft 3531. It has become difficult to play.

  The right middle slide shaft 3531 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The right middle shaft bracket 3532 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511. The right middle slide shaft 3531 and the right middle shaft bracket 3532 are attached along the shaft opening 3511e extending horizontally of the middle support portion 3511b, and the right middle slide base 3530 extends from the base opening 3511d. It can be slid in the same direction as the direction, that is, in the horizontal direction in the front view (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  Further, the pair of lower rollers 3534 pivotally supported by the right middle lower roller support member 3533 in the right slide unit 3510 are rail portions 3511f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3511d in the middle support portion 3511b of the right unit base 3511. Are supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and the right middle lower roller support member 3533 (lower part of the right middle slide base 3530) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3511f and moved in the front-rear direction. Can be regulated.

  Accordingly, in the right slide unit 3510, the right middle slide base 3530 is suspended and supported by the right middle slide shaft 3531, and the rail portion 3511f in the middle support portion 3511b of the right middle slide shaft 3531 and the right unit base 3511 is moved in the front-rear direction. Can be supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  The right middle slide drive motor 3535 of the right slide unit 3510 extends rearward through the right unit base 3511 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3511g of the middle support portion 3511b on the front side of the right unit base 3511. Installed to do.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 is disposed on the rear side of the right unit base 3511, and a drive gear 3514 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the middle right slide drive motor 3535 so as to be integrally rotatable. A large-diameter gear 3515a having a large diameter, a reduction gear 3515 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3515a, has a small-diameter gear 3515b that is smaller than the large-diameter gear 3515a, and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511; A first transmission that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3515b of 3515 and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511 and a part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the right unit base 3511 through the meshing opening 3511e of the right unit base 3511. Gear 3516 and front opening from meshing opening 3511e in first transmission gear 3516 And a the second transmission gear 3517, which is rotatably supported on the front of the rack gear 3530b meshing right unit base 3511 of the right in the slide base 3530 with sites meshes exposed to.

  The right slide unit 3510 has a right middle slide base 3530 via a reduction gear 3515, a first transmission gear 3516, and a second transmission gear 3517 when the drive gear 3514 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction by a right middle slide drive motor 3535. The right middle slide base 3530 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to the rack gear 3530b. Accordingly, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the right middle slide base 3530 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  The right slide unit 3510 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like lower right slide base 3540 that is disposed on the front surface of the base opening 3511d in the lower support portion 3511c of the right unit base 3511 and to which the rotating body unit 3410 is attached on the front side. A cylindrical lower right slide shaft 3541 that supports the upper end of the lower right slide base 3540 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3511e of the lower support portion 3511c and extends in the left-right direction; A lower right shaft bracket 3542 that supports both left and right ends of the slide shaft 3541 and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511.

  The right slide unit 3510 includes a lower right lower roller support member 3543 attached to a lower portion of the lower right slide base 3540 and a rail portion in the right unit base 3511 that is rotatably supported at both right and left ends of the lower right lower roller support member 3543. A pair of lower rollers 3544 capable of rolling on 3511f and a lower right slide base 3540 are moved in the left-right direction along the lower right slide shaft 3541 and arranged below the lower support portion 3511c in the right unit base 3511. A lower right slide drive motor 3545 attached to the motor attachment portion 3511g and a lower right position detection sensor 3546 attached to the right unit base 3511 and detecting the slide position of the lower right slide base 3540 are provided.

  The lower right slide base 3540 of the right slide unit 3510 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The lower right slide base 3540 has a pair of slide receiving portions 3540a formed at the right end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction and having a through-hole through which the lower right slide shaft 3541 can be inserted, and formed on the lower side in the left-right direction. An extended rack gear 3540b and an insertion hole 3540c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The lower right slide base 3540 includes a detection piece 3540d that extends downward from the lower side in a plate shape and can be detected by the lower right position detection sensor 3546.

  The lower right slide base 3540 is supported by the lower right slide shaft 3541 through a slide bush 3512 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3540a are inserted into the lower right slide shaft 3541, respectively. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3512 includes a flange extending outwardly at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3540a. Inserted to face each other. In addition, a cylindrical shaft collar 3513 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3540a (slide bush 3512) in the lower right slide shaft 3541, and the slide bush 3512 approaches each other by the shaft collar 3513. It is possible to prevent the slide bush 3512 from coming out of the slide receiving portion 3540a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3540a in the lower right slide base 3540 are arranged at a distance of about 1/2 with respect to the length of the lower right slide shaft 3541 to be inserted, with respect to the lower right slide shaft 3541. It has become difficult to play.

  The lower right slide shaft 3541 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The lower right shaft bracket 3542 of the right slide unit 3510 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the right unit base 3511. The lower right slide shaft 3541 and the lower right shaft bracket 3542 are attached along a shaft opening 3511e inclined obliquely of the lower support portion 3511c, and extend from the lower right slide base 3540 to the base opening 3511d. It can be slid in the same direction as that of the direction, that is, in a direction in which the left side is higher when viewed from the front (an axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  The pair of lower rollers 3544 pivotally supported by the lower right lower roller support member 3543 in the right slide unit 3510 is a rail portion 3511f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3511d in the lower support portion 3511c of the right unit base 3511. Are supported so as to be able to roll in the front-rear direction, and the lower right lower roller support member 3543 (lower part of the lower right slide base 3540) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3511f and moved in the front-rear direction. Can be regulated.

  Therefore, in the right slide unit 3510, the lower right slide base 3540 is suspended and supported by the lower right slide shaft 3541, and is moved back and forth by the rail portion 3511f in the lower right slide shaft 3541 and the lower support portion 3511c of the right unit base 3511. Can be supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  Further, the lower right slide drive motor 3545 of the right slide unit 3510 extends rearward through the right unit base 3511 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3511g of the lower support portion 3511c on the front side of the right unit base 3511. Installed to do.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 is arranged on the rear side of the right unit base 3511 and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower right slide drive motor 3545 so as to be integrally rotatable. The drive gear 3514 meshes with the drive gear 3514 and is driven by the drive gear 3514. A large-diameter gear 3515a having a large diameter, a reduction gear 3515 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3515a, has a small-diameter gear 3515b that is smaller than the large-diameter gear 3515a, and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511; A first transmission that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3515b of 3515 and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3511 and a part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the right unit base 3511 through the meshing opening 3511e of the right unit base 3511. Gear 3516 and front opening from meshing opening 3511e in first transmission gear 3516 Includes a second transmission gear 3517 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3540b meshing right unit base 3511 of the lower right slide base 3540, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  The right slide unit 3510 has a lower right slide base 3540 via a reduction gear 3515, a first transmission gear 3516, and a second transmission gear 3517 when the drive gear 3514 is driven to rotate in an appropriate direction by a lower right slide drive motor 3545. The lower right slide base 3540 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to the rack gear 3540b. Accordingly, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the lower right slide base 3540 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  Reference numeral 3518 in the drawing is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 3511, and includes a rotation drive motor 3412, a rotary head decoration board 3416, a rotation detection sensor 3426, a base decoration board 3428, and a right relay. This is a wiring retainer for pressing a wiring member (not shown) for connecting to the substrate 3018.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 154 to 156, the left slide unit 3550 in the slide unit 3500 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 is attached to the left side of the opening 3001 c in the back box 3001 and extends in the vertical direction. It has. The left unit base 3551 has three support portions (3551a, 3551b, 3551c), an upper support portion 3551a, a middle support portion 3551b, and a lower support portion 3551c for supporting the three rotator units 3410 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. ).

  Each of the support portions 3551a, 3551b, 3551c in the left unit base 3551 is provided with a rectangular base opening 3551d penetrating in the front-rear direction with slide bases 3560, 3570, 3580, which will be described later, and a base opening 3551d. The slide shaft 3561, 3571, 3581, which will be described later, is disposed on the upper side, and is provided with a horizontally-long rectangular shaft opening 3551e penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, each base opening 3551d is formed with a rail portion 3551f extending in the left-right direction in which lower rollers 3564, 3574, and 3584 described later can roll on the lower side of the inner peripheral edge.

  The upper support portion 3551a of the left unit base 3551 is formed in a state in which a rectangular base opening 3551d and a shaft opening 3551e extending in the left-right direction are inclined so that the right side is lowered in front view. . Further, the middle support portion 3551b is formed such that a rectangular base opening portion 3551d and a shaft opening portion 3551e extend in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. Further, the lower support portion 3551c is formed in a state in which a rectangular base opening portion 3551d and a shaft opening portion 3551e extending in the left-right direction are inclined so that the right side is higher in a front view.

  Further, on each support portion 3551a, 3551b, 3551c of the left unit base 3551, a motor attachment portion 3551g for attaching slide drive motors 3565, 3575, 3585, which will be described later, to the lower side of each base opening portion 3551d, and a motor attachment A meshing opening 3551h is formed between a portion 3551g and a base opening 3551d directly above, and a part of a first transmission gear 3556, which will be described later, faces the front side. Although not described in detail, the left unit base 3551 is formed with mounting holes, mounting bosses, and the like for mounting various members at appropriate positions.

  The left slide unit 3550 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like upper left slide base 3560 that is disposed on the front surface of the base opening 3551d in the upper support portion 3551a of the left unit base 3551 and the rotary body unit 3410 is attached to the front side. A cylindrical upper left slide shaft 3561 that supports the upper end of the upper left slide base 3560 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3551e of the upper support portion 3551a and extends in the left-right direction, and an upper left slide shaft 3561 An upper left shaft bracket 3562 that supports both left and right ends and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551.

  The left slide unit 3550 is rotatably supported on the left and right ends of the left upper and lower roller support members 3563 and the left upper and lower roller support members 3563 that are attached to the lower part of the upper left slide base 3560, and on the rail portion 3551f of the left unit base 3551. A pair of lower rollers 3564 that are allowed to roll and an upper left slide base 3560 are moved in the left-right direction along the upper left slide shaft 3561 and are arranged below the upper support portion 3551a in the left unit base 3551, and are attached to the motor mounting portion 3551g. An upper left slide drive motor 3565 that is attached, and an upper left position detection sensor 3566 that is attached to the left unit base 3551 and detects the slide position of the upper left slide base 3560 are provided.

  The upper left slide base 3560 of the left slide unit 3550 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The upper left slide base 3560 has a pair of slide receiving portions 3560a formed at the left end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction and having a through hole through which the upper left slide shaft 3561 can be inserted, and formed at the lower side and extended in the left-right direction. A rack gear 3560b and an insertion hole 3560c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The upper left slide base 3560 includes a detection piece 3560d that extends downward from the lower side in a plate shape and can be detected by the upper left position detection sensor 3566.

  The upper left slide base 3560 is supported by the upper left slide shaft 3561 through a slide bush 3552 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3560a are inserted into the upper left slide shaft 3561, respectively. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3552 is provided with a flange extending outward at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected with respect to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3560a. Inserted to face each other. Further, a cylindrical shaft collar 3553 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3560a (slide bush 3552) in the upper left slide shaft 3561, and the slide bush 3552 moves in a direction in which the slide bush 3552 approaches each other. This prevents the slide bush 3552 from coming off from the slide receiving portion 3560a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3560a in the upper left slide base 3560 are arranged at a distance of about 1/2 with respect to the length of the inserted upper left slide shaft 3561, and are loose with respect to the upper left slide shaft 3561. It has become difficult.

  The upper left slide shaft 3561 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The upper left shaft bracket 3562 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551. The upper left slide shaft 3561 and the upper left shaft bracket 3562 are attached along the obliquely inclined shaft opening 3551e of the upper support portion 3551a, and the upper left slide base 3560 is the same as the extending direction of the base opening 3551d. It can be slid in the direction, that is, the direction in which the right side is lowered in front view (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  In addition, the pair of lower rollers 3564 pivotally supported by the left upper and lower roller support members 3563 in the left slide unit 3550 has a rail portion 3551f provided on the lower side of the base opening portion 3551d in the upper support portion 3551a of the left unit base 3551. The upper and lower roller support members 3563 (lower part of the upper left slide base 3560) are slidably supported along the rail portion 3551f and moved in the front and rear direction. It can be regulated.

  Accordingly, in the left slide unit 3550, the upper left slide base 3560 is suspended and supported by the upper left slide shaft 3561, and is moved in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 3551f in the upper support portion 3551a of the upper left slide shaft 3561 and the left unit base 3551. It can be slidably supported in the left-right direction while being regulated.

  Further, the upper left slide drive motor 3565 of the left slide unit 3550 has a rotating shaft extending rearward through the left unit base 3551 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3551g of the upper support portion 3551a on the front side of the left unit base 3551. As installed.

  The left slide unit 3550 is disposed on the rear side of the left unit base 3551 and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the upper left slide drive motor 3565 so as to be integrally rotatable. The drive gear 3554 is meshed with the drive gear 3554 and more than the drive gear 3554. A large-diameter gear 3555a, a reduction gear 3555 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3555a, has a small-diameter gear 3555b that is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter gear 3555a, and is supported on the rear surface of the right unit base 3551, and a reduction gear 3555 The first transmission gear that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3555b and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the left unit base 3551 and that part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the left unit base 3551 through the meshing opening 3551e of the left unit base 3551. 3556 and the front opening from the meshing opening 3551e in the first transmission gear 3556 Includes a second transmission gear 3557 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3560b meshing with the left unit base 3551 of the upper left slide base 3560, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  When the left slide unit 3550 rotates the drive gear 3554 in an appropriate direction by the upper left slide drive motor 3565, the rack gear of the upper left slide base 3560 is passed through the reduction gear 3555, the first transmission gear 3556, and the second transmission gear 3557. The upper left slide base 3560 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to 3560b. Thus, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the upper left slide base 3560 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  The left slide unit 3550 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like left middle slide base 3570 that is disposed in front of the base opening 3551d in the middle support portion 3551b of the left unit base 3551 and to which the rotating body unit 3410 is attached on the front side. A columnar left middle slide shaft 3571 that supports the upper end of the left middle slide base 3570 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and is disposed in the shaft opening 3551e of the middle support portion 3551b and extends in the left-right direction; A left middle shaft bracket 3572 that supports the left and right ends of the slide shaft 3571 and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551.

  The left slide unit 3550 includes a left middle lower roller support member 3573 attached to a lower portion of the left middle slide base 3570 and a rail portion in the left unit base 3551 that is rotatably supported on both left and right ends of the left middle lower roller support member 3573. A pair of lower rollers 3574 capable of rolling on 3551f and a left middle slide base 3570 are moved in the left-right direction along the left middle slide shaft 3571, and are arranged below the middle support portion 3551b in the left unit base 3551. A left middle slide drive motor 3575 attached to the motor attachment portion 3551g and a left middle position detection sensor 3576 which is attached to the left unit base 3551 and detects the slide position of the left middle slide base 3570 are provided.

  The left middle slide base 3570 of the left slide unit 3550 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The left middle slide base 3570 is formed at the left end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and has a pair of slide receiving portions 3570a each having a through hole through which the left middle slide shaft 3571 can be inserted. An extended rack gear 3570b and an insertion hole 3570c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The left middle slide base 3570 includes a detection piece 3570d that extends upward from the upper side in a plate shape and can be detected by the left middle position detection sensor 3576.

  The left middle slide base 3570 is supported by the left middle slide shaft 3571 through a slide bush 3552 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3570 a are respectively inserted into the left middle slide shaft 3571. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3552 is provided with a flange extending outward at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3570a. Inserted to face each other. A cylindrical shaft collar 3553 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3570 a (slide bush 3552) in the left middle slide shaft 3571, and the slide bush 3552 approaches the slide bush 3552 by the shaft collar 3553. It is possible to prevent the slide bush 3552 from coming off from the slide receiving portion 3570a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3570a in the left middle slide base 3570 are arranged at a distance of about 1/3 from the length of the left middle slide shaft 3571 to be inserted, with respect to the left middle slide shaft 3571. It has become difficult to play.

  The left middle slide shaft 3571 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The left middle shaft bracket 3572 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed by appropriately bending a metal plate, and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551. The left middle slide shaft 3571 and the left middle shaft bracket 3572 are attached along a shaft opening 3551e extending horizontally in the middle support portion 3551b, and the left middle slide base 3570 extends from the base opening 3551d. It can be slid in the same direction as the direction, that is, in the horizontal direction in the front view (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  The pair of lower rollers 3574 supported by the left middle lower roller support member 3573 in the left slide unit 3550 are rail portions 3551f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3551d in the middle support portion 3551b of the left unit base 3551. Is supported so as to be able to roll in the front-rear direction, and the left middle lower roller support member 3573 (lower part of the left middle slide base 3570) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3551f and moved in the front-rear direction. Can be regulated.

  Accordingly, in the left slide unit 3550, the left middle slide base 3570 is suspended and supported by the left middle slide shaft 3571, and in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 3551f in the middle support portion 3551b of the left middle slide shaft 3571 and the left unit base 3551. Can be supported so as to be slidable in the left-right direction.

  Further, the left middle slide drive motor 3575 of the left slide unit 3550 has a rotating shaft extending rearward through the left unit base 3551 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3551g of the middle support portion 3551b on the front side of the left unit base 3551. Installed to do.

  The left slide unit 3550 is disposed on the rear side of the left unit base 3551 and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the left middle slide drive motor 3575 so as to be integrally rotatable. The drive gear 3554 meshes with the drive gear 3554. A large-diameter large-diameter gear 3555a, a reduction gear 3555 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3555a, has a small-diameter gear 3555b that is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter gear 3555a, and is supported on the rear surface of the left unit base 3551; 1st transmission which meshes | engages with the small diameter gear 3555b of 3555, and is pivotally supported by the rear surface of the left unit base 3551, and a part of peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the left unit base 3551 through the meshing opening 3551e of the left unit base 3551. Gear 3556 and front opening from meshing opening 3551e in first transmission gear 3556 Includes a second transmission gear 3557 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3570b meshing with the left unit base 3551 of the left in the slide base 3570, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  When the drive gear 3554 is rotationally driven in an appropriate direction by the left middle slide drive motor 3575, the left slide unit 3550 has a left middle slide base 3570 via a reduction gear 3555, a first transmission gear 3556, and a second transmission gear 3557. The left middle slide base 3570 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to the rack gear 3570b. Accordingly, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the left middle slide base 3570 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  The left slide unit 3550 in the slide unit 3500 of this example is a plate-like lower left slide base 3580 that is disposed on the front surface of the base opening 3551d in the lower support portion 3551c of the left unit base 3551 and the rotary unit 3410 is attached to the front side. The lower left slide base 3580 supports the upper end of the lower left slide base 3580 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and is disposed in the shaft opening 3551e of the lower support portion 3551c and extends in the left-right direction. And a lower left shaft bracket 3582 that supports both left and right ends and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551.

  Further, the left slide unit 3550 is rotatably supported on both left and right sides of a lower left lower roller support member 3583 and a lower left lower roller support member 3583 attached to the lower portion of the lower left slide base 3580, and on the rail portion 3551f of the left unit base 3551. A pair of lower rollers 3584 that can roll and a lower left slide base 3580 are moved in the left-right direction along the lower left slide shaft 3581 and are arranged below the lower support portion 3551c in the left unit base 3551 and are attached to the motor mounting portion 3551g. A lower left slide drive motor 3585 to be attached and a lower left position detection sensor 3586 that is attached to the left unit base 3551 and detects the slide position of the lower left slide base 3580 are provided.

  The lower left slide base 3580 of the left slide unit 3550 has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends in the left-right direction. The lower left slide base 3580 has a pair of slide receiving portions 3580a formed at the left end on the upper side and in the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction and having a through-hole through which the lower left slide shaft 3581 can be inserted, and formed at the lower side and extended in the left-right direction. A rack gear 3580b and an insertion hole 3580c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and through which the rear portion of the rotation drive motor 3412 in the rotating body unit 3410 is inserted. The lower left slide base 3580 includes a detection piece 3580d that extends downward from the lower side in a plate shape and can be detected by the lower left position detection sensor 3586.

  The lower left slide base 3580 is supported by the lower left slide shaft 3581 via a slide bush 3552 in which a pair of slide receiving portions 3580a are respectively inserted into the lower left slide shaft 3581. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the slide bush 3552 is provided with a flange extending outwardly at one end of the cylindrical shape, and the flanges are mutually connected with respect to the through holes of the pair of slide receiving portions 3580a. Inserted to face each other. Further, a cylindrical shaft collar 3553 is inserted between the pair of slide receiving portions 3580a (slide bush 3552) in the lower left slide shaft 3581, and the slide bush 3552 moves in a direction in which the slide bush 3552 approaches each other. Thus, the slide bush 3552 is prevented from being removed from the slide receiving portion 3580a.

  The pair of slide receiving portions 3580a in the lower left slide base 3580 are arranged at a distance of about 1/2 of the length of the lower left slide shaft 3581 to be inserted, and are loose with respect to the lower left slide shaft 3581. It has become difficult.

  The lower left slide shaft 3581 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed of a metal rod having a circular cross section and has high rigidity. The lower left shaft bracket 3582 of the left slide unit 3550 is formed by bending a metal plate as appropriate, and is attached to the rear side of the left unit base 3551. The lower left slide shaft 3581 and the lower left shaft bracket 3582 are attached so as to follow the obliquely inclined shaft opening 3551e of the lower support portion 3551c, and the lower left slide base 3580 is the same as the extending direction of the base opening 3551d. It can be slid in the direction, that is, the direction in which the right side is higher when viewed from the front (the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the game area 1100).

  In addition, the pair of lower rollers 3584 pivotally supported by the lower left lower roller support member 3583 in the left slide unit 3550 has a rail portion 3551f provided on the lower side of the base opening 3551d in the lower support portion 3551c of the left unit base 3551. The lower left lower roller support member 3583 (lower part of the lower left slide base 3580) is slidably supported along the rail portion 3551f and moved in the front / rear direction. It can be regulated.

  Therefore, in the left slide unit 3550, the lower left slide base 3580 is suspended and supported by the lower left slide shaft 3581, and is moved in the front-rear direction by the rail portion 3551f of the lower left slide shaft 3581 and the lower support portion 3551c of the left unit base 3551. It can be slidably supported in the left-right direction while being regulated.

  Further, the lower left slide drive motor 3585 of the left slide unit 3550 has a rotating shaft extending rearward through the left unit base 3551 with respect to the motor mounting portion 3551g of the lower support portion 3551c on the front side of the left unit base 3551. As installed.

  The left slide unit 3550 is disposed on the rear side of the left unit base 3551 and is fixed to the rotation shaft of the lower left slide drive motor 3585 so as to be integrally rotatable. The drive gear 3554 meshes with the drive gear 3554 and is more than the drive gear 3554. A large-diameter large-diameter gear 3555a, a reduction gear 3555 that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear 3555a, has a small-diameter gear 3555b that is smaller in diameter than the large-diameter gear 3555a, and is supported on the rear surface of the left unit base 3551, and a reduction gear 3555 The first transmission gear that meshes with the small-diameter gear 3555b and is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the left unit base 3551 and that part of the peripheral surface is exposed to the front side of the left unit base 3551 through the meshing opening 3551e of the left unit base 3551. 3556 and the front opening from the meshing opening 3551e in the first transmission gear 3556 It includes a second transmission gear 3557 that is pivotally supported on the front of the rack gear 3580b meshing with the left unit base 3551 in the lower left slide base 3580, a well as part meshes exposed to.

  When the left slide unit 3550 rotates the drive gear 3554 in an appropriate direction by the lower left slide drive motor 3585, the rack gear of the lower left slide base 3580 is passed through the reduction gear 3555, the first transmission gear 3556, and the second transmission gear 3557. The lower left slide base 3580 can be slid in the left-right direction by being transmitted to 3580b. Thus, the rotating body unit 3410 attached to the front surface of the lower left slide base 3580 can also be slid in the left-right direction.

  Reference numeral 3558 in the drawing is attached to the front surface of the left unit base 3551, and includes a rotation drive motor 3412, a rotary head decoration board 3416, a rotation detection sensor 3426, a base decoration board 3428, and a left relay. This is a wiring retainer for retaining a wiring member (not shown) for connecting to the substrate 3020.

[2-10D. Operation of rotating body unit by slide unit]
Subsequently, the movement of the rotating body unit 3410 by the slide unit 3500 in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. First, as shown in FIG. 157 and the like, the right slide unit 3510 of the slide unit 3500 is arranged and arranged on three support portions 3511a, 3511b, and 3511c arranged in the vertical direction of the right unit base 3511 in a normal state. The supported rotating body unit 3410 is in the most moved state (initial state) to the right end side. In this initial state, each rotating body unit 3410 is substantially contained within the front projection of the right unit base 3511.

  In addition, when each rotating body unit 3410 supported by the right slide unit 3510 is in an initial state (in an initial position state), detection pieces 3520d and 3530d of the respective slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 attached to the front surface. , 3540d are detected by the position detection sensors 3526, 3536, and 3546, respectively (see FIG. 151).

  From this initial state, each drive gear 3514 is rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise in front view) by slide drive motors 3525, 3535, and 3545 attached to the motor attachment portions 3511g of the respective support portions 3511a, 3511b, and 3511c of the right unit base 3511. ), The rotational speed of the slide drive motors 3525, 3535, and 3545 is reduced by the reduction gear 3515 meshed with the drive gear 3514 and transmitted to the first transmission gear 3516 and the second transmission gear 3517. The slide bases 3520, 3530 b, 3540 b of the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540 b meshed with the second transmission gear 3517 slide to the left in the front view.

  The left ends of the left slide receiving portions 3520a, 3530a, and 3540 of the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 are attached to the left ends of the slide shafts 3521, 3531, and 3541 (detailed description and illustration are omitted). The slide drive motors 3525, 3535, and 3545 are stopped at substantially the same time as they come into contact with each other, and the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540, that is, the state of the appearance position where each rotary body unit 3410 has moved leftward (appearance state) )

  In the right slide unit 3510 of this example, the support portions 3511a, 3511b, and 3511c of the right unit base 3511 are each slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 (rotating) in a direction extending radially from the approximate center of the game area 1100 when viewed from the front. Since the body unit 3410) is slid, each slide base 3520, 3530, 3540 is moved from the initial position where the slide base 3520, 3530, 3540 is moved to the rightmost position to the appearance position where it is moved to the leftmost position. The tips of the rotating body units 3410 attached to the bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 are in a state where they are close to each other.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 can slide each slide base 3520, 3530, 3540 (rotary body unit 3410) independently by appropriately controlling the drive of each slide drive motor 3525, 3535, 3545. Various variations of movement (movable effects) can be realized.

  Further, the right slide unit 3510 can rotate the rotating decoration body 3410A of the rotating body unit 3410 when the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 are in the initial state or the appearance state. Various movable effects can be performed by appropriately combining the slide effect of the rotating body unit 3410 and the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A.

  Further, as described above, the right slide unit 3510 suspends and supports the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 by the slide shafts 3521, 3531, and 3541 formed of metal bars, and the slide shafts 3521, 3531, and 3541, respectively. Since 3541 is supported by shaft brackets 3522, 3532, and 3542 formed of a metal plate, each slide base 3520, 3530, and 3540 can be smoothly slid and supported without rattling. . Therefore, the right slide unit 3510 can be mounted on the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540, even if the rotary unit 3410 that is heavier by attaching the rotation drive motor 3412 or the like to the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540. The rotating decorative body 3410A in which the center of gravity of the rotating body unit 3410 is eccentric can be rotated to cause a changing uneven load that causes vibration from the rotating body unit 3410. Even if it acts, the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 can be firmly supported to prevent the slide bases 3520, 3530, and 3540 from vibrating, and the rotating decorative body 3410A can be smoothly rotated. It is like that.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 158 and the like, the left slide unit 3550 of the slide unit 3500 is arranged and arranged on three support portions 3551a, 3551b, and 3551c arranged in the vertical direction of the left unit base 3551 in a normal state. The supported rotating body unit 3410 is in the most moved state (initial state) to the left end side. In this initial state, each rotating body unit 3410 is substantially contained within the front projection of the left unit base 3551.

  In addition, when each rotating body unit 3410 supported by the left slide unit 3550 is in an initial state (initial position state), detection pieces 3560d and 3570d of the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 to which the respective rotating body units 3410 are attached to the front surface. , 3580d are detected by the position detection sensors 3566, 3576, 3586, respectively (see FIG. 154).

  From this initial state, each drive gear 3554 is moved in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise in front view) by slide drive motors 3565, 3575, and 3585 attached to the motor attachment portions 3551g of the support portions 3551a, 3551b, and 3551c of the left unit base 3551. When rotating in the rotation direction), the rotational speed of the slide drive motors 3565, 3575, and 3585 is reduced by the reduction gear 3555 that meshes with the drive gear 3554 and transmitted to the first transmission gear 3556 and the second transmission gear 3557. The slide bases 3560, 3570b, and 3580b of the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 engaged with the second transmission gear 3557 are slid rightward in a front view.

  The right ends of the right slide receiving portions 3560a, 3570a, and 3580 in the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 are attached to the right ends of the slide shafts 3561, 3571, and 3581 (detailed description and illustration are omitted). The slide drive motors 3565, 3575, and 3585 are stopped substantially at the same time, and the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580, that is, the appearance positions where the rotary body units 3410 have moved to the left most (appearance state). )

  In the left slide unit 3550 of this example, the support portions 3551a, 3551b, and 3551c of the left unit base 3551 are each slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 (rotating) in a direction extending radially from the approximate center of the game area 1100 in a front view. Since the body unit 3410) is slid, each slide base 3560, 3570, 3580 is moved from the initial position where the slide base 3560, 3570, 3580 is moved to the leftmost position to the appearance position where it is moved to the rightmost position. The tips of the rotating body units 3410 attached to the bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 are in a state of being close to each other.

  The left slide unit 3550 can slide the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 (the rotator unit 3410) independently by appropriately controlling the drive of the slide drive motors 3565, 3575, and 3585. Various variations of movement (movable effects) can be realized.

  Further, the left slide unit 3550 can rotate the rotating decorative body 3410A of the rotating body unit 3410 in any position where the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 are in the initial state or the appearance state. Various movable effects can be performed by appropriately combining the slide effect of the rotating body unit 3410 and the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A.

  Further, as described above, the left slide unit 3550 suspends and supports the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 by the slide shafts 3561, 3571, and 3581 formed of a metal rod, and also supports the slide shafts 3561, 3571, Since the 3581 is supported by the shaft brackets 3562, 3572, and 3582 formed of a metal plate, the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 can be smoothly slid and supported without rattling. . Therefore, even if the left slide unit 3550 is provided with the rotary unit 3410 that is heavy by providing the rotary drive motor 3412 or the like to the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580, the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 are attached. The rotating decorative body 3410A in which the center of gravity of the rotating body unit 3410 is eccentric can be rotated to cause a changing uneven load that causes vibration from the rotating body unit 3410. Even if it acts, the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 can be firmly supported to prevent the slide bases 3560, 3570, and 3580 from vibrating, and the rotating decorative body 3410A can be smoothly rotated. It is like that.

[2-11. Lower movable production unit]
Next, the lower movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 159 to 164. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the lower movable effect unit in the back unit of the game board as viewed from the front, and FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the lower movable effect unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the lower movable rendering unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG. Further, FIG. 163 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the elevating unit in the lower movable effect unit. FIG. 164 is a front view showing the movement of the elevating decorative body in the lower movable effect unit.

  The lower movable effect unit 3600 in the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3001c in the back box 3001 and substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and is positioned behind the attacker unit 2100 in the front unit 2000. . The lower movable effect unit 3600 extends in the up-down direction to support the elevating decoration body 3611 so that the elevating decoration body 3611 can be moved up and down, and is formed in a cannonball shape in which a substantially cylindrical upper end bulges upward in a hemispherical shape. A lifting unit 3610 having at least a lifting / lowering solenoid 3613 that drives the lifting / lowering decoration 3611 supported by the lifting / lowering shaft 3612 up and down in a vertical direction, and two lifting units 3610 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. And a left support base 3651 disposed on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in front view and a left support unit 3610 disposed on the left side in front view of the right support base 3651 and supporting the two lifting units 3610 adjacent to each other in the left-right direction. And a support base 3652.

  The lower movable effect unit 3600 in this example includes four elevating units 3610 having elevating decorative bodies 3611.

  The lower movable effect unit 3600 is supported by an upper cover 3653 that connects the upper ends of the right support base 3651 and the left support base 3652 and supports the lower end of the lift shaft 3612 of each lift unit 3610, and the upper cover 3653. A front cover 3654 that covers the front surfaces of the support base right 3651 and the support base left 3652, and a through hole 3655 a that is disposed above the front cover 3654 and the upper cover 3653 and through which the lifting decoration 3611 in the lifting unit 3610 can pass. And an upper decorative cover 3655 attached to the front surface of the rear wall 3001b of the back box 3001.

  The lower movable effect unit 3600 is in a state in which the corresponding lifting solenoid 3613 is arranged on either the front side or the rear side with respect to the lifting shaft 3612 extending in the vertical direction of each of the four lifting units 3610. Specifically, in the right elevation base unit 3610 supported by the right support base 3651, the elevation solenoid 3613 is disposed on the rear side of the elevation shaft 3612, and the front left side supported by the right support base 3651. In the lifting / lowering unit 3610, a lifting / lowering solenoid 3613 is disposed in front of the lifting / lowering shaft 3612. Further, in the elevation unit 3610 on the right side of the front view supported by the left support base 3652, the elevation solenoid 3613 is disposed in front of the elevation shaft 3612 and the elevation unit on the left side of the front view supported by the left support base 3652 is provided. In 3610, a lifting solenoid 3613 is disposed behind the lifting shaft 3612. Accordingly, in the entire lower movable effect unit 3600, of the four lifting decoration bodies 3611 arranged in the left-right direction, the two lifting decoration bodies 3611 on the center side are slightly rearward from the two lifting decoration bodies 3611 on the left and right sides. It is in an offset state.

  Further, in the lower movable effect unit 3600, the elevating solenoid 3613 in each elevating unit 3610 is supported so that the plunger that moves forward and backward moves forward and backward with respect to the right support base 3651 and the left support base 3652.

  The elevating unit 3610 of the lower movable effect unit 3600 in this example has a plunger holder 3614 attached to the tip (lower end) of the plunger of the elevating solenoid 3613, a lower end connected to the plunger holder 3614, and an upper end than the upper surface of the upper cover 3653. A rod-like lifting arm 3615 that has an elongated link hole 3615a that extends upward and extends in the lateral direction (front-rear direction) at the upper end, and is disposed on either the left or right side of the lifting solenoid 3613; A link pin 3616a extending in the left-right direction is slidably inserted into the link hole 3615a of 3615a, extends from the base end side of the link pin 3616a to both sides in the front-rear direction, and the other side is one side with respect to one side across the link pin 3616a Heel part 3616b extending about twice as long as the side, end part on one side of heel part 3616b A first arm 3616 having a shaft support portion 3616c that is formed and directly supported on the upper surface of the upper cover 3653 directly above the lifting solenoid 3613, and the lower end rotates with respect to the other end portion of the first arm 3616. A second arm 3617 that is supported and extends upward shorter than the first arm 3616, a connecting portion 3618a to which the upper end of the second arm 3617 is rotatably attached, and a connecting portion 3618a are formed at the lower part of the outer periphery, and the lifting shaft 3612 A cylindrical sliding part 3618b inserted into the outer periphery of the sliding part 3618, and an elevating decorative body base 3618 provided with an annular mounting part 3618c formed at the upper end of the sliding part 3618b and to which the lower end of the elevating decorative body 3611 is attached. ing.

  The lifting unit 3610 further includes a coil-shaped biasing member 3619 that is inserted into the outer periphery of the lifting shaft 3612 inside the lifting decoration body 3611 and biases the lifting decoration body base 3618 downward. Further, the elevating unit 3610 is inserted into a cylindrical elevating shaft 3612 and has a transparent rod-shaped light guide member 3620 whose upper end protrudes above the elevating shaft 3612 and whose lower end protrudes below the elevating shaft 3612; An elevating decorative body decoration substrate 3621 on which at least LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted directly below the light guide member 3620. The light guide member 3620 of the elevating unit 3610 has a diffusion lens formed at the upper end, and diffuses the light from the LED of the elevating decorative body decoration board 3621 arranged immediately below the upper end of the elevating shaft 3612. Thus, the elevating decoration body 3611 can be decorated with light emission from the inside.

  Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 supports the lifting arms 3615 of the two lifting units 3610 arranged on the center side in front view so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and two raising and lowering arranged on the left and right sides in front view. Further provided is a guide member 3656 that supports the elevating decorative body decoration substrate 3621 of the unit 3610 and is attached to the right support base 3651 and the left support base 3652. Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 supports the elevating arms 3615 of the two elevating units 3610 arranged on the left and right sides in the front view so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and two elevating units arranged on the center side in the front view. A center support member 3657 is further provided to support the elevating decorative body decoration substrate 3621 of the unit 3610 and to connect the right support base 3651 and the left support base 3652.

  Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 includes a magnetic detection sensor 3660 that is attached to the front cover 3654 and detects magnetism. This magnetic detection sensor 3660 can detect magnetism acting in the vicinity of the attacker unit 2100, and can detect an illegal act using a magnet or the like.

  The upper decorative cover 3655 of the lower movable effect unit 3600 in this example includes an extending part 3655b extending forward from the lower part of the front end. The extended portion 3655b is positioned immediately below the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 in a state where the game board 4 is assembled. The lower movable effect unit 3600 includes a stage lower right decorative substrate 3661 and a stage lower left decorative substrate 3661 which are attached to the lower side of the extending portion 3655b of the upper decorative cover 3655 and have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface. ing. With the stage lower right decorative substrate 3661 and the stage lower left decorative substrate 3662, the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500 can be decorated with light emission from the lower side.

  Next, the movement of the elevating decorative body 3610 in the lower movable effect unit 3600 will be described. In the normal state, the lower movable effect unit 3600 is in a state where the elevating decoration body 3611 is lowered downward by the urging force and gravity of the urging member 3619 of the elevating unit 3610 (see FIG. 164 (a) and the like). reference). In the lift unit 3610, the plunger of the lift solenoid 3613 protrudes downward when the lift decorative body 3611 is lowered. Note that the elevating decorative body 3611 is restricted from moving downward when the lower end of the sliding portion 3618b of the elevating decorative body base 3618 contacts the upper surface of the upper cover 3653 that supports the elevating shaft 3612. .

  When the elevating unit 3610 raises (immerses) the plunger by energizing the elevating solenoid 3613 from the normal state where the elevating decorative body 3611 is lowered, the elevating arm 3615 is interposed via the plunger holder 3614 attached to the lower end of the plunger. As the elevating arm 3615 rises, the link pin 3616a of the first arm 3616 inserted into the link hole 3615a of the elevating arm 3615 also rises. In the first arm 3616 having the link pin 3616a, the shaft support portion 3616c on one side of the flange portion 3616b close to the link pin 3616a is pivotally supported by the upper cover 3653, and the shaft support portion is raised as the link pin 3616a rises. The other side of the flange portion 3616b is pivoted about 3616c so that the end portion on the other side rises larger than the rise of the link pin 3616a.

  The lifting decorative body base 3618 is guided by the lifting shaft 3612 via the second arm 3617 supported by the other end of the first arm 3616 against the biasing force of the biasing member 3619. Will rise. As a result, the elevating decoration body 3611 attached to the elevating decoration body base 3618 of the elevating unit 3610 is raised (protruded) more than the upper surface of the upper decoration cover 3655 (see FIG. 164 (b)), and the player Fully visible from the side (see FIG. 167).

  In order to lower the raised elevating decorative body 3611, when the energization to the elevating solenoid 3613 is stopped, the elevating decorative body base 3618 is pushed downward by the urging force of the urging member 3619, and the reverse movement is performed. By doing so, the elevating decorative body 3611 returns to the normal state in which it is lowered.

  Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 of this example is configured such that the four elevating decorative bodies 3611 can be moved up and down independently by the elevating solenoids 3613 provided in the respective elevating units 3610, respectively. By appropriately combining the movements of the two lifting / lowering decorative bodies 3611, various movable effects can be performed.

  Further, the lower movable effect unit 3600 fixes the position of the light guide member 3620 that guides (guides) the light from the LED of the lift decoration body decoration board 3621 to the lift decoration body 3611, and then fixes the light guide member 3620 to the light guide member 3620. Therefore, the range of light emitted from the light guide member 3620 can be changed according to the movement position of the lift decoration body 3611, and the lift decoration body 3611 can be moved up and down relatively. The light emitting decoration of the decoration body 3611 can be changed.

[2-12. Liquid crystal display]
Subsequently, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000, and displays a predetermined effect image according to the game state. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 114 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 that protrudes outward from both the upper and lower sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing piece 1902.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 112 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral control board box 1910 that houses a peripheral control unit 4140, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 168), and the like, and a lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. And a volume 1912 extending rearward. By rotating this volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from each speaker 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5, the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 and the like can be adjusted. It has become.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes an inverter board box 1920 containing an inverter board 4163 (see FIG. 168) for turning on a backlight (in this example, a cold cathode tube). Is provided on the left side.

[2-13. Movable production on game board]
Next, the movable effects using the movable effect units 3300, 3400, 3600 in the game board 4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 165 to 167. FIG. FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper movable effect unit of the back unit in the game board. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the left / right movable effect unit of the back unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 167 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lower movable effect unit of the back unit in the game board.

  As shown in FIG. 109 and the like, the game board 4 of this example is located at a retreated position where the upper movable unit 3310 of the movable upper movable effect unit 3300 provided in the rear unit 3000 is raised in a normal state. In this state, except for the character base cover 3319 of the upper movable unit 3310, the center logo decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 is positioned behind the character body 3311, the back decoration member 3330, and the like. It is invisible to the player.

  Further, in the normal state, the game board 4 is such that each rotary body unit 3410 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 in the rear unit 3000 is located at an initial position away from the center of the game area 1100 and each rotation. The rotational decoration body 3410A of the body unit 3410 has a rotational position where the part having the heart-shaped translucency in the rotational head 3415 approaches the center of the game area 1100 (the rotational center of the rotational decoration body 3410A and the game). On the axis connecting the center of the area 1100, the game area 1100 is stopped at a position near the center of the game area 1100.

  When each rotary body unit 3410 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 is in the initial position, a rotary head 3415 having a substantially circular shape in front view in the rotary ornament 3410A is formed on the inner periphery of the right frame of the center accessory 2500. Three substantially semicircular recesses, and three substantially semicircular recesses formed at the right end of the left back decoration member 3111 of the back decoration unit 3100. It appears to be integrated with decorations such as the center accessory 2500 and the back decoration unit 3100.

  Further, in the normal state, the game board 4 is in a state in which each lifting decoration body 3611 of the four lifting / lowering units 3610 of the lower movable effect unit 3600 in the rear unit 3000 is lowered, and the transparent stage of the center accessory 2500 Through 2510, the upper part of the lifting / lowering decorative body 3611 is slightly visible.

  In the game board 4 of this example, when the cam link gear 3364 is driven to rotate in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the up-and-down drive motor 3361 of the upper movable effect unit 3300, the link pin 3364b is rotated around the rotation center of the cam link gear 3364. , And slides in the direction of moving away from the base end portion 3365a in the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365e of the lifting arm 3365. And the raising / lowering arm 3365 rotates centering | focusing on the base end part 3365a with the revolution of the link pin 3364b sliding in the connection part 3365e.

  When the elevating arm 3365 rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, the connecting sliding member 3365 slides in the connecting portion 3365b of the elevating arm 3365 and simultaneously slides in the guide groove 3351a, thereby connecting and sliding. The elevating slider 3354, that is, the upper movable unit 3310 is slid downward (elevated) through the connecting shaft 3366 supported by the member 3365.

  As a result, the pair of character bodies 3311 of the upper movable unit 3310, the back decoration member 3330, and the like are positioned below the center logo decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500, and as shown in FIG. The character body 3311 and the like are visible from the side. That is, a pair of character bodies 3311 appears.

  Since the pair of character bodies 3311 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 can rotate in different directions with respect to the axis extending in the vertical direction, the upper movable unit 3310 is lowered to the appearance position. In addition to the movable effect of causing the pair of character bodies 3311 to appear, a movable effect of rotating the pair of character bodies 3311 relative to each other can also be performed.

  Although the illustration of the movable effect pattern by the upper movable effect unit 3300 is omitted, for example, when the upper movable unit 3310 is in the retracted position, the pair of character bodies 3311 are rotated and stopped so as to face rearward in this state. The upper movable unit 3310 is lowered to cause a pair of character bodies 3311 to appear. Thereafter, the pair of character bodies 3311 are rotated so as to face forward. Thereby, since the pair of character bodies 3311 appear in a state of facing backward, when the pair of character bodies 3311 are then turned forward and the pair of character bodies 3311 are directed forward, it is possible to strongly hold the player with an opportunity. Therefore, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the appearing pair of character bodies 3311 face forward, and the expectation can be increased and the interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

  Alternatively, predetermined music may be output in accordance with the rotation of the appearing pair of character bodies 3311, thereby making the illusion that the pair of character bodies 3311 is dancing to the music. It is possible to entertain the movement of the pair of character bodies 3311 with respect to the player and to prevent the interest from deteriorating.

  In addition, when the game board 4 of this example rotates and drives each of the rotary drive motors 3412 of the six rotary body units 3410 in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 arranged on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in front view, A substantially hemispherical rotating head 3415 arranged at the foremost end of the unit 3410 rotates, and a pair of arm members 3423 arranged on the rear side of the rotating head 3415 move away from or approach each other while rotating together with the rotating head 3415. Or move back and forth with respect to the rotation axis. As a result, the pair of arm members 3423 simulating the hand while rotating seem to open and close, attracting the player's interest strongly, and reducing the player's interest in the game It becomes possible to suppress.

  In the left / right movable effect unit 3400, the six rotating decorative bodies 3410A may be rotated at the same timing, or may be rotated at different timings. In addition, in the case where the timing of rotating the six rotating decorative bodies 3410A is different, the direction of the rotating head 3415 and the timing of advance and retreat of the pair of arm members 3423 are different. It is possible to make the illusion that the rotating decorative body 3410 </ b> A is swaying, and to make it more noticeable.

  In the left and right movable effect unit 3400, slide drive motors 3525, 3535, 3545, 3565, 3575, and 3585 respectively corresponding to the six rotator units 3410 are driven to rotate, and each slide base to which each rotator unit 3410 is attached. 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 slide in the direction toward the center of the game area 1100, and as shown in FIG. 166, the six rotary body units 3410 appear at the positions where they approach the center of the game area 1100. It comes to be in a state. In this state, each rotating body unit 3410 is positioned on the center side of the game area 1100, so that it becomes more conspicuous from the player side, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  As shown in FIG. 166, in the gaming board 4, in a state where the six rotary body units 3410 in the left and right movable effect unit 3400 are positioned at the appearance position, the rotary head 3415 in the rotary decorative body 3410A of each rotary body unit 3410 is The rotator unit 3410 stands out from the decoration of the center accessory 2500 and the back decoration unit 3100, as if the center object 2500 and the back decoration unit 3100 are formed in a substantially semicircularly curved recess. It is in a state.

  In addition, the left-right movable effect unit 3400 narrows the visible range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by positioning each rotating body unit 3410 at an appearance position close to the center of the game area 1100 as shown in FIG. 166. The viewing range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be physically changed to strongly attract the player's interest.

  Further, in the left and right movable effect unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 166, the rotary decoration body 3410A may be rotated by the rotation drive motor 3412 in a state where each rotary body unit 3410 is located at the appearance position. Thus, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A, to entertain the player, and to make a movable effect (rotation effect) widely in the entire game area 1100. It is possible to make the player have a strong expectation for the game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In the left and right movable effect unit 3400, each rotator unit 3410 may be slid in a direction closer to the center of the game area 1100, thereby enabling the rotator unit to slide with respect to the player. Depending on the position of 3410, the number of rotating rotating unit 3410 that slides, etc., it is possible to think that an opportunity has come, and a sense of expectation is given to a movable effect by a plurality of rotating unit 3410. The pachinko machine 1 can be made hard to get tired of looking forward to the movable performance.

  Further, in the left and right movable effect unit 3400, an effect image may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 arranged on the rear side in accordance with the slide effect of each rotating body unit 3410 and the rotation effect of the rotating decorative body 3410A. In addition, the player can be more entertained by the collaboration effect of the movable effect and the effect image.

  Further, in the left and right movable effect unit 3400, for one rotator unit 3410, the movable effect of the rotator unit 3410 corresponds to the area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 closer to the center of the game area 1100 in the rotator unit 3410. The specific effect image may be displayed, and the area for displaying the specific effect image on the liquid crystal display unit 1900 may be changed in accordance with the position of the rotator unit 3410 that performs the movable effect. An effect (specific effect) by the rotator unit 3410 and the specific effect image can be performed at any position where the six rotator units 3410 having substantially the same shape are arranged, so that it can be seen in a conventional pachinko machine. It would be possible to show the player what had not been done and to surprise the player. Can entertain, interest will be able to be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the gaming board 4 of this example drives each lifting solenoid 3613 in the four lifting units 3610 of the lower movable effect unit 3600 disposed on the rear side of the stage 2510 in the center accessory 2500, so that it is shown in FIG. As described above, each lifting decoration body 3611 can be raised, and by raising the four lifting decoration bodies 3611, the upper end of each lifting decoration body 3611 is in a state of protruding above the stage 2510. Yes.

  Accordingly, the elevating decorative body 3611 protrudes from the rear side and the lower side of the stage 2510 and protrudes to the lower front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900, so that the player is aware of the rising of the elevating decorative body 3611. It is possible to make it easy to enjoy the decoration and movement of the lifting / lowering decorative body 3611 by paying attention to the raised / lowering decorative body 3611.

  In addition, since the lower movable effect unit 3600 can individually elevate and lower the four elevating decoration bodies 3611, various elevating effects can be performed by appropriately selecting a pattern for elevating the four elevating decoration bodies 3611. It is possible to perform a moving production that is difficult to get tired of.

  Further, in the lower movable effect unit 3600, the light guide member 3620 for guiding the light from the lift decoration body decoration board 3621 for emitting and decorating the lift decoration body 3611 of the lift unit 3610 is fixed to the lift decoration body 3611. Therefore, when the elevating decorative body 3611 is moved up and down, the distance to the light guide member 3620 (the upper end thereof) changes, and the light emitting condition and the light emission range of the elevating decorative body 3611 can be changed. In addition, the lighting effect of the elevating decorative body 3611 can be enjoyed.

  Further, in the lower movable effect unit 3600, the four elevating decorative bodies 3611 can be moved up and down independently, and for example, the number of the lottery results held by the start winning prize is increased by the number of elevating decorative bodies 3611 to be raised. It may be expressed, and the number of holdings can be made more conspicuous compared to the case of displaying by the number of lighting of lamps, images, etc., as in conventional pachinko machines, and the sense of expectation for the reserved lottery results It is possible to suppress the interest from deteriorating. In this case, the type of the lottery result held by the light emitting color of the elevating decoration 3611 may be suggested, and a variety of hold display can be performed.

[3. Various substrates]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of main boards 4000 and a group of peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of main boards 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls game operations (game progress) and a payout control board 4110 that controls payout of game balls and the like. Further, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects based on commands from the main control board 4100, and an effect image on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for controlling display.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like are incorporated. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g, and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing information stored in a RAM 4100e built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in RAM 4100e”). . The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100d”) and a main control built-in RAM 4100e, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and to prevent fraud. These functions are also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 includes a first start port sensor 3231 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2102. 2127 and detection signals from some of the general prize opening sensors 3232 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or attached to the gate sensor 2402, the general prize opening sensor 3232, the count sensor 2128, and the back unit 3000, respectively. The detected signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3660 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g, so that the start port solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid are connected via the panel relay board 3012. The first special symbol display 1185, the second control signal 2185, the main control I / O port 4100 b, the panel relay board 3012, the holding display board 2603 of the center accessory 2500, and the function display board 1191 A drive signal is output to the special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the second special symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, and the game state display 1183. .

  As described above, the main control MPU 4100a executes the control program stored in the ROM based on such detection signals, so that drive signals are appropriately sent to various actuators such as the start-up solenoid 2121 and the attacker solenoid 2124. As a result, various games played in the pachinko machine 1 proceed according to a predetermined procedure.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3231, the second start port sensor 2127, the gate sensor 2402, and the count sensor 2128 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches. The general winning opening sensor 3232 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently pass through the gate portion 2401, so the first start port sensor 3231, the second start port sensor 2127, and Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 2402 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start port sensor 3231, the second start port sensor 2127, and the gate sensor 2402. In addition, when a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the game winning ball 2103 is opened and game balls are frequently entered, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 2128 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 2128. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3232 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2104 where game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3232 uses a mechanical switch that is less expensive than a proximity switch even if its life is shorter.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown)). The main control MPU 4100a, which will be described in detail later, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, and shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  The main control board 4100 is supplied with various voltages from a power supply board 851 as described in detail later. The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 169) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851 and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, the power failure notice signal is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of game balls and the like controls the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls relating to payout and the firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and also sends the ball by the ball feeding solenoid 585. A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error cancel switch 860a for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game balls in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[3-2A. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and an external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a is operating normally. A payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and a payout control input circuit 4111e to which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input. It is equipped with. The payout control MPU 4111a includes a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), in order to prevent fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball break switch 750 Detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

  A ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 is first sent via the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first supplied as a payout control input circuit. 4111e and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full of the stored game balls is first sent to the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880 and input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as an error LED. A signal to be displayed on the machine 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is sent to the payout control I / O port 4111b. Or the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal board 784 is a portion that is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall), so that the hall computer can detect the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the pachinko machine. The game information and the like of the gaming machine 1 can be grasped and the game of the player can be monitored.

  According to such a payout control unit 4111, a control signal stored in the ROM is executed based on various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, so that a drive signal is output to the payout motor 744 as described above. As a result, game balls are paid out by the number of prize balls indicated by the received payout command.

  Further, the error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notification that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, out of ball) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and when the number “2” is displayed, (Specifically, on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740. When When the number “3” is displayed (specifically, it is a “counting switch error”) (specifically, the game ball is meshed with the vicinity of its entrance and the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate). Based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, a notification is made that the counting sensor 751 is malfunctioning. When the number “5” is displayed, a “retry error” (specifically, a payout) That the number of operation retries has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that the operation is “full” (specifically, from the full-tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal, it notifies the fact that the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it indicates that “CR is not connected” (payout) control That the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the numeral “9” is displayed, it is “in stock” (specifically, That the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent via the frequency display board 365, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. Are input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in a serial manner, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received at the port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU 4111a. The CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the remaining number display 365c. It outputs to the board 874, the main side relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input into the remaining frequency display 365c.

[3-2B. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the clock signal, and this A firing solenoid driving circuit 4120d that outputs a driving signal to the firing solenoid 654 based on the firing reference pulse, and a ball feeding solenoid driving circuit 4120e that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 585 based on the firing reference pulse are provided. . Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, the firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls are launched toward the gaming area 1100 per minute and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

  A touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not a palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, and a firing stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and then input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit 4120a and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the front of the rotational handle body 506 is the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d through the plate 880.

  This firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d emits a drive current for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 with a launch strength that matches the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle based on a signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. When the reference pulse is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e generates a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input. When the ball feeding member 584 of the ball feeding unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 by the output and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the constant current is obtained. Is stopped, the game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball hitting device 650 side. Thus, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply board 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. A liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control.

[3-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 performs a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality sound performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c are stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. The game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board to the lamp driving board 4170, or the gaming board Game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in 4, color LEDs of each decoration board provided in the game board 4, etc. Game board side drive light emission data composed of a game board light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a flashing signal or a gradation lighting signal to the game board decoration drive board Transmission from the serial I / O port to each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, or driving to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 Door-side drive data for outputting a signal, and door-side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5 The configured door side driving light emission data is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration driving board to the door frame base board 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, or the liquid crystal display device. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the 1900 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit, the sound ROM Control signal for extracting the sound information from 140d (sound command) and outputs to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting the original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are transmitted via relay boards 3014, 3016, 3018, and 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided in the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 are door frame base substrates. 194, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided in the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The speaker 821 is controlled so that music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects flow, and is provided in the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262, and the speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. Note that the volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and projecting rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control unit 4140 is not shown, and an external watchdog timer (hereinafter “peripheral control external” The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together to diagnose whether or not its system is running out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by a serial input / output port. In this embodiment, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / flashing command, game board side lighting / flashing command, movable body drive, which are output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the command and display command. In this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  Each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 outputs a lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the received door frame side lighting flashing command via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. A lighting signal or a flashing signal based on the game board-side lighting flashing command that is output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in the frame 5 Are output to the LEDs of the decorative boards 2523, 2532, 3112, 3122, 3132, 3318, 3334, 3335, 3416, 3428, 3621, 3661, and 3662 provided in the game board 4. Each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 sends a drive signal to the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 based on the received movable body drive command. The dial drive motor 414 provided, the drive motors 3315, 3361, 3412, 3525, 3535, 3545, 3565, 3575, 3585 and the solenoid 3610 provided in the game board 4 are output.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. It is input via each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 and the peripheral side relay terminal board attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From the side speaker 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 via the 882, or from the speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 via the relay boards 3014, 3016, 3018 and 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. Then, control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various performances flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the gaming window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal added with a lower speaker 391, which will be described later, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the low-frequency speaker 821. In addition, it is possible to present a sound effect (sound production) with a sense of reality more than before.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control board 4010 according to this embodiment includes a real-time clock control unit 4190 (hereinafter also referred to as an RTC control unit 4190). FIG. 190 (a) is a diagram for explaining a real-time clock function among the functions of the peripheral control board 4010, and a part of the configuration is omitted for convenience of explanation. FIG. 190B is a diagram for explaining the backup power supply function of the RAM, in particular, of the functions of the peripheral control unit 4140, and a part of the configuration is omitted for convenience of explanation. .

<Real time clock function>
The peripheral control MPU 4140a in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a built-in real-time clock 4140aa (hereinafter, built-in RTC 4140aa) as shown in FIG. 190 (a). The built-in RTC 4140aa may be included in a timer function for measuring a time such as a change time set in the change display pattern in the peripheral control board 4010 of the present embodiment described later.

  The RTC control unit 4190 includes a real-time clock 4192 (hereinafter referred to as RTC 4192), a battery 4194, and a RAM 4196. The RTC 4192 includes a register circuit, a clock input circuit, a clock output circuit, an interrupt output circuit, a data input / output circuit, a control circuit, and the like. The RTC 4192 can output current calendar information and time information. The calendar information includes information related to the date, for example, information such as “year”, “month”, “day”, “day of the week”, and the like. The time information includes information about time, for example, information such as “hour”, “minute”, “second”, and the like. The RAM 4196 stores information necessary for the operation of the RTC 4192. The battery 4194 is connected to the RTC 4192 and the RAM 4196 and functions as a backup power source for these. As the battery 4194, a primary battery such as a button battery, a rechargeable secondary battery, or a large-capacity capacitor may be used.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes a power supply board 851 (see FIG. 169, which will be described later) for supplying power to each board such as a main board 4000 and a peripheral control board 4010 which will be described later. When the power supply board 851 is turned on, power is supplied to each board, and when the power supply board 851 is turned off, the supply of power to each board is stopped.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the power supply board 851 is turned on), the RTC 4192 receives power from the power supply board 851 and operates. On the other hand, the RTC 4192 cannot receive power from the power supply board 851 when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (when the power supply board 851 is turned off), but receives power supply from the battery 4194. The operation can be continued even when the power is turned off.

  The built-in RTC 4140aa is a part that manages information related to the current date and time, and can output current calendar information and time information. Since the built-in RTC 4140aa is a part that operates upon receiving power supply from the power supply board 851, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off (when power supply from the power supply board 851 is stopped), current calendar information and time Information is lost. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a obtains the calendar information and time information from the RTC 4192 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up (when the power is turned on) or when a failure occurs in the power supply board 851 (for example, when a momentary power failure occurs). It is received and set in the built-in RTC 4140aa. Thereafter, when using the calendar information and the time information, the peripheral control MPU 4140a does not use the calendar information and the time information of the RTC 4192, but uses the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa.

  If the peripheral control MPU 4140a cannot acquire calendar information and time information from the RTC 4192, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the RTC 4192 has caused a malfunction and performs error processing. As error processing, a predetermined initial value may be set as the calendar information and time information, and the operation may be performed. The initial value may be, for example, “Saturday, January 1, 2011, 12:00”.

  Here, in the peripheral control board 4010 (for example, a peripheral control RAM 4140e or RAM 4140f to be described later), a “special date and time (for example, date and time after a predetermined period elapses from the delivery date)” is set in advance. The peripheral control board 4010 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4140) may perform “special processing” when the “special date and time” exists. However, even if the current time corresponds to the “special date and time”, if the RTC 4192 malfunctions and the error processing is performed, the calendar information and the time information are reset to the initial values. “Special processing” may not be performed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the peripheral control board 4010), the clerk of the game store (such as a pachinko hall or a game center) in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed switches the “special date and time” to a suitable date and time. It may have a function that can

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the RTC control unit 4190 operates even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. In this way, the calendar information and time information output by the RTC control unit 4190 can be made accurate. Further, even if the calendar information and time information are lost when the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the built-in RTC 4140aa is newly set with the calendar information and time information output from the RTC control unit 4190 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4140a can perform control based on accurate calendar information and time information without inquiring of the RTC 4192 each time.

  In the present embodiment, the RTC control unit 4190 is provided on the peripheral control board 4010. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other boards (for example, relay boards 3014, 3016, 2018, 3020 described later) are provided. Or a lamp driving substrate 4170). Further, the RTC control unit 4190 may include a GPS update unit that periodically acquires current calendar information and time information from GPS satellites in order to make the current calendar information and time information accurate. .

<RAM backup power supply function>
As shown in FIG. 190B, the RAM backup power supply function will be described using the peripheral control unit 4140. FIG. In the peripheral control unit 4140 in FIG. 190B, configurations other than the functional blocks described below (for example, a sound source IC 4140c described later) are omitted. As shown in FIG. 190B, the peripheral control unit 4140 includes a capacitor BC2, a diode SD0, and a RAM 4140f in addition to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  The RAM 4140f is a memory for storing information that the pachinko gaming machine 1 (power supply board 851) wants to retain without being lost even when the power is turned off. The diode SD0 is connected to the + 5.25V creating circuit 851e of the power supply substrate 851 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 on the anode terminal side, and a voltage of + 5.25V can be applied. The diode SD0 is connected to the RAM 4140f and the capacitor BC2 on the cathode terminal side.

  Capacitor BC2 is an electric double layer capacitor and functions as a backup power source for RAM 4140f. The capacitor BC2 has a negative terminal grounded to the ground, while a positive terminal is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. The power from the + 5.25V generation circuit 851e is supplied to the RAM 4140f and also to the capacitor BC2. Thereby, the capacitor BC2 is charged. Therefore, when the power from the + 5.25V generation circuit 851e is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4010, the charge charged in the capacitor BC2 is supplied to the RAM 4140f, and the stored contents of the RAM 4140f are held. In this case, the diode SD0 can prevent electric charges from being supplied from the capacitor BC2 to the power supply substrate 851 side.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a appropriately stores information that the pachinko machine 1 (power supply board 851) does not lose even when the power is turned off in the RAM 4140f, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off again. When the power is turned on, continuous control is possible using the information stored in the RAM 4140f before the power is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the diode SD0, the capacitor BC2, and the RAM 4140f are provided in the peripheral control unit 4140. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be provided in the liquid crystal control unit 4150, for example. The RAM 4140f may be shared by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

[3-4. LCD controller]
Next, as shown in FIG. 168, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the peripheral control board 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, a VDP (abbreviation of video display processor) 4150c for controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d. And a character RAM 4150e to which various stored data are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like. Control is in progress. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an execution signal (to be described later) from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, its control data (display command), and A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c, and then the screen data following the top screen data. Extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b one by one from the head screen data, and outputs it to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. If the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, if the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”) set.

  Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats the main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixel and the direction crossing the one direction sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900.

[3-5. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 851 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. Note that the grounds of the various substrates and the grounds of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851 although not shown.

[3-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the island facility. When the power switch 852 is operated, the power supplied from the island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the power supply board 851 includes a full-wave rectification circuit 851a, a power factor correction circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and a + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectification circuit 851a performs full-wave rectification of AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the island facility and supplies the rectified current to the power factor correction circuit 851b. This power factor improvement circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified electric power to generate DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851c. The smoothing circuit 851c smoothes + 37V by removing the input + 37V ripple, and + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. The + 5.2V creation circuit 851d creates a direct current + 5.2V (DC + 5.2V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.2V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c.

  The + 5.25V creation circuit 851e creates a direct current + 5.25V (DC + 5.25V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5.25V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 12V creation circuit 851f creates a direct current + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The + 24V creating circuit 851g creates DC + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851c. The voltages created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, the + 12V creation circuit 851f, and the + 24V creation circuit 851g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. Note that AC24V supplied from the island facility is also supplied to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 via the power supply board 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851a.

  The power supply board 851 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source of a RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 in the payout control board 4110. This is a backup power source for RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  As described later, + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and is also supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. + 5.2V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and also to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. + 5.2V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e via the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC1”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control board 4110. That is, as for the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d, current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM that is forward by the diode PD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC1, An electric current flows toward.

  In this way, the capacitor BC1 has an electrical connection method in which + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d returns to the payout control board 4110 and then from the payout control board 4110 back to the power supply board 851. 2V can be applied and charged. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is not supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control MPU4111a does not operate, but the stored contents are retained by applying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has come to be.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 (hereinafter referred to as “the negative terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is grounded, and the positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as “the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e that is forward by the diode MD0, the + terminal of the capacitor BC0, An electric current flows toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 from the supply control board 4110 and the supply control board 4110 again from + 5.2V created by the + 5.2V creation circuit 851d. Depending on the connection method, + 5.2V is applied and charging is possible. As a result, when the power from the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB. Therefore, the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate. It has come to be.

[3-5B. Voltage supplied to each control board]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 169, three types of voltages, + 5.2V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and the main control board is passed through the payout control board 4110. 4100 is also supplied. In addition, four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V created by the power supply board 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, and the peripheral control board is provided via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872. On the other hand, among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are supplied to the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. As shown in FIG. 170 (a), four types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V supplied to the peripheral control board 4010 are + 5.25V, + 12V, and Three kinds of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the lamp driving circuit 4161 of each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001, and the lighting signal is sent from the lamp driving circuit 4161 to various decorative boards of the game board 4 Various signals such as a flashing signal and a gradation lighting signal are output, and the four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuit 4162 of each relay board 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. The drive signal is output from the drive source drive circuit 4162 to an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4. Of the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of +24 V and +37 V are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a that is controlled for drawing, and a backlight power source that is a power source for the backlight of the liquid crystal module 1900a. Power is being supplied. In contrast, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), three types of voltages of + 5.25V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the door frame base board 194. Of these three types of voltages, + 12V is supplied to the + 9V creation circuit 194a to create DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”). In addition to the three types of voltages, the door frame base substrate 194 supplies four types of voltages including +9 V generated by the +9 V generation circuit 194 a to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5.

[3-5C. Voltage supplied to dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4111a. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5.2V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from the + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 through the diode PD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110b is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and monitors these + 12V and + 24V power outages or signs of instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 12V and + 24V, the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure warning. This power failure notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 via the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 170 (a) and 170 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted via the peripheral control board 4010. The backlight power supply 1900b is transmitted to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base substrate 194, and various decorative substrates of the door frame 5 are passed through the door frame base substrate 194. Etc. are to be transmitted.

  In addition to + 12V and + 24V being supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110b, + 12V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111e of the payout control unit 4111, and + 24V is, for example, payout of the payout control unit 4111 It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply board 851 is not used at all in the payout control board 4110 and is supplied to the launch power supply board 831 as it is via the payout control board 4110. The firing power supply substrate 831 creates a predetermined voltage, which will be described later, from the supplied + 37V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the firing control unit 4120.

[3-5D. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the main control board 4100 includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5.2V from the payout control board 4110, and removes noise from this + 5.2V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 through the diode MD0, this + 5.2V is supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 4100a. For example, + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100f and the like, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g and the like, for example.

[3-5E. Voltage supplied to launch power board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the launch power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (capacitance: 4700 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down + 37V from the payout control board 4110 to create direct current + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 35V”) to drive the firing solenoid of the launch control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. This is supplied to the circuit 4120d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as “−terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”) is grounded, while the plus terminal (hereinafter referred to as “positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0”). Is electrically connected to the + 35V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying + 35V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In the present embodiment, a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the dispensing control board 4110. It has become. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[3-6. Driving solenoid drive method]
Next, a method for driving the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, output voltage, signal logic and waveform, etc. at predetermined points of the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing a driving circuit for a firing solenoid, FIG. 172 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 173 is a diagram showing characteristics of the DC / DC converter. FIG. 174 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit for the firing solenoid of FIG.

[3-6A. Launch solenoid drive system]
As shown in FIG. 171, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 is mainly composed of a firing control input circuit 4120a, an oscillation circuit 4120b, a firing timing circuit 4120c, a firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball in the dispensing control board 4110. The feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e, the DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply board 831, the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply board 851, and the smoothing circuit 851c are configured.

  When the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the launch control input circuit 4120a receives power (AC24V) from the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110. Is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a CR connection signal, and a detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle is input. When the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518, which is output as a touch detection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120c and detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped according to the player's will, is input. The stop detection signal is output to the launch timing circuit 4120c.

  The launch timing circuit 4120c permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal from the launch control input circuit 4120a. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4120c has a first state that the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Case, touch detection signal is the second case that the palm or finger is not touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the firing stop detection signal tells that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped Among the third cases, when one of the cases is applicable, the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited, while when not all of the cases, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted.

  The firing timing circuit 4120c is input with the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b. When the launching solenoid 654 is permitted to launch a game ball, 100 game balls per minute are played based on this clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and a ball feed reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number of times (5 times in this embodiment). It outputs to the feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e. The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d drives the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by + 24V from the power supply board 851.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4121a, an amplifier circuit 4121b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and a switching circuit 4121d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121a is supplied with + 5.2V generated by the + 5.2V generation circuit 851d of the power supply board 851. The direct current + 2.5V stabilized from this + 5.2V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter “ + 2.5V ”) and is supplied to the amplifier circuit 4121b.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to the load. The REF terminal that is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal that is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 are electrically connected to + 5.2V via the resistor PR2, and the resistor PR2 connects to the REF terminal. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4121b. This +2.5 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC0 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC0 also serves as a low-pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Returning to FIG. 171, the amplifier circuit 4121 b amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121 a by a factor of two to create DC +5.0 V (DC +5.0 V, hereinafter referred to as “+5.0 V”). Then, it is supplied to the rotational position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192.

  The amplifier circuit 4121b mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC1 as shown in FIG. 172 (a). The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplifier circuit, and + 2.5V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, and the operational amplifier PIC1. One end of the inverting input terminal (− terminal) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR3 whose ground is grounded, and the other end of the resistor PR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. And are electrically connected. The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set so that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is, as described above, + 5.0V obtained by amplifying + 2.5V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the handle. The rotation position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 is supplied via the device relay board 192. This +5.0 V is smoothed by removing ripples (AC component convoluted with voltage) by the capacitor PC2 connected to the ground (the capacitor PC2 also serves as a low-pass filter). Note that + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC1 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 171, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, and one fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with +5.0 V from the above-described amplifier circuit 4121b, and the other fixed terminal at both ends is the handle. It is electrically connected to the resistor PR0 of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d in the payout control board 4110 via the device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded. From the variable terminal which is a terminal different from the fixed terminals at both ends of the rotational position detection sensor 512, it is possible to take out the divided voltage of the voltage applied to both ends according to the variable resistance value. The voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is connected to resistances PR5 and PR6 (described later) in the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 via the handle device relay board 192 and the main side relay terminal board 880. 172 (b)), and the divided voltage of the resistor PR6 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (b), the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 is passed through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880 as described above. The ripple (the AC component convolved with the voltage) is removed and smoothed by the grounded and grounded capacitor PC3 (the capacitor PC3 also serves as a low-pass filter), and the firing solenoid of the dispensing control board 4110 The voltage is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120d. As shown in FIG. 172 (b), this operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 at the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage on the order of volts, and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage outputs the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by a factor of 1, that is, as it is as a voltage on the order of volts. The first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts, but outputs the voltage to the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC3. Therefore, circuit separation from the first stage output side circuit is realized. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the first stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC4 grounded to the ground.

  The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (− terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 is a non-inverting input terminal ( + Terminal). The non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR6 whose one end is grounded, in addition to the other end of the resistor PR5. As a result, the voltage from the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 in the first stage is a voltage in the order of volts because it simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage in the order of volts as described above, and is divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. The voltage of the divided resistor PR6 is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage as a voltage on the order of millivolts. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage doubles the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2, that is, the voltage in the millivolt order is output to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. To do. The operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is the voltage that the resistor PR6 in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6, directly outputs, but the resistance in the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6. Circuit separation is realized between a rear-stage input side circuit for applying a voltage that the PR6 takes on and a rear-stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c. Thereby, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear stage input side circuit to the rear stage output side circuit, and the influence of the rear stage output side circuit can be prevented from being given to the rear stage input side circuit. The + 24V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC5 grounded to the ground.

  Returning to FIG. 171, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650 flows through the resistor PR1 whose one end is grounded, so that the voltage in the millivolt order that the resistor PR1 takes is used as a firing control voltage. 4121c. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is also applied with the firing intensity target voltage, which is the voltage in the millivolt order described above. As described above, the firing control voltage and the firing strength target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c are resistances from the voltage in the order of volts to the voltage in the order of millivolts in the payout control board 4110 (the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d). The voltage is stepped down by the voltages that PR1 and PR6 handle. That is, since it is applied through a wiring pattern formed on the payout control board 4110, this wiring pattern is not easily affected by noise, and the voltage comparison circuit 4121c has a firing control voltage and a firing strength target voltage at a voltage on the order of millivolts. Can be compared with each other, between the board device of the payout control board 4110 and the hitting ball launching device 650 and between the board devices of the payout control board 4110 and the handle device 500 via the wiring. Since the wiring is easily affected by noise, the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by setting the voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4121c is an inverting circuit that compares the firing control voltage with the firing strength target voltage, and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a logical output of HI or LOW, and when the launch control voltage is greater than the launch intensity target voltage, it becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as “L”), while the launch control voltage. Is smaller than the firing intensity target voltage, it becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as “H”). Thus, since the output logic is H or L depending on the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121d as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4121d receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831a included in the firing power supply board 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c each time the firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input. A combined current obtained by combining the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC <b> 0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking device 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is input while flowing to the firing solenoid 654, the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off. In other words, the switching circuit 4121d receives the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, and supplies the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. If the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes larger than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L and OFF A signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, and the switching circuit 4121d cuts off the constant current flowing through the firing solenoid 654. By this interruption, the current does not flow to the firing solenoid 654, so that the firing control voltage becomes smaller than the firing strength target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d, As described above, 4121d supplies the firing solenoid 654 with a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. As described above, in accordance with the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c, the switching circuit 4121d generates a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current generated by the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 with the firing solenoid 654. Therefore, the switching circuit 4121d performs control to cause the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c to self-oscillate and flow the current to the firing solenoid. That is, the switching circuit 4121d functions as a “self-excited oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the firing control voltage close to the firing intensity target voltage. Thereby, the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is rotated, and the launch solenoid 654 can be driven with a launch intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and is at the original rotational position where the front of the rotary handle main body 506 is not rotated, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0. The applied voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to the switching circuit 4121d, the switching circuit 4121d combines the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The merged current is passed through the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. At this time, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is at least over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current commensurate with the voltage (the minimum output current output from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are combined). When the merged current) flows to the firing solenoid 654, the game ball launched by the firing solenoid 654 reaches the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 even if the game ball can jump over the firing rail 660. Therefore, the foul balls are collected by the foul cover unit 540. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the firing intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is the minimum current. However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the game balls that have been launched are collected as foul balls. Thereby, since it can prevent overlapping with the game ball sent to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, the firing solenoid 654 is prevented from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. In addition, it is possible to prevent the firing solenoid 654 from being overloaded and to prevent failure.

  In this embodiment, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a + 2.5V. Is amplified by the amplifier circuit 4121b and is divided by the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, so that the rotational position of the front part 506 of the rotary handle body is the same as that of the divided voltage. When held at the position, no fluctuation occurs and the voltage is held constant. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

  In addition, the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed has a game ball circulation system in which game balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are ground and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine again. For this reason, the temperature in the island facility is extremely high due to heat generated by polishing of the game balls, heat generated by collision and friction between the game balls, and heat generated by the power supply board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric decorations. In this embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 for the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, + 2.5V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is trapped in the pachinko facility. It can be output. As a result, since the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to temperature is suppressed, the voltage taken out from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512, that is, the “fluctuation” of the firing intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4121c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121d without including the minute voltage. In other words, when the rotation position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body is the same rotation position, “unevenness” can be suppressed in the firing strength at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100, so that “unevenness” of the game ball is suppressed. be able to.

[3-6B. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 173 with respect to the input current at the point TA and the output current and output voltage at the point TB shown in FIG. The TA point is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference from the ground.

  First, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at the point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V, as shown in FIG. 173 (a). Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in the section B where the output voltage Vout is from + 30V to + 20V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In section C where the current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout increases from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases from 400 mA to 660 mA by approximately 260 mA and the output voltage Vout increases by +10 V as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the section D from 1 to +5 V, the output current Iout increases from 660 mA to 1010 mA by about 350 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. Note that, in the vicinity of +5 V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (b), the relationship between the input current Iin at the TA point and the output current Iout at the TB point is that the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. It has become a relationship. Specifically, in the section A where the output voltage Vout is from + 35V to + 30V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, whereas the input current Iin is reduced by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when a current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still a game. While the firing intensity is difficult to reach the region 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body flows through the firing solenoid 654 and the input current Iin begins to become smaller than the output current Iout, The game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a launch intensity that reaches the game area 1100. In the section B where the output voltage Vout is + 30V to + 20V, the output current Iout increases from 360 mA to 400 mA by about 40 mA, while the input current Iin decreases from 320 mA to 260 mA, which is compared with the output current Iout. Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In the section C where the output voltage Vout is from + 20V to + 10V, the output current Iout is increased by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by approximately 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout is increased by about 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, whereas the input current Iin is decreased by about 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current obtained by combining 360 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle body. The current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 when the rotating handle main body front 506 is not rotated is touched 506, whereas the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA. In some cases, the combined current of 1010 mA and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the front of the rotary handle body 506 and rotates the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise. Thus, the current flows through the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotational position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the firing intensity of the firing solenoid 654 is that the game ball that has already jumped to the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 collides with the stop 1114. Then, it rolls downstream along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and is strong enough to be collected at the out port 1151 without entering the various winning ports. For this reason, the range of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a that can be taken when the player turns the front of the rotary handle body 506 clockwise to play a game is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <value of output current Iout <1000 mA), which is a milliampere order current.

[3-6C. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and firing reference pulse from firing timing circuit]
Next, at a fixed rotational position in front of the rotary handle body 506, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at the point TB shown in FIG. 171 and the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, Will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TB point is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (potential difference from the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the TC point is a firing reference pulse from the firing timing circuit 4120c. This is a point for referring to T0.

  As described above, when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c allows the launching of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654, 100 game balls per minute, that is, 60000 ms, are directed toward the game area 1100. Since it is set to be ejected, the pulse width is 30 ms and the period T is 600 ms as shown in FIG.

  Here, when the player touches the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle body front 506 to reach the limit rotational position, the DC / DC in the original rotational position not rotated. A waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  174 (b) and (c) when the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle 506 is in the limit rotational position. As described above, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described maximum current and starts to flow to the firing solenoid 654 (timing t0). ). When this maximum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) drops to +5 V in accordance with the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a is 1010 mA which is the maximum output current described above. Then, when the input is stopped after 30 ms has elapsed after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). When the maximum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as shown in FIG. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is close to zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is equal to the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging starts with a certain current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to near +35 V, charging is continued with a current of 360 mA, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  On the other hand, when the firing handle front pulse 506 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front of the rotary handle body 506 is in the original rotational position, FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and is supplied to the firing solenoid 654. The flow starts (timing t0). When this minimum current is flowing to firing solenoid 654, the voltage of DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of electrolytic capacitor SC0) slightly decreases according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the minimum output current described above. Then, after the input of the firing reference pulse T0, when 30 ms elapses and the input is stopped, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slightly advanced (timing t1). When the minimum current to the firing solenoid 654 is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases as described above. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 slightly falls, but belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is output from the DC / DC converter 831a. Charging is started by a current of 360 mA that is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, charging is completed within a period of 570 ms from the time when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input and 30 ms elapses until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  As described above, even when the maximum current and the minimum current flow through the firing solenoid 654, due to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, the charge discharged from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms when the current firing reference pulse T0 is input. Can be completed within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, consider a case where the DC / DC converter 831a adopts a control method in which a current flows through the firing solenoid 654 alone in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period of 30 ms after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. In this control method, since the current that the DC / DC converter 831a independently flows to the firing solenoid 654 is about 2 A to 3.5 A, this current is supplied from the power supply board 851. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven, a large current larger than 2 A to 3.5 A flows instantaneously. Then, every time the firing reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated with a period T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply board also increases with this period T. In other words, the power supply board supplies a predetermined current to electronic components, decorations used for decoration, etc. in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the firing solenoid 654 is driven. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply is cut off for safety.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the DC / DC converter 831a independently drives the firing solenoid 654 without the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input. The amperage-order current supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V on the power supply board 851 is extended to a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is inputted until the next firing reference pulse T0 is inputted. When the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0, the “first current” in the order of milliamperes supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of + 37V of the power supply board 851. And electrolytic When the power supply SC0 is charged with the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is distributed to the “second current” in the milliampere order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851. it can. As a result, the amperage order of the amperage order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the + 37V DC power supply of the power supply board 851 in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width after the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The current is supplied from the DC power source of + 37V of the power supply board 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a during a period of 600 ms from when the firing reference pulse T0 is input in the presence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 until the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the “first current” and “second current” in the order of milliamperes supplied. Therefore, a load for supplying an instantaneous large current by driving the firing solenoid 654 can be eliminated from the power supply board 851. Further, it is possible to eliminate the time spent on designing the operating conditions of the safety device when the power supply board 851 is overloaded.

[3-6D. Relationship between firing reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the firing reference pulse T0 and the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the TC point is a point for referring to the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c, and the TD point shown in FIG. 171 refers to the ball feeding reference pulse T1 from the firing timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

  The ball feed reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5) which is five times 30 ms which is the firing reference pulse T0. When the firing reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d, as shown in FIGS. Input to the circuit 4120e (when timing t0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t3). Thereby, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. Thus, the next set of game balls to be launched can be completed before the next firing reference pulse T0 is input. Each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the game ball is moved to the game area 1100. It can be launched continuously toward.

  As described above, in this example, after the game ball is driven by the firing solenoid 654, the driving power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, and the electrolytic power supply board 831 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Therefore, the current (maximum current) supplied to the firing solenoid 654 can be changed by exchanging the firing power supply substrate 831 having the electrolytic capacitors SC0 having different capacities, and the driving characteristics of the hit ball launching device 650 can be changed. The characteristics can be changed to match the board 4.

  In addition, since power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, the power from the power supply board 851 is stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and fired between the time the game ball is launched and the next time it is launched. By supplying the power to the solenoid 654, it is possible to avoid instantaneously consuming a large current directly from the power supply board 851, and light emission and movement of the LED of the light emitting decoration board, the motor for driving the effect, the solenoid, etc. It is possible to prevent instability and occurrence of unevenness of the game ball.

  Further, the power supply board 851 creates and supplies DC power (+ 5.2V, + 5.25V, + 12V, + 24V, and + 37V) from the AC power (AC24V) of the island facility, and the hitting ball launcher 650 has a handle. The front of the rotary handle main body 506 of the device 500 is rotated, and the shooting solenoid 654 can be driven with a shooting intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch a game ball toward the game area 1100.

  The firing intensity target voltage applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is + 2.5V, which is a constant voltage from the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, is amplified by the amplification circuit 4121b, and + 5.0V is the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506 is held at the same rotational position, the divided voltage is maintained at a constant voltage without fluctuation. Become. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to be close to the launch intensity target voltage by causing the combined current to flow to the launch solenoid 654 of the ball hitting device 650, so that the launch control voltage becomes the same as the launch intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows. Therefore, the firing solenoid 654 causes the game ball to play the game area 1100. The firing strength launched towards the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent “flying unevenness” of the game ball due to the drive firing of the firing solenoid 654.

[3-7. Control processing on main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 to 187. FIG. 175 is a flowchart illustrating an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 176 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing upon occurrence of power interruption. FIG. 177 is a flowchart illustrating an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 178 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing the start opening winning process. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing the variation start process. FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  FIG. 183 is a flowchart showing an example of the big hit game start process. FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process. FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 187 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

  As shown in FIG. 175, in the main process, when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU 4100a executes a power-on process (step S1). In this power-on process, it is determined whether or not the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is normal (is a set value when a power failure occurs). If normal, the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e is used. Executes processing to return to the power outage (power recovery processing), and if the backup data is abnormal, clears RAM 4100e and performs CPU peripheral device settings (normal initial settings, interrupt timing settings, etc.) Do.

  When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. If the RAM clear switch 4100c that instructs to clear the backup data stored in the RAM 4100e during the power-on process is on, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed. In addition, when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control board 4100 during the power-on process, the RAM 4100e is cleared and normal initialization is performed.

  In the power-on process, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been activated to the peripheral control unit 4140 when normal initialization is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 that the main control board 4100 has been activated. The backup data is also stored in the RAM 4100e even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, a power-on process is executed.

  When this power-on process is completed, the main control MPU 4100a starts a loop process in which each game process is repeatedly executed. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 851. That is, since a plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate with different power supply voltages, after the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from an external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board 851, Supply to each device. Accordingly, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board 851 is equal to or lower than the predetermined power supply voltage, the power failure notice indicating that the supply of the power supply voltage from the power supply board 851 to the main control board 4100 is stopped. A signal is transmitted. Then, when a power failure notice signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, a process at the time of occurrence of power interruption is executed (step S4).

  The process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption is performed when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board 851 after the power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery). In order to start from the state, the state when the power failure occurs is stored as backup data in the RAM 4100e. Although the processing content will be described later, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the power failure occurrence processing is not interrupt processing, but as branch processing that is executed immediately after the start of the loop depending on whether or not a power failure warning signal is detected. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

  By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power supply is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step S2). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176, the process at the time of power-off occurrence is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. First, the main control MPU 4100a performs an interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM 4100e is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether or not the content of the RAM 4100e before the power failure is retained at the time of power recovery.

  Subsequently, the main control MPU 4100a sets a specified value indicating that the process at the time of power-off occurrence has been performed in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e (step S4c). When the above processing is completed, the main control MPU 4100a prohibits access to the RAM 4100e (step S4d) and enters an infinite loop to prepare for the stop of power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure, etc. (hereinafter referred to as “instantaneous power interruption”), the process at the time of the occurrence of a power interruption has started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that it is impossible to return from the infinite loop in the above processing. In order to avoid such adverse effects, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the process is normally performed. However, the watchdog timer enters the process when the power is cut off and is not updated. As a result, even when a power interruption occurs due to a momentary power failure and an infinite loop is entered, a reset is applied after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main control MPU 4100a is activated in the same process as when the power is turned on.

  Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. After executing the register saving process (step S10), the control MPU 4100a executes the processes from step S11 to step S18. In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-described switches (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 in step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated in the random number update process 1 is different from the random number updated in the random number update process 2 described above. Although the random number will be described later, the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may be updated in the random number update process 1 as well. In the payout operation process in step S13, a payout command for instructing payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

  Further, in the normal control process in step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the movable piece 2105 that opens and closes the second start port 2102 by the start port solenoid 2121) is controlled. Then, a process of changing the open / close state of the second start port 2102 is executed. In the special control process in step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variably displayed on the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 based on the progress of the game. A special electric accessory (that is, an opening / closing member 2106 for opening / closing the special winning opening 2103 by the attacker solenoid 2124) is controlled to execute a process of changing the open / closed state of the special winning opening 2103.

  In the subsequent output data setting process in step S16, a process for outputting a state signal indicating a gaming state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer), and a drive signal is output to a special figure start memory display (not shown). The process to perform is performed. In the command transmission process of step S17, a process of transmitting the effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. In the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the process from step S11 to step S17 is executed, a register restoration process (step S18) is executed, and the process ends.

  Here, various random numbers that are updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the random number update process 1 (step S12) and the random number update process 2 (step S3) described above will be described. In this embodiment, as the various random numbers used in the game, the big hit determination random number used for the determination of whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state (also called the big hit determination or big hit lottery), the big hit gaming state in the big hit determination A special jackpot symbol used to determine the special symbol stop symbol (the symbol associated with the jackpot type (probability jackpot, number of rounds, etc.)) Reach determination random number, special symbol display 1185 used for determination (reach determination) on whether or not to perform a high expectation effect such as a reach effect when it is determined that neither a big win nor a small win (losing) is determined Fluctuation display pattern random number (variation time) used to determine the variation display pattern (variation time, etc.) of the special symbol displayed in 1186 Random number), usually per determining random number used for determining whether to control the movable piece 2105 in an open state to open and close the second start hole 2102 (ordinary lottery per determination), and the like.

  As will be described later, the jackpot determination random number according to this embodiment is also used to determine whether or not a specific condition to be performed when it is determined that the jackpot is lost (lost) is satisfied. Is done. Also, the jackpot symbol random number is the type of jackpot that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot is won (whether the probability variation function or the time shortening function is activated, the opening mode of the jackpot 2103 in the jackpot game, etc. It is also used for the judgment on the type of jackpot that is determined.

  Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, a big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, a big hit symbol random number, and a normal symbol per random determination random number related to whether or not the movable piece 2105 is controlled to be opened. Update. That is, the random number used for the determination relating to the occurrence of the big hit gaming state and whether or not to control the movable piece 2105 to the open state is updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability (probability to determine that a big hit gaming state is generated, probability to determine that the movable piece 2105 is controlled to be opened) in a predetermined period with each random number can be made constant. It is possible to prevent the person from becoming disadvantaged. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the generation of the big hit gaming state and the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery and the variable display pattern random number are updated.

[About special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 178 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the special control process.

  In this special control process, first, first and second start opening prize winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first / second start opening winning process, a determination is made as to whether or not a game ball has won the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102. Then, after the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) is performed, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Will be done.

  More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 ( YES in step S120), a fluctuation start process (step S130) is executed. In the variation start process (step S130), after setting for starting the variation display of the special symbol is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery, the processing flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 (the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator). After the change display of the special symbol (identification symbol) from the start to the stop display is determined in any of 1186, the processing flag is updated to “2”.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the changing process (step S180) is executed. In this changing process, the changing time set in the changing pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and the special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 uses the special time indicator 1186 based on the time-out. Stop changing the symbol display. Thereafter, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the big hit is won, the process selection flag is updated to “3”. On the other hand, if it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied even though the big hit is lost (the win is won for the small hit), the processing selection flag is updated to “4”. However, the process selection flag is updated to “0” when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss). That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the process flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the big hit game start process (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the type of jackpot is determined, and after the opening mode (number of rounds, opening time, game ball winning limit number, etc.) at the jackpot 2103 according to the type is set, the processing flag is set. It is updated to “5”. On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the process flag is 4 (YES in step S210), a small hit game start process (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game start process, after the opening mode (opening number and opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing device 500) in the big winning opening 2103 corresponding to the small hit is set, the processing flag is set to “6”. Is updated.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the process flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the big hit game process (step S240) is executed. In this jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing device 500 is controlled based on the opening mode at the big prize opening 2103 set in the jackpot game start process (step S200). In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing flag is updated to “0” after determining whether or not to operate the probability variation function or the time reduction function. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the processing flag is 6 and the small hit game processing (step S250) is executed. In this small hit game process (step S250), the opening / closing operation applied to the opening / closing device 500 is controlled based on the opening mode at the big prize opening 2103 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). In addition, when the small hit game process ends, the process flag is updated to “0”, that is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the change start process (step S130) is performed again.

  As described above, when any one of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

[About the 1st and 2nd starting entrance prize process]
Next, the first / second start opening winning process (step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 179 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the first and second start-up prize winning processes.

  In the first / second start opening winning process (step S110), the process mainly involved in determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first start opening 2101 or the second start opening 2102, and the winning On the condition that it is determined that there has been, the process related to the update of the hold state of the corresponding special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is performed.

  Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not a detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 2127. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 2127, it is determined that a game ball has been won at the second start port 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the second reserved number counter provided in the RAM 4100e becomes the upper limit value 4 Judgment is made as to whether or not it is less than. As a result, if the second hold number counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

  That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data acquired by winning a game ball at the second start port 2102 (a big hit determination random number, for a big hit symbol) as the second start hold storage process (step S203). A random number or the like) is stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) while being associated with the type of special symbol or the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e.

  In the process of step 203, a winning notification command is set to indicate that a game ball has been won at the second starting port 2102 (more precisely, the type of special symbol or the order of holding). The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 in the command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, when the suspension display on the second start port 2102 side is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like through the control by the peripheral control board 4010, this can be quickly updated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2127 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the detection signal is 4, next, as a process of step S205, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3231. As a result, when it is determined that a detection signal is output from first start port sensor 3231, it is determined that a game ball has been won at first start port 2101 (YES in step S205), and the next Then, the process of step S206 is performed. In the processing of step S206, various random numbers for the first big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first reserved number counter provided in the RAM 4100e becomes the upper limit 4 Judgment is made as to whether or not it is less than. As a result, if the first hold number counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

  In other words, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a first performs various data obtained by winning a game ball at the first start port 2101 (a big hit determination random number, a big hit symbol random number) as the first start hold storage process (step S207). Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM 4100e) in association with the types of special symbols and the order of suspension. Next, as a hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM 4100e.

  Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command indicating that a game ball has been won at the first starting port 2101 (more precisely, the type of special symbol, the order of holding, etc.) is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 in the command transmission process (step S17). With such a configuration, it is possible to update the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like on hold on the first start port 2101 side quickly through control by the peripheral control board 4010.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S205 that no game ball has been won at the first start port 2101 or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first holding number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, at this point, the first and second start opening winning processes are terminated.

  In this embodiment, after the winning process (step S201 to step S204) for the second starting port 2102 is executed, the winning process (step S205 to step S208) for the first starting port 2101 is executed. Yes. However, instead of this, after the winning process to the first starting port 2101 is executed, the winning process to the second starting port 2102 may be executed.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute a preceding determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and may further transmit a command representing the result of the preceding determination process to the peripheral control board 4010 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, determination of big hit lottery, probability variation lottery, small hit lottery, and variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is preliminarily determined. It is a process to determine. The preceding determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the preceding determination table. The preceding determination table is a table similar to the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the preceding determination process, by comparing the random number with the preceding determination table, the lottery result when the lottery using the random number is performed (whether the big hit or the small hit, the type of the big hit, the variation display pattern, etc.) (The determination made in this way prior to the lottery is also referred to as “prefetch determination”). The peripheral control board 4010 may realize an effect reflecting the received winning notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is “prefetching” Also called “Direction”). For example, when the pre-determining result indicates that an effect with a specific singer as a motif is realized, a character representing a specific singer is displayed in the effect before the effect is realized. It may be an effect.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the content of the preceding determination table may be different from the content of the table used for the lottery.

  The main control MPU 4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies a specific condition. When the game condition does not satisfy the specific condition, the main control MPU 4100a A winning notification command that does not represent a result may be transmitted. For example, when the variable display resulting from winning at the first start port 2101 is not started immediately after winning but is put on hold, the main control MPU 4100a displays a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination processing related to the winning. You may send it. Here, in the big hit gaming state and the short-time gaming state, the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a winning notification command indicating the result of the preceding determination process, but transmits a winning notification command that does not indicate the result of the preceding determination process. May be. The specific conditions regarding the second start port 2102 may be similar.

[About variation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 180 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation start process.

  In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is “0”, the main control MPU 4100a firstly sets the values of the two reserved number counters (first start memory) corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b. It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start memory number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two reserved number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 2390a and 2390b are storage areas for the first start memory and the second start memory (special symbol random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (see FIG. 187). )) Indicates the number of random values stored. Therefore, if the value of the hold number counter is “0” in this step S301 (YES), it is determined that none of the start conditions for the first big hit lottery and the second big hit lottery are satisfied, and then the next step As the process of S318, the change start process is terminated when the process flag is updated to “1”.

  On the other hand, if neither the first start memory number nor the second start memory number is “0” (NO in step S301), the special symbol is used to update the order of execution of the big hit lottery that is in the hold state. Shift processing is performed in the random number storage means 4515 and 4532 (steps S302 to S310).

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d). These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the first starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). These storage areas are respectively associated with the values of the second starting storage numbers (“1” to “4”). In each of the storage areas 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d, a big hit determination random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit determination random number is stored, a big hit symbol random number, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, and the like are stored. A jackpot symbol random number storage area 4581 is provided.

  That is, the main control MPU 4100a appropriately operates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 as a shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol changes. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and when the jackpot is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side Although there is no difference in the expected value of the benefits (such as the number of winning balls that can be earned) given to the player in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, On the other hand, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, there is a chance that it will be won, and the probability of winning on the small hit is “0%”, so only the lottery process on the second special symbol side is executed As much as possible, the small hit gaming state is not generated.

  In this regard, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the winning (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device is not won. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated so that all the lotteries (the lottery of the second special symbol) based on the winning at the second starting port 2102 are digested first. As a result, until the number of holds for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes “0”, only the game (the lottery on the second special symbol side) that is not won in the above-mentioned small win is sequentially performed. Will be able to. In addition, as will be described later, in the game state in which the so-called time-shortening function is activated, the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, which is the side to be digested, is not interrupted. Since the control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the game ball to the second start port 2102 that is the trigger for the execution of the game, the lottery (fluctuation) only on the second special symbol side is continuously executed. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 180 and 187, in the shift process (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the process of step S302, the process is preferentially digested.

  It is determined whether or not the value of the holding number counter (second starting storage number) corresponding to the second special symbol display 1186 is “0”, that is, in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532a. It is determined whether random numbers are stored. As a result, if it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second storage area [1] 4532a stores the second random number. A random number related to the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). In other words, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (random number for jackpot determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for reach determination, variation display pattern random number) are not limited to the process related to jackpot lottery, but the variation pattern (variation) Games for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, processing for setting the gaming state, etc. The second start game can be progressed with the winning of the ball.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532d) are shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively (step S304). Accordingly, at least the storage area [4] 4532d is vacant, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “1” to the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the number-of-holds counter corresponding to the second special symbol (step S306). Note that the special symbol variation flag set to “1” in this way is reset, for example, when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  In contrast, as shown in FIGS. 180 and 187, when it is determined in the process of step S302 that no random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (YES in step S302), the random number relating to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 and obtained (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random number read out in this way is not only the process related to the jackpot lottery, but also the process related to the setting of the special symbol variation pattern, the process related to the setting of the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, and the setting of the gaming state The first start game that is triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2101 can be advanced by being provided to the processing related to the above.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a updates each of the nth (n is a natural number greater than or equal to 2) storage areas (storage area [2] 4515b to storage areas) in order to update the digestion rank for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515d) are respectively shifted to the (n-1) th storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c) (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d is vacant, and new start information (hold) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515d.

  Thereafter, the main control MPU 4100a sets “2” in the special symbol variation flag so as to indicate that the game on the first special symbol side (first start game) is in progress (step S309). ). Furthermore, in order to update the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the first special symbol side, “1” is subtracted from the hold number counter corresponding to the first special symbol (step S310). Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to “2” is reset when the processing flag is updated to “0” after the variation start processing is completed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the probability variation function is in operation, that is, whether or not the probability variation state has a high probability (step S312). If not the probability variation state (NO in step S312), the probability variation is not activated. Jackpot determination table, i.e., a table set with a low probability of jackpot, on the other hand, in the case of a probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of probability fluctuation operation, i.e., the probability of a big hit is Select a highly set table. In this example, the probability of winning a big hit is set to 1/400 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal), and the probability of being a big hit is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). / 400.

  After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the big hit determination random number for any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not a random number (hit value) corresponding to (step S315 (hit lottery)). If it is a jackpot value (YES in step S315), the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number for any special symbol acquired in the same manner in step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). Thereafter, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot is turned on (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

  On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number corresponding to a small hit (small hit value) (step S319). If it is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to “ON” (step S320), assuming that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if it is not the small hit value (NO in step S319), the process proceeds to step S318 without going through step S320, assuming that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied. In step S318, the process flag is updated to “1”, and the variation start process is terminated. In this example, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, random numbers generated with a random number range of, for example, 0 to 99 as the jackpot symbol random number. Numeric values are prepared, and in the processing of step S303 or step S307, one of these random values is acquired as the value of the random number for the big hit symbol. Then, the acquired random number value is used for the process of determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S316. For example, if the random number value is 0 to 52, the jackpot A is determined. If it is 53-57, it is determined as big hit B, if it is 58-63, it is determined as big hit C, if it is 64-81, it is determined as big hit D, and if it is 82-99, it is determined as big hit E. .

  According to such a determination method, as shown in FIG. 188, the probability that the type of big hit (hit involving the operation of the condition device) is determined as “big hit A” is “53%”, and the type of big hit The probability that the jackpot is determined to be “big hit B” is “5%”, the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be “big hit C” is “6%”, and the jackpot type is “big hit D”, “big hit” The probability of being determined as “E” is “18%”, respectively.

  Here, when “hit A” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the corresponding win, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of that big hit A is performed, the probability variation function and the short-time function (open) Both of these are controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of them are activated. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot A, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened and closed as a long-open game that repeats a plurality of times (in the present embodiment, 16 times) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. The long-time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2106 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10). This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2106 is returned to the closed state when any of the following conditions is met: In this long-time opening / closing pattern, the time for which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened is longer than the time for which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened in the medium-time opening / closing pattern and the small-time opening / closing pattern described later. That is, in the game per long opening, a large amount of prize balls (about 1750 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, even when “big hit B” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the hit, after the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit B is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function ( Both are controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of them are operated. However, in the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit B, the opening / closing member 2106 is played as a middle open hit game that is repeated a plurality of times (in the present embodiment, 16 times) in a medium time open / close pattern. The medium time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined medium time (for example, 13 seconds to 17 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2106 is opened from the closed state, or a predetermined medium number (for example, six). This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2106 is returned to the closed state when any of the following conditions is met: In this intermediate time opening / closing pattern, the time for which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened is longer than the time for which the opening / closing member 2106 is opened in the small-time opening / closing pattern described later. That is, in the game per middle opening, a medium amount of prize balls (about 1000 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

  On the other hand, if “big hit C” is won, the big hit game corresponding to the win of the big hit C will be given only when the gaming state at the time of the winning is “external advantageous gaming state in which the time reduction function operates”. After being performed, it is controlled to a probability changing external advantageous gaming state in which both the probability changing function and the time shortening function (open extension function) are activated. However, if the game state at the time of the selection is not the “external advantageous game state in which the time reduction function operates”, after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension extension) Function) is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function is activated. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of jackpot C, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed as the above-mentioned game for hitting inside / opening which is repeated a plurality of times (in the present embodiment, 16 times) in a middle time opening / closing pattern.

  On the other hand, when “big hit D” is won, regardless of the gaming state when the big win is won, after the big hit game corresponding to the big win D is won, the probability variation function and the short time function (open) (Extended function), and the high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability variation function operates is controlled. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot D, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening which is repeated a plurality of times (in the present embodiment, 16 times) in the middle time opening / closing pattern.

  On the other hand, when “big hit E” is won, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the hit, after the big hit game according to the win of the big hit E is performed, the probability variation function and the short time function (open extension function) The game is controlled to a normal game state (normally an external disadvantageous game state) in which none of the functions is activated. In the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot E, the opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed as the above-mentioned game for hitting the middle opening which is repeated a plurality of times (in the present embodiment, 16 times) in a medium time opening / closing pattern.

  Incidentally, when such a big hit A to E (hit with the operation of the condition device) is selected as a small hit (hit without the operation of the condition device), the opening / closing member 2106 is opened and closed for a short time. Only a game per small opening (small hit game) that is repeated a plurality of times (in this embodiment, twice in this embodiment) is performed, and the same game was performed before the game per small opening (small hit game) was performed. There is no such thing as a different gaming state. Note that the small time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined small time (for example, 3 seconds to 6 seconds) has elapsed after the opening / closing member 2106 has been opened from the closed state, or a predetermined small number (for example, two) of games. This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2106 is returned to the closed state when any of the winning conditions is satisfied at the big winning opening 2003. That is, in the game per small opening (small winning game), since only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be obtained by the player as a privilege, the opening / closing member 2106 operates. In spite of this, it can be said that attention should be paid to the handling (positioning) of the game design in that the game interest may decrease.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment, “big hit A” to “big hit E” are prepared as types of hits (big hits) that accompany the operation of the condition device. Therefore, the processing in step S317 will be described in more detail. When the big hit type is “big hit A”, the big hit flag A is turned on (set), and when the big hit type is “big hit B”, the big hit flag B is turned on (set). ), The big hit flag C is turned on (set) when it is “big hit C”, the big hit flag D is turned on (set) when it is “big hit D”, and the big hit flag E is set when it is “big hit E”. It will be in the ON state (set).

[About variation pattern setting processing]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process.

  As shown in FIG. 181, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU 4100a first sets the big hit flag “ON” as the process of step S401. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the big hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S401), the big hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed in order to set the fluctuation pattern when the big hit is won. This is performed (step S402).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the big hit flag is not “ON”, it is next determined in step S403 whether or not the small hit flag is “ON”. As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is “ON” (YES in step S403), it is determined that the specific condition is satisfied although it is lost, and the small hit is won. In order to set the fluctuation pattern at the time, a small hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed (step S404).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not “ON”, then in step S405, a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect or the like) with a high degree of expectation for winning a big hit is obtained. Judge whether or not to perform. In the process of step S405, for example, when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 180) is a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is performed, and the acquired reach is obtained. When the determination random number is not a predetermined hit value, it is determined that the high expectation effect is not performed. As a result, if it is determined that a high expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), a high expectation loss variation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that a variation pattern for performing the high expectation effect is set. This is performed (step S406).

  Regarding the number of predetermined hit values prepared for the random numbers for reach determination, the normal external disadvantaged game state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time reduction function operates) It is also possible to make the game state different for each of the game states of the probability change external disadvantage game state (only the probability change function is activated) and the probability change external advantage game state (both the probability change function and the time reduction function are activated). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the probability that it is determined that a high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value is Although it is “1/12”, in the normal external advantageous game state and the probabilistic external advantageous game state, the degree of expectation at the time of reach is further increased (or efficient holding and digestion is performed). Alternatively, it may be determined that the high-expected performance should be performed with a lower probability. On the other hand, in the probable external disadvantaged game state, it is determined that a high-expected performance should be performed with a higher probability so that the possibility of a big hit can be made more conscious. Also good.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S405 that a high-expected effect with a high degree of expectation of winning a big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the loss variation pattern when the high-expected effect is not performed In order to set (a normal loss variation pattern), a low-expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S407).

  Here, the table set in the low expected loss variation pattern table setting process is prepared in association with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holds is a predetermined value. When this is the case, the shortening variation is performed.

  However, in the gaming state in which the short-time function is activated, the fluctuation time is set so that the number of holds for the lottery (fluctuation) on the second special symbol side where the probability of winning a small hit is “0” is difficult to break. Is set. More specifically, when the number of reserves on the second special symbol side is less than or equal to the predetermined value, the shortened variation is not used in spite of the gaming state in which the time reduction function operates, and the shortened variation is employed in the normal gaming state. Only the variation time (variation time longer than the shortening variation in the normal gaming state) having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when not being played is selected. In addition, the variation time on the first special symbol side will not adopt the shortened variation regardless of the number of reserves, only the variation time having a length equal to or longer than the variation time when the shortened variation is not adopted in the normal gaming state. Is to be selected. As a result, when in the gaming state where the time-shortening function is activated, it is possible to suppress the holding of the first special symbol side where the small hit can be won, so that the pachinko machine 1 has a small hit. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that it is installed.

  As will be described later, as shown in FIG. 181, when the selection table related to the variation pattern is set in any one of steps S402, S404, S406, and S407, the main control MPU 4100a In step S410, a special symbol variation pattern is determined based on the set selection table. Next, in step S411, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol determined in this way is set as an effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) or the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a command that shows the winning type, including winning and winning hits).

  Further, the value of the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When the special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol is set based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variable display concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the display 1186 is started. Thereafter, the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated.

  By the way, the variation pattern set in the variation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 177 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. . Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4010 side, the result of the big win lottery is shown based on the variation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command. In this way, a display effect is performed.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is set as described above when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. The first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is extended to the period after the stop of the variable display for the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 without being finished within the variation time of the variation pattern. The time is extended), and it can be executed to show that it has been lost in the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device (extension effect pattern in FIG. 198 (b)). That is, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when the game per small opening is executed, the display effect that encourages the acquisition of the prize ball will not appear, and it will be relatively early after it is shown that the big win is lost. It becomes possible to shift to fluctuation (reservation of special symbols), and the extension that may give some expectation as an effect until the opening / closing member 2106 operates is suitably avoided. .

  In addition, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a special effect is provided with respect to the display effect at the time of the small hit (extended loss effect) described above, which indicates that the big hit is lost after the special symbol is stopped. There is also a display effect (extended jackpot effect) that shows that the winner is won after the symbol stops. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a win (big hit) with the operation of the condition device, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not finished within the fluctuation time of the set fluctuation pattern, and the first special The symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is won for winning (big hit) with the operation of the condition device after extending to the period after the stop of the variable display on the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs. (Extended effect pattern in FIG. 198 (b)).

  That is, in this case, the display effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as a simple loss effect (highly expected loss variation pattern) that appears when the big hit is lost. This makes it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and as a result, the opening / closing member 2106 operates in accordance with the winning of the small hit. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, about the lighting mode (at the time of special symbol stop) of the multiple LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the small hit, the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the big hit (when the special symbol is stopped) Thus, control is performed so as to appear as modes that are close to each other, such as whether or not one LED is lit or not. That is, in this case, when the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped, it is immediately determined which result is obtained (at least after the effect is extended). It will be difficult to grasp until a short time has elapsed until the winning is clearly indicated. Therefore, it is possible not only to concentrate on the extended display effect (extended effect), but also to the period after the special symbol is stopped by reducing interest in the special symbol (multiple LEDs). Even a display effect that has been made can be made difficult for the player to recognize. As a result, it is possible to suppress the guessing that a small hit is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 due to the particularity when the extended effect appears, and as a result, according to the winning of the small hit It is possible to suppress a decrease in game entertainment due to the opening / closing member 2106 operating.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a single round number is set regardless of the type of jackpot, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game is indicated when the jackpot is won. This is omitted for the well-known round lamp. As a result, it is possible to avoid exposing the big hit or the small win depending on whether or not the round lamp is turned on when the special symbol is stopped.

[Fluctuation pattern determination process for big hits]
Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of big hit will be described based on FIG. FIG. 189 is a table showing an example of a normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, a normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and a normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3. In FIG. 189, ○ in the winning column means a big hit, △ means establishment of a specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), and x means failure of the specific condition at the time of loss (pure loss). means.

  As described above, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 181), the main control MPU 4100a is won as a jackpot as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 181). The big hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern at the time of the change is set.

  In this big hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function only) Operation) and a probability change external advantageous game state (both the probability change function and the time shortening function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different big hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time-saving function are both disabled). When it is determined that it is in (operation), the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 189 is selected regardless of the type of the big hit.

  Then, as described above, when the normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 180) while referring to the selected table T1. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbols, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1. Among them, nine specific values are allocated to the fluctuation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 9%), and 20 specific values are allocated to the fluctuation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (Selection rate at big hit 20%), 30 specific values are assigned to variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) (selection rate at big hit 30%), and 40 specific values are It is assigned to the fluctuation number 12 (fluctuation time Td1) (selection rate at big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 15 (fluctuation time Te) (selection rate 1 at big hit) %). Thus, except for the big hit fixed variation number 15, the number of specific values (hit values) allocated tends to increase as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when the variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the big hit is won with the production content “a (or a ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the display effect is displayed and the change number 5 (change time Tb1) is selected, the winning content has been won in the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the effect content “b (or b ′)” appearing. Is displayed, and when variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, a big hit is won with the effect content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the display effect is displayed and the change number 12 (change time Td1) is selected, the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the display effect indicating that the big win is won is performed and the change number 15 (change time Te1) is selected, the effect content “e” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900. A display effect is shown to indicate that the winner is won. Incidentally, the production content a, the production content a ′, the production content b, the production content b ′, the production content c, the production content c ′, the production content d, the production content d ′, and the production content e are all in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The types of display effects that appear (for example, the types of reach effects and the types of story effects) are different.

  As will also be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. The fluctuation time Td1 is longer, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

  As described above, in the normal big hit variation pattern table T1, when the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number obtained in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 180). The effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command “01H” for variation number 1) and the winning information command (the winning type including winning and winning points per win) Command) are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta1 if the variation number is 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, when performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, if it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the big hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is selected. Then, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, which of the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side and the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side was won? Regardless of whether or not the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 is selected, when the first special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed, and when the second special symbol side lottery (variation) is performed Thus, display effects with different contents may appear by selecting the big hit variation pattern table having different contents.

  When it is determined that the game is in the normal external disadvantageous game state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are both inactive), the normal big hit variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 189 is selected regardless of the big hit type. However, based on the state of the big hit flag corresponding to the big hit type, any of the normal big hit variation pattern tables prepared for each big hit type may be selectively used.

  That is, in this case, the selection rate of the variation pattern can be made different according to the type of jackpot, and when a specific variation pattern appears, there is a bias such as increasing the probability of being a jackpot of a specific type. It becomes like this. In addition, even if the variation time is the same, the variation number (production command) can be made different according to the type of jackpot. In this case, just by confirming the production command, The type of jackpot can be grasped. Therefore, if the appropriateness is determined by comparing the effect command and the winning information command on the peripheral control board 4010 side, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 is improved. Will be able to.

[Change pattern determination process for small hits]
Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 181), the main control MPU 4100a performs the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 181). A small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern when winning is set.

  In this small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state (the probability variation function) Only) and a probability-variable external advantageous gaming state (both probability-changing function and time-shortening function are operating). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function and time reduction function) When it is determined that it is inactive), the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 shown in FIG. 189 is selected.

  Then, as described above, when the normal small hit variation pattern table T2 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a obtains by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 180) while referring to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that a value from “0” to “99” can be acquired as the random display pattern random number of the special symbol, in the normal small hit variation pattern table T2, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained. Among the values, 35 specific values are allocated to the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selection rate at small hit 35%), and 30 specific values are the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2). (Selection rate at small hit 30%), 30 specific values are allocated to variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (selection rate at small hit 20%), 5 A specific value is assigned to the fluctuation number 13 (fluctuation time Td2) (selection rate at the time of small hit 5%). In this way, the number assigned to a specific value (small hit value) tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, a display that shows the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content “a (or a ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the performance is performed and the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, the display of the big hit lottery result is displayed while the performance content “b (or b ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the production is performed and the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, the display of the jackpot lottery result is displayed with the production content “c (or c ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the effect is performed and the change number 13 (change time Td2) is selected, the effect content “d (or d ′)” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Display performance the result of the lottery is shown is carried out. Incidentally, as such a display effect in which the result of the big hit lottery is shown, for example, a display effect showing that the big hit is lost or a game state in which a winning ball can be obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is entered. A display effect (display effect that appears even when a big win is won) or the like is appropriately adopted.

  As will also be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result is obtained as a big hit lottery with the production content “a (or a ′)” appearing. A directing of what was done appears. The fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (fluctuation time) When the number 6) is selected, the production contents “b (or b ′)” appear, and a production of a pair appears as to what result was obtained as the big hit lottery. Further, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tc1 based on the fluctuation time Tc1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 (fluctuation number 9) or the fluctuation time Tc2 (fluctuation time). When the number 10) is selected, the production contents “c (or c ′)” appear in each case, and a pair of productions appear as to what results were obtained as the big hit lottery. The variation time Td2 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) of the variation time Td1 based on the variation time Td1, and the variation time Td1 (variation number 12) or the variation time Td2 (variation time). When the number 13) is selected, the production contents “d (or d ′)” appear in each case, and a pair production of what kind of result is obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

  As described above, in such a normal small hit variation pattern table T2, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 180). And an effect command (for example, command “02H” for variation number 2) associated with the determined variation pattern, and a winning information command (the winning type including winning and winning hits per win) Are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta2 for variation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, in performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined game state Is selected, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted. However, when a small win is won in a gaming state in which the short-time function is activated (external advantageous gaming state), a single variation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) It is desirable that the same display process as the low-expected effect at the time).

[Variation pattern determination process for highly expected performance]
Next, the variation pattern determination process at the time of high expectation effect will be described based on FIG.

  As described above, if it is determined in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 181) that a highly anticipated effect should be performed, the main control MPU 4100a performs a high expectation as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 181). In order to set a variation pattern when performing an effect, a highly expected loss variation pattern table setting process is performed (step S406).

  Even in this high-expected loss variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are not activated), the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time reduction function is activated), the probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state ( It is determined whether the game state is one of the probability variation function only) and the probability variation external advantageous game state (both the probability variation function and the time reduction function are activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different high expectation loss variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (probability changing function, time reduction function) Is also inactive), the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 189 is selected.

  As described above, when the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3 is selected in this way, the main control MPU 4100a refers to the selected table T3 and performs the process of step S303 (see FIG. 180). A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the acquired variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 (LED) is also determined.

  Here, assuming that values from “0” to “99”, for example, can be acquired as the random display pattern random numbers for the special symbol, these values from “0” to “99” are obtained in the normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3. 40 specific values are allocated to variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selection rate 40% at the time of high expectation loss), and 17 specific values are variation number 4 (variation time) Ta4) (selection rate at high expectation loss 17%) and 25 specific values are assigned to change number 7 (change time Tb3) (selection rate at high expectation loss 25%) , 13 specific values are allocated to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at the time of high expectation loss), and 3 specific values are allocated to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3). (Selection rate at the time of high expectation loss) %), Selectivity of 2% during the two specific values are assigned to the change number 14 (variable time Td3) (High disappointing). In this way, the number of specific values (loss values) allocated tends to decrease as the variation number increases.

  As will be described later, when the variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1900 was defeated in a big hit with the content “a, no development (or a ′)” appearing. When the display effect is displayed and the change number 4 (change time Ta4) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1900 has been defeated in the big win while the effect content “a, with development” appears. Is displayed, or a display effect indicating that the player has been defeated in the big win while the effect content “c ′” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When the display is made, a display effect is displayed indicating that the player has been defeated in the big hit with the content “b, no development (or b ′)” appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) is selected, a display effect or a liquid crystal display indicating that the player has lost the jackpot while the effect content “b, with development” appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the display effect is displayed on the display device 1900 indicating that the winning content is “d ′” and the winning combination is selected, and the variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. When the production content “c (or c ′)” is displayed, the display production is performed to indicate that the player has lost the jackpot. When the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) is selected, the liquid crystal display In the device 1900, a display effect indicating that the player has lost the jackpot is performed with the effect content “d (or d ′)” appearing. By the way, as will be described later, when the variation number is 4 or 8, it appears as a loss production pattern with different production contents depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4010 side. Since the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern that is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4010 side is changed. In response to this, it is possible to cause production patterns having different jackpot expectations.

  Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) according to the fluctuation time Ta1 as a reference. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2), or the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is selected, the production content “a” appears, A production of a pair about whether the result was obtained appears. However, when the variation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the variation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the effect content “a” is displayed until the opening period before the prize winning opening 2103 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 2106. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) according to the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4010 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As a result, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern that becomes the pair of the variation number 4 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9 as described above.

  Furthermore, the fluctuation time Tb3 is set as a time (the same or approximate time) corresponding to the fluctuation time Tb1 based on the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (fluctuation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 ( When the variation number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, the production contents “b” appear, and a pair of productions appear as to what result was obtained as a big hit lottery. However, when the variation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the variation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content “b” is displayed until the opening period before the opening / closing member 2106 is opened / closed by the opening / closing member 2106. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a loss effect pattern to be paired when such an extension effect is performed. ing. The fluctuation time Tb4 (fluctuation number 8) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) in accordance with the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14) as a reference. Depending on the control on the control board 4010 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the variation time Td3 (variation number 14). As a result, the change number of the jackpot effect pattern that is the pair of the change number 8 of the lost effect pattern is changed between the change number 5 and the change number 12 as described above.

  Then, as described above, in such a normal high-expected loss variation pattern table T3, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 180). Then, an effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (eg, command “03H” for variation number 3) and a winning information command (including winning and winning points for winning and winning the winning combination) The command indicating the seed is set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the variation time associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the variation time Ta3 if the variation number is 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to “2” (step S414).

  On the other hand, in performing the big hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the game state is different from the normal external disadvantageous game state, the high expectation variation pattern table associated with the determined game state is displayed. A selection is made, a variation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined variation pattern, but this description is omitted.

  According to such a normal big hit fluctuation pattern table T1, a normal small hit fluctuation pattern table T2, and a normal high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table T3, the big hit expectation degree is a display effect b rather than a display effect a. The display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the jackpot is won, it is determined that the jackpot is won when the effect e appears.

[About change processing]
Next, the changing process (step S180) executed when the process flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 182 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the changing process.

  As shown in FIG. 182, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU 4100a first sets the change time set in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 181) as the process of step S501. It is determined whether or not the time is up. If the variation time set in the timer has not expired (NO in step S501), the in-fluctuation process is terminated.

  If the variation time set in the timer has expired (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol is displayed based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of special symbol) concerning the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs as the indicator 1186 is ended. In addition, when the display effect for the big hit lottery is being performed in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result in the display effect should be confirmed and displayed to the peripheral control board 4010 in order to end the display effect. Is set (step S503). This fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. Thereby, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later on the peripheral control board 4010 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode in the peripheral control board 4010, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not ended despite the reception of the definite stop command, and the subsequent opening period As described above, the display effect may be controlled so that the display effect is extended.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is ON (step S504). If the big hit flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to “3” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the special symbol is suspended, as indicated by the fact that the big win is won (step S505). Then, the changing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not ON but the loss is a big hit (NO in step S504), it is next determined in step S506 whether the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to “4” on the assumption that the special symbol is in the process stage where the special symbol is suspended as indicated by winning the small hit (step S506). S507), the process during change is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON but is a pure loss (a loss that does not satisfy the specific condition) (NO in step S506), it is special to indicate that both the big hit and the small hit are lost. The processing flag is updated to “0” on the assumption that the symbol is in the processing stage where the variation is stopped (step S508), and the variation processing is terminated. In other words, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the special symbol is performed on the condition that the processing is suspended in the process of step S130.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the big hit game start process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 183 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 183, in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the main control MPU 4100a first executes a condition device as compared with the normal external disadvantage game state or the normal external advantageous game state as the process of step S601. It is determined whether or not the function (probability variation function) for increasing the winning probability of winning (big hit) with the operation of is in operation (probability variation state). As a result, when it is determined that the probability variation function is in operation in either the probability variation external disadvantage game state or the probability variation external advantage game state (YES in step S601), the probability variation function The operation is stopped (step S602).

  Then, as a process of step S603, a function (time-short function) that makes it easy for a game ball to enter the second starting port 2102 is in operation (time-short game state) while the operation of the probability variation function is stopped in this way. It is determined whether or not. If it is not determined in step S601 that the probability variation function is in operation, the process proceeds to step S603 without executing step S602. As a result, when it is determined that the game is in one of the normal external advantageous game state and the probability-variable external advantageous game state and the time reduction function is in operation (YES in step S603), the operation of the time reduction function is performed. Stop (step S604).

  Next, in order to allow the big hit game to be performed while the operations of the probability variation function and the short time function are stopped in this way, as a process of step S605, a round game in which the big winning opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the same big hit game. The maximum number of times (in this embodiment, all 16 times), the upper limit number (predetermined large number or medium number) at which a game ball can enter the big winning opening 2103 in each round game, The opening mode in the big hit game such as the opening / closing operation restriction time of the opening / closing member 2106 in each round game (a predetermined long time of the long time opening / closing pattern or a predetermined medium time of the medium time opening / closing pattern) is set. That is, in the process of step S605, first, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 180). Then, the information related to the “open mode in the jackpot game” prepared in association with each of the jackpot types determined in this way (jackpot A to jackpot E) is read from the ROM 4100d (see FIG. 168), etc. The read information is set. As a result, the big hit game can be executed with the above-described opening mode corresponding to the big hit type (big hit A to big hit E). If it is not determined in step S603 that the time saving function is in operation, the process in step S605 is performed without executing the process in step S604.

  After that, before the big hit game is played, an interval production (for example, an opening production such as “Congratulations” or a challenge bonus production such as “Obtain a chance to win!”) Is executed. As possible, an interval effect command indicating the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the big hit game is started is set (step S606). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped (as described above. Since the extension effect) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is prepared based on this. That is, only the interval effect command indicating a specific time (for example, 8 seconds) is set regardless of the type of jackpot due to the relationship with the time required for the extension effect that appears even when winning the small hit. Only the opening effect as described above and the extension effect as described above are selectively performed for a specific interval time. As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 177, so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the peripheral control board 4010 side. Through the control described later, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S606 is set (step S607), and the process flag is updated to “5” (step S608). Then, the jackpot game start process is terminated.

[About small hit game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 184 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game start process.

  As shown in FIG. 184, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU 4100a first performs the same small hit game as the process of step S701 so that the small open game (small hit game) is performed. The number of times the grand prize opening 2103 is repeatedly opened in the game (in this embodiment, twice), the upper limit number (predetermined small number) that allows the game balls to enter the big prize opening 2103 at the time of opening, The opening mode in the small opening game (small hit game) such as the opening / closing operation restriction time (small time opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing member 2106 at the time of opening is set.

  After that, prior to the small opening game (small winning game) being performed, an interval effect before the small game is performed (for example, a challenge bonus effect such as “Chance to get a chance!”) Can be executed. As described above, an interval effect command indicating the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the jackpot game is started is set (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped when the small hit is won (as described above). Therefore, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an interval indicating a specific time (for example, 8 seconds) is shown regardless of the symbol random number at the time of winning the small hit because of the time required for the extension effect that appears even when the big win is won. Only the production command is set. Such a time setting at the time when the extended effect appears, it is possible to suppress the existence of a small hit, and as a result, the opening and closing member 2106 operates in response to the winning of the small hit, and the game entertainment is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  Next, an interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the process flag is updated to “6” (step S704). Then, the small hit game start process is terminated.

  As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 177, so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the peripheral control board 4010 side. Through the control described later, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

[About jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 185 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the big hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 185, in the big hit game process (step S240), the main control MPU 4100a first sets a big hit game in-progress flag indicating that the big hit game has already been performed as the process of step S801. It is determined whether or not it is in an ON state (set).

  Here, the big hit game in-progress flag is operated in the OFF state when there is a processing status immediately after the transition to the big hit game processing (step S240). Therefore, when the processing state is immediately after the big hit game process (step S240), it is determined that the big hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the process of step S802 I do.

  In the process of step S802, whether or not the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect, challenge bonus effect, or extended effect) has ended, that is, the interval effect timer (set in the process of step S607 (see FIG. 183)) Judgment is made as to whether or not the time is up for 8 seconds. If the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not expired and the above-described interval effect (opening effect, challenge bonus effect, or extended effect) is still being executed (NO in step S802), The big hit game process is temporarily ended, and it waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is up through the processes of steps S801 and S802.

  As a result of such processing, when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has timed out, as a process of step S803, a big hit start command indicating that the big hit game is started is set, and the big hit game is The big hit gaming flag indicating that the game is already in progress is operated (set) in the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S804.

  That is, as will be described later, the jackpot start command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 177, so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the peripheral control board 4010. Through the later-described control by the side, a display effect during the jackpot game is performed. Further, by operating (setting) the big hit game flag in the ON state, when the big hit game process (step S240) is started in the subsequent interrupt control, such steps S801 to S803 are performed. Without performing the above process, the process from the following step S804 for performing the process related to the execution of the jackpot game is performed.

  In the process of step S804, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2103 is open. If it is open (YES in step S804), then as the processing in step S805, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the big prize opening 2103 is set in the processing in step S605 (see FIG. 183). It is determined whether or not the opened / closed operation limit time (predetermined long time or predetermined middle time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S805), the winning opening 2103 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2106 (step S807).

  However, even if it is determined in the process of step S805 that the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S805), the same processing is performed after the special winning opening 2103 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2103 is equal to or greater than the upper limit (for example, 6 or 10) set in the process of step S605 (YES in step S806). Then, the process proceeds to the process of step S807 and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S805), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2103 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S806), the big winning game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S804 that the big prize opening 2103 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2106 (the number of round games) is set in step S605 (FIG. 183). It is determined whether or not the maximum number (16 times) set in the process of (see) has been reached (step S808). If it has not reached (NO in step S808), the opening / closing member 2106 is operated to open the big winning opening 2103 (step S809), and the big hit game process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S808 that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of times, the process of steps S810 to S815 is executed, for example, in step S317 (see FIG. 180). Based on the winning type of the big hit that is the trigger for executing the big hit game stored in the RAM 4100e (see FIG. 168) separately from the big hit flag in the process, the game state after the big hit game is set and then the big hit End the gaming state. Here, the winning type refers to whether or not the winning type activates the probability variation function or the short-time function. The content of the information about whether or not to activate the time-saving function depends on the gaming state when it is determined that the jackpot is the big hit.

  That is, first, the big hit flag and the big hit game flag are each set to the OFF state (step S810), and the winning type of the big hit that is triggered by the execution of the big hit game is determined (step S811, step S813). Here, in the process of step S811, it is determined whether or not the winning type (big hit AD) that activates the probability variation function. As a result, when it is determined that the selected type that activates the probability variation function is not selected, the process proceeds to step S813 without operating the probability variation function. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the winning type activates the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S812), and then the process proceeds to step S813. To do.

  Also, in the process of step S813, it is determined whether or not the winning type that activates the time-shortening function (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C won in the short-time gaming state). As a result, when it is determined that it is not the winning type that activates the time saving function, the big hit game process is terminated when the processing flag is set to “0” without operating the time saving function (step S815). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S813 that the winning type activates the time reduction function, the time reduction function is activated (step S814), and the processing flag is set to “0”. (Step S815), the big hit game process is terminated.

  According to such a big hit game start process, until it is determined in the process of step 806 that the round game has reached the maximum number of times, the big winning opening 2103 is opened according to the type of the big win (step S805). , Step S806 and step S808) are repeatedly released, and as a result, a prize ball according to the type of jackpot can be obtained by the player.

[About small hit game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 186 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the small hit game process.

  As shown in FIG. 186, also in the small hit game process (step S250), the main control MPU 4100a first displays the small hit game indicating that the small hit game has already been performed as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the in-game flag is in the ON state (set).

  Here, the small hit game flag is operated in the OFF state when the small hit game process (step S250) is in a processing state immediately after the transition. Accordingly, when the processing state is immediately after the transition to the small hit game process (step S250), it is determined that the small hit game flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Perform the process.

  In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-described interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) has ended, that is, the interval effect timer (8 in this case) set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 184). Judgment is made as to whether the time has elapsed. If the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has not expired and the interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extended effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily terminated, and the process waits until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) expires through the processes of steps S901 and S902.

  As a result of such processing, when the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) has expired, a small hit start command indicating that a small hit game is to be started is set as the processing of step S903, and the small hit start command is set. The small hit game flag indicating that the hit game has already been performed is set (set) to the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S904.

  That is, as will be described later, the small hitting start command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 177, so that the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the peripheral control board. Through the control described later on the 4010 side, a display effect during the small hit game is performed. Further, by operating (setting) the small hit game flag in the ON state, when the small hit game process (step S250) is started in the subsequent interrupt process, such a step S901 is performed. -The processing from the following step S904 for performing the processing related to the execution of the small hit game is performed without performing the processing of step S903.

  In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 2103 is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then as the processing in step S905, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the special winning opening 2103 is set in the processing in step S701 (see FIG. 184). It is determined whether or not the open / close operation limit time (a predetermined short time of the short time open / close pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation limit time has elapsed (YES in step S905), the winning opening 2103 is closed by closing the opening / closing member 2106 (step S907).

  However, even if it is determined in the processing of step S905 that the set opening / closing operation restriction time has not yet passed (NO in step S905), the same processing is performed after the special winning opening 2103 is opened. If the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2103 is greater than or equal to the upper limit (for example, two) set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S905), the above step The process shifts to S907 and the special winning opening 2103 is closed. On the other hand, when the set opening / closing operation limit time has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), and the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2103 has not yet reached the upper limit number. (NO in step S905), the small winning game process is terminated while maintaining the big winning opening 2103 in the open state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S904 that the big prize opening 2103 is not being opened, the number of times the big prize opening 2103 is opened by the opening / closing member 2106 is determined in the process in step S701 (see FIG. 184). It is determined whether or not the set maximum number of times (two times) has been reached (step S908). If not reached (NO in step S908), the opening / closing member 2106 is operated to open the special winning opening 2103 (step S909), and the small hit game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S908 that the opening / closing member 2106 has already opened the maximum winning opening 2103 for the maximum number of times, the small hit flag and the small hit game flag are turned off. The state is operated (step S910), and when the processing flag is set to “0” (step S911), the small hit game processing is ended.

  According to such a small winning game process, until it is determined in the process of step 906 that the opening / closing member 2106 has opened the large winning opening 2103 the maximum number of times, the large winning opening 2103 is in response to the big hit. Although it is an open mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the grand prize opening 2103 as compared to the open mode, it is possible for a player to acquire a prize ball corresponding to the open mode. Become.

[3-8. Control processing at peripheral control unit]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 191 to 197. FIG. 191 is a flowchart illustrating an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 192 is a flowchart illustrating an example of 16 ms steady processing. FIG. 193 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing (step S1100). FIG. 194 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). FIG. 196 is a flowchart illustrating an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 197 illustrates an example of stop symbol determination processing (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

  In the sub main process, as shown in FIG. 191, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs the initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control unit 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

  Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment executes a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process every 2 ms. That is, in this 2 ms steady process, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is incremented ("1" is added to the counter value). As a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

  In this regard, in the process of step 1002, such a 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until it is set in the 2 ms steady process described above (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), a 16 ms steady process described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady process is performed every 16 ms.

  In this 16 ms steady process, the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320 provided in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the door frame 5 and the game board 4 based on various effect commands received from the main control board 4100. , 322, 430, 432, 3014, etc., and processing for controlling the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc. of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are executed. When the 16 ms steady process ends, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and this is monitored again until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set in the 2 ms steady process described above (loop process).

[About 16ms steady processing]
As shown in FIG. 192, in the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first analyzes various command commands received from the main control board 4100 (command analysis process) as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the analyzed effect command, control (effect control processing) for effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the notice effect that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear in the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the like are performed.

  Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes a sound control process related to the sound output of the speakers 130, 222, 262, and 821 to generate a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect (step S1300). Furthermore, a light emission decoration control process related to the light emission decoration by the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, and 3014 provided in the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is executed (steps). S1400).

  Thereafter, the commands (display commands described later) are set to the relay boards 3014, 3016, 3018, 3020 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 in the processes S1200 to S1400. In addition, an information output process for transmitting a sound output command, a light emission decoration command, or the like is performed (step S1500). As a result, the liquid crystal display device 1900, the speaker 821, the door frame 5 and the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, 3014 and the like provided in the game board 4 are used. An effect corresponding to the issued command is performed.

  After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms steady state is performed. The process ends.

  It should be noted that such processing in steps S1100 to S1600 (16 ms steady processing) is set as a processing amount that is completed within 16 ms, but it is assumed that when the time of 16 ms has elapsed from the start of 16 ms steady processing, the step is performed. Even if the execution up to the process of S1600 has not been completed, the process in the above-described step S1600 is continued without changing back to the process in step S1100 (from the command analysis process). It will carry out to the processing of. That is, when 16 ms elapses during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapse flag is set. When it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms elapse flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms elapse process is performed. To start.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1600) is executed by a 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop processing in the sub-main processing and the 16 ms steady processing.

[About command analysis processing]
Next, command analysis processing (processing in step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 193, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first determines whether the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e as the process of step S1101. Is determined (step S1101).

  That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment receives an effect command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processes such as a 16 ms steady process and generates a command reception interrupt process, and this command reception interrupt In the processing, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the received command storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e. The reception command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the reception order of the production commands from the main control board 4100. In the command reception interrupt process, these production commands are associated with the reception order. Each of these areas is memorized separately.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the contents of the received command storage area are confirmed, and if an effect command is stored, the effect command having the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the reception command storage area. (Step S1102).

  Next, whether or not the read effect command is a pattern command (a command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 181). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e and the variation pattern reception flag is set. (Step S1104), the command analysis process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a pattern command (the command shown in FIG. 189) (NO in step S1103), the read effect command is processed in step S411 (see FIG. 181). It is then determined whether or not the winning information command (the winning information command indicating the winning type including winning and winning points) is included in the effect command set on the main control board 4100 side ( Step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e (step S1106), the command analysis process is executed. finish.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a winning information command (NO in step S1105), when the flag corresponding to the effect command received in the corresponding storage area of peripheral control RAM 4140e is set. (Step S1107), the command analysis processing ends. Note that as such an effect command, for example, a fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 182), step S606 (see FIG. 183), or step S702 described above An interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process (see FIG. 184) and a big hit start set on the main control board 4100 side in the process in step S803 (see FIG. 185). There is a command and a small hitting start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S903 (see FIG. 186).

[About production control processing]
Next, the effect control process (the process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 194, the effect control process is based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress of the game. Either the display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240) is selectively performed.

  That is, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 193) is set. On the condition that the display is performed, a process for starting a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed, including the display of the decorative symbols. For example, a display effect pattern (decoration pattern stoppage, presence / absence of the above-mentioned extension effect, etc.) is determined based on a pattern command or a winning information command, and the display effect pattern is determined according to the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control unit 4150). In addition to setting display commands, settings related to the notice effect are also performed.

  In the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is “1”, a flag corresponding to the fixed stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 193) is set. Display command (for the liquid crystal control unit 4150) to end the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 including the display of the decorative symbols, so that the result of the big hit lottery is displayed. And so on. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the confirmed stop command is reset.

  Also, in the big hit display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is “2”, a flag corresponding to an interval effect command at the big hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 193), On the condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set, a display indicating that the big winning opening 2103 is opened on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or a display in the big hit gaming state (for example, round display, etc.) Each control is performed. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

  Further, in the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is “3”, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the small hit that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 193). In addition, on the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays that the big winning opening 2103 is opened, or the effect display in the small hit gaming state is displayed. Control each. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

  However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display effect at the time of big hit or small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not ended within the fluctuation time indicated by the received pattern command. The first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 is extended to a period (opening period) after the stop of the variable display related to the lighting pattern of the plurality of LEDs, and the display after this extension In the production, there is a case where the result of the big hit lottery can be shown.

  That is, in this case, as described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the opening period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is included. A display effect pattern is determined, and a display command (for the liquid crystal control unit 4150) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. Further, in the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), there is an intermediate stage where the display stage in the liquid crystal display device 1900 has not ended even though the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set. The process will be terminated.

  In the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240), the display effect thus extended is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). Processing to be performed continuously as a response to the contents to be processed. Therefore, in the process at the time of extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, effect control according to the command (display control indicating that the big prize opening 2103 is opened, etc.) Never do.

  As described above, the command set in the processing of steps S1210 to 1230 in the effect control processing is transmitted to liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output processing (step S1500) shown in FIG. As a result, a display effect of the contents (display effect pattern or the like) indicated by the command appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 through the control by the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side.

[About decorative symbol variation start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 195 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a decorative symbol variation start process.

  As shown in FIG. 195, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs a variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 193) as the process of step S1221. It is determined whether or not the reception flag is in an ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, the variation pattern is determined in the process of step S 1104 (see FIG. 193) based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition (YES in step S 301) on the main control board 4100 side. It will wait for the reception flag to be turned on.

  Until the fluctuation pattern reception flag is operated to the ON state, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs control related to the demonstration effect and the effect mode by the processing of the following steps S1232 to S1237.

  That is, first, it is determined whether or not the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S1232). Then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a display command (for the liquid crystal control unit 4150) for starting a demonstration effect is set in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 193, so that a demonstration effect is produced in the liquid crystal display device 1900 through control by the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side. Will be executed.

  If it is not determined in step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol variation start process is temporarily terminated, and the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221). Will wait until either condition is satisfied (YES in step S1236).

  Further, as a result of performing such processing (step S1236, step S1237), when it is determined in the processing of step S1232 that the demonstration effect is being executed in the liquid crystal display device 1900 (step S1232). In step S1233, it is determined whether or not an operation by the player with respect to the effect mode is permitted.

  That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit) or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), the liquid crystal The display effects in the display device 1900 are not provided as the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 without ending within the variation time of the variation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side. A display effect pattern (extension) that can be extended to the period after the stop of the variable display on the LED lighting pattern, and whether or not a win (bonus) with the operation of the condition device is won. A first production mode in which a production pattern) can be selected, and a second production mode in which a challenge bonus production pattern can be selected. .

  Here, an outline of such an extended effect pattern that can appear when the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is in the first effect mode, and a challenge bonus effect pattern that can appear when in the second effect mode. Each will be described. 198 (a) and 198 (b) are diagrams for explaining the extended effect pattern while comparing with the normal (non-extended) display effect pattern, and FIG. 198 (c) shows the challenge bonus effect pattern. It is a figure for demonstrating.

  As shown in FIG. 198 (a), first, in a normal (non-extended) display effect pattern, it is matched with the start of fluctuation of a special symbol (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is started. The end of the display effect is also performed in accordance with the end of the variation of the special symbol (based on the set of flags corresponding to the fixed stop command). The production will appear. Further, after the display effect is completed in this way, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses the opening period until the special winning opening 2103 is opened, based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set. Thus, for example, it is possible to switch to an opening effect according to the winning result such as a big hit or a small win. When the big winning opening 2103 is opened, the control for opening the big winning opening 2103 is performed based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command or the small win start command is set. It can be switched to the opening effect that shows.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), also in the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extension effect pattern), the change pattern reception flag is set so as to match the start of the change of the special symbol. Based on the above, a display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is started. However, even if the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set, the display effect is not ended, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is continuously performed even when the special symbol change ends. It has been broken. In addition, when entering the opening period until the big prize opening 2103 is opened, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, but the peripheral control MPU 4140a has the big prize opening 2103 opened. The set of commands is ignored without switching to the interval effect indicated by “”, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is continued. Then, when the big winning opening 2103 is opened, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command or the big hit start command is set. It is executed in the form of switching to a win-winning effect that shows win-win information about whether or not it is a win (big hit) with the operation of the condition device.

  In other words, in this case, the above-mentioned effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as one effect that appears at the time of the loss of the big hit, and after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period at the time of execution of the game per small opening (small hit game) and thereafter Since it is performed over the open period of the grand prize winning opening 2103, the display effect concerning the next change (reservation of the special symbol) is shifted relatively quickly after it is shown that the big hit is lost. Will be able to. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, because the production proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called highly anticipated loss production. This makes it difficult to notice, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the opening / closing member 2106 operating in accordance with the winning of the small hit.

  Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2106 is similar to or similar to the operation mode of the small opening game (small game) corresponding to the small winning game. Since there is no big hit game for operating the opening / closing member 2106 with the above-mentioned operation mode, there is no latent production state using a so-called small hit, and in this sense, a hit (small It is difficult to notice that it is a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a hit. In this sense, the above-mentioned effect at the time of a small hit is used as a loss effect pattern (a pair effect) with respect to the hit effect pattern that appears at the time of a big hit, but this is a pachinko machine 1 on which a small hit is mounted. It can be said that it is based on the technical idea of making it difficult to grasp a certain thing (the technical idea opposite to the conventional one). That is, in view of the fact that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop of a special symbol, opening period, opening of a big prize opening, etc. appear also at the big hit under such a technical idea, the opening period (further In this case, the display effect related to the winning is performed at the time of the big hit (winning win of the big hit) and at the time of the small hit (winning of the big hit) including the opening period of the big winning opening. As a result, the opening period and the opening of the special winning opening 2103 are less likely to be noticed, and as a result, the display effect at the time of a small hit can be made to appear as if it is a highly expected loss effect pattern.

  In the extended effect pattern, during the extended display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900, at the end of the opening period, whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a win (hit) with the operation of the condition device is determined. Information may be shown.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) according to this embodiment, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball by the operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is provided in the first effect mode in which such an extended effect pattern can be selected. Even when a result that is different is obtained, when the result of the lottery is a small hit, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a display effect at the time of a loss indicating that the big hit is lost. .

  In contrast to such an extended production pattern when in the first production mode, when the second production mode is selected, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball is provided by the operation of the opening and closing member 2106. If the result of the lottery is a small win or a big win, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shows a challenge bonus effect indicating that the player has won the winning ball when winning is possible. Like that. In this challenge bonus effect pattern, when the result of the big win lottery is a hit not accompanied by the operation of the condition device (small hit) or a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device (big hit), the winning ball is opened by opening the big winning opening 2103. As a winning that can be acquired, not only a big hit but also a small hit will appear as a display effect that is treated as one type (win type).

  That is, as shown in FIG. 198 (c), also in this challenge bonus effect pattern, the liquid crystal display device is adapted to match the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set). The display effect in 1900 is started. However, this display effect is not an effect that shows the lottery result for winning the big hit, but is won when the opportunity to win a prize ball is granted by opening the big winning opening 2103 (big hit, small hit). It is performed as an effect that shows whether or not it is. Therefore, although the end of the display effect is performed in accordance with the end of the change of the special symbol (based on the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command being set), An effect appears indicating whether or not an opportunity for winning a prize ball is given when the winning opening 2103 is opened. Further, in the opening period after the display effect is finished in this way, an opportunity for winning a prize ball is given by opening the special winning opening 2103 based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set. It is possible to switch to a challenge bonus effect for how many prize balls can be obtained by the player by opening the grand prize opening 2103. .

  As this challenge bonus effect, for example, a reference gauge for the number of prize balls that can be obtained by a player each time an operation is performed on a predetermined operation means (such as the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400). (For example, “get your pocket money!” Reminiscent of a small amount of award balls, “bonus get!” Reminiscent of a medium amount of award balls, “find a gold vein!” "How many levels of missions could be achieved by multiple operations on a given operation means?" It is desirable to be performed as a mission-oriented operation system production. Furthermore, in such an effect, if a finalized effect that at least a medium amount or more prize balls are paid out or a finalized effect that a large amount of prize balls are paid out can appear, it can be obtained. In addition to the awarded ball amount, the expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player can be dramatically increased by the amount that the possibility of a small hit is excluded. Then, when the opening period ends and the big winning opening 2103 is released, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed to the challenge bonus effect based on the set of flags corresponding to the big hit start command and the small hit start command. This is executed by switching to a challenge result effect or the like where a challenge result (for example, a guideline for the number of prize balls finally shown in the operation system effect) is shown.

  That is, in this case, after the display effect at the time of hitting appears, when opening the big prize opening 2103, by using the opening period, at least a specific number (for example, a small amount of prize balls (in this embodiment, 40 to 50). The number of prize balls can be added as a bonus after the player knows that there will be an opportunity to get a prize ball so that the prize ball can be obtained. Challenge bonus production with a round lottery element such as whether or not to be taken. Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability changing function or the time-shortening function operates). Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that the winning probability (1/400) with the operation of the condition device is added to the winning probability (3/400) with no operation of the condition device. With (1/100), not only that the prize ball can be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2106 operates), but also that the game state can be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. Can also be made aware. As a result, only a monotonous loss effect is repeatedly displayed due to the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, and the decline in the game entertainment is suppressed. .

  Also, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even if the player wins a big hit, if the specific condition is satisfied, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled so that the display effect at the time of winning appears. Despite the fact that the player can be aware that the winning ball can be paid out and that the game state is advantageous to the player, the operation of the winning prize opening 2103 is, for example, a big hit in the challenge result presentation. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can display a specific image (such as an image indicating that only a small amount of prize balls can be acquired) that does not appear when the player is selected. In other words, in this case, until the big prize opening 2103 is opened in accordance with the big win, it functions as a waiting effect period for determining whether or not a specific image appears. In particular, when a specific image appears, the number of award balls that can be obtained by the player is much larger than when the specific image does not appear, as well as there is no change to the gaming state advantageous to the player. Since it will be possible to acquire only a small number of prize balls, this game entertainment interest when a performance showing that the big hit is won, combined with the size of such a gap of profits that the player can obtain Can be further enhanced.

  According to such a configuration in which two effect modes are adopted, in the first effect mode in which an extended effect pattern can be selected, a prize ball is awarded to the player when a game per small opening (small hit game) is executed. In the second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, an effect that does not make the user aware of the fact that can be paid out (in other words, that the opening / closing member 2106 operates) can be performed. When the game (small hit game) is executed, the player can be presented with an awareness that the player can pay out the prize ball (in other words, the opening / closing member 2106 operates). As a result, in the second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected, a higher probability (a smaller winning hit probability “1/400” is smaller than in the first effect mode in which the extended effect pattern can be selected). With the higher probability “1/100)”, which is the winning probability of winning “3/400”, an effect that makes the player aware that a prize ball can be paid out appears. The probability of execution of a bonus game (opening of the big prize opening 2103 by the opening / closing member 2106) in which a prize ball can be paid out to the player without causing a change in the gaming state accompanied by the operation of the condition device. It will be possible to achieve a deeper effect as if changes in each time. In addition, in the second production mode, the player can hardly realize that such a production is the pachinko machine 1 in which the small hit is mounted in the first production mode. This is because a display effect is provided in which not only big hits but also small hits are treated as one kind of hits where winning balls can be obtained by opening the big prize opening 2103.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) according to this embodiment, a first effect mode in which such an extended effect pattern can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. Mode compulsory control means for creating a mode compulsory period that is forcibly determined to any one of the effect modes and that is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the compulsorily determined effect mode is provided.

  For example, a first predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall (for example, a period until a predetermined date such as one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the first effect mode. The second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the period until a predetermined date such as the next one month elapses) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode. When the control related to the creation of the mode compulsory period is performed, an effect is performed so as to conceal the fact that the small hits are mounted as described above for the first month. It operates as a pachinko machine 1 that can pay out a prize ball to a player with a winning probability. On the other hand, during the next month, the effect that the small hit is treated as one type of winning that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2103 is performed, so that the winning probability of the big win is exceeded. The pachinko machine 1 which can be paid out to a player with a high probability can be operated as a pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with only one game specification. In combination with the fact that it was difficult to notice the presence of small hits during the period, it seems as if another pachinko machine that has different operation specifications for obtaining the ball as well as the production contents on the liquid crystal display device 1900 has been newly operated. Will be able to give the player a unique impression. After the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the player's operation on the operation means during the demonstration effect.

  In this regard, in the process of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first produces either one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on time information such as calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa. It is determined whether or not the mode is forcibly determined as the mode. As a result, when it is determined that the first production mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall), the second production is performed. When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, when it is in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses), it is assumed that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is not allowed (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is temporarily ended. That is, in this case, while the demonstration effect is being executed (YES in step S1232), the process waits for the variation pattern reception flag to be set (YES in step S1221).

  On the other hand, based on the time information such as the calendar information and time information of the built-in RTC 4140aa, it is determined that the mode is not in the mode forcing period that is forcibly determined as one of the first effect mode and the second effect mode. When it is performed (for example, when the second predetermined period has already elapsed), it is assumed that the change of the effect mode by the player's operation is permitted (YES in step S1233), and then step S1234 Perform the process.

  In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode. Here, the operation by the player is, for example, an operation on the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 is performed while the demonstration effect is being performed. When operated, it is conceivable to perform display control for causing the liquid crystal display device 1900 to display an effect mode selection screen. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, a specific effect mode is selected by an operation on the dial operation unit 401, and the selected specific effect mode is determined by an operation on the pressing operation unit 405. Then, it is determined that there has been an operation by the player to change the effect mode (YES in step S1234), and setting processing related to the effect mode is performed to change to the determined effect mode (step S1235). ).

  Note that the means to be operated by the player may not be the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400, and a predetermined operation by the player is possible including a proximity operation using a touch panel. Anything is acceptable. In addition, as a process when an operation by the player is performed, in addition to control for causing a change in display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 (appearance of selection screen, display at the time of selection, display at the time of determination), for example, transmission The player is informed that the effect mode has been switched by changing the effect mode of a predetermined decorative member, such as changing the color of light emitted from the back of the game panel 1150 having a characteristic (eg, changing from blue to red). Alternatively, it may be shown.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 193) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side. Assuming that the predetermined start condition (YES in step S301) is established, the following steps S1222 to 1227 for starting the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are performed.

  That is, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first operates (resets) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Then, on this basis, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantageous game state (step S1223). The game state flag is operated, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big win display process (step S1230)) to indicate the type of game state controlled after the big hit game.

  Then, when the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (YES in step S1223), next as the process of step S1224, the setting state of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC 4140aa Based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information, it is determined whether or not the first production mode is set. As a result, when the first production mode is forcibly determined or when the first production mode is set in a period in which the change of the production mode by the player's operation is allowed Then, it is determined that the first production mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

  In the process of step S1225a, the information related to the variation pattern stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e and the peripheral Based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the control RAM 4140e, the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are determined.

  Next, a notice selection process is performed in which it is determined whether or not a notice effect is to be executed based on the notice determination random number (step S1226A). That is, when the first production mode and the second production mode are used, the notice pattern execution frequency and the contents of the production of the notice effect change in addition to the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the selection process, in the notice effect table when the first effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on an appropriate notice determination random number.

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the first effect mode thus determined are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 193, so that in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side Through the control, a display effect of the content indicated by the display command (extended effect pattern or the like) appears, and a notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set in a period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined or in a period in which the effect mode can be changed by the player's operation. If it is in the state, it is determined that the first effect mode is not set (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, the information related to the variation pattern stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4140e is referred to while referring to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. Based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the control RAM 4140e, the effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are determined. Next, in the notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect) related to the notice effect based on an appropriate notice determination random number, including the determination as to whether or not to execute the notice effect. The notice selection process for determining the pattern is executed (step S1226b).

  Then, display commands (notice commands) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern in the second effect mode determined in this way are set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. In other words, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through the control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S1223 that the game state flag does not indicate that the game state is normally in the external disadvantaged game state (NO in step S1223), the detailed description is omitted, but the current game state An effect pattern and a stop symbol are determined based on the corresponding effect table (step S1229), and an appropriate advance notice is included in the notice effect table corresponding to the current gaming state, including whether or not to execute the notice effect. A notice selection process in which an effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the notice effect is determined based on the determination random number is executed (step S1230).

  Then, a display command (preliminary command) associated with the effect pattern, stop symbol, and notice effect pattern corresponding to the current gaming state thus determined is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to “1”. ”(Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. In other words, the display command and the notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. Through the control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the notice effect of the content indicated by the notice command appears.

  FIG. 196 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 196, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 is read and associated with this variation pattern command. An effect pattern is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 202 and 203). Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 199 and 200). When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, for the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900 (including the case where the above-mentioned extended effect pattern in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbol is stopped) is adopted (confirmed). It will stop (based on the stop command being set).

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, an “extended effect pattern” and “an effect that is not an extended effect pattern but a pair of the extended effect pattern can be prepared. A determination is made as to whether any of the production patterns “losing production pattern” has been determined in step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any one of these effect patterns is determined, when a predetermined stop symbol at the time of extension (a specific reach lose symbol or the like) is determined (step S1303), step S1225a (FIG. 195) is determined. The processing of (see) is terminated. That is, in this case, during the opening period, the contents of the display effect centered on the story such as the character are extended (developed) in a state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the extended stop symbols. It will continue to appear, after which the result of whether or not you won the jackpot will be clearly stated.

  On the other hand, a normal production pattern that is different from any of the production patterns of “extended production pattern” and “losing production pattern that is not an extended production pattern but can be prepared as a production of a pair of the extended production pattern” (FIG. 198 (a)) is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the big win lottery indicated by the winning information command is determined through the processing of step S1304 to step S1310.

  That is, first, based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106, it is determined whether or not the result of the big win lottery is a big hit (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, when the stop symbol dedicated to the big hit is determined (step S1305), the processing of step S1225a (see FIG. 195) is terminated.

  If the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and if the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. The stop symbol dedicated to the small hit time is determined (step S1307). However, in the first effect mode, since the effect commands are all associated with the extended effect pattern so that the presence of the small hit is concealed, the processing in step S1306 is always performed. Then, it is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and next, as a process of step S1308, a determination is made as to whether or not it is a display effect (high expectation loss effect) in which reach is formed.

  As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, when the stop pattern of reach loss is determined (step S1309), the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 195) is terminated, whereas reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 195) is terminated when the irregular stop symbols that do not form reach are determined (step S1310).

  FIG. 197 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

  As shown in FIG. 197, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 is read and associated with the variation pattern command. An effect pattern is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated. It may be. When a plurality of performance patterns are associated, one of the performance patterns is determined based on the result of the effect lottery using a predetermined random number for performance, or one of the effects is determined based on the type of jackpot The pattern will be determined.

  After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (the symbol combination at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second rendering mode, for the decorative symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900, when a lottery result that enables winning balls is obtained, the special symbols are adjusted to stop changing ( Based on the fact that the fixed stop command is set, the stop symbol at the time of hit is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, the result of the big win lottery is based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106. Judgment is made as to whether or not the ball can be acquired (big hit or small hit) (steps S1322 and S1324). As a result, when the result of the big win lottery is a win (a big hit or a small win) where a winning ball can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the big winning opening 2103 is confirmed to be opened. When the bonus challenge stop symbol that can be grasped is determined (step S1305), the processing of step S1225b (see FIG. 195) is terminated. The bonus challenge stop symbol is realized by, for example, a special symbol that does not become a component of the jackpot symbol combination appearing during the change, and the symbol combination included in the symbol combination at the time of stop, etc. can do.

  In this case, in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, for example, at least a specific number (for example, a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. Round lottery elements such as how many prize balls can be added as bonuses after the player knows that the opportunity to get prize balls will be provided as There will be a challenge bonus performance.

  On the other hand, when the result of the big win lottery is not a hit (big hit or small win) in which a winning ball can be obtained (NO in both the processes of step S1322 and step S1324), the process of step S1325 is as follows. A determination is made as to whether or not the display effect is a reach.

  As a result, when it is a display effect in which reach is formed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 195) is completed at the time when the stop symbol of reach loss is determined (step S1326), whereas reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be displayed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 195) is terminated when the irregular stop symbols that do not form reach are determined (step S1327).

  Hereinafter, an example of the display effect that appears when such various processes (steps S1210 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment are performed will be described. FIG. 199 is a time chart illustrating an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” illustrated in FIG. 189 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

[First production mode, extended production pattern for production command “01H”]
As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 189 is based on the fact that the big hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a display effect a (for example, a specific mission a) associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the content of whether or not the character can be succeeded (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is in a situation where the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta1 has arrived. The display effect a is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission a to succeed or fail).

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Ta1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is then displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  That is, in this case, the display effect a (not developed, lost) described later associated with the command “03H” shown in FIG. 189 is prepared, so that the display effect a even when the timing t1 has elapsed. This will function as “development display effect a (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission a)”. Therefore, when this “development display effect a” appears, the special symbol is still fluctuated from the player's side even though it is in the opening time OP after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. Can be grasped as being. In addition, the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be grasped as being in a temporarily stopped state even though it is in a state after being confirmed and stopped. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the big win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the above, the variable display of the decorative design is performed only in a small display area (a portion that is difficult to be noticed such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with respect to the display effect a. However, the player can grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission “a” in the display effect “a” can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design (the result is displayed by the character). More desirable.

  In other words, in the extended production pattern having the content of the display production a (big hit) associated with the production command “01H”, the actual decoration is used at the opening time OP after the change of the special symbol is stopped. Despite the fact that the symbol has been fixedly stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successfully achieved (for example, a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy has stood up). The “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, a specific mission “a” is displayed such that, for example, the appearance until the character A again faces the enemy is displayed using the time until the end timing t2 of the opening time OP on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect is made on whether or not it can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, this “development display effect a (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful)” at the opening time OP on the main control MPU 4100a side is performed by the command “ This is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with “02H”. And, as described above, when the player is in the first effect mode, the display effect a (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the small hit. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reserved digestion) relatively soon after the is displayed.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command “01H”, a specific mission a is reached until the end timing t2 of the opening effect OP arrives. A state of success (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and an effect on whether or not the specific mission a can be successful (whether or not the character A attacks the enemy and succeeds) Production). As a result, the jackpot demonstrative effect a appears in a form showing that the specific mission a has been successful after the opening timing OP end timing t2, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “01H”. Will function as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having effect content a”. The details of the effect during the jackpot game will be described later, but the player will launch a game ball into the big prize opening 2103 in the presence of such a jackpot explicit effect a.

[First production mode, extended production pattern for production command “02H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, FIG. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, assuming that the variation relating to the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in FIG. 2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the variation time Ta1) is started (timing t0), , A display effect a at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command “02H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy)) The dynamic display of the extended production pattern with contents is started. When the extended effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 199 (a)) associated with the effect command “01H”. Similarly to the above, even when the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Ta2 has arrived, the display effect a is not ended (the specific mission a is not succeeded or failed). ) Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”. In addition, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended rendering pattern associated with the rendering command “01H” (FIG. 199) is also determined to stop at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). Note that the lost stop mode at the time of extension is a single display mode regardless of the big win lottery results for the big hit and the small win, and the display mode is distinguished. Has not been.

  Furthermore, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Ta2 under the temporary stop in the manner of stopping the loss when the decorative symbol is extended as described above. As for a, a point of continuation expectation about whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) This is the same as the extended production pattern (see FIG. 199 (a)) associated with the production command “01H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”, the opening time OP after the change of the special symbol is stopped is actually the case. Despite the fact that the decorative design has been confirmed and stopped, it has succeeded in the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such expectation As a result, “development display effect a” appears. In this “development display effect a”, a specific mission is shown such that, for example, the appearance of the character A again facing the enemy is displayed using the time until the end timing t2 of the opening time OP on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect about whether or not a can be made is performed.

  Furthermore, in the same manner, until the end timing t2 of the opening effect OP arrives, the state where the specific mission a is successful (the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the specific mission a is An effect about whether or not it can be succeeded (the effect of whether or not the character A attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command “02H”, after the opening effect OP end timing t2, the small release per time when the effect command is “02H” In the game (small hit game), until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2103, the losing explicit effect a appears in a form indicating that the specific mission a has failed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  For example, the loss explicit effect a is performed as a big hit defeat effect, for example, the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character A is disappointed.

  According to the extended production pattern associated with such production commands “01H” and “02H”, the time from the start timing t0 of the special symbol to the opening end timing t3 of the big winning opening 2103 is a big hit. Since it will function as one such production, it becomes possible to direct the player's gaze point to such production, and the large winning opening 2103 is opened when the losing explicit production a is performed, and thus small. This makes it difficult to notice that the hit is the pachinko machine 1 mounted.

  In order to obtain these functions and effects, no information can be obtained even if the player confirms that the special winning opening 2103 is open (an event that may be a reason for confirming the opening). It is important that the configuration is excluded. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the big hit game that opens the big winning opening 2103 with the same or approximate opening manner as the game per small opening (small hit game) can be executed, by confirming the opening, Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the gaming state may be changed on condition of the operation of the condition device. In addition, since the player can obtain information that can be an opportunity to quit the game, that the player has won a big hit with a few hits that do not match the low winning probability of the big hit, attention is paid to the opening of the big winning opening 2103 It may also be a cause that

[Display effect pattern when the effect command is “03H” in the first effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation concerning the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 189 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1). If started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” (for example, whether the specific mission a can be successful (character A) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of whether or not the enemy can be defeated is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a thus started is displayed when the timing t1 at which the change of the special symbol is stopped as the change time Ta3 elapses. This is completed without extending the production a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”. In addition, even when the decoration symbol changes, at the timing t1 at which the special symbol change is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the extension stop state at the time t1 of the extension stop. ing. As for the loss stop mode at the time of extension, a single display mode appears at the time of big hit, at the time of small hit, and at the time of the loss.

  In addition, the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed before the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta3, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 199 (a) and (b)) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy A state in which the character A who has fallen due to the attack did not stand up is shown), and the player is made aware that the specific mission has failed. By preparing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues after timing t1 shown in FIGS. 199 (a), (b), and (d) can function as an effect pattern with development. become.

[Display effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command “04H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (d), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure Based on the fact that the loss is obtained, the fluctuation is applied to a special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 189 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect a at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” (for example, whether a specific mission a can be made successful (character The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having contents such as whether or not A can defeat the enemy is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the contents of the display effect a started in this way is an effect command “01H” to “03F” even though it is a non-extended display effect pattern. Even if the timing t1 has arrived due to the elapse of the special symbol fluctuation times ta1 to ta3, the display effect a is not ended (successful or unsuccessful for the specific mission a). . Furthermore, in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern (effect command “04H”), the decoration symbol change is started, but this decoration symbol change is also continued without being terminated at the timing t1. It has become.

  That is, in the case of loss (pure loss), unlike the case of big win or small win, not only the time required for opening control of the big winning opening 2103 but also the opening time OP is immediately prepared and the next change is immediately made. For this reason, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the variation time of the special symbol.

  In this regard, with respect to the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command “04H”, in the main control MPU 4100a, from the variation start timing t0 at the time of small hit to the opening end timing t3 of the big winning opening 2103. It is prepared to be adopted when a variation time Ta4 having a length corresponding to the time is selected as a reference. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays the display effect a. However, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, but the display effect has a longer time.

  In other words, in this case, regarding the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the variation of any of them is not fixed and stopped at the timing t1 with the suspension stop mode at the time of extension. As in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the extension time at the stage before the passage of the timing t1, which is only an intermediate stage with respect to the change time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the lost stop mode. Then, whether or not the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is continued until the timing t1 is reached while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the suspension stop mode at the time of extension. A continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character A who has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed. It should be noted that the loss stop mode at the time of extension is a single display even though the lottery result and the variation time of the big hit are different between the big hit, the small hit and the lost (pure loss). The mode is adopted, and the display mode is not distinguished.

  And, in this way, the continuation expectation production was successful with the decorative symbol temporarily suspended (for example, a character A who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such expectation. The “development display effect a” appears. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the fluctuation state again, and the display effect a is applied to the display effect a as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”. In the small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (a portion that is difficult to receive attention, such as an end portion of the display area), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is in a stopped state (when it is “01H” to “03H”, temporarily stopped when it is “04H”). Stop) is maintained until timing t2.

  In this “development display effect a”, for example, an appearance as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successful, such as the appearance of the character A again facing the enemy within the time of the fluctuation time Ta4, is shown. Done. However, as in the case of the display effect patterns associated with the effect commands “01H” to “03H”, the state in which the specific mission “a” has been successful (the character A is the enemy) until the timing t2 comes. No effect is shown, and only an effect about whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded (an effect such as whether Character A attacks an enemy and succeeds) appears. ing.

  Then, after the timing t2, the state where the specific mission a has failed is shown until the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2103 in the game per small opening (small winning game) at the time of the production command “02H”. Lost explicit production a will appear in the form shown. As with the effect command “02H”, for example, the losing explicit effect a shows that the attack by the character A is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character A regrets. This is done as a defeat. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” functions as “a loss effect pattern of effect patterns having the effect content a”.

  As described above, in the first effect mode, based on the fact that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, a specific lost effect pattern (effect command “ 04H "), when the specific control time (change time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU 4100a side, within the determined specific control time (change time Ta4). Display control relating to a specific loss production pattern is performed in such a way that specific production content (display production a) appears. Nevertheless, it corresponds to the specific lose effect pattern (effect command “04H”) in which the specific effect content (display effect a) appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the big hit lottery. When display control is applied to a specific hit effect pattern (effect command “01H”) attached, the main control MPU 4100a side has a variation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific variation time (variation time Ta4). ) Is determined, not only the determined short variation time (variation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (opening period OP) is set as the production time. The display control related to a specific hit effect pattern is performed in such a way that a specific effect content (display effect a) appears at It was.

  According to such an effect technique, even in a predetermined interval period after the special symbol is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs a winning effect as to whether or not the winning is won. When the winning effect ends, the big hit game starts immediately without going through a uselessly long opening effect, and the game progress can be realized with a good tempo. In addition, when a display effect pattern of such specific effect content (display effect a) appears, a notable effect element is added to the point of whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle stage, When the stoppage is confirmed, it is possible to grasp that an opportunity for winning a prize ball is granted by opening the special winning opening 2103, so that it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

  Further, by providing the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” with respect to the extended effect pattern for the effect commands “01H” and “02H”, the “development display effect a” is obtained. The big hit expectation degree when it appears is avoided to have to be set within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, and the small hit is installed Even under such an effect system that makes it difficult to recognize this, it is possible to perform an effect design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG.

  Further, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, since the special symbol fluctuates after timing t1, there is no problem even when the player confirms the variation state of the special symbol. Absent. And by preparing such a non-extension effect pattern in the form of mixing with the above-mentioned extension effect pattern, even if a special symbol stop state in the extension effect pattern is confirmed, It will be possible to promote awareness that might be mistaken.

  Further, in the display effect pattern in the case of the effect command “04H”, the big prize opening 2103 is not opened when the losing explicit effect a is being performed. There is no problem even if it exists. Then, such a non-open losing explicit effect a is prepared in such a manner that it is mixed with the losing explicit effect a at the time of the above-mentioned effect command “02H”, thereby opening the big winning opening 2103 in the losing explicit effect a. Even if this is confirmed, it is possible to encourage the player to be aware of a mistake that may be mistaken.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands “01H”, “02H”, and “04H”, a specific mission a is required until the timing t2 arrives. (Whether or not the character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of the timing t2, whether or not the specific mission a is successful (the character A Whether or not to defeat the enemy) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even with such an effect method, the small win time display effect a Since most of the opening effect OP is used for the display effect a, and after that, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of character A appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively quickly. In this case, it can be said that the player is more advantageous in that the possibility of delaying the initial movement of the game ball into the big winning opening 2103 can be suppressed at the start of the big hit game.

  By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 189 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the probability of winning the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such a gameability (performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

  However, even if any of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 189 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, the main control MPU 4100a is set when the second effect mode is set. The winning commands 2103 by winning the small hits in spite of the contents of the performance commands “01H” to “04H” from the side, as well as the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, although no change has occurred. By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content on the premise of opening the game, the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2103 compared to when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if is greatly increased.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “01H”]
That is, as shown in FIG. 199 (a), based on the fact that the main control MPU 4100a wins the big hit when the second production mode is set, the state shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect a ′ in the second effect mode is different from the content of the display effect a in the first effect mode. In the form of the display effect pattern (challenge), such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening 2103 is confirmed to be open. Bonus performance pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display pattern of the decorative symbols is made different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, whereas the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly composed of characters. In the second effect mode, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that is more likely to be noticed.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is stopped with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to appear is displayed, and a prize ball can be obtained by opening the special winning opening 2103 at the timing t1 when the change of the special symbol is stopped. In order to make it possible for the player to understand that the bonus challenge stop symbol is displayed on the predetermined symbol line, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode, whereby the effect command “01H” is displayed. The associated display effect pattern is “winning of the effect patterns having effect contents a ′”. It will function as a “production pattern”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in this way, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses the opening time OP to acquire a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2103. The number of prize balls that can be earned by the player by opening the special winning opening 2103 is determined based on the fact that the bonus challenge stop symbol appears to be given to the player. A challenge bonus effect a ′ about whether it is a thing is performed.

  Here, as this challenge bonus effect, for example, an operational system effect with mission characteristics, such as “to what level could a staged mission be achieved by a plurality of operations on a predetermined operation means”? In addition, the user is nervous about the operation of the operation means such as “which one of a plurality of display images with different degrees of expectation for the amount of balls appears when the predetermined operation means is operated once”. It is desirable to perform it as an operation system effect with a feeling. In this case, when the predetermined operation means is not operated, the challenge bonus effect ends without obtaining any information at the opening time OP. In addition, in the effect result obtained in the challenge bonus effect, confirmation information about which open mode (long-time opening / closing pattern, medium-time opening / closing pattern, small-time opening / closing pattern) is performed is obtained. An effect pattern to be displayed may be included.

  When the end timing t2 of the opening time OP arrives, when the special winning opening 2103 is opened, the control related to the opening of the special winning opening 2103 is performed, and any opening mode (long-time opening / closing pattern, middle time opening / closing pattern) is determined. , An opening effect is shown that indicates whether or not the big prize opening 2103 is opened with a small time opening / closing pattern. With such an effect during opening, the player will not only play the big hit game but also hit the game ball to the big winning opening 2103 at the time of the game per small opening (small hit game). Compared to when in the mode, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2103 is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern when Effect Command “02H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Ta2 shown in FIG. 5 (here, described as being set at the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1900, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “02H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command “02H”) having the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. At the timing t1 when the display effect a ′ having a content such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that a winning ball can be obtained by opening the winning opening 2103. It becomes. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “02H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having effect contents a ′”.

  Further, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in this way, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses the opening time OP to acquire a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2103. The number of prize balls that can be earned by the player by opening the special winning opening 2103 is determined based on the fact that the bonus challenge stop symbol appears to be given to the player. The point that the challenge bonus effect a ′ regarding whether or not it is performed is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is “01H”.

  That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are treated in the same way as the big winning opening 2103 is opened, and the variation of the decorative design is started. The contents of the stage from the timing t0 until the challenge bonus stage is performed are not distinguished, and the appearance of the bonus challenge stop pattern and the challenge bonus stage is shown to indicate that the opening of the big prize opening 2103 is confirmed. It is only.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the jackpot game corresponding to the winning of the jackpot, either the long-time opening / closing pattern or the middle-time opening / closing pattern is adopted, whereas the small hitting game In the small opening per game (small hit game) corresponding to the winning, only the opening mode of the small time opening / closing pattern that cannot be adopted in the big hit game can be adopted. Therefore, when a challenge bonus performance is performed as a mission-oriented operation system performance, etc., depending on the operation for a given operation means, it is more difficult to achieve each mission in the small hit than in the big hit. The production lottery will be performed. In addition, when the challenge bonus effect is performed as an operation system effect such as “Which of a plurality of display images having different degrees of expectation for the amount of balls appears when a predetermined operation means is operated once,” An effect lottery corresponding to an operation on a predetermined operation means is performed in such a manner that a display image having a high expectation with respect to the amount of balls is less likely to appear in the case of the small hit than in the case of the big hit.

  Then, when the end timing t2 of the opening time OP comes due to such a challenge bonus effect, control for opening the grand prize winning opening 2103 is also performed in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “02H”. And in which opening mode (long-time opening / closing pattern, medium-time opening / closing pattern, small-time opening / closing pattern) the opening of the big prize opening 2103 is shown. As compared with the case of the first effect mode, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning the winning ball by opening the special winning opening 2103 is greatly increased. Of the long-time opening / closing pattern, medium-time opening / closing pattern, and small-time opening / closing pattern, when the small-time opening / closing pattern is adopted, the opening effect is ended in a relatively short time. As for whether or not the small hit of E and the small win is won, the player is displayed by displaying a specific image that does not appear at the time of winning the big bonus in the challenge bonus directing at the opening time OP prior to the opening effect. May be made graspable.

Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command,
The extended effect pattern in the first effect mode, which is treated as a no-chance loss that does not give the chance to win a prize ball (similar to the effect pattern in the case of pure loss (the effect command “04H”)), and Non-extended display effect pattern in the second effect mode (similar to the effect pattern at the time of the big hit (the effect command “01H”)) as a hit of the high chance that the opportunity to win the prize ball is given ( Challenge bonus production pattern)
Are selectively executed. That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side, and thereby, a variety of effects with greatly different effect contents can be obtained without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. Can be realized.

  Furthermore, the game per small opening (small game) means that only a small amount of award balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege. Since the game state is not shifted to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than before the small opening game (small hit game) is performed, the gaming interest is reduced even though the opening / closing member 2106 operates. It can be said that it is necessary to pay attention to the handling in the game setting in that point. Therefore, in the past, when a small hit is installed, a special hit function is performed in which a big hit game is played with a behavior similar to that of a small open per game (small hit game) and thereafter, a transition is made to an advantageous gaming state. First of all, the winning type is prepared, and in the situation where a game per small opening (small winning game) is performed, the player is made aware of the possibility of being a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type Therefore, it has been a major premise to maintain the game entertainment at the time of a small opening game (small hit game). However, even in the case of such a conventional gaming machine, when a specific winning type is won, it is finally won in the big win with a big win probability set in a very low game state. Regardless of this, it is inevitable that there will be a decline in the game entertainment interest (decrease in the game entertainment interest due to the gap between the jackpot probability and the real probability of the jackpot) due to the fact that prize balls corresponding to this low probability cannot be obtained. It was.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is configured so that when hitting a small hit, a big hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and thereafter an advantageous gaming state The conventional game machine has a technical idea for suppressing a decrease in the gaming interest when a game per small opening (small game) is performed in that a specific winning species that functions to shift to In the first place, it is very different.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the small hits are mounted, the winning type of the big hit (big hit) so that a plurality of types of big hit games having different prize balls can be obtained by the player can be executed. A, jackpots B to E) are prepared. When opening the big prize opening 2103, first, the lottery result in which the opening of the big prize opening 2103 is confirmed in the big hit lottery (a big hit A where a large amount of outgoing balls are expected to be obtained, and a medium amount of outgoing balls are expected). Display effect on whether or not a big hit B ~ E, a small hit that is expected to get a small amount of balls) is obtained (a challenge bonus effect pattern appears regardless of the type of hit) I have to). And as a result, when it is shown that the same lottery result is obtained, it is possible for the player to know that at least a small amount of balls are available. Then, there will be a further challenge bonus effect on how many balls can be added (from a small amount to a medium or large amount). I am doing so.

  Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state is changed to a game state advantageous to the player (a game state in which the probability changing function or the time-shortening function operates). In this respect, in this embodiment, depending on how many balls are stacked (a big hit A that is expected to obtain a large amount of balls, or a big hit BE that is expected to obtain a medium amount of balls), The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function (probability of transition to a gaming state in which the probability variation function operates) is made different. That is, in this case, a challenge as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes appear so that the probabilities of changing to the gaming state in which the probability variation function operates after the opening of the special winning opening 2103 is completed will be different. It will function as a bonus performance. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability that a winning probability “3/400” without operation of the condition device is added to a winning probability “1/400” with operation of the condition device. With “1/100”, not only can a prize ball be paid out to a player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2106 operates), but also that a game state advantageous to the player can be entered. Can also be made aware.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation for the operation of the probability variation function when it is stacked until it is possible to obtain a large amount of balls (probability expectation at the time of big hit A) is 100%, and at least medium Expectation for operation of the probability variation function when it is stacked until it is possible to acquire a large amount of balls (expected probability when jacking A to E) is 82%, and it is possible to acquire a medium amount of balls The expectation for the operation of the probability variation function when stacked up until it is assumed (probability expectation at the time of big hit BE) is 61.7%, and there are many expected values of the number of balls that can be obtained The more likely you are in the situation, the higher the expected probability of change.

  Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus production, since it is positioned as a default production state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, there is a large amount of ball winning according to the winning of the big hit Unlike conventional gaming machines where whether or not a basic game (basic production) is used, even if a small opening per game (small hit game) where a small amount of balls can be obtained is performed, Since the grand prize winning opening 2103 is only opened in conformity with the default performance state, a decrease in the game entertainment is suppressed. In addition, when in the second production mode, the probability of appearance of the hit production (probability of entering the challenge bonus) is determined by the fact that a small amount of balls can be obtained is positioned as the default production state. ) Is set to a higher probability (higher probability of winning big wins plus higher probability of winning big hits), and as a result, it is not possible to acquire award balls corresponding to the lower probability. It is also avoided that the interest is reduced.

  And in order to be able to have the challenge bonus performance pattern that realizes such games and performance in the second performance mode, not only is the lottery for the small hits performed in the first performance mode, At the time of winning a small hit, the varying times Ta2 to Td2 of the length corresponding to the changing times Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of winning the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, a small win is not originally required, and a display effect as to whether or not a big hit has been won is basically performed based on the big win probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect that is difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine is equipped with a small hit, but the liquid crystal display device 1900 has a special symbol variation. If the production method that shows the result of the big hit lottery at the time of stop is simply adopted, after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period when the game per small opening (small hit game) is executed and the opening period of the subsequent big prize opening 2103 The existence of the game will be conspicuous, and the entertainment interest of the game may be reduced.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, at the timing t1 (at the end of the variation of the special symbol) when the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set. However, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is not ended and is continued. In addition, when entering the opening period until the special winning opening 2103 is opened, a flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU 4140a has the special winning opening 2103 opened. The set of the command is ignored without switching to the interval effect shown to be performed, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is continued. The display on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command or the small hit start command is set at the timing t2 when the control for opening the big winning opening 2103 is started. The effect is executed in such a manner as to switch to the winning explicit effect indicating whether or not the winning information is whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (hit) with the operation of the condition device.

  In other words, in this case, the above-mentioned effect at the time of the small hit is positioned as one effect that appears at the time of the loss of the big hit, and after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period at the time of execution of the game per small opening (small hit game) and thereafter Since it is performed over the open period of the grand prize winning opening 2103, the display effect concerning the next change (reservation of the special symbol) is shifted relatively quickly after it is shown that the big hit is lost. Will be able to. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, because the production proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called highly anticipated loss production. This makes it difficult to notice, and as a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the opening / closing member 2106 operating in accordance with the winning of the small hit.

  And in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is in particular the first effect mode as described above. And a mode forcing control means for creating a mode forcing period that is forcibly determined to be one of the effect modes of the second and the second effect modes and is not allowed to be changed by the player's operation from the forcibly determined effect mode. ing. Then, a first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined as the first production mode, and the first predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the control related to the creation of the mode forcing period is performed so that the second predetermined period (for example, the next one month) is forcibly determined as the second effect mode.

  According to such a mode compulsory period, the hall side conceals this from the player even though the small hits are mounted by the appearance of the extended effect pattern as described above during the first predetermined period. In addition, by performing a win display in the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the winning probability “1/400” of the jackpot, a prize ball is awarded to the player with the winning probability “1/400” of the jackpot The first game-specific pachinko machine that can be paid out can be started (first newly opened store). In addition, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period elapses in this way, not only a big hit but also a small win is one type as a hit where a winning ball can be obtained by opening the big winning opening 2103. The above-mentioned challenge bonus performance pattern to be dealt with is higher than the winning probability “1/400” in the first predetermined period, coupled with the fact that it is difficult to notice the presence of the small hit in the first predetermined period. Based on the probability “1/100”, the winning display is performed in the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  That is, in this case, a prize ball can be paid out to the player with a higher probability “1/100” obtained by adding the winning probability “3/400” of the big hit to the winning probability “1/400” of the big hit. The operation of a new pachinko machine with a second game specification can be started (second new store opening). As a result, while the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine that has different game specifications for obtaining the ball as well as the production contents in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is newly operated. Such an impression can be given to the player.

  Furthermore, according to such a mode compulsory period, unless a predetermined date (first predetermined period) has not elapsed and it is determined that it is at a specific date (second predetermined period). The change control from the first production mode is not permitted, and some production modes (second production mode) of the plurality of production modes are still hidden without appearing. Will be performed. In other words, in this case, as the month and day have passed since the pachinko machine 1 was delivered to the hall, the production functions that were hidden until then were gradually exposed. Since the rendered performance function can be selectively used by the player's operation, it is possible to maintain the gaming interest for a long period of time.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern at Effect Command “03H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation concerning the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 189 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1). If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “03H” is performed. Then, the variation of the decorative design is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “03H”) having the content of the display effect a ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. Then, a display effect a ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggling by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) Accordingly, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “03H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content a ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (effect command “01H”) having the content of the display effect a at the time of the big hit in which the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a deviation in the production time at, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production a at the time of big hit, and the contents of the display production a develop. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “01H” is “non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern). ) ”, There is no deviation in the production time with the same production pattern (production command“ 01H ”), and the production pattern (production command“ 01H ") will function as an effect pattern at the time of losing (an effect pattern in which a bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the small hit at the effect command “02H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (a bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line) appears, the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is a predetermined symbol) for this effect pattern (effect command “02H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “04H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 199 (d), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a loses neither a big hit nor a small hit (pure net). Based on the fact that the loss is obtained, the fluctuation is related to a special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta4 shown in FIG. Is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1900 dynamically displays a non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H”. Is started.

  That is, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H” has the contents of the display effect a at the time of the big hit when the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “03H” is in the first effect mode. In view of the fact that it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of losing the effect pattern (effect command “01H”), this (effect pattern at the time of losing when in the first effect mode) should be compensated. It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” is the “non-extension effect pattern” when in the second effect mode, contrary to the display effect pattern for the effect command “03H”. The production time with the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit (the production command “01H”) will be shifted, and the production with the content of the display effect a ′ at the time of the big hit It cannot function as an effect pattern when the pattern is lost.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” and the fluctuation time Tc2 when the fluctuation number is “10” shown in FIG. In this case, the variation time having the same length as the variation time Ta4 is prepared. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, a display effect pattern described later (see FIG. 200A) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” is “non-display”. Since it appears as an “extended display effect pattern”, there is no deviation in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command “09H”). Therefore, regarding the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “04H”, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “04H” is displayed. By starting the dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus) at the time of the loss with respect to the effect pattern (effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit The challenge stop symbol is made to function as an effect pattern that does not appear on a predetermined symbol line.

  In the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started, for example, such a decorative pattern is displayed at the variation time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives. Then, a display effect c ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. Become.

  As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “04H” appears when a specific loss variation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU 4100a is different. It is possible to function as each display display pattern for the big hit display effect patterns of the two types of effect contents a and c ′, and functions as a display display effect pattern for any of the big hit display effect patterns. Whether to do this is selectively set based on whether the first effect mode or the second effect mode is set. As a result, for the two big hit effect commands “01H” and “09H”, the big hit effect commands “01H” are in the first production mode and in the second production mode. , The appearance probability of the loss display effect pattern prepared for the big hit display effect pattern of “09H” can be changed.

  More specifically, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the lose effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Further, regarding the big hit effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, in the first effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is not adopted as the loss effect pattern. In the effect mode, the effect command “04H” at the time of losing is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Therefore, for the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command “09H”, the appearance probability for the lost effect pattern of the effect command “04H” is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, various display effects patterns with different degrees of expectation can be made to appear according to the effect mode without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step (see FIG. 201).

  The reason why such a special effect can be realized is that an effect command in which the length of each effect is adjusted by using the special symbol stop timing t3 as the effect time for one loss variation time Ta4. Even though the big hit effect pattern of “09H” and the fluctuation time Ta1 shorter than the loss fluctuation time Ta4, at least the opening period after the symbol stop is added and used as the production time, so that the length of each other's production can be increased. This is nothing but the jackpot effect pattern (first effect mode) of the adjusted effect command “01H”. That is, by preparing the big hit effect pattern with the effect time adjusted in this way, one hit change time Ta4 is associated with the big hit effect patterns of the change commands “01H” and “09H” having different change times Ta1 and Tc1. When this loss variation time Ta4 is selected, it becomes possible to determine which production contents a and c ′ appear on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side. Furthermore, even such an opening period that is added as a production time has a certain length regardless of the type when winning the winning prize opening 2103 (big hit or small win) is won. Setting the time (for example, 8 seconds) is also important for realizing such a special effect including an effect pattern especially at the time of a small hit.

  FIG. 200 is a time chart illustrating an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” illustrated in FIG. 189 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

[About the first production mode, extended production pattern for production command “09H”]
As shown in FIG. 200 (a), based on the fact that the big win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first production mode is set, the variation time shown in FIG. Assuming that a change related to a special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a display effect c (eg, a specific mission c) at the time of a big hit associated with the effect command “09H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not can be made successful (whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. The extended effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c thus started is in a situation where the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc1 has arrived. The display effect c is continued without ending (without causing the specific mission c to succeed or fail).

  That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number is “9” shown in FIG. 189 is not prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 when the fluctuation number is “4”. However, when the first production mode is set, such an “extended production pattern” is adopted, and the production time with the production pattern (production command “04H”) is shifted. Is to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the first production mode, production relevance (big hit production pattern, loss production) with the display production pattern when the variation number is “4”. Pattern) is not given.

  In addition, in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H”, the variation of the decorative design is also started. However, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the stoppage of the special symbol is fixed and stopped at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Tc1 in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. The display effect c in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed until the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped by the elapse of the variation time Tc1 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for the above, a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) is performed.

  In other words, in this case, a display effect c described later (no development, loss) associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. 189 is prepared, so that the display effect c even when the timing t3 has elapsed. This will function as “development display effect c (effect in which a chance to succeed a specific mission c)”. Therefore, when this “development display effect c” appears, the special symbol is still fluctuated from the player's side even though it is in the opening time OP after the variation of the special symbol is stopped. Can be grasped as being. In addition, the decorative design in the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be grasped as being in a temporarily stopped state even though it is in a state after being confirmed and stopped. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance that it will be shown that the big win is won by overturning the lost stop mode.

  However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the content of the display effect c is performed in a large display area (the center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In the above description, the decorative pattern variation display is performed only in a small display area (a part that is not easily noticed such as an end portion of the display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 with respect to the display effect c. However, it is more preferable to let the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be successful without paying attention to the movement of the decorative design.

  In other words, in the extended production pattern having the content of the display production c (big hit) associated with the production command “09H”, the actual decoration is the opening time OP after the change of the special symbol is stopped. Despite the fact that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successfully achieved (for example, a character C who has fallen due to an attack from the enemy has stood up). The “development display effect c” appears. In this “development display effect c”, a specific mission “c” is displayed such that, for example, the appearance until the character C again faces the enemy is displayed using the time until the end timing t4 of the opening time OP on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect is made on whether or not it can be successful.

  However, as will be described later, such “development display effect c (effect regarding whether or not a specific mission a can be successful)” at the opening time OP on the main control MPU 4100a side is the command “ This is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with “10H”. As described above, when the player is in the first presentation mode, the display presentation c (small hit) is a big hit loss in order to make it difficult to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the small hit. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (special symbol reserved digestion) relatively soon after the is displayed.

  Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command “09H”, the specific mission c is reached until the end timing t4 of the opening effect OP arrives. A state of success (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and an effect on whether or not the specific mission c can be successful (whether or not the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) Production). As a result, after the opening effect OP ends timing t4, the jackpot demonstrative effect c appears in a manner indicating that the specific mission c has been successful, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” is displayed. Will function as a “winning effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c”. Although details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later, the player will hit a game ball into the big prize opening 2103 in the presence of such a big hit explicit effect c.

[First production mode, extended production pattern for production command “10H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200B, based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the first effect mode is set, FIG. In the liquid crystal display device 1900, when the variation relating to the special symbol having the variation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 2 (here, described as being set to the same time as the variation time Tc1) is started (timing t0), , A display effect c at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command “10H” (for example, whether or not a specific mission c can be succeeded (whether the character C can defeat the enemy)) The dynamic display of the extended production pattern with contents is started. When the extended effect pattern (effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c thus started is also the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 200A) associated with the effect command “09H”. Similarly to the above, even when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the passage of the variation time Tc2 has arrived, the display effect c is not ended (the specific mission c is not succeeded or failed). ) Continue this.

  In addition, the variation of the decorative pattern is also started in the dynamic display of the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”. In addition, with respect to the variation of the decorative symbol, the extended production pattern (FIG. 200) associated with the production command “09H” is also the point that the special design variation is stopped at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. (See (a)). In addition, although the lost stop mode at the time of extension is different from the big win lottery result for the big hit and the small hit, a single display mode is adopted, and the display mode is distinguished. What has not been done is as described above.

  Furthermore, the display effect in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixed and stopped by the elapse of the fluctuation time Tc2 while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the manner of stopping the loss at the time of extension. As for c, a point of continuation expectation about whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not a character C that has fallen due to an attack from an enemy can stand up) This is the same as the extended production pattern (see FIG. 200A) associated with the production command “09H”.

  That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”, the opening time OP after the change of the special symbol is stopped is actually Despite the fact that the decorative design has been confirmed and stopped, the continuation expectation effect at the time of temporary stop has been successfully achieved (for example, a character C who has fallen down due to an attack from the enemy) has such expectation. As a result, the “development display effect c” appears. Then, in this “development display effect c”, a specific mission is shown such that, for example, the appearance of the character C again facing the enemy is displayed using the time until the end timing t4 of the opening time OP on the main control MPU 4100a side. An effect is made as to whether c can be successful.

  Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the opening effect OP arrives, the specific mission c is not shown without showing that the specific mission c is successful (the character C defeats the enemy). An effect about whether or not it can be successful (an effect such as whether or not the character C attacks the enemy and succeeds) appears. However, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command “10H”, after the opening effect OP end timing t4, the small release per time when the effect command is “10H” In the game (small hit game), until the end timing t5 of the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2103, the losing explicit effect c appears in the form of the state in which the specific mission c has failed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c”.

  In this losing explicit effect c, for example, as a big hit defeat effect different from the losing explicit effect a, for example, an attack by the character C is dismissed and the enemy escapes, and then the character C is regretted. Done.

  According to the extended production pattern associated with such production commands “09H” and “10H”, the time from the start timing t0 of the special symbol to the opening end timing t5 of the big prize opening 2103 is a big hit. Since it will function as one such production, it becomes possible to direct the player's gaze point to such production, and the large winning opening 2103 is opened when the losing explicit production c is being performed, and thus small. This makes it difficult to notice that the hit is the pachinko machine 1 mounted.

[Display effect pattern in the case of the first effect mode and the effect command “11H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200 (c), when the first production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 189 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t3). If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect c at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” (for example, a specific mission c can be made successful (character C) The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the contents of whether or not the enemy can be defeated is started. However, the display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) having the contents of the display effect c thus started is displayed when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the lapse of the variation time Tc3 has arrived. This is ended without extending the production c (in the form of failing a specific mission c).

  More specifically, the variation of the decorative design is also started in the dynamic display of the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”. In addition, even when the decoration symbol changes, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the extension stop state when the extension symbol is stopped with the suspension stop mode when extended. ing.

  In addition, the display effect c in the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the elapse of the variation time Ta3, while the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. As for the point of whether or not this is continued, the point is to perform a continuation expectation effect (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up). This is the same as the extended effect pattern (see FIGS. 200A and 200B) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

  However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H”, the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy A state in which the character C that has fallen due to the attack did not stand up is shown) so that the player can know that a specific mission has failed. By providing such an effect pattern, an effect pattern that continues after timing t3 shown in FIGS. 200A and 200B can be made to function as an effect pattern with development.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, whether or not the specific mission c has been successfully completed until the timing t4 has arrived even in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect commands “09H” and “10H”. Whether or not (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but prior to the arrival of timing t4, whether or not a specific mission c was successful (whether character C defeated the enemy) Or not) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the lose explicit indication effect is performed. Even in such an effect method, the small win time display effect c is the small hit time. Most of the opening effect OP is used for the display effect c, and after that, a big win defeat effect such as the appearance of the regret of the character C appears. It is possible to shift to the next change (special symbol reservation digestion) relatively quickly. In this case, it can be said that the player is more advantageous in that the possibility of delaying the initial movement of the game ball into the big winning opening 2103 can be suppressed at the start of the big hit game.

  By the way, as described above, such display effects appear when any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 189 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side in the first effect mode. It is. Then, the player wins the big win with the probability of winning the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit that is not particularly necessary for realizing such a gameability (performance) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game about whether or not it will be played.

  However, even if any of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 189 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side, the main control MPU 4100a is set when the second effect mode is set. The winning commands 2103 based on the winning of a small hit, although there is no change in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state as well as the contents of the production commands “09H” to “11H” from the side By actively adopting the display effect pattern of the effect content on the premise of opening the game, the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2103 compared to when in the first effect mode The game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if is greatly increased.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “09H”]
That is, as shown in FIG. 200 (a), based on the fact that the big win is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, the state shown in FIG. Assuming that the variation of the special symbol having the variation time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1900 has the contents of the display effect c ′ at the big hit time associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  However, the content of the display effect c ′ in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect c in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to make a specific mission c ′ successful? In this form, a display effect pattern (challenge) with a content such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with a bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the winning prize opening 2103 has been confirmed to be open. Bonus performance pattern). Therefore, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (at least in a portion that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second performance mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and the big hit is determined depending on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. The player is made to know the result of the lottery.

  Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) at the time of the effect command “09H”, for example, such a decorative symbol is used as the bonus challenge stop symbol in the variation time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives. A display effect c ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop display with the stop display mode that appears, and at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the special winning opening 2103 is opened. In order to make it possible for the player to know that an opportunity to acquire a prize ball is granted, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “09H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  In addition, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in this way, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses the opening time OP to acquire a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2103. The number of prize balls that can be earned by the player by opening the special winning opening 2103 is determined based on the fact that the bonus challenge stop symbol appears to be given to the player. A challenge bonus effect c ′ about whether it is a thing is performed. As will be described later, since this challenge bonus effect c ′ has a different expectation from the above-described challenge bonus effect a ′, the content of the effect is also made different from each other.

  Then, when the end timing t4 of the opening time OP arrives, the control related to the opening of the special winning opening 2103 is performed, and any opening mode (long-time opening / closing pattern, middle-time opening / closing pattern, small-time opening / closing pattern). Is performed during opening to indicate whether or not the grand prize opening 2103 is open. With such an effect during opening, the player will not only play the big hit game but also hit the game ball to the big prize opening 2103 at the time of the game per small opening (small hit game). Compared to when in the mode, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2103 is greatly increased. Details of the effects during the big hit game will be described later.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “10H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200 (b), based on the fact that the small hit is won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second production mode is set, FIG. If the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Tc2 shown in FIG. 1 (here, described as being set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device In 1900, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the small hits associated with the effect command “10H” and the variation of the decorative design are started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “10H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. At the timing t3 when a display effect c 'appears with an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears, and at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped The decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “10H” functions as “a hit effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  Further, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in this way, the liquid crystal display device 1900 uses the opening time OP to acquire a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2103. The number of prize balls that can be earned by the player by opening the special winning opening 2103 is determined based on the fact that the bonus challenge stop symbol appears to be given to the player. The point that the challenge bonus effect c ′ regarding whether it is a thing is also the same as in the case of the display effect pattern for the effect command “09H”.

  In other words, as described above, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big win and the small win are handled in the same way as the big prize opening 2103 is opened, and the decoration pattern fluctuates. There is no distinction in the production contents from the start timing t0 until the challenge bonus production is performed, and the opening of the big prize opening 2103 is confirmed by the appearance of the bonus challenge stop symbol and the challenge bonus production. Is only shown.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot winning, either the long-time opening / closing pattern or the middle-time opening / closing pattern is adopted. On the other hand, in the small opening per game (small hit game) according to the winning of the small hit, only the opening mode of the small time opening / closing pattern that cannot be adopted in the big hit game can be adopted. Therefore, when a challenge bonus performance is performed as a mission-oriented operation system performance, etc., depending on the operation for a given operation means, it is more difficult to achieve each mission in the small hit than in the big hit. The production lottery will be performed. In addition, when the challenge bonus effect is performed as an operation system effect such as “Which of a plurality of display images having different degrees of expectation for the amount of balls appears when a predetermined operation means is operated once,” An effect lottery corresponding to an operation on a predetermined operation means is performed in such a manner that a display image having a high expectation with respect to the amount of balls is less likely to appear in the case of the small hit than in the case of the big hit.

  Then, when the end timing t4 of the opening time OP arrives due to such a challenge bonus effect c ′, control for opening the special winning opening 2103 is also performed in the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “10H”. And during opening an opening effect is shown that shows which open mode (long opening / closing pattern, medium time opening / closing pattern, small time opening / closing pattern) the big winning opening 2103 is open, etc. As a result, the game performance (rendering performance) is realized as if the opportunity frequency of winning the winning ball due to the opening of the special winning opening 2103 is significantly increased as compared with the case in the first rendering mode.

As described above, the display effect pattern for the effect command “10H” is a display effect pattern based on one effect command,
・ Extended production pattern in the first production mode, which is treated as a no-chance loss that does not give a chance to win a prize ball, and ・ A small chance to win a chance to win a prize ball ( This is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the second effect mode to be handled (similar to the effect pattern at the time of big hit (effect command “09H”)). That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU 4140a side, and thereby, a variety of effects with greatly different effect contents can be obtained without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step. Can be realized.

[Second Effect Mode, Display Effect Pattern for Effect Command “11H”]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU 4100a does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Is obtained, the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 189 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timings t0 to t3). If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the loss associated with the effect command “11H” is performed. Then, the variation of the decorative design is started.

  The non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) having the content of the display effect c ′ thus started is also displayed, for example, in such a decorative pattern at the variation time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. Then, a display effect c ′ having contents such as an appropriate character struggling so as to stop display in a stop display mode in which a bonus challenge stop symbol appears. However, at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line without the worth of struggle by an appropriate character. (Challenge bonus performance pattern) As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “11H” functions as “a loss effect pattern among effect patterns having the effect content c ′”.

  Thus, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “11H” is “non-extended display effect pattern” regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, it is between the effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c at the time of the big hit when the “extended effect pattern” is adopted. Since there is a shift in the production time at the stage, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of a loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production c at the time of the big hit, and the contents of the display production c are developed. As described above, it functions only as a halfway effect pattern that ends in the middle stage.

  On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit at the effect command “09H” appears as the “non-extended display effect pattern”. For the effect pattern (the effect command “09H”) having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the big hit without causing any deviation in the effect time with the same effect pattern (the effect command “09H”). It will function as an effect pattern at the time of the loss (effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line). As described above, when in the second effect mode, the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect c ′ at the time of the effect command “10H” is also the effect at the time of the hit. Since the pattern (the bonus challenge stop pattern appears as a production pattern that appears on a predetermined design line), the production pattern (the bonus challenge stop design is a predetermined pattern) for this production pattern (production command “10H”). It will function as a production pattern that does not appear on the design line).

  Thus, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “09H” corresponds to the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern for the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 199 (b), and the display effect pattern for the effect command “11H” is shown in FIG. 199 (c). The production command corresponds to the display production pattern when the production command is “03H”, and although the production contents differ from each other, the production series addressed to itself (production contents a series, production contents) c series) function as production patterns having substantially the same role.

  However, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” in the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”) is prepared. Not. That is, in the production content c series, if a display production pattern corresponding to the production command “04H” is prepared, in the first production pattern, the display production pattern corresponding to the production command “09H” is displayed. Although it can function effectively as a loss display effect pattern, the second effect pattern cannot function as a display loss effect pattern for the display effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”. Therefore, despite being given a relatively long time, there was a display effect pattern dedicated to losing without the jackpot symbol combination appearing, and we were worried that this might reduce the entertainment interest of this game Is.

  Therefore, when in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern when the effect command is “09H”, as the lose effect pattern, the effect pattern at the time of losing (pure loss) that does not satisfy a specific condition is adopted. Only the effect pattern when the specific condition is satisfied (the display effect pattern when the effect command is “10H”) functions as the only presence in place of the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss) To come. That is, in this case, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), unlike the production content a series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), “development display production c” appears. The big hit expectation degree at that time must be set within a range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit. However, the production content c of the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”) has a longer time than the production content a of the production content a series (production commands “01H” to “04H”). As the jackpot expectation degree, it is executed as an effect with a higher expectation than the effect content a. Therefore, the expectation degree of big hit when the “development display effect c” appears, even if it is within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, this is required as an appropriate value described later. Setting is relatively easy.

  In addition, regarding the display effect pattern associated with the effect command “04H” in the effect content a series (effect commands “01H” to “04H”), the effect content a is in the second effect mode. By functioning as a loss effect pattern for the hit effect pattern (effect commands “09H”, “10H”) of the effect content c series, not the hit effect pattern of the series (effect commands “01H”, “02H”) As described above, it is avoided that the jackpot symbol combination does not appear as a display effect pattern dedicated to losing. Therefore, in the production content c series (production commands “09H” to “11H”), when in the second production mode, the winning production patterns (production commands “09H” and “10H”) are prepared. The lost effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the lost effect pattern (the effect command “11H”) to the extent that the display effect pattern selection probability of the effect command “04H” is added.

  Although details are omitted, each display effect pattern associated with each of the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. Display having the same form as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 199 (a) to (d)) associated with the a series effect commands “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H”. It is set as a production pattern. Furthermore, the display effect patterns respectively associated with the effect commands “12H”, “13H”, “14H” of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 189 are the effect commands “09H”, It is set as a display effect pattern having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 200A to 200C) associated with “10H” and “11H”, respectively. That is, each display effect pattern associated with the effect commands “05H”, “06H”, “07H”, and “08H” of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 189 and the effect content d shown in FIG. The production relations between the display production patterns associated with the series production commands “12H”, “13H”, and “14H” are the production commands “01H”, “02H”, Each display effect pattern (refer to FIGS. 199 (a) to (d)) respectively associated with “03H” and “04H” and the effect commands “09H”, “10H”, “11H” of the effect content c series. Are set so as to have the above-described effect relationship with each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 200A to 200C) associated with each other.

  FIG. 201 (a) is a table showing the jackpot expectation degree when in the first effect mode for each effect content series, and FIG. 201 (b) is a challenge when in the second effect mode. It is a table | surface which shows a bonus rush expected degree etc. according to each production content series, respectively. In addition, about the numerical value which shows a probability, since the 2nd decimal place is rounded off and it has shown as a numerical value to the 1st decimal place, the probability total value of each element may not become 100%.

  According to such a setting aspect related to the display effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 201 (a), for the jackpot expectation degree that is the expectation degree at which the hit effect appears in the first effect mode, The big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern appears is “0.5%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is “1.5%”. The big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern appears is “13.7%”, and the big hit expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is “33.1%”. When the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, the big hit expectation is “100%”, which is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect contents e, a confirmed effect that the big hit is won appears regardless of the effect mode.

  Further, regarding the big hit expectation degree (expectation degree at which the hit effect appears) when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode is in the developed stage, when the developed effect content a appears The big hit expectation degree of "1.3%", the big hit expectation degree when the development content b after development appears "3.7%", the big hit when the development content c after development appears The degree of expectation is “25%”, and the degree of expectation for jackpot when the production content d after development appears is “72.7%”.

  On the other hand, with respect to the challenge bonus entry expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the winning effect appears in the second effect mode, as shown in FIG. 201B, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears The challenge bonus entry expectation degree is “7.9%”, the challenge bonus entry expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ appears is “11.8%”, and the effect content c ′ is displayed. The challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the effect pattern appears is “15.4%”, and the challenge bonus rush expectation degree when the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears is “10%”.

  That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d are the jackpot effect patterns (effect command “01H”, effect command “05H” set as the extended effect patterns. ”), A non-extended display effect pattern (effect command“ 04H ”, effect command“ 08H ”) that can only function as a loss effect pattern when in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (the effect command “04H” and the effect command “08H”) prepared in this way is used in the second effect mode. 09H ”, the production command“ 10H ”) and the effect content d ′ for the hit production pattern (the production command“ 12H ”, the production command“ 13H ”).

  According to the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H”, when in the first effect mode, the expectation that a win effect appears including the developed effect contents a and b. Although the degree (expected degree of jackpot) is lowered, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d), thereby It can be avoided that only display effect patterns that cannot be expected are repeatedly performed. Furthermore, for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d, although the appearance probability including the effect contents c and d after development is low, a hit effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d. The degree of expectation (expected degree of jackpot) is increased (with respect to each display effect pattern of effect contents a and b), and thereby the game entertainment when a specific display effect pattern (effect contents c and d) appears Can be improved.

  Conversely, the display effect pattern associated with such effect commands “04H” and “08H” is used as a display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. As a result, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series is increased by that amount (operation on the appearance probability). As a result, it is possible to reduce the difference between the probability of appearance between the contents a to d and the expectation level at which the hit effect appears, as compared with the first effect mode, and the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side can be reduced. Even if it is not changed one by one, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects.

  Moreover, the display effect associated with the effect commands “04H” and “08H” regarding the disparity between the effect contents regarding the expectation level (challenge bonus entry expectation degree) at which the winning effect appears when in the second effect mode. In addition to being used as a display effect pattern of the production contents c and d series, the pattern can be used as a winning combination for winning a prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2103, and one kind of small hit is also available. Is further reduced (an operation to reduce the disparity in expectation level where a hit effect appears).

  According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, the display effect patterns of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ are relatively likely to appear regardless of the type of the effect contents a ′ to d ′. Become. In addition, the entry probability (probability of execution of the winning effect) of the challenge bonus effect in which the granting of the opportunity for winning the prize ball is confirmed is equalized compared to that in the first effect mode (here, the contents of the effect) a) to d ′) (within a range of ± 10%), even if any production content a ′ to d ′ appears due to the above-mentioned gap in the appearance probability being filled It becomes easier for a person to expect that an opportunity for winning a prize ball will be given.

  In this regard, when in the second production mode, when the challenge bonus production is entered (executed), “the big prize opening 2103 is opened in any manner (long-time opening / closing pattern, medium-time opening / closing pattern, small-time opening / closing pattern). Since it is characterized by the effect “whether it is done”, it is better to make it appear more easily as a display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ than when it appears to be biased to any one. It is more desirable to suppress the decline in the entertainment interest.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 201 (b), in the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ to d ′ according to this embodiment, the effect content a ′ is the most in the appearance probability of the large / medium time opening / closing pattern. It becomes smaller and gradually becomes larger in the order of the production contents b ′, c ′, d ′. Further, with regard to the appearance probability of the short-time opening / closing pattern, the production content a ′ is the largest, and the production content b ′, c ′, d ′ is gradually decreased in the order. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′ appears, the possibility of opening the grand prize winning opening 2103 with a short time opening / closing pattern is certainly high, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in the present embodiment) , About 40 to 50) is determined to be acquirable, and the color with a sense of expectation that the winning prize opening 2103 will be opened with a long-time opening / closing pattern or a medium-time opening / closing pattern. You can enjoy as a director. When the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′ appears, the probability that the big winning opening 2103 is opened with the long-time opening / closing pattern or the medium time opening / closing pattern is the probability that the big winning opening 2103 is opened with the small time opening / closing pattern. Rather than confirming that at least a small amount of prize balls can be acquired as a privilege, the winning prize opening 2103 has a long opening / closing pattern and a medium opening / closing pattern. It will function as an effect of shades such as whether or not it is opened. Then, the display effect patterns of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ each function as an effect having a hue between the display effect pattern of the effect contents a ′ and the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. The display effect pattern of the effect content b ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a ′, and the display effect pattern of the effect content c ′ is darker in the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content d ′. Is darker. Therefore, the display effect patterns of such effect contents a ′ to d ′ are all relatively likely to appear, so that the player can enjoy the effects of various shades.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-described operation for reducing the disparity in expectation level at which the hit effect appears between the contents is smaller than that in the first effect mode is expected to show the hit effect. The degree relationship is to be reversed depending on the production mode. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 201 (a) and 201 (b), when in the first production mode, the expectation levels of production contents b and c are “1.5%” and “ 13.7% ”, which is smaller than the expectation level“ 33.1% ”of the effect content d, but when in the second effect mode, the expectation level of the effect contents b ′ and c ′ Are “11.8%” and “15.4%”, respectively, which are larger than the expectation level “10%” of the production content d ′. Even with such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different effects without changing the logic on the main control MPU 4100a side by step.

  However, when the production pattern of the production content d ′ appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the winning production (challenge bonus production) is executed is certainly greater than when the production pattern of the production contents b ′ and c ′ appears. Although it is low, as long as it enters the challenge bonus production, the grand prize opening 2103 is opened with a high and medium time opening / closing pattern with a higher probability than the production pattern of production contents b ′ and c ′. It is easy to get a lot of balls. Therefore, the production patterns of the production contents b ′ and c ′ and the production pattern of the production content d ′ are divided according to the player, and such various shades are given depending on the display production pattern. As a result, a decrease in the entertainment interest of the game is suppressed.

  Next, an example of an effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1900 when the control for opening the big winning opening 2103 is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 189, FIG. 199 (a) and FIG. 200 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E). ), The contents of the production are not different and the type is not shown, and the control for opening the big winning opening 2103 (in this case, the control for the big hit game) is started while being kept secret. It will be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first presentation mode, the type of jackpot and the period are determined using the period when the control for opening the big prize opening 2103 is performed. An effect that can indicate the gaming state after the end is performed.

  That is, as described above, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state is either big hit A or B, after the big hit game is finished, both the time reduction function and the probability variation function are activated. It will be controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when either of the big hits A and B is won, the liquid crystal display device 1900 first indicates that the big hit is won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, and then the long-time opening / closing pattern and the middle time. An effect indicating information (a big bonus, a regular bonus, etc.) relating to the amount of a ball as to which of the opening / closing patterns is used to open the big winning opening 2103 is performed (effect during a big hit game). In addition, even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed as the big hit game effect relating to the amount of balls, the big hit is won in the big hit explicit effects a to d. When clearly indicating, the information (type of jackpot) concerning the amount of balls to be played may be displayed together (simultaneously displayed).

  In addition, when the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state is one of the big hits C to E, after the big hit game is finished, the external disadvantageous game state in which the time-shortening function does not operate (the probability variation function also operates The normal external disadvantageous game state or the probability variation external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function is activated). Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is ended, whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed. Therefore, when one of the big hits C to E is won, the liquid crystal display device 1900 first indicates that the big hit is won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, and then either of the big hits A or B By performing an effect different from the effect during the big hit game when is won, an effect indicating that one of the big hits C to E of the big hits A to E is won is performed ( Production during the big hit game). In addition, since the opening mode having a medium-time opening / closing pattern is adopted when winning big hits C to E, it only takes a big hit C to E to show that it has been won. Information was also shown. In addition, even for an effect that indicates that one of the big hits C to E is won, even if the effect is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed, the big hit is demonstrated in the big hit explicit effects a to d. It may also be displayed (simultaneously displayed) when clearly indicating that it has been won.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 189, FIG. 199 (a) and FIG. 200 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second presentation mode, there is an opportunity to open the big prize opening 2103. There is no difference in the content of the production depending on the type of the hit (big hit A to big hit E, small hit), and the type is not shown and the control for opening the big prize opening 2103 is kept secret ( Here, the control for the big hit game or the small hit game) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second presentation mode, the type of winning (big hit, small hit is made using the period when the control for opening the big prize opening 2103 is performed. The type of winning or jackpot) or the game state after the period ends can be shown.

  That is, in the effect during opening in the second effect mode, firstly, it depends on the amount of balls to be played regarding which of the long opening / closing pattern, the medium time opening / closing pattern, and the small time opening / closing pattern is open. An effect in which information (such as a big bonus, a regular bonus, or a small bonus) is shown is performed. As a result, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2103 is opened with a long-time opening and closing pattern (big bonus), it is automatically shown that it is controlled to the probability variation external advantageous gaming state based on the winning of the big hit A. Will be. In addition, when it is shown that the big prize opening 2103 is opened with a small time opening / closing pattern (small bonus), it is naturally shown that it is a small win and the game state will not be changed. It becomes.

  However, when it is indicated that the special winning opening 2103 is opened with a middle time opening / closing pattern (regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as an effect during opening. As a result, when the character wins in the battle effect, it is shown that the game is controlled to the probable external advantageous gaming state based on the winning of the big hit B. On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the battle production, it is indicated that one of the big hits C to E has been won, and after the opening production (big hit game) ends, the time is shortened. It is controlled to an external disadvantageous game state in which the function does not operate (a normal external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function does not operate, or a probability variation external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function operates). Then, as the effect state after the big hit game is ended, whether or not the probability variation function is in operation is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which it is concealed.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent production state is limited to a period until a special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times). For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it indicates that it is in a probable external disadvantaged game state, while when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I am doing so. And when the character wins in this battle effect, it shows that it is won by big hit, and when the character is defeated, it usually shows that it is in an external disadvantaged game state, and waits for the end of the same period The latent production state is terminated without any problem.

  As described above, according to the latent effect technique in which the current gaming state is indicated until the period until the special symbol is changed a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, as a player, It becomes easy to enjoy whether the game state is in the game state, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the game state being kept secret for a long period of time even though the time-saving function is not activated.

  By the way, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 199 (a), the extension command “01H” shown in FIG. ”Is associated, but as shown in FIG. 202, in addition to the“ extended effect pattern ”, a“ non-extended display effect pattern ”having the contents of the display effect a is also associated. It may be.

  That is, in this case, when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 189 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a displays the “extended effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a and the display effect a. One of the “non-extended display effect patterns” having the contents is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern.

Here, as a technique concerning selection of the “extended display pattern” having the content of the display effect “a” and the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect “a”, for example,
(A) Based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on a random number, either an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a or a “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a How to choose
(B) Based on the type of jackpot won in the jackpot lottery, an “extended display pattern” with the contents of the display effect a and a “non-extended display effect pattern” with the contents of the display effect a In addition to a method for selecting any one of the above, a method combining (A) and (B) can be employed.

  Of these, when the method (a) is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are associated with the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern”, respectively. The “extended effect” having the contents of the display effect a when the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 189 is received in the first effect mode, according to the ratio of the random number values associated in advance. The appearance probabilities of “pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of display effect a are determined. With regard to the appearance probability setting, it is important that when the “extended effect pattern” appears rather than the “non-extended display effect pattern”, the big hit expectation is higher until the end of the display effect pattern. It is more desirable to entertain.

  Further, when the method (b) is adopted, when a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is won, the dynamic of the “non-extended display effect pattern” having the contents of the display effect a The display is started on the liquid crystal display device 1900. According to such a production method, at a timing t1, a winning result for at least a specific winning type (for example, big hit A) is displayed.

  For example, when a hit effect (a big hit explicit effect that clearly indicates a big hit) by a “non-extension display effect pattern” appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A” having the highest advantage for the player. In the subsequent opening time OP, the liquid crystal display device 1900 performs an opening effect for congratulating the player such as “Congratulations!”. Then, in the big hit game after the timing t2 when the control related to the opening of the big winning opening 2103 is started, the special big hit effect dedicated to the “big hit A” is performed. However, when a hit effect (a big hit explicit effect that clearly indicates a big hit) does not appear at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol, the “big hit A, which is the most advantageous for the player” It will be possible to grasp that it is not won. And in this case, when the big hit explicit production appears through the above-mentioned continuous expected production by the “extended production pattern”, it is possible to grasp that any of “big hit B” to “big hit E” has been won. It will be.

  Further, when adopting a method combining (A) and (B), an effect lottery table is prepared for each type of jackpot, and based on the acquired random number value while referring to the effect lottery table. Thus, either an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a or a “non-extended display effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a is selected. In other words, by providing an effect lottery table for each type of jackpot, it becomes possible to make the selection rate of “extended effect pattern” and “non-extended display effect pattern” different in each table. Thereby, for example, the expectation of the type of jackpot that has been won is made different depending on whether it is clearly indicated that the jackpot is won by either “extended effect pattern” or “non-extended display effect pattern”. In addition to the fact that the “non-extension production pattern” has a lower jackpot expectation, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is higher when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit. , “Expansion effect pattern” has a higher jackpot expectation, but when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit, the expectation of “big hit A”, which is the most advantageous, is lower. Is also possible.

  As for the method related to the selection of the “extended effect pattern” and the “non-extended display effect pattern”, in addition to the display effect pattern of the effect command “01H”, the effect command “05H” shown in FIG. The display effects patterns “09H” and “12H” can be similarly adopted. However, when the effect commands “01H” and “05H” are used as the display effect patterns, the display effect patterns “03H” and “07H” are lost to the display effect pattern as the winning effect pattern. It can function as a pattern.

  Further, in the example described above with reference to FIG. 200A, the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 189 when in the first effect mode has an “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a”. ”, But as shown in FIG. 203, in addition to the“ extended effect pattern ”, an“ extended effect pattern ”having the contents of the display effect c may also be associated. Good.

  That is, in the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c” associated with the effect command “02H”, the display effect is performed by extending the stop timing t1 of the special symbol. The content of the effect is not only the display effect pattern of the effect command “11H” when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 200 (c)), but also the display effect after development in which the big hit expectation is higher. It will be the production contents that do not appear. Therefore, when the production command “02H” shown in FIG. 189 is received in the first production mode, a part of the production command is assigned to the production contents in which the developed display production does not appear. In addition, it is possible to set the winning probability for small hitting higher while keeping the appearance probability of the display effect after development in the first effect mode low. In this case, when in the second production mode, the probability of entry into the challenge bonus production (the expectation level at which the bonus production appears) will be increased by the amount set for the higher probability of winning the small hit. Thus, an opportunity to acquire a prize ball by opening the special winning opening 2103 can be given with a higher probability.

  In this case, when the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 189 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that “the extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a” and “the display effect”. One of the “extended effect patterns having the contents of c” is selected, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 starts dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern. In addition, as a method for selecting the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a” and the “extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c”, for example, as a result of a predetermined effect lottery based on a random number Based on the above, it is possible to adopt a method of selecting either “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect a” or “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect c”. When this method is adopted, how many random values that can be acquired are “an extension effect pattern having the contents of display effect a” and “an extension effect pattern having the contents of display effect c”. The contents of “display effect a” in the case where the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 189 is received in the first effect mode according to the ratio of the random number values associated in advance. The appearance probabilities of “extended effect pattern having“ and the extended effect pattern having the contents of display effect c ”are determined.

  In addition, regarding a method related to selection of “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect a” and “extended effect pattern having contents of display effect c”, the display effect pattern of the above-described effect command “02H” is used. In addition, the display effect pattern of the effect command “06H” shown in FIG. 189 can be similarly adopted. When this effect command “06H” is adopted as the display effect pattern, the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect b” and the “extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect d” are selected. It becomes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the variation pattern (variation number “15”, production command “15H”) shown in FIG. 189 for determining the big hit is prepared. You may omit it. That is, in this case, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always appear when the special winning opening 2103 is opened in the second effect mode.

[4-1A. Game contents by main board]
Next, game contents by the main board 4000 including the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is moved to the game panel 1150 when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game area 1100 is placed in front of the game area 1100, and a game with a game ball is started. A game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down in the game area 1100 on the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength.

  The game ball driving strength is determined by detecting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 with the rotation position detection sensor 512 and then using the shot control unit 4120 with the shot control unit 4120 based on the detection signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512. The driving strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled so that it can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game balls come into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game balls flow down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 flows down from the left and right sides of the center wall 25003 and reaches the left side of the center wall 2500 of the center wall 2500, the center wall 2503 plays the center role. You are directed to the area on the left side of the object 2500. When a game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the gate portion 2401 arranged on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402, it is used for a normal hit determination as a normal lottery result. A random number is extracted. Then, based on the normal hit determination random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light in red, green and orange alternately. ), And a normal symbol based on a random number for normal hit determination (ordinary lottery result) extracted after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) is stopped (normal symbol indicator 1189 is displayed in red or green) ). The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol variation pattern selected from the normal hit determination table (ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table).

  Specifically, if the selected random number is a “normal hit” random number, the normal symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 emits green light), and the selected normal random number is a “normal lose” random number. In the case of, stop display is performed with a normal symbol suggesting a loss (the normal symbol indicator 1189 emits red light). Then, when a normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of movable pieces 2105 that close the second start port 2102 expands for a predetermined opening time (for example, between 0.3 seconds and 3 seconds). The game ball can be awarded to the second start port 2102 by repeating a predetermined number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times).

  Note that the variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time of the movable piece 2105 at the second start port 2102 are changed according to the first hit determination random number or the second hit determination random number (special lottery result). As a result of special lottery, when “short time per hour (including normal short time per hour, high probability per short time, etc.)” is extracted, it is normal to change the fluctuation time and expansion time to a short time. The hit determination table can be replaced from a normal table to a high probability table.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an area where a game ball can flow is provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2500 from the center in the left-right direction to the left side, but the right side from the center follows the outer periphery of the game area 1100. An arc-shaped area extending downward is provided, and when a game ball enters this area, the game ball is sent to the lower side of the center accessory 2500 without obtaining an opportunity to enter the gate portion 2401 or the warp inlet 2504. As a result, the chances are reduced and the movement of the game ball becomes less enjoyable. Therefore, the player plays the game by adjusting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 as appropriate so that the game ball flows down from the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the center accessory 2500 to the left side. It is possible to suppress the game operation that is strongly driven and to prevent the entertainment from deteriorating by enjoying the game by the operation of the original handle device 500 of the pachinko machine 1.

  By the way, in this example, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2402 while the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 while the normal symbol is variably displayed, the normal symbol that is changing is stopped and the normal symbol generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is determined, the normal hit determination random number (including the normal symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2402 is temporarily stored and the display is suspended. The number of random numbers for determining normal hits (also referred to as the number of holds) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This normal symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and suggests the number of memories by the number of each LED to be lit. In this example, up to four are stored and the number of pending is displayed. It is like that. In addition, when the number of holdings exceeds four, the random numbers for normal hit determination extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2402 are discarded.

  In addition, the game balls that have been driven into the game area 1100 and have flowed down the left side of the center role 2500 are moved toward the center of the game area 1100 below the center role 2500 by the shelf 2302 of the side guide member 2300. It has become. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 arranged below the center accessory 2500 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3232, the main control board 4100 is based on the detection signal. A predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in accordance with the payout command, so that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are received. The payout is made to the upper plate 301.

  If the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 does not win any of the general winning opening 2104, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, and the big winning opening 2103, the game area 1100 It is provided at the lower center in the left-right direction and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. In addition, regardless of whether the game ball wins the general winning port 2104, the first starting port 2101, the second starting port 2102, or the big winning port 2103, the winning game ball is returned to the gaming area 1100. The game board 4 is discharged to the lower rear side.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2504 that opens on the left side surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied to the upper first stage 2511 of the stage 2510 of the center accessory 2500. It has become so. Then, the game ball supplied onto the first stage 2511 rolls in the left-right direction on the first stage 2511 and rolls forward from one of the valleys formed low on both sides of the center in the left-right direction. To the second stage 2512. Even in the second stage 2512, the game ball rolls in the left-right direction, rolls forward from one of the valleys formed low on both sides of the center in the left-right direction, and is supplied to the third stage 2513. The game ball supplied to the third stage 2513 also rolls in the left-right direction on the third stage 2513, and from above the attacking unit 2100 (substantially the first start port 2101) from the lowered portion at the substantially horizontal center. It is released into the gaming area 1100 immediately above.

  By the way, when the game ball rolling on the second stage 2512 of the stage 2510 enters the chance entrance 2514 opened to the rear side of the raised portion at the center in the left-right direction, it is lower than the lowered portion of the third stage 2513. Further, on the lower side, the chance outlet 2515 disposed immediately above the first start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100 is discharged into the game area 1100, and the game ball is received into the first start port 2101 with a high probability. Yes. When a game ball is received by the first start port 2101 and detected by the first start port sensor 3231, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls from the prize ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 or the like. Is dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first start port 2101, the second start port 2102, and the big prize opening 2103 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, so that the game balls released from the stage 2510 are The first start port 2101 and the like are received with a high probability, and when the second start port 2102 and the big prize opening 2103 are acceptable, the game ball is received when it is released from the stage 2510 or the chance exit 2515. Since there is a high possibility, not only the first starting port 2101 but also the second starting port 2102 and the prize winning port 2103 can be expected to have a sense of expectation regarding the acceptance of game balls, and the interest can be enhanced. Yes.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate part 2401 and is detected by the gate sensor 2402 and “normal hit” is drawn as the normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of movable pieces that close the second starting port 2102 is closed. When the game ball is received in the second start port 2102 and detected by the second start port sensor 2127 when the 2105 is expanded for a predetermined time and can be won, the main control board 4100 and the like are Accordingly, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the prize ball device 740 to the upper plate 301.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when a game ball wins the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and is detected by the first start port sensor 3231 and the second start port sensor 2127, the first start is started. A predetermined first hit determination random number is extracted at the port 2101, and a predetermined second hit determination random number is extracted at the second start port 2102. Then, based on the extracted hit determination random number, after the special symbol variation display displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started, The special symbol corresponding to the extracted winning determination random number is stopped and displayed as a special lottery result. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the second special symbol indicator 1186 in a manner associated with “big hit”, the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 has a predetermined pattern. A special advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game) that opens and closes is generated, and a game ball is awarded to the big prize opening 2103 during that time, so that more game balls can be acquired. When a single game ball wins the big prize opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 13) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 from the prize ball device 740.

  Note that, in the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 as well, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed in the same manner as the normal symbol variation display due to the game ball entering the gate portion 2401. In 1186, when the special symbol is variably displayed, or when the special symbol such as the big hit game as the special advantageous gaming state cannot be variably displayed, the game ball is awarded to the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the first start port sensor 3231 is displayed. When detected by the second starting port sensor 2127, the first symbol extracted based on the detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3231 and the second starting port sensor 2127 until the special symbol change display is possible. The random number for hit judgment and the random number for judgment of second hit are stored and the display is suspended, and the stored number of random numbers for hit judgment is stored in the first special symbol. So as to display in 憶 display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187. The first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory indicator 1187 are each composed of two LEDs, so that the number of memories is suggested by the combination of the light emission state of each LED that is turned off / on / flashing. In this example, up to four each are stored and displayed. In addition, when the number of holdings exceeds four, the extracted random numbers for hit determination are discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first hit determination random number and the second hit determination random number that are the big hit determination random numbers extracted based on the detection of the first start port sensor 3231 and the second start port sensor 2127, respectively. By comparing with a predetermined hit determination table (also referred to as a special symbol variation pattern table) determined in advance, it is determined whether it is “losing”, “small hit”, or “big hit”. ing. The type of jackpot is also determined by comparing the hit determination table with the jackpot symbol random number.

  Then, the first hit determination random number and the second hit determination random number extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game balls to the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 (the special lottery result is), In the case of “small hit”, the main control board 4100 repeats the opening / closing pattern for closing the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 in an open state for a predetermined short time, a plurality of times (for example, twice). .

  On the other hand, when the extracted first hit determination random number or second hit determination random number is “big hit”, the main control board 4100 opens the opening / closing member 2106 of the attacker unit 2100 for a predetermined long time. An opening / closing pattern that closes the opening / closing member 2106 (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) when a predetermined number of game balls have been awarded to the grand prize opening 2103 when a predetermined number of game balls have been awarded, (Predetermined number of rounds) are repeated, and an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. For the “big hit” after the predetermined number of rounds, the hit determination table is changed to a high probability table according to the extracted hit determination random number. Further, the variable time setting table is appropriately changed in order to change to the short-time gaming state or to cancel the short-time gaming state in accordance with the hit determination random number.

  In the pachinko of this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game (number of times of opening and closing the opening and closing member 2106) is set to the same number (for example, 16 times) regardless of the type of jackpot. For “big hit A” in which balls can be acquired, a number of rounds (for example, 16 times) (the number of times of opening and closing the opening / closing member 2106) is set, and a medium amount of balls can be acquired. For “big hit B” to “big hit E”, the number of rounds (the number of times of opening and closing of the opening and closing member 2106) may be set to a medium number of times (for example, 9 times) which is smaller than a large number of times. According to such a configuration, during a big hit game (especially in the second performance mode), “big hit A” and “big hit B” (or “big hit A” and “big hit B”) are performed over a plurality of rounds. It is possible to produce an effect as to which type is “big hit E”). However, in this case, there is no difference in the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 2106 in each round game, the time limit in each round game, and the limit number of game balls to be entered in the big winning opening 2103.

  Also, in this embodiment, the player is awarded when a big win is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and when a big win is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side. Although there is no difference in the expected value of profit (the number of prize balls that can be acquired, etc.), a difference may be provided in the expected value. For example, when the lottery process on the first special symbol side is performed, the probability that a jackpot game with the largest number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is executed is set to be relatively high, When the lottery process on the two special symbols side is performed, a case where the probability that the jackpot game having the largest number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is executed is set to be relatively low corresponds.

  Next, detection of the rotation direction and rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 will be described. The rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 by detecting the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates integrally with the dial operation unit 401. ing. In FIG. 204 to FIG. 206, the rotation detection sensor 432a is described as “A” and the rotation detection sensor 432b is described as “B”. Steps 1 to 4 shown below are four types of rotation positions of the dial operation unit 401 with reference to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, respectively. The rotational position sequentially shifts to step 2, step 3, and step 4, and after shifting to step 4, it returns to step 1 again.

  First, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the clockwise direction, as shown in FIG. 204, as shown in FIG. 204, both rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then the dial. The rotation detection sensor 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c by the shift to step 2 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the operation unit 401, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432b and moves to the rotation detection sensor. The process proceeds to a step in which 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b rotate. The process proceeds to a step not detecting 410c. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the clockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432a and the rotation detection sensor 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The process proceeds to a step where the rotation detection sensor 432b detects the rotation detection piece 410c.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, as shown in FIG. 205, as shown in FIG. 205, both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, and then Due to the shift to step 2 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432a and the rotation detection sensor 432a does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c. The detection sensor 432b proceeds to a step of detecting the rotation detection piece 410c. Thereafter, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b and the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b both detect rotation. The process proceeds to a step where the piece 410c is not detected. Then, due to the shift to step 4 accompanying the counterclockwise rotation of the dial operation unit 401, the rotation detection sensor 432a detects the rotation detection piece 410c, while the slit 410d of the driven gear 410 moves to the rotation detection sensor 432b. Then, the process proceeds to a step where the rotation detection sensor 432b does not detect the rotation detection piece 410c.

  That is, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on (the rotation detection piece 410c is detected) / OFF (the rotation detection piece 410c is not detected). As shown in FIG. 4, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are both “ON” in Step 1, and the rotation detection sensor 432a continues to be “ON” in Step 2, while the rotation detection sensor 432b is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection sensor 432a continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection sensor 432b is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to Step 1 again, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  On the other hand, when the dial operation unit 401 rotates counterclockwise, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on / off in step 1 as shown in FIG. In step 2, the rotation detection sensor 432b continues to be “ON”, while the rotation detection sensor 432a is “OFF”. Thereafter, after both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are “OFF” in Step 3, the rotation detection sensor 432b continues to be “OFF” in Step 4, while the rotation detection sensor 432a is “ON”. Thereafter, the process returns to Step 1 again, and both the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned “ON”.

  As described above, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 based on ON / OFF in each of the steps 1 to 4 described above. When the dial operation unit 401 constituting the unit 400 functions as an operation means, in other words, when the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by a player's operation, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are turned on / off. It is detected that the dial operation unit 401 has been rotated. At this time, the dial operation unit 401 rotates clockwise from the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b before the rotation operation and the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b during the rotation operation. It is detected whether it has been rotated or operated counterclockwise. In this example, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401. However, by counting the pulses of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, the dial operation unit 401 The rotational position can also be detected.

  For example, if Step 1, that is, the state where both the rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b are “ON” is the state before the rotation operation, the rotation detection sensor 432 a is regarded as the ON / OFF state of the rotation detection sensors 432 a and 432 b during the rotation operation. If it is “ON” while the rotation detection sensor 432b is “OFF”, it coincides with step 2 in the clockwise direction, so that the dial operation unit 401 is detected to be rotated in the clockwise direction. On the other hand, if the rotation detection sensor 432a is “OFF” while the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are in the ON / OFF state during the rotation operation, the rotation detection sensor 432b is “ON”, which is the same as Step 2 in the counterclockwise direction. Therefore, it is detected that the dial operation unit 401 is rotated counterclockwise. The clockwise or counterclockwise operation signal of the dial operation unit 401 detected by the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b is output to the peripheral control unit 4140. The peripheral control unit 4140 receives the player's intention to operate based on the input operation signal, and reflects this in the effect on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like.

  In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 functions as a movable effect unit that rotates based on the drive of the dial drive motor 414, the drive of the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted as the rotation operation of the driven gear 410 via the drive gear 412. The dial operation unit 401 provided integrally by the rotation operation of the driven gear 410 rotates clockwise or counterclockwise. At this time, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401 based on whether or not the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 rotating with the dial operation unit 401 is detected (ON / OFF). Then, detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b are output to the peripheral control unit 4140, and the peripheral control unit 4140 having received the detection signals of the dial operation unit 401 knows the rotation direction and rotation speed of the dial operation unit 401. Rotational motion is controlled.

[5. Aspects extracted from the present embodiment (technical thought)]
Hereinafter, various technical ideas extracted by viewing this embodiment from various viewpoints will be described.

[Technical thought extracted by providing game area, decoration unit, arm member, link member, or moving drive motor]
The following aspects (technical ideas) can be extracted by viewing this embodiment from the viewpoint of “including a decoration unit, an arm member, a link member, or a movement drive motor”.
[Aspect 1]
“A game area where game media is driven by the player's operation,
A decorative unit that is arranged at a predetermined position in the game area in a front view, and has a decorative body formed in a predetermined shape, and a connecting shaft that protrudes backward from a substantially horizontal center;
A connecting portion connected to the connecting shaft of the decorative unit, a hook-shaped first arm portion extending from the connecting portion to the outside in front view of the decorative unit, and a side opposite to the connecting portion in the first arm portion A base end portion that is formed on the base end side of the base and is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a hook-shaped second that extends from the base end portion in a direction different from the first arm portion. An arm that is formed at the tip of the arm part and the second arm part and has a long hole-like link connecting part extending in the extending direction of the second arm part, and is arranged on the rear side of the decoration unit Members,
A link pin that is slidably inserted into the link connection portion of the arm member, revolves the link pin around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined radius, and is externally viewed from the front of the decoration unit A link member that is rotatable at a position of
And a moving drive motor for moving the decoration unit by rotating the link member in accordance with a game state that is changed when a game medium is driven into the game area. .

  Here, as the “decorative body”, “a thing imitating a predetermined character in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine (for example, a figure)”, “an object imitating a predetermined item in accordance with the concept of the gaming machine”, etc. Is mentioned.

  The “decoration unit” includes “a movable mechanism for moving the decorative body”, “a light emitting means for decorating the decorative body and the like”, “a decorative member separately from the decorative body. And the like "," one provided with a movable body separately from the decorative body ", and the like.

  Furthermore, as the “connecting portion”, “the connecting shaft of the decoration unit is connected so as to be relatively rotatable”, “the connecting shaft of the decoration unit is connected so as to be slidable in a predetermined direction (formed in a long hole shape) And the like "," the connecting shaft of the decoration unit being connected so as to be relatively rotatable and slidable in a predetermined direction "," the connecting shaft of the decoration unit being connected non-rotatably ", and the like.

  Further, as the second arm portion that “extends in a different direction” from the first arm portion in the arm member, “the angle at the intersection of the extending direction of the first arm portion and the extending direction of the second arm portion, It is desirable to be within the range of 90 degrees to 135 degrees, and if the angle is smaller than this, the rotation axis of the arm member in the revolving range of the link pin passes through an axis parallel to the moving direction of the decoration unit. Since the range located on the decoration unit side becomes larger than necessary (the space related to the link member is closer than necessary to the decoration unit side), the space on the rear side of the decoration unit must be widened, and the relative This is because there is a problem that the decoration unit becomes small. Further, if the angle is larger than this, the range exceeding the axis extending through the center of rotation of the arm member in the revolving range of the link pin and extending in the direction perpendicular to the moving direction of the decoration unit becomes larger than necessary. The movement drive mechanism such as the link member is positioned closer to the center of the movement range of the decoration unit, and the movement drive mechanism such as the link member can be easily seen from the player side regardless of the end of the movement range of the decoration unit. Therefore, a member for concealing the movement drive mechanism is newly required, or the degree of freedom of arrangement of the decoration unit including the movement drive mechanism becomes worse, and the decoration unit cannot be arranged at an effective position. This is because a problem occurs.

  In addition, “according to the gaming state” means “accepting entrances arranged in the gaming area (for example, a general winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a big winning opening, an accessory winning opening, a V winning opening, "According to the acceptance of the game medium to" etc. "," In response to the game medium that has been put into (entered in) the game area has passed a specific area (eg, gate, warp passage, stage, etc.) ”,“ According to the lottery result drawn by accepting game media ”,“ According to the rotation of multiple rotating bodies triggered by the insertion of game media ”,“ Rotated by the input of game media A game medium to be put into the game area, in accordance with the combination of symbols displayed on the stopped rotator in order to stop a plurality of rotators in succession, according to the type of effect determined by a lottery such as a start winning prize, etc. "According to the amount of driving" Depending on the length of hammering the blank of game media to be written ", and the like.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 1, the game area into which the game medium is driven by the player's operation on the gaming machine, the decorative body that is arranged at a predetermined position in the game area in a front view, A decorative unit having a connecting shaft that protrudes rearward from substantially the center in the direction, a connecting portion connected to the connecting shaft of the decorative unit, a bowl-shaped first arm portion extending from the connecting portion to the outside in front view of the decorative unit, A base end portion formed on the base end side opposite to the connecting portion in the first arm portion and supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction, in a direction different from the first arm portion from the base end portion It has a hook-like second arm portion that extends shortly, and a long-hole-like link connecting portion that is formed at the tip of the second arm portion and extends in the direction in which the second arm portion extends, and is behind the decorative unit. Side arm member and arm member A link having a link pin that is slidably inserted into the connecting portion, revolves at a predetermined radius around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and is rotatable at a position outside the front view of the decoration unit A member and a moving drive motor that rotates and drives the decoration unit by rotating the link member in accordance with a gaming state that is changed when a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area are provided.

  As a result, when the link member is driven to rotate by the movement drive motor in accordance with the gaming state changed by driving the game medium into the game area, the link pin of the link member extends around the rotation axis of the link member. Will revolve with a predetermined radius. This link pin is inserted into a long hole-shaped link connecting portion formed at the distal end of the second arm portion extending from the base end portion of the arm member. Since the positional relationship between the base end portion of the arm member that is rotatably supported at the position outside the view and the link pin changes, the link pin slides in the link connection portion and at the same time the link connection portion is moved in a predetermined direction by the link pin. The entire arm member rotates around the base end via the second arm, and is connected to the decorative unit at the tip of the first arm that extends longer than the second arm from the base. Therefore, the connecting portion will also rotate. Then, as the arm member rotates, the decoration unit connected to the connecting portion at the distal end of the first arm portion extending from the base end portion moves in the same direction as the direction in which the arm member rotates. . Therefore, even if a movement drive mechanism such as a link member or a movement drive motor is arranged at a position as far as possible from the rear side of the decoration unit, the decoration unit can be moved reliably. Since the movement drive mechanism excluding the arm member can be eliminated, the space behind the decoration unit can be reduced as much as possible, the decoration unit can be relatively enlarged, It is possible to increase the size and make the player stand out from the player side, and it is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained by moving the large decoration unit.

  In addition, since the second arm part for rotating the arm member via the link connection part is formed shorter than the first arm part connected to the decoration unit via the connection part, the movement range of the decoration unit is reduced. The revolving diameter of the link pin in the link member can be made larger, and the player can be surprised and entertained by the greatly moving decoration unit, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. be able to.

  Further, the decoration unit may be supported by a slide mechanism so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the connecting portion of the arm member may be formed in a long hole shape that allows the connecting shaft of the decoration unit to slide and rotate. This makes it possible to move the decoration unit straight up and down even when the tip of the first arm portion (connecting portion) of the arm member moves in an arc, so that the game can be compared with the case where the decoration unit is raised and lowered in an arc. It is possible to make it feel natural that the decoration unit moves up and down without knowing that the decoration unit is moving with some rotation, and the decoration unit moves unnaturally. It is possible to prevent the person's interest from moving away from the decoration unit, and to prevent the fun of the decoration unit from deteriorating by making the decoration unit move (elevating). You can bet

  Also, when the link pin is revolved slightly in the same direction from the position where the link unit revolves in the direction in which the decoration unit rises and the decoration unit rises most, that is, the position where the link pin reaches top dead center. In addition, a long hole-shaped link connection portion may be formed so that the link pin abuts one end of the link connection portion of the arm member, whereby the load applied from the decoration unit via the connecting portion of the arm member Will act in the direction of revolving the link pin to one end side of the link connection part, but the link pin revolves because it is in contact with one end part of the link connection part. The arm member is prevented from rotating (decoration unit descending), and the ornament unit can be kept stopped at the raised position, leaving an extra drive motor. It is not necessary to apply a heavy load or use a motor having a brake function, and it is possible to prevent the motor from being prone to malfunction and to prevent the decoration unit from being enlarged. A sufficient arrangement space can be ensured, and the above-described effects can be reliably realized by relatively enlarging the decoration unit.

  Also, as described above, the decoration unit can be enlarged as much as possible by eliminating the moving drive mechanism from which the arm member is removed from directly behind the decoration unit, so that the rotation drive for rotating the decoration body in the decoration unit is possible. A mechanism may be provided, whereby the decoration body of the decoration unit moving in a predetermined direction can be rotated to surprise the player and at the same time strongly attract the player's interest to the decoration unit. It is possible to entertain a movable effect by the decoration unit, and to suppress a decrease in interest for the game. Note that the decorative body may be rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction, so that the player can also show the player the rear side of the decorative body by rotating the decorative body. It can be changed, attracting the player's attention and making it hard to get tired, and changing the appearance of the decorative body makes the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

  Furthermore, at least the decorative body of the decorative unit located at one moving end may be provided with a front decorative member that makes it invisible from the player side, whereby the decorative unit is moved from one moving end to the other. When moved to the moving end, a decorative body (decoration unit) can appear, so that the player can be surprised by the appearance of the decorative body (decoration unit) and attract the player's interest to the decorative body. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation by thinking that there is something good for the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, after providing an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image in the center of the front view in the game area, the decoration unit is positioned between the position outside the effect display means and the position of the front of the effect display means. It is also possible to move the decoration unit between them, so that the decoration unit can be made conspicuous by moving the decoration unit to the front side of the effect display means, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and The movement and decoration of the unit can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from decreasing. In addition, since the decoration unit can be moved to the front side of the effect display means, and the effect image matching the movement of the decoration unit can be displayed on the effect display means, it is possible to perform a collaboration effect using the movable effect and the effect image. It is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored by various effects and reducing the interest of the player.

  In addition, a game panel that divides the rear end of the game area may be provided, and a decoration unit may be arranged on the rear side of the game panel. Since the movement of the medium is not hindered, the gaming medium can be distributed in a good state, and a gaming machine that can sufficiently enjoy the movement of the gaming medium inherent to the gaming machine can be obtained.

  Furthermore, a frame-shaped center accessory may be provided in the approximate center of the game area, and the decoration unit may be moved between the inside of the center accessory frame and the outside of the frame in front view. When the decoration unit is moved into the frame of an accessory, the decoration unit (decoration body) can be made more conspicuous and attract the player's interest. It is possible to suppress the interest of the person from falling.

  In addition, you may make it provide the base member which supports at least the arm member for moving a decoration unit, a link member, a movement drive motor, etc., thereby, the arm member for moving a decoration unit by a base member, The link member and the like can be positioned at a desired position, the arm member and the like can be moved without any problem, and the movement drive mechanism of the arm member and the like can be unitized to facilitate the assembly of the gaming machine. It is possible to suppress an increase in costs related to the gaming machine.

  Moreover, you may make it equip a decoration unit with a some decoration body, and thereby, the decoration effect of a decoration unit can be improved, and it can suppress that a player is entertained and an interest falls.

Aspect 2: In the configuration of Aspect 1,
“It further comprises a slide mechanism that supports the decoration unit so as to be slidable in the vertical direction,
The arm member is
The connecting portion is formed in a long hole shape that supports the connecting shaft of the decoration unit so as to be slidable in a direction in which the first arm portion extends and to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. It is characterized by that.

  Here, the “slide mechanism” includes “a slide rod that is attached to the side that supports the arm member and the like, and that extends in the vertical direction along the slide rod. And a pair of sliders that are slidably supported by the slide rod on one end side, and that are attached to the side that supports the arm member and the like by slidably holding the left and right side surfaces of the other end side of the slider. And a guide roller that is attached to a side that supports an arm member or the like and that has a guide groove extending in a vertical direction in which a connecting shaft is slidably inserted. .

  According to the configuration of aspect 2, the gaming machine is further provided with a slide mechanism that supports the decorative unit so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the connecting portion of the arm member is used as the connecting shaft of the decorative unit as the first arm. It is formed in the shape of a long hole that is slidable in the extending direction of the portion and is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  Accordingly, the decoration unit is supported by the slide mechanism so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the connecting portion of the arm member is formed in a long hole shape in which the connecting shaft of the decoration unit can slide and rotate. Even if the tip (connecting portion) of the first arm portion moves in an arc shape, the decoration unit can be raised and lowered straight. In other words, since the decoration unit moves straight up and down, the decoration unit does not know that the decoration unit is moving with any rotation compared to the case where the decoration unit is moved up and down in an arc shape. It is possible to make the unit ascend and descend naturally, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from moving away from the decoration unit due to the unnatural movement of the decoration unit. ) To prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

  In addition, since the decoration unit is moved up and down, the decoration unit is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left and right direction in the game area as compared to the case of moving in the left and right direction. It is possible to make the decoration unit easy to see from either the left or right side, and it is possible to make the movement or decoration of the decoration unit more enjoyable and to suppress the player's interest from being lowered.

Aspect 3: In the configuration of Aspect 2,
"The arm member is
One end portion of the link connection portion contacts the link pin at a position where the link pin of the link member revolves in a predetermined direction and slightly revolves in the predetermined direction from a position where the decoration unit is raised most. It is formed so as to be in contact with each other.

  By the way, when the decoration unit is moved up and down in the vertical direction, the second arm part is formed shorter than the first arm part of the arm member, and the second arm part is formed from the decoration unit via the first arm part. The load applied to the link connecting portion is larger than the load of the decoration unit due to the lever principle, and the link member is rotated by the link pin inserted in the long hole-shaped link connecting portion (the link pin is Revolution) will be applied. On the other hand, in order to keep the decoration unit stopped at the raised position, it is conceivable to drive the movement drive motor for rotationally driving the arm member to cancel the load applied from the decoration unit. In this case, since the load on the motor becomes large, there is a problem that the motor is consumed at an early stage and trouble is likely to occur.

  On the other hand, on the decorative unit side, by providing a stopper that a part of the decorative unit comes into contact with the slide mechanism or the like, it is possible to prevent the decorative unit from further descending. Since it is not possible to lower the position with a stopper that simply abuts, it is necessary to provide a movable stopper that can release the abutment. There arises a problem that the decoration unit becomes relatively small in order to secure the space to be provided.

  Therefore, it may be possible to keep the decoration unit stopped at the raised position by using a moving drive motor for rotating the arm member, which has a brake function. There is a problem that the cost is increased because the cost is high, and the size of the motor is increased, so that the movement drive mechanism for moving the decoration unit becomes larger and it is difficult to secure a space for providing the movement drive mechanism and the like. Therefore, there is a possibility that the decoration unit cannot be arranged at an optimal position.

  The direction of the load from the decorative unit acting on the link pin via the arm member (link connecting part) is stopped by stopping the link pin revolution at the highest position (top dead center) due to the link pin revolution. It is possible to prevent the link pin from revolving due to the load from the decoration unit by passing through the center of rotation of the link member, but it is necessary to stop the link pin accurately at the top dead center position. There is a problem that the load related to control increases.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 3, one end portion of the link connecting portion of the arm member is slightly revolved in the predetermined direction from the position where the link pin of the link member is revolved in the predetermined direction to raise the decoration unit most. It is formed so as to contact the link pin at a position.

  As a result, the link pin was revolved in the direction in which the decoration unit was raised, and the link pin was slightly revolved in the same direction from the position where the decoration unit was most raised, that is, the position where the link pin reached the top dead center. Sometimes, the link pin is formed with a long hole-shaped link connection part so as to contact one end of the link connection part in the arm member, so that the load applied from the decoration unit via the connecting part of the arm member, It will act in the direction to revolve the link pin to one end side of the link connection part, but the link pin can revolve because it is in contact with one end part of the link connection part. Therefore, the rotation of the arm member (decrease of the decoration unit) is prevented, and the decoration unit can be kept stopped at the raised position.

  Therefore, as described above, when the link pin is brought into contact with one end of the long hole-like link connecting portion, the decoration unit can be stopped and held at the raised position, which is unnecessary for the mobile drive motor. It is not necessary to apply a load or use a motor having a brake function, and it is possible to prevent the motor from being prone to malfunction, and it is possible to suppress the increase in size of the motor and to arrange the decoration unit. A sufficient space can be secured, and a relatively large decorative unit can be used to ensure the above-described effects.

Aspect 4: In any one configuration from Aspect 1 to Aspect 3,
"The decoration unit is
It further has a rotation drive mechanism for rotating the decorative body around an axis extending in the vertical direction in accordance with a game state.

  Here, as the “rotation drive mechanism”, “the decoration body is directly fixed to the rotation shaft of the rotation drive motor”, “the decoration body is rotated via a drive gear rotated by the rotation drive motor”, “rotation” And the like including a driving pulley that is rotated by a driving motor, a driven pulley that rotates with a decorative body, and a belt that is wound around the driving pulley and the driven pulley.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 4, the decoration unit is provided with the rotation drive mechanism that rotates the decoration body around the axis extending in the vertical direction according to the gaming state.

  As a result, the decorative body of the decorative unit that moves is rotated by the rotation drive mechanism, so that the decorative body of the decorative unit that moves in a predetermined direction can be rotated to surprise the player, and at the same time, An interest can be strongly attracted to the decoration unit, and it is possible to entertain a movable effect by the decoration unit and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Also, as described above, the decoration unit can be enlarged as much as possible by eliminating the moving drive mechanism from which the arm member is removed from directly behind the decoration unit, so that the rotation drive for rotating the decoration body in the decoration unit is possible. A mechanism can be arrange | positioned without a problem and the decoration unit provided with the decorative body which rotates can be implemented reliably.

  Furthermore, since the decorative body is rotated about the axis extending in the vertical direction, the rear side of the decorative body can be shown to the player by rotating, and the appearance of the decorative body can be greatly changed. Can attract the player's attention and make it hard to get bored, and can change the appearance of the decorative body to make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating.

Aspect 5: In any one configuration from Aspect 1 to Aspect 4,
“When the decoration unit that moves by the rotation of the arm member in the game area in front of the decoration unit is at one moving end, the decoration body becomes invisible from the player side, and the decoration unit It further includes a front decorative member that is disposed at a position where the decorative body is visible from the player side at the moving end and on which a predetermined decoration is formed.

  Here, examples of the “front decoration member” include “one provided with light emitting means for decorating light emission”, “one provided with a movable body”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 5, when the decoration unit that moves by the rotation of the arm member in the game area on the front side of the decoration unit is one of the moving ends, the decoration body cannot be visually recognized from the player side. When the unit is at the other moving end, a decorative body is provided at a position where the decorative body can be visually recognized from the player side, and a predetermined decoration is formed.

  Thereby, the decorative body of the decoration unit located at one moving end is made invisible from the player side by the front decoration member, and when the decoration unit is moved from one moving end to the other moving end, It is possible to make a decorative body appear, and the appearance of the decorative body (decoration unit) can surprise the player, attract the player's interest to the decorative body, and The expectation can be raised by thinking that there is a good thing, and it can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  Note that only the decoration body of the decoration unit may be made invisible by the front decoration member, or the entire decoration unit may be made invisible.

Aspect 6: In any one configuration from Aspect 1 to Aspect 5,
“It further includes an effect display means that is arranged to be visible from the player side at the approximate center of the front view in the game area and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state,
The decorative unit is
It is arranged in front of the effect display means, and is movable between a position where the effect image of the effect display means is hardly obstructed and a position where the effect image is obstructed by rotation of the arm member. It is characterized by being "

  Here, examples of “effect display means” include “liquid crystal display device”, “EL display device”, “plasma display device”, “CRT”, “laser display”, and the like. Note that it is desirable to use a thin display means such as a liquid crystal display device, etc., so that the depth direction of the gaming machine can be made relatively wide, and the space between the game area and the effect display means is made relatively wide. It is possible to facilitate the arrangement of the decoration unit and the like.

  According to the configuration of aspect 6, the gaming machine is further provided with effect display means that is arranged so as to be visible from the player side at the approximate center of the front view in the game area and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. In the above, the decoration unit is arranged in front of the effect display means, and is movable between a position where the effect image on the effect display means is hardly blocked and a position where the effect image is blocked by the rotation of the arm member. It is what I did.

  Accordingly, the position where the large decoration unit as described above hardly blocks the effect image of the effect display means, that is, the position where the effect image is blocked from the position outside the front view of the effect display means (the front side of the effect display means). To the front side of the effect display means, so that the decoration unit can stand out, attract the player's attention, and enjoy the movement and decoration of the decoration unit. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in games from being reduced.

  In addition, since the decoration unit can be moved to the front side of the effect display means, the effect image that matches the movement of the decoration unit is displayed on the effect display means, so that the collaboration between the movable effect and the effect image is possible. It is possible to produce effects, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by various effects and reducing the interest of the player.

Aspect 7: In any one configuration from Aspect 1 to Aspect 6,
“A frame-shaped front component member that defines an outer periphery in a direction perpendicular to the direction facing the player in the game area;
A plate-like game panel disposed on the rear side of the front component member and defining a rear end of the game area;
The decoration unit is arranged behind the game panel ”.

  Here, the plate-like “game panel” may be an opaque one such as “plywood (for example, veneer board)”, “glued wood”, “metal plate”, or “acrylic resin plate”, “polycarbonate resin”. Examples include transparent plates such as “plate”, “ABS resin plate”, “polypropylene plate”, “polyarylate resin plate”, “methacrylic resin plate”, and “glass plate”.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 7, the gaming machine is disposed on the rear side of the front component member and the frame plate-shaped front component member that defines the outer periphery in the direction perpendicular to the direction facing the player in the game area. And a board-like game panel that divides the rear end of the game area, and a decorative unit is arranged on the rear side of the game panel.

  As a result, the decoration unit is arranged on the rear side of the game panel that defines the rear end of the game area, so that the movement of the game medium in which the decoration unit is driven into the game area is not hindered. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can distribute the medium in a favorable state and that can sufficiently enjoy the movement of the gaming machine inherent in the gaming machine.

  Further, as described above, since the movement drive mechanism excluding the arm member from behind the decoration unit can be eliminated, the front space is suppressed by arranging the decoration unit on the rear side of the game panel. Even if it becomes, a decoration unit as large as possible can be arrange | positioned and there can exist an effect similar to the above-mentioned.

Aspect 8: In the configuration of aspect 7,
“The game panel
After having an opening portion penetrating in the front-rear direction at the front center in the gaming area,
It further includes a center accessory attached to the opening of the gaming panel from the front side and formed in a frame shape,
The front decorative member is provided on the frame-shaped upper portion of the center accessory, and the decorative unit is disposed on the rear side of the front decorative member.

  Here, as the “center role”, “the window portion penetrating in the front-rear direction, the peripheral wall portion that prevents the game medium from entering the window portion, and the game medium that has entered from the predetermined position of the peripheral wall portion are rolled. A stage that is later refluxed into the game area and disposed at the lower inner edge of the window part, '' a window part that penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a peripheral wall part that prevents entry of game media into the window part. Equipped with "," a window part that penetrates in the front-rear direction, a peripheral wall part that prevents the ingress of game media into the window part, and a receiving port (award opening) that is arranged at a predetermined position on the peripheral wall part and can be opened and closed according to the gaming state ), And the like. Further, a decorative body that can be decorated with light emission, a movable decorative body that can be moved, and the like may be appropriately provided at a predetermined position of the center accessory.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 8, the game panel is formed with the opening portion penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position substantially in the center in the front view in the game area, and is attached to the game machine from the front side to the opening portion of the game panel. A center accessory formed in a frame shape is further provided, a front decoration member is provided on the frame-shaped upper portion of the center accessory, and a decoration unit is disposed on the rear side of the front decoration member.

  As a result, the front decorative member is arranged on the upper part of the center accessory formed in the frame shape, and the decorative unit that moves up and down is arranged behind the front decorative member. Sometimes the front decorative member makes the decorative body invisible from the player side, and when the decorative unit is in the lowered position, the decorative body is visible from the player side and at the same time the decorative unit is in the frame of the center The decoration unit (decoration body) is greatly conspicuous and attracts the player's interest, and the entertainment of the player is reduced by making the decoration unit entertain movable and decoration effects. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, a frame-shaped center accessory is provided in the approximate center of the game area, and a gaming machine having a similar atmosphere to a gaming machine having a conventional center accessory can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the player who is familiar with the machine from feeling uncomfortable and being shunned, and this game machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine to play.

Aspect 9: In a gaming machine,
“A game area where game media is driven by the player's operation,
A frame-shaped front component member that defines an outer periphery in a direction perpendicular to the direction facing the player in the game area;
A plate-like game panel that is disposed on the rear side of the front component member and defines a rear end of the game area, and has an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction at substantially the center in front view;
A center accessory which is attached to the opening of the game panel from the front side and is formed in a frame shape, and includes a front decoration member in which a predetermined decoration is formed on the upper portion of the frame shape;
It is arranged to be visible from the player side on the rear side of the gaming panel through the frame of the center accessory, and a predetermined effect image is displayed according to a gaming state that changes when a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area. Production display means that can be displayed;
A decorative body that is arranged in front of the effect display means and rearward of the game panel, and is formed in a predetermined shape, and is rotationally driven to rotate the decorative body about an axis extending in the vertical direction according to the gaming state. A decoration unit having a mechanism and a connecting shaft that protrudes rearward from substantially the center in the left-right direction;
When the decorative unit is at one moving end, the decorative body is not visible from the player side by the front decorative member of the center accessory, and when the decorative unit is at the other moving end, the front decorative member is A sliding mechanism that supports the decorative unit slidably in a vertical direction between the decorative body and a position at which the decorative body is visible from the player side,
A coupling portion coupled to the coupling shaft of the decoration unit supported by the slide mechanism, and a hook-shaped first arm extending from the coupling portion to the outside of the decoration unit in a direction extending in a long hole shape. A base end portion that is formed on a base end side of the first arm portion opposite to the connecting portion and is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and the first arm from the base end portion A hook-like second arm portion that extends short in a direction different from the portion, and a long-hole-like link connecting portion that is formed at the tip of the second arm portion and extends in the direction in which the second arm portion extends. An arm member disposed on the rear side of the decorative unit;
A link pin that is slidably inserted into the link connection portion of the arm member, revolves the link pin around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined radius, and is externally viewed from the front of the decoration unit A link member that is rotatable at a position of
A movement drive motor that rotates the link member according to a game state to drive the decoration unit to move in the vertical direction;
The arm member is
The connecting portion is formed in a long hole shape that supports the connecting shaft of the decoration unit so as to be slidable in a direction in which the first arm portion extends and to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. With
One end portion of the link connection portion revolves against the link pin at a position where the link pin of the link member revolves in a predetermined direction and slightly revolves in the predetermined direction from a position where the decoration unit is raised most. It is formed to touch. ''
It is characterized by being.

  According to the configuration of the aspect 9, the game area into which the game medium is driven by the player's operation on the gaming machine, and the front of the frame plate shape that defines the outer periphery in the direction perpendicular to the direction facing the player in the game area A plate-like game panel having a component, a plate-like game panel disposed on the rear side of the front component, having a rear end of the game area and penetrating in the front-rear direction substantially at the center in front view, and an opening of the game panel A center accessory having a front decoration member which is attached from the front side and is formed in a frame shape and having a predetermined decoration formed on the upper portion of the frame shape, and the player side on the rear side of the game panel through the frame of the center role Is arranged so that it can be visually recognized, and an effect display means capable of displaying a predetermined effect image according to a gaming state that is changed by a game medium being driven into the game area, and in front of the effect display means than the game panel Arranged on the back side, predetermined A decorative unit having a decorative body formed in a shape, a rotational drive mechanism that rotates the decorative body around an axis that extends in the vertical direction according to the gaming state, and a connecting shaft that protrudes rearward from a substantially horizontal center. The decorative body becomes invisible from the player side by the front decorative member of the center accessory when the decorative unit is at one moving end, and the decorative body is also played by the front decorative member at the other moving end when the decorative unit is lowered. A slide mechanism that supports the decoration unit so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the position where it can be visually recognized from the person side, a connection part that is connected to the connection shaft of the decoration unit supported by the slide mechanism, and a long hole from the connection part A hook-shaped first arm portion that extends to the outside of the decorative unit when viewed from the front in the direction that extends in the shape, and is formed on the base end side opposite to the connecting portion in the first arm portion and extends in the front-rear direction A base end portion that is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis, a bowl-shaped second arm portion that extends from the base end portion in a direction different from the first arm portion, and a tip end of the second arm portion. And a long hole-like link connecting portion extending in the extending direction of the second arm portion, and being slidably inserted into the arm connecting member disposed behind the decorative unit and the link connecting portion of the arm member. A link member having a link pin, revolving at a predetermined radius around the axis extending in the front-rear direction, and capable of rotating at a position outside the front view of the decorative unit, and the link member according to the game state And a drive motor for driving the decoration unit to move in the up-and-down direction, and the connecting part of the arm member can be slid in the extending direction of the first arm part. And a shaft extending in the front-rear direction A position where the decorative unit is raised most by revolving the link pin of the link member in a predetermined direction at one end of the link connecting portion while being formed in the shape of a long hole that can be rotatably supported around And further abutting with the link pin at a position slightly revolved in the predetermined direction.

  As a result, the decoration unit is supported by the slide mechanism so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the rear side of the front decoration member and the rear side of the game panel arranged at the upper part of the frame shape in the center accessory. An arm member having a first arm part that extends long and a second arm part that extends shortly at a position outside the front view is rotatably supported, and the connecting shaft of the decoration unit is connected to the connecting part at the tip of the first arm part. Since the link pin of the link member that revolves by the movement drive motor is inserted into the link connection part at the tip of the second arm part, the game that changes by driving the game medium into the game area Depending on the state, when the link member is driven to rotate by the movement drive motor and the link pin revolves around the rotation axis of the link member extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined radius, the link pin Slides in the long hole-like link connecting portion of the arm member and simultaneously presses the link connecting portion in a predetermined direction by the link pin, and the entire arm member rotates about the base end portion via the second arm portion. Thus, the connecting portion at the distal end of the first arm portion extending longer than the second arm portion from the base end portion also rotates. Since the connecting portion of the arm member is formed in a long hole shape that allows the connecting shaft of the decoration unit to slide and rotate, the tip (connecting portion) of the first arm portion of the arm member rotates in an arc shape. When it moves, the connecting shaft of the decorative unit slides in the long hole-shaped connecting portion, and at the same time, the connecting shaft of the decorative unit is pressed by the connecting portion of the arm member, and the decorative unit moves up and down via the connecting shaft. Therefore, even if a movement drive mechanism such as a link member or a movement drive motor is arranged at a position as far as possible from the rear side of the decoration unit, the decoration unit can be moved up and down with certainty. Since the moving drive mechanism excluding the arm member can be eliminated, the space behind the decoration unit can be made as small as possible, and the decoration unit can be made relatively large. Can be made conspicuous from the player's side, and a large decoration unit can be moved to delight the player and prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, since the second arm part for rotating the arm member via the link connection part is formed shorter than the first arm part connected to the decoration unit via the connection part, the movement range of the decoration unit is reduced. The revolving diameter of the link pin in the link member can be made larger, and the player can be surprised and entertained by the greatly moving decoration unit, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. be able to.

  Also, the decoration unit is supported by the slide mechanism so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, so that the decoration unit can be moved up and down straight even if the tip of the first arm part (connecting part) of the arm member moves in an arc shape. Compared with the case where the decoration unit is raised and lowered in an arc shape, the player can feel the raising and lowering of the decoration unit naturally by not knowing that the decoration unit is moving with some rotation. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from moving away from the decoration unit due to the unnatural movement of the decoration unit. It can suppress that it falls.

  Furthermore, since the decoration unit is moved up and down in the up-down direction, the decoration unit is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction in the game area than when moved in the left-right direction. It is possible to make the decoration unit easy to see from either the left or right side, and it is possible to make the movement and decoration of the decoration unit more enjoyable and to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating.

  Also, when the link pin is revolved slightly in the same direction from the position where the link unit revolves in the direction in which the decoration unit rises and the decoration unit rises most, that is, the position where the link pin reaches top dead center. Since the long hole of the link connection part is formed so that the link pin comes into contact with one end of the long hole-like link connection part of the arm member, when the decoration unit is stopped at the raised position, the arm member Even if the load applied from the decorative unit via the connecting portion of the link acts in the direction of revolving the link pin toward one end of the link connecting portion, the link pin abuts on one end of the link connecting portion. Therefore, the link pin cannot revolve, the arm member is prevented from turning (decoration unit is lowered), and the decoration unit is kept stopped at the raised position. It can be. Therefore, since the decoration unit can be stopped and held at the raised position, it is not necessary to apply an extra load to the mobile drive motor or use a motor having a brake function, and the motor is liable to malfunction. It is possible to suppress the increase in the size of the motor and to secure a sufficient space for arranging the decoration unit. It can be a gaming machine that plays.

  In addition, since the decoration unit is provided with a rotation drive mechanism that rotates the decoration body around an axis extending in the vertical direction according to the gaming state, the decoration body of the decoration unit that moves up and down in the vertical direction rotates. In this way, the player can be surprised, and at the same time, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decoration unit. it can. In addition, since the decorative body is rotated around the axis extending in the vertical direction, the rear side of the decorative body can be shown to the player by rotating, and the appearance of the decorative body can be greatly changed. Can attract the player's attention and make it hard to get bored, and can change the appearance of the decorative body to make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. In addition, as described above, the decoration unit can be made as large as possible by eliminating the movement drive mechanism from which the arm member is removed from directly behind the decoration unit. A mechanism can be arrange | positioned without a problem and the decoration unit provided with the decorative body which rotates can be implemented reliably.

  Further, the front decorative member is arranged on the upper part of the frame-shaped center accessory, and the decorative unit that moves up and down is arranged behind the front decorative member. Therefore, when the decorative unit is in the raised position, the front decorative member is arranged. With this, the decoration body becomes invisible from the player side, and when the decoration unit is in the lowered position, the decoration body is visible from the player side, and at the same time, the decoration unit is located within the frame of the center accessory in front view. Therefore, the decoration unit (decoration body) can be made conspicuous to attract the player's interest strongly, and the play of the decoration unit and the decoration production can be enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Can do.

  In addition, the decorative unit is arranged between the effect display means that can be visually recognized through the frame on the rear side of the center object and the game panel, and in the raised position where the decorative unit is located directly behind the front decorative member, The position where the effect image of the effect display means is hardly obstructed, and the position where the effect image of the effect display means is blocked at the lowered position where it appears in the frame of the center effect means, it is lowered into the frame of the center character By moving to the front side of the effect display means, the decoration unit can stand out, attract the player's interest strongly, and enjoy the movement and decoration of the decoration unit. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. In addition, since the decoration unit can be moved up and down to the front side of the effect display means, by displaying the effect image according to the movement of the decoration unit on the effect display means, it is possible to use the movable effect and the effect image. Collaboration production can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to various productions.

  Furthermore, since the decoration unit is arranged on the rear side of the game panel that defines the rear end of the game area, the decoration medium does not hinder the movement of the game medium driven into the game area. Can be distributed in a good state, and a gaming machine that can fully enjoy the movement of the gaming medium inherent in the gaming machine can be obtained. Further, as described above, since the movement drive mechanism excluding the arm member from behind the decoration unit can be eliminated, the front space is suppressed by arranging the decoration unit on the rear side of the game panel. Even if it becomes, a decoration unit as large as possible can be arrange | positioned and there can exist an effect similar to the above-mentioned.

Aspect 10: In any one gaming machine of aspect 1 to aspect 9,
It is a pachinko machine.
Here, the pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium that is a medium that a player inputs into the gaming machine and a game medium that is a medium used for a substantial game performed by the player are the same. This is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball inserted. Specifically, “a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a number of obstacle nails, accessories, display means, etc. , A game area provided with appropriate entrances for game balls such as passing holes and arrival holes, a rail for guiding the game balls from the launcher to the game area, and entrance of the game balls guided to the game area It has a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls according to the entrance to the ball entrance or according to the entrance mode of the game balls to the plurality of entrances.

  In addition, there are various types of pachinko machines, which are generally represented by what is referred to as a “digipachi machine”, “entrance state detection means for detecting the entrance state to the entrance (game state detection And a special lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when the incoming ball is detected by the incoming ball state detecting means, and a special symbol for varying the special symbol according to the lottery result of the lottery means and stopping the fluctuation. "With a symbol display means" or "Additionally, during special symbol fluctuations, a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is displayed in a variable manner, and the symbols are stopped in the symbol string, and characters, various articles, etc. Further comprising an effect display means for displaying an appropriate display by drawing the display object and operating the display object, etc. " Game ball distribution Therefore, one game is played with a predetermined number of game balls, such as 16 that are equipped with lottery means for performing a lottery, and generally called “aletachi machines”. For example, “a payout of a predetermined number of game balls according to the manner in which the game balls enter the ball opening” can be exemplified.

  According to the structure of aspect 10, in the pachinko machine, the effect of either of the aspects mentioned above can be show | played.

Aspect 11: In any one gaming machine from Aspect 1 to Aspect 9,
It is a pachislot machine.
Here, the pachislot machine inserts a medal as an insertion medium, and rotates a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols drawn thereon by operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) after the medal is inserted. Then, the player can perform a game such that the symbol sequence constituted by each reel is variably displayed, and thereafter the variation display of each symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation means (for example, stop button). Is to be done. In other words, it can be understood as a slot machine with a stop operation function. If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the variable display of each symbol row is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination, etc. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to the player who can acquire a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the structure of aspect 11, in the pachislot machine, the operational effects of any of the aspects described above can be achieved.

Aspect 12: In any one gaming machine from aspect 1 to aspect 9,
It is characterized by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.
Here, “a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused” means that a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium is input, the starting operation means A symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed in response to an operation of the operation lever (for example, an operation lever), and thereafter, the variation of the symbol string is stopped in response to an operation of a stop operation means (for example, a stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed. And, when the variable display of each symbol row is stopped, the displayed single symbol is a specific symbol, the combination of symbols displayed in each symbol row is a specific combination, etc. When the condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the satisfied condition, or a special advantageous state advantageous to the player who can acquire a large amount of medals is generated.

  According to the configuration of the twelfth aspect, in the gaming machine formed by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the operational effect of any of the above-described aspects can be achieved.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 in this embodiment is the above-described effect display means, the center logo decoration member 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the front unit 2000 of this embodiment is the above-mentioned front decoration member, and the back unit 3000 of this embodiment. The upper movable unit 3310 and the connecting shaft 3366 in the upper movable effect unit 3300 are rotated in the above-described decorative unit, the character body 3311 in the upper movable unit 3310 in this embodiment is in the above-mentioned decorative body, and the rotation in the upper movable unit 3310 in this embodiment. The gear 3312, the drive gear 3314, and the character body drive motor 3315 correspond to the rotation drive mechanism described above.

  In this embodiment, the guide groove 3351a of the unit base 3351, the slide rod 3352, the slide member 3353, the lift slider 3354, the guide roller 3355, and the slider guide 3356 in the lift unit 3350 of the lift movable unit 3300 are connected to the slide mechanism described above. The lift drive motor 3361 in the lift unit 3350 of the embodiment corresponds to the above-described movement drive motor, the cam link gear 3364 of this embodiment corresponds to the above-mentioned link member, and the lift arm 3365 of this embodiment corresponds to the above-mentioned arm member, respectively. doing.

  Furthermore, the arm portion 3365c of the lifting arm 3365 in this embodiment is the above-mentioned first arm portion, the extending portion 3365d of the lifting arm 3365 in this embodiment is the above-mentioned second arm portion, and the lifting arm 3365 in this embodiment. The connection portion 3365e corresponds to the above-described link connection portion.

[6. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the center logo decoration member 2520 disposed on the frame-shaped upper portion of the center accessory 2500 and the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) on the rear side The upper movable unit 3310 of the movable effect unit 3300 is supported by a slide mechanism such as a slide rod 3352 and a lift slider 3354 in the lift unit 3350 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and is longer than the upper movable unit 3310 at a position outside the front view. A lifting arm 3365 having an extending arm portion 3365c and a short extending portion 3365d is rotatably supported, and a connecting shaft 3366 extending from the upper movable unit 3310 is connected to a connecting portion 3365b at the tip of the arm portion 3365c. And a connecting portion 3365e at the tip of the extending portion 3365d. Since the link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364 that revolves by the elevating drive motor 3361 is inserted, the cam is moved by the elevating drive motor 3361 according to the game state that changes by driving the game ball into the game area 1100. When the link gear 3364 is rotationally driven to revolve the link pin 3364b with a predetermined radius around the rotation axis of the cam link gear 3364 extending in the front-rear direction, the link pin 3364b is connected to the elongated hole 3365e in the lifting arm 3365. The connecting portion 3365e is pressed in a predetermined direction by the link pin 3364b at the same time as sliding inside, and the elevating arm 3365 rotates around the base end portion 3365a via the extending portion 3365d, and extends from the base end portion 3365a. Of the arm portion 3365c extending longer than the protruding portion 3365d Connecting portions 3365b of the end also becomes possible to rotate. Since the connecting portion 3365b of the lifting arm 3365 is formed in a long hole shape that allows the connecting shaft 3366 of the upper movable unit 3310 to slide and rotate, the tip of the arm portion 3365c (the connecting portion 3365b) of the lifting arm 3365 is formed. ) Rotates in a circular arc shape, the connecting shaft 3366 of the upper movable unit 3310 slides in the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365b, and at the same time, the connecting shaft 3366b of the elevating arm 3365 presses the connecting shaft 3366 of the upper movable unit 3310. The upper movable unit 3310 moves up and down via the connecting shaft 3366. Therefore, even if the moving drive mechanism (elevating mechanism 3360) such as the cam link gear 3364 and the elevating drive motor 3361 is arranged at a position as far as possible from the rear side of the upper movable unit 3310, the upper movable unit 3310 can be securely connected. Since the lifting mechanism 3360 excluding a part of the lifting arm 3365 from behind the upper movable unit 3310 can be eliminated, the space on the rear side of the upper movable unit 3310 can be made as small as possible. The upper movable unit 3310 can be made relatively large, the upper movable unit 3310 can be made larger and conspicuous from the player side, and the large upper movable unit 3310 can be moved. It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating by making the player entertained.

  Further, since the extending portion 3365d for rotating the lifting arm 3365 via the connecting portion 3365e is formed shorter than the arm portion coupled to the upper movable unit 3310 via the connecting portion 3365b, the upper movable unit 3310 is formed. Can be made larger than the revolving diameter of the link pin 3364b in the cam link gear 3364, and the player can be surprised and entertained by the upper movable unit 3310 that moves up and down greatly. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

  In addition, the upper movable unit 3310 is supported by a slide mechanism such as a slide rod 3352 and a guide roller 3355 so that the upper movable unit 3310 can be slid in the vertical direction. However, since the upper movable unit 3310 can be moved up and down straight, the upper operation unit 3310 moves with some rotation relative to the player as compared with the case where the upper movable unit 3310 is moved up and down in an arc shape. It is possible to make the up and down movement of the upper movable unit 3310 a natural feeling without knowing that it is present, and the upper movable unit 3310 moves unnaturally so that the player's interest is separated from the upper movable unit 3310. Can enjoy the movement (up and down) of the upper movable unit 3310. Was interest in the game and can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the upper movable unit 3310 is moved up and down in the up-down direction, the upper movable unit 3310 is positioned closer to the center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 than when moved in the left-right direction. The upper movable unit 3310 can be easily seen from either the left or right side, and the movement or decoration of the upper movable unit 3310 can be more enjoyed to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating. Can do.

  Also, the position where the upper movable unit 3310 is most lifted by revolving the link pin 3364b of the cam link gear 3364 in the direction in which the upper movable unit 3310 is raised, that is, the position where the link pin 3364b reaches the apparent top dead center. Then, when the link pin 3364b is slightly revolved in the same direction, the link pin 3364b comes into contact with one end (end on the rotation center side) of the elongated hole-shaped connecting portion 3365e in the lifting arm 3365. Since the elongated hole of the connecting portion 3365e is formed, when the upper movable unit 3310 is stopped at the raised position, the load applied from the upper movable unit 3310 connects the link pin 3364b via the connecting portion 3365a of the lifting arm 3365. Even if acting in the direction of revolving toward one end of the portion 3365e, the link pin 336 Since b is in contact with one end of the connecting portion 3365e, the link pin 3364b cannot revolve, and the rotation of the lifting arm 3365 (the lowering of the upper movable unit 3310) is prevented. The movable unit 3310 can be kept stopped at the raised position. Accordingly, since the upper movable unit 3310 can be stopped and held at the raised position, it is not necessary to apply an extra load to the lifting drive motor 3361 or use a motor having a brake function, which causes a malfunction of the motor. It is possible to prevent the motor from being easily generated, and it is possible to suppress the enlargement of the motor and to sufficiently secure the arrangement space of the upper movable unit 3310, and relatively increase the upper movable unit 3310. It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which shows the effect mentioned above reliably.

  Further, since the upper movable unit 3310 is provided with a rotation drive mechanism such as a character body drive motor 3315 for rotating the character body 3311 around an axis extending in the vertical direction according to the gaming state, By rotating the character body 3311 of the movable unit 3310, the player can be surprised, and at the same time, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper movable unit 3310, and the movable effect by the upper movable unit 3310 can be enjoyed. Moreover, it can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls. In addition, since the character body 3311 is rotated around an axis extending in the vertical direction, the rear side of the character body 3311 can be shown to the player by rotating, and the appearance of the character body 3311 is greatly increased. It can be changed, it can attract the player's interest strongly and make it hard to get tired, and there may be something good for the player by changing the appearance of the character body 3311 It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the interest from deteriorating. Furthermore, as described above, the upper movable unit 3310 can be made as large as possible by eliminating the lifting mechanism 3360 excluding a part of the lifting arm 3365 from directly behind the upper movable unit 3310. A rotation drive mechanism such as a character body drive motor 3315 for rotating the character body 3311 can be arranged without any problem in the 3310, and the upper movable unit 3310 provided with the rotating character body 3311 can be reliably realized.

  Further, the center logo decoration member 2520 is disposed on the upper part of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and the upper movable unit 3310 that is moved up and down on the rear side of the center logo decoration member 2520 is disposed. The character body 3311 and the like are not visible from the player side by the center logo decoration member 2520 when the position is raised, and the character body 3311 and the like are visible from the player side when the upper movable unit 3310 is lowered. At the same time, the upper movable unit 3310 is positioned in the frame of the center accessory 2500 when viewed from the front, and the upper movable unit 3310 (character body 3311) can be highlighted to attract the player's interest strongly. Entertain and enjoy moving and decoration effects by unit 3310 Can be users of interest be suppressed.

  In addition, an upper movable unit 3310 is arranged between the liquid crystal display device 1900 that can be visually recognized through the inside of the frame on the rear side of the center accessory 2500 and the game panel 1200 (panel plate 1210). In the raised position located immediately behind the logo decoration member 2520, the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is hardly blocked, and in the lowered position appearing in the frame of the center accessory 2500, the effect image of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed. Therefore, the upper movable unit 3310 can be made conspicuous by moving it down to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and moving it to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Can be strongly attracted, and the movement and decoration of the upper movable unit 3310 can be enjoyed. Interest in the game of the player can be suppressed. Further, since the upper movable unit 3310 can be moved up and down to the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can display an effect image in accordance with the movement of the upper movable unit 3310 to move the upper movable unit 3310. It is possible to perform a collaboration effect by the effect and the effect image, and to suppress the player's interest from being lowered by various effects and being less tired.

  Further, since the upper movable unit 3310 is arranged on the rear side of the gaming panel 1200 (panel plate 1210) that partitions the rear end of the gaming area 1100, the upper movable unit 3310 is driven into the gaming area 1100. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to flow down in a good state without hindering the movement of the game ball, and the pachinko machine 1 can sufficiently enjoy the movement of the game ball inherent to the pachinko machine. Further, as described above, since the lifting mechanism 3360 excluding a part of the lifting arm 3365 from directly behind the upper movable unit 3310 can be eliminated, the upper movable unit 3310 can be disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1200. Even when the space on the front side is suppressed, the upper movable unit 3310 that is as large as possible can be arranged, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the six rotating body units 3410 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the gaming state are viewed from the front. If the liquid crystal display device 1900 is fully slid away from the approximate center, the visible range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be maximized, and the six rotating body units 3410 can be viewed in front view. If the liquid crystal display device 1900 is fully slid in a direction approaching the approximate center, the visible range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be made the narrowest. Further, by appropriately selecting the rotating unit 3410 to be slid out of the six rotating units 3410, the shape of the visible range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 can be variously changed. Therefore, the pattern in which the six rotator units 3410 are movable and the size and shape of the visible range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the six rotator units 3410 can be diversified. Various effects can be performed with the liquid crystal display device 1900, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and the player's interests from decreasing.

  Further, since the six rotator units 3410 are slid radially in the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a front view, the player's interest when the rotator unit 3410 is slid toward the center. Can be directed to the center side, and by sliding the rotating body unit 3410 away from the center side, the player's interest can be directed to the outside or the liquid crystal display device 1900 side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by giving different stimuli.

  Further, since the decorations (outer appearances) of the six rotating body units 3410 have the same shape when viewed from the front, the six rotating body units 3410 can be rotated even if the visible range of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed by sliding the six rotating body units 3410. Changes in the atmosphere on the body unit 3410 side can be reduced, and the player's interest can be attracted to the viewable range side, that is, the liquid crystal display device 1900 side. Thus, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, since the six rotary body units 3410 have the same shape, each rotary body unit 3410 is slid (moved) independently, and an effect image corresponding to the rotary body unit 3410 slid on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Is displayed, it is possible to perform a collaboration effect by the rotating body unit 3410 and the effect image. Then, by appropriately selecting the rotating body unit 3410 to be slid (movable), it is possible to perform a collaborative effect with the same contents at different positions. The player can be surprised and entertained, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to prevent the interest in the game from being reduced.

  Further, the rotating unit 3410 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 is provided with a rotating bed decorative substrate 3416 and a base decorative substrate 3428 that can emit light according to the game state. Since the light emitting decoration can be used, the light emitting decoration of the rotating body unit 3410 can make the rotating body unit 3410 stand out, attract the player's interest to the rotating body unit 3410, and pay attention to the rotating body unit 3410. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the movement and decoration of the rotating body unit 3410, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. In addition, since the six rotator units 3410 arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are provided with the decoration substrates 3416 and 3428, each of the rotator units 3410 is decorated with light emission by the decoration substrates 3416 and 3428. Then, the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (viewable range) can be illuminated in a frame shape, and the player's interest can be attracted to the viewable region, and the effect image displayed in the viewable region It is possible to suppress the interest of the game from deteriorating.

  Further, since the number of the rotator units 3410 is six, the size of the rotator unit 3410 per unit can be set to an appropriate size so that the player's interest is in each rotator unit 3410. In addition, it is possible to realize various production patterns (movable patterns) that are easy to understand, and it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored and lowering the interest of the player.

  Furthermore, the rotary unit 3410 is slidably supported with respect to the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a front view, and the slide unit 3500 is provided to move and drive the rotary decorative body 3410 according to the gaming state. In this way, since the rotating unit 3410 can be slid in the axial direction passing through the approximate center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 by the slide unit 3500, the rotating unit 3410 is provided with a mechanism for sliding itself. As compared with the case where the rotating body unit 3410 is increased, the rotating body unit 3410 can be prevented from becoming large, and the rotating body unit 3410 having the optimum size can be obtained. Mechanism that swings (rotates) the arm member 3423 It is possible to incorporate without problems, can move other than slide the rotating unit 3410 movable body capable may be a pachinko machine 1 is strongly attracted the attention of the player.

  Further, when the rotating decorative body 3410A of the rotating body unit 3410 that is slidable in the axial direction passing through substantially the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is rotated, the pair of arm members 3423 move forward or backward (turn). ), And the three rotary body units 3410 can perform the three movements of slide, rotation, and forward / backward movement, so that the movable effect of the rotary body unit 3410 can be conspicuous and attract the player's attention strongly. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from deteriorating by making the movement of the rotating body unit 3410 enjoyable. In addition, since the six rotating body units 3410 that perform the three movements as described above surround the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the atmosphere in the game area 1100 is increased by moving each rotating body unit 3410. As a pachinko machine that can be changed, it can make the player think that there is something good and raise the expectation of the game, and can make this pachinko machine 1 stand out and play This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the rotation drive motor 3412 of the left and right movable effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is driven to rotate, the rotation base 3411 that rotatably supports the rotating decoration body 3410A is rotated. The movable link gear 3421 of the rotating decorative body 3410A meshing with the fixed gear member 3418 that is impossiblely supported revolves around the rotation axis of the rotating decorative body 3410A along with the fixed gear 3418b of the fixed gear member 3418 and rotates. As the movable link gear 3421 rotates, the link pin 3421a of the movable link gear 3421 revolves around the rotation axis of the movable link gear 3421. As the link pin 3421a revolves, the link pin 3421a slides in the first link groove 3422a of the sliding member 3422 and is pushed by the link pin 3421a, so that the sliding member 3422 becomes the rear rotary table member 3420 and the front rotary table. The sliding member 3422 that slides relative to the member 3424 and rotates together with the rotating decorative body 3410A advances and retreats. Further, when the sliding member 3422 advances and retreats, the insertion pin 3423a of the arm member 3423 inserted into the second link groove 3422b of the sliding member 3422 moves in the sliding direction of the sliding member 3422 and at the same time, the second link groove 3422b. It rotates about the shaft portion 3423c of the arm member 3423 pivotally supported by the turntable rear member 3420 and the turntable front member 3424 so as to slide inside, and the drive arm with the rotation of the drive arm portion 3423b. The operating arm portion 3423d extending from the other end side of the portion 3423b also rotates in the same direction, and the operating arm portion 3423d (arm member 3423) as an advance / retreat member approaches and separates from the rotation axis of the rotating decorative body 3410A. It will advance and retreat in the direction. Therefore, when the rotating decorative body 3410A is driven to rotate by the rotation drive motor 3412, the sliding member 3422 that rotates together with the rotating decorative body 3410A linearly slides and advances and retracts, and the arm member 3423 rotates and advances and retracts. Therefore, a motion can be imparted to the rotating decorative body 3410A that is rotating, the rotating decorative body 3410A that is rotating can be made conspicuous, and the player can be focused on the rotating decorative body 3410A. It is possible to entertain the movement of 3410A and suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  On the other hand, a rotating body base 3411 that supports a rotating decorative body 3410A, a rotation drive motor 3412, a fixed gear member 3418, a rotating table rear member 3420 and a rotating table front member 3424, a movable link gear 3421, a sliding member 3422, an arm member 3423, and the like. The upper end is slidably supported by slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581 having high rigidity, and the lower end is restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by the rail portions 3511f and 3551f of the unit bases 3511 and 3551. Attached to the front surfaces of the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580, and attached to the unit bases 3511, 3551 for supporting the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581, etc. When the second transmission gears 3517, 3557 are driven to rotate by the slide drive motors 3525, 3535, 3545, 3565, 3575, 3585, the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560 engaged with the second transmission gears 3517, 3557, The rack bases 3520, 3530a, 3540a, 3560a, 3570a, 3580a of the 3570, 3580 cause the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 to move left and right along the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581. Will move. Accordingly, the rotating decorative body 3410A rotated by the rotation drive motor 3412 is moved in the left-right direction via the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 by the slide drive motors 3525, 3535, 3545, 3565, 3575, 3585. Since the rotating decorative body 3410A moves in the left-right direction, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotating decorative body 3410A, and the rotating decorative body 3410A rotates and in the left-right direction. Can be enjoyed, and by recognizing the movement of the rotating decorative body 3410A, it can be thought that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised, and the player's game It can suppress that interest falls. Further, the arm member 3423 as the advance / retreat member can advance and retreat, so that the shape of the rotating rotating decoration body 3410A can be changed, and the rotating decoration of a form clearly different from the rotating body provided in the conventional pachinko machine is possible. The body 3410A (rotating body) can be shown to the player, the player can be surprised, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation effect of the rotating decoration body 3410A, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  And the upper end side of the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 to which the rotating body base 3411 supporting the rotating decoration body 3410A and the rotation drive motor 3412 is attached is provided with highly rigid slide shafts 3521, 3531, Since it is slidably supported by 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581, the rotating decorative body 3410A is rotated by the rotation driving motor 3412, and a rotating decorative body is applied even if a force that vibrates with respect to the rotating shaft is applied. It is possible to prevent the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3570, 3580 (rotating body base 3411) from vibrating or shaking due to the force acting from the 3410 A, and the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 35 0 it is possible to prevent the blurring direction along the rotation plane of the rotary decoration member 3410A. Further, since the lower end side of the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, and 3580 is restricted by the rail portions 3511f and 3551f of the unit bases 3511 and 3551, the rotating decorative body 3410A is moved in the front and rear direction. It is also possible to prevent blurring. Accordingly, since the rotating decorative body 3410A can be prevented from rotating while shaking during the movable effect by the rotating decorative body 3410A, the appearance of the rotating decorative body 3410A can be improved, and the rotational decoration can be improved. The visual effect on the rotation effect of the body 3410A can be enhanced, the rotation effect of the rotation decoration body 3410A can be enjoyed without any problem for the player, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, a rotating body base 3411 provided with a rotating decoration body 3410A, a rotation drive motor 3412 and the like is provided with high-rigidity slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, via slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580, and the like. Since it is slidably supported by 3571, 3581, the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581 can be made difficult to bend even if the load applied from the rotating body base 3411 increases. Even a heavy rotating body base 3411 (rotating body unit 3410) can be slid without problems. Therefore, the rotating body base 3411 is provided with the rotating decoration body 3410A, the rotation drive motor 3412, the sliding member 3422, etc., and the load applied to the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581 from the rotating body base 3411 is increased. However, the rotating body base 3411 (rotating decorative body 3410A) can be slid in the left-right direction without any problem, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the center of gravity position of the rotating decorative body 3410A is changed by moving the sliding member 3422 or the arm member 3423 back and forth, the rotating decorative body 3410A can be rotated without any problem and the rotating decorative body 3410A is provided. Since the rotating base 3411 can be prevented from shaking, the rotating decorative body 3410A can be provided with the sliding member 3422 and the arm member 3423 without any problem, and the rotating decorative body 3410A whose shape changes during rotation is provided. The pachinko machine 1 can be realized with certainty.

  Further, the upper ends of the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 to which the rotating body base 3411 is attached are supported by high-rigidity slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581, Apparently, the center of gravity on the rotating body base 3411 side is positioned below the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581, and the rotating body including the rotating decorative body 3410A, the rotation drive motor 3412, and the like. Since the base 3411 (slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580) is suspended from the upper side, the slide base 3 is supported by the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581. 20,3530,3540,3560,3570,3580 can be supported in a relatively stable state, it is possible to slide the slide base 3520,3530,3540,3560,3570,3580 smoothly.

  Further, as described above, the eccentric rotating decoration body 3410A can be moved in the left-right direction without any problem and can be rotated. Therefore, as the shape of the rotating decoration body 3410A, for example, it can rotate at first glance. (For example, a figure imitating a character, an item imitating, etc.), and what the player thought was just a decoration moved or rotated left and right. In addition to being able to entertain the movement of the rotating decorative body 3410A by focusing attention on the rotating decorative body 3410A, and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. Can be easily attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, both ends of the highly rigid slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581 are supported by shaft brackets 3522, 3532, 3542, 3562, 3572, and 3582 formed of metal plates and attached to the unit bases 3511 and 3551. Therefore, the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, and 3570 are compared with the case where the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581 are directly attached to the unit bases 3511 and 3551. , 3580 (rotary body base 3411 side) load applied to the metal plate shaft brackets 3522, 3532, 35 via slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581. 2, 3562, 3572, 3582, and the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581 can be firmly fixed regardless of the material of the unit bases 3511, 3551 to ensure the above-mentioned effects. It can be played.

  Further, the rotary base 3411 is attached to the front side of the slide base 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 supported so as to be slidable with respect to the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581. Since the body base 3411 is slidably supported, the assembled bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 are slidable on the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581. It is only necessary to attach a rotating body base 3411 to which a rotating decorative body 3410A, a rotation drive motor 3412 and the like are attached, and slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581 and a slide base 352. , 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, and 3580 and the assembly of the rotating decorative body 3410A and the like and the rotating body base 3411 can be performed separately, which improves the assembly workability and increases the cost. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the rotating body base 3411 is supported by the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581 via the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, and 3580, the rotating decorative body 3410A and the like. If a problem occurs on the rotating body base 3411 side, the rotating body base 3411 side (rotating body unit 3410) can be easily replaced by removing the rotating body base 3411 from the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580. And the maintenance rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved by improving the malfunction early, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the malfunction can be resolved early, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, a pair of slide receiving portions 3520a, 3530a, 3540a, 3560a, 3570a, 3580a separated in the extending direction of the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581, the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, The slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 (rotary body base 3411) are supported with respect to 3571, 3581, and the pair of slide receiving portions 3520 a, 3530 a, 3540 a, 3560 a, 3570 a, 3580 a are slid. Since the shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581 are separated from each other by a distance of 1/6 to ½, the slide shafts 3521, 353 are separated. , 3541, 3561, 3571, and 3581 can be reduced as much as possible, and at the same time, the moving distance of the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, and 3580 (rotary body base 3411) is as much as possible. The rotating decorative body 3410A (rotating body unit 3410) can be smoothly slid in the left-right direction.

  Further, as described above, the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 are suspended and supported by the slide shafts 3521, 3531, 3541, 3561, 3571, 3581, and the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, The load applied to 3560, 3570, 3580 acts on the second transmission gears 3517, 3557 via the rack gears 3520b, 3530b, 3540b, 3560b, 3570b, 3580b of the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580. Since the meshing between the rack gears 3520b, 3530b, 3540b, 3560b, 3570b, 3580b and the second transmission gears 3517, 3557 is changed, the second transmission gear 351 is changed. , 3557 becomes difficult to rotate or slips and prevents the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 (rotating body base 3411) from moving and causing a malfunction. And the slide bases 3520, 3530, 3540, 3560, 3570, 3580 can be reliably moved in the left-right direction.

  Further, a normal line passing through the sliding member 3422 in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the first link groove 3422a through the longitudinal center of the first link groove 3422a passes through the rotation axis of the rotating decorative body 3410A. Since the second link groove 3422b for moving the arm member 3423 forward and backward (rotates) is provided on both sides of the normal line of the slide member 3422, the arm member 3423 is provided on both sides of the normal line. It is possible to make the movement of the rotating decorative body 3410A during rotation more conspicuous as the pair of arm members 3423 move forward and backward, making the player more enjoyable to move the rotating decorative body 3410A. I can do it.

  In addition, since the rotary decorative body 3410A is provided with the rotary head 3415 that covers the front surface of the sliding member 3422, a mechanism for moving the sliding member 3422 and the arm member 3423 forward and backward (rotating) by the rotary head 3415. Can be concealed, the appearance of the rotating decorative body 3410A can be improved, and the decorativeness of the rotating decorative body 3410A can be enhanced to prevent the player's interest from decreasing.

  As mentioned above, although the aspect extracted from a viewpoint "it is equipped with a decoration unit, an arm member, a link member, or a movement drive motor" was demonstrated, from this viewpoint, it is not restricted to these aspects, Other various aspects Can be extracted. Moreover, you may combine the structure of a part of above-mentioned various aspect or aspect with the other aspect demonstrated in this specification. Moreover, you may apply the structure of a part of the extracted aspect or aspect to another various aspect and effect example (or the aspect extracted from a viewpoint of implement | achieving various effect examples).

  Although various aspects extracted from the present embodiment have been described above, those aspects or some configurations of the aspects may be combined with other aspects described in this specification. Moreover, you may apply the structure of a part of the extracted aspect or aspect to another various aspect and effect example (or the aspect extracted from a viewpoint of implement | achieving various effect examples).

  Moreover, although various aspects (technical ideas) extracted from various viewpoints have been described, the various aspects described above or a part of the aspects may be combined with other aspects described in this specification. Good. In addition, the configurations and modifications described in the various aspects described above may be applied to other aspects described in the present specification.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1110 Front component member 1200 Game panel 1210 Panel board 1220 Panel holder 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Table unit 2500 Center object 2501 Window part 2502 Flange part 2520 Center Logo decoration member (front decoration member)
3000 Back unit 3001 Back box 3300 Upper movable production unit 3310 Upper movable unit (decoration unit)
3311 Character body (decorative body)
3312 Rotation gear (rotation drive mechanism)
3313 Intermediate gear (rotary drive mechanism)
3314 Drive gear (rotary drive mechanism)
3315 Character body drive motor (rotary drive mechanism)
3316 Character base 3317 Decorative plate 3330 Rear decorative member (decorative unit)
3350 Lifting unit 3351 Unit base 3351a Guide groove (sliding mechanism)
3352 Slide rod (slide mechanism)
3353 Slide member (slide mechanism)
3354 Lifting slider (sliding mechanism)
3355 Guide roller (slide mechanism)
3356 Slider guide (slide mechanism)
3360 Elevating mechanism 3361 Elevating drive motor (moving drive motor)
3362 Drive gear 3363 Reduction gear 3364 Cam link gear (link member)
3364b Link pin 3365 Lifting arm (arm member)
3365a Base end portion 3365b Connection portion 3365c Arm portion (first arm portion)
3365d Extension part (second arm part)
3365e Connection part (link connection part)
3366 Connecting shaft (decoration unit)
3367 Linking sliding member

Claims (3)

A determination game means capable of executing a determination game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition;
When a special result is obtained in the judgment game by the judgment game means, privilege granting means for granting a privilege to the player;
Effect control means capable of controlling the result information about the determination game by the determination game means as indicated by a display effect in a predetermined effect display device;
Operating means provided so as to be operable by a player ,
Before Symbol effect control means,
Time information update means for performing update processing on time information using a real-time clock function;
When it is in the first effect period based on the time information by the time information update means , even if a specific effect command is acquired according to the result of the determination game by the determination game means , the specific effect First effect control means for controlling not to accept an operation on the operation means at a predetermined timing in an effect pattern according to a command and to prevent a specific operation system display effect from appearing; and
When it is in the second effect period based on the time information by the time information update means, when the specific effect command is acquired according to the result of the determination game by the determination game means , A second effect control means for receiving an operation on the operation means at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern and controlling to cause a specific operation system display effect to appear based on the operation. Yes game machine which is characterized in that. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine further comprising a lamp device that performs a predetermined light emission effect. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A gaming machine further comprising a speaker device that performs a predetermined sound effect.